Interactive Centre for Science and Technology in Łódź

Detailed guidelines for the detailed designs of exhibits, exhibition arrangement and equipment

DRAFT

Address of the construction work: ul. Targowa 1/3 i ul. Tuwima 46, 54/58, Łódź, woj. łódzkie działki ewidencyjne nr: 180/46 i 180/47 - w obrębie S-6

Common Procurement Vocabulary (CPV): 32322000-6 Multimedia equipment 32321300-2 Audio-visual materials 79930000-2 Specialty design services 79822500-7 Graphic design services 72212783-1 Content management software development services 72212520-1 Multimedia software development services 71314100-3 Electrical services 51110000-6 Installation services of electrical equipment 39154000-6 Exhibition equipment 39150000-8 Miscellaneous furniture and equipment 32417000-9 Multimedia networks 31611000-2 Wiring sets 31500000-1 Lighting equipment and electric lamps 48780000-9 System, storage and content management software package 79950000-8 Exhibition, fair and congress organisation services 92110000-5 Motion picture and video tape production and related services 92312000-1 Artistic services

Name and address of the Investor: EC1 Miasto Kultury ul. Targowa 1/3, 90-022 Łódź Address for correspondence: ul. Tymienieckiego 5 90-365 Łódź, woj. łódzkie

Prepared by: DELTA. Stanisław Pochwała, ul. Kuźnicy Kołłątajowskiej 16/10, 31-234 Kraków

Kraków, luty 2013

Prepared by: DELTA. Stanisław Pochwała, 31-234 Kraków, ul. Kuźnicy Kołłątajowskiej 16/10, office: 31-060 Kraków, ul. Św. Wawrzyńca 15

The team - key personnel: arch. Łukasz Bigas, Maciej Pociecha, Tomasz Borsukiewicz, Karolina Kiryjczuk, Paweł Kotlarz, Mirosław Kołodziej, Maria Łukasiewicz-Rudkowska, Paweł Osmenda, arch. Małgorzata Pasek, Piotr Skindzier, Rafał Sworst, Bartłomiej Świerz, Stanisław Pochwała - Project Manager

Legal basis of issue: - Order and guidelines of the Investor: EC1 Miasto Kultury, ul. Targowa 1/3, 90-022 Łódź, umowa z dnia 31.10.2012 r. - Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 2 września 2004 r. w sprawie szczegółowego zakresu i formy dokumentacji projektowej, specyfikacji technicznych wykonania i odbioru robót budowlanych oraz programu funkcjonalno-użytkowego /Dz. U. Nr 202, poz. 2072 z późn. zm./ - Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 18 maja 2004 r. w sprawie określenia metod i podstaw sporządzania kosztorysu inwestorskiego, obliczania planowanych kosztów prac projektowych oraz planowanych kosztów robót budowlanych określonych w programie funkcjonalno-użytkowym /Dz. U. Nr 130 poz. 1389 z późn. zm./

Table of contents

Table of contents ...... 3 1.General assumptions, requirements and guidelines for the design and execution of the exhibition ...... 4 1.1.General functional and program assumptions ...... 4 1.2 Assumptions for educational activities and experiments ...... 8 1.3.Historic elements of the exhibition and its surroundings ...... 10 2. Detailed guidelines for the design and implementation of the exhibition - the descriptive part, the scenarios of multimedia contents ...... 10 Path one : Energy conversion ...... 10 Path two: Development of knowledge and civilization ...... 60 Foucault’s Pendulum ...... 174 Kids zone (not in technical dialogue) ...... 176 Path three: Microworld – Macroworld ...... 185 2d 3d Cinema ...... 222 3. Scenography. Effects Lightning. The visual information ...... 222 3.1. Arrangement and scenographic solutions...... 222 3.2.Functional and technical requirements of lighting effects processor ...... 226 3.3.System visual information ...... 229 4. Functional and technical requierement of AV and IT equipment ...... 230 Entry Zone: ...... 230 Path 1: Energy conversion: ...... 232 Path 2: Development of knowledge and civilization ...... 240 2d 3d Cinema ...... 254 Path 3: Microworld - Macroworld ...... 255 5.Functional requirements and technical parameters of AV and IT installation .. 263 6.Media Content. Exhibition management systems. Web page ...... 271 6.1.Media Content ...... 271 6.2.Exhibition management system ...... 273 6.3. Website ...... 282 7. Accessibility to the exhibition for the disabled ...... 283 8.Guidelines for the contract ...... 286 8.1. Guidelines and requirements for the preparation of project documentation ...... 286 8.2 Requirements in relation to the performance and acceptance of delivery, assembly and installation ...... 289

1.General assumptions, requirements and guidelines for the design and execution of the exhibition

1.1.General functional and program assumptions The Science and Technology Centre in Łódź (CNIT) will be built in part of the facility EC-1 West of the revitalized heat and power plant, located on ul. Targowa 1/3 in Łódź - reconstructed and extended based a multi-disciplinary project documentation "Design of the revitalization of the EC-1 and its adaptation for cultural and artistic objectives in Łódź, ul. Targowa 1/3" developed by the project consortium: Office of Investments "Fronton" Sp. z o.o. with its head offices in Łódź, Urbanism and Architecture Mirosław Wiśniewski Sp. z o.o. with its head offices in Łódź.

Adopted facility specifications: - revitalized building area (Engine Room, Pump Room, Boiler Room, Distribution substation, Cooling tower, Water softening facility): 11.921 m2 - newly designed area (Extension): 6.434 m2

technical technical

[m2]

Room / zone Room area Total exhibition Permanent [m2] area area exhibition Temporary [m2] additional for The area visitor and services area services area services Commercial [m2] Passageways, rooms utility rooms, [m2]

Engine Room, 4878.21 2184.77 711.63 0.00 0.00 1981.81 Pumping station, Boiler Room

Water softening 1063.88 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1063.88 facility

Distribution 5019.50 1812.70 254.18 291.80 387.95 2272.87 substation

Newly_designed 6434.30 1700.34 433.58 199.73 1468.78 2631.87 buildings

Cooling tower 958.78 324.44 0.00 0.00 154.90 479.44

Total 18354.67 6022.25 1399.39 491.53 2011.63 8429.87

The permanent exhibition is in this paper the space provided for exploring the following paths: Energy conversion, Development of knowledge and civilization, Microworld - Macroworld.

Temporary exhibitions in this study are areas provided for temporary exhibitions that complement the permanent exhibitions.

The kid's zone in this study is a separate space provided for the interactive exhibition for children in two age groups: 3-6 years and 7-12 years.

The additional services and visitor services areas in this study are spaces for meetings, organizing and conducting classes, lectures - located in the Distribution station, as well as CNiT administration offices (newly designed buildings).

The commercial service area in this study is area for catering and retail services along with its storage facilities, staff room and sanitary facilities.

Passageways, technical rooms, utility rooms - will include: ticket office, changing rooms, service rooms, a staff room, cleaning room, bathrooms, utility rooms (ventilation units, pumping stations, distribution substation and control room, engine room), and corridors, staircases, shafts. This area is also the Entry zone.

The property is listed in the register of monuments. Highlighting the historic structure of the building is one of the essential purposes of the exhibition. The exhibition cannot compete in its form (set and arrangement designs) with the historic structure and historic technical infrastructure.

Prior to designing and implementing the CNiT exhibition one should be familiar with the detailed arrangements set out in the "Project for the execution and revitalization of the EC-1 and its adaptation for cultural artistic objectives in Łódź, ul. Targowa 1/3" prepared by Urban Planning and Architecture Sp. z o.o. Design Studio in Łódź - multi-disciplinary documentation and project architect’s supervision/ architect's on-site services card introduced during the implementation.

Programme concept involves setting demonstrations and experiments in the CNiT building and at the same time incorporating them in the historic infrastructure facility, whose selected parts will be preserved and displayed.

The exhibition is planned to be displayed in the form of three paths:

 Path One "Energy conversion" - levels: 0.00, +4.50, +7.50, +10.50: It is assumed to illustrate the process of electricity production from primary sources. This path is to planned to use the historic infrastructure of EC1. The scenario involves the interweaving of historical information about the presented objects (relics of the old infrastructure) as well as new content, based on demonstrations and experiments carried out. The aim is to show the phenomena and laws of physics and the chemicals used or present in the production and transmission of electricity. It will also illustrate the problems of electrical grid management It is to emphasize the issue of energy conservation.

 Path Two "Development of knowledge and civilization" - levels: +7.50, +10.50: It is assumed to demonstrate natural phenomena - the key to the most important discoveries, laws, physical and chemical theories.

The path is to be based on stands / installations / devices, which will enable to observe or independently perform experiments - illustrating the laws of science or milestones in the development of science. The aim is to interest the visitor in modern science and inspire him to seek the implementation of science and knowledge in various aspects of the present.

 Path Three "Microworld - Macroworld" - levels: +7.50, +10.50, +13.96, +16.96: It assumes the presentation of objects and phenomena at the micro (elementary particles, atoms, elements) and the scale of the macroworld (the earth and the cosmos, astrophysics, geology) - using modern multimedia technology and physical models. It is to present past and modern testing methods, techniques and implementations for everyday nanotechnology, space technology. Its aim is to both deepen the knowledge and present practical aspects of space exploration and microstructures research: implementation and application of materials and technologies used, for example, in: manned spaceflight, satellite technology or nanotechnology.

In addition, special areas are to be separated: - Kid's zone, the level of + / -0.00 - unconnected with the visiting paths, - Cinema 2d, 3d, level 10.50 - available for the first and third paths, - The simulator, level 10.50 - available for the first, second and third paths, - Foucault pendulum, cooling tower - available for the first, second and third track sightseeing, - The zone of the physico-chemical experiments (Lab) - available for the first and second paths, - The zone of temporary exhibitions - unconnected with the visiting paths.

Separate areas are function zones, which are necessary for the proper functioning of the exhibition: the entrance zone, recreation zone, meeting zone.

The surroundings of the building should serve as extension / introduction to the exhibition.

The exhibition should be used to implement history and science independent curricula - for all levels of education. Each of the paths and temporary exhibitions area should be adapted to that type of classes.

CNiT has to become a landmark on the cultural map of Łódź, a permanent element of Culture and Tourism development strategy and the venue for regular events promoted by the City of Łódź.

The exhibition is to be deeply rooted in the traditions of the local (city) and the tradition of the site (power plant, CHP plant). The exhibition, which draws on the local traditions is also to refer global phenomena and processes, to diversity-and multiculturalism, international scientific and technological achievements.

The exhibition is to promote ecological values, the principles of sustainable development.

Form and message of the exhibition must be unique; CNiT exhibition shall be so designed and constructed that, based on experience and "best practices", will be both individualized and associated with the specific location. It will be distinguished from other similar exhibitions by its subjects, communication solutions with the public, arrangement, technology. It should form an exhibition of unique research value, which not only impresses with its architecture and form but also remains for a long time in the visitor’s memory for a long time as the real adventure. The main axis of the exhibition and its

6 exploration, should be experiencing learning and knowledge, in many dimensions, and the history of the place - discovering it through stage design, multimedia, and interactive installations, the transfer of knowledge, created atmosphere and symbolism.

The exhibition should be focused on the visitor. Defined target groups include: - domestic and foreign tourists: individual and group, - family groups, - school children, - people interested in new and advanced technologies, - students, scientific (technical colleges), - environmental engineering, industry associations, - researchers of culture, - sector operating in the fields of IT and AV, - collectors, hobbyists, enthusiasts of art and monuments of municipal engineering, curators, - opinion leaders, - local community.

The most important group of customers: - school children, - family groups - domestic and foreign tourists: individual and group.

Exhibition layout: a thematic/problem based.

The message: personalized - references the fate of individuals (particular people), the emotions, the senses.

Narrative: - should show phenomena and processes of natural and technical, scientific theories and their applications, global issues (ecology, energy) - should be based on the analysis of attitudes and values - including historical conditions and contexts.

The level of information detail should be varied. This concerns primarily the exploration of the second path: "The development of knowledge and civilization", where the history of science and technology will be presented both on interactive stations and the multimedia - in the form of comments at experiment stations. This message will be conveyed to both the people not specially prepared for the reception of more complex messages from the natural sciences, as well as to those who, through vocational school or have acquired a body of knowledge and desire to expand it. Therefore the second path: "The development of knowledge and civilization" will feature: - comments, in the form of tablets, the models / systems / interactive stations - which are, in fact, the instruction manual and a brief comment, to explain the phenomenon, - comments on multimedia devices (touch screens): basic and extended - with the option chosen by the visitor.

Individual tracks and thematic modules should be distinguishable, but at the same time the coherence of the exhibition and its zones should be maintained.

The exhibition should employ the language and form of communication appropriate to the needs of today's visitors. It should use innovative, but at the same time proven technology and information.

Languages: Polish, English, German, French.

1.2 Assumptions for educational activities and experiments

CNiT exhibition should be interactive. The emphasis of the exhibition should be placed on learning by experiment and learning through play. An integral part of exploring the exhibition should be the independent pursuit of knowledge, self-experimentation and interaction: Visitors - exhibition. The exhibition is to use both domestic and foreign "good practice" in this area and recognized, proven methodology for building interactive exhibitions - including the latest trends in this innovative field of study. These tasks should be accompanied by recreational aspect - the opportunity to have a good time for adults and children. Interactivity is to provide with an opportunity of a direct and autonomous exploration of knowledge. The exhibition is to be made up of the stands where visitors independently carry out experiments in a selected fields of science.

Stands, models, interactive installations refer to: models, systems and devices receiving stimuli from the visitor and reacting to them. Interactivity of the exhibition must be provided in a physical way (touch), and by receiving gestures and movements of the viewer. Interactivity of the exhibition must be provided by: - the use of relevant media, sensors and software, - design and mechanics of models, systems, elements of stage design - activated by visitors. Interactivity is designed to be ensured by conducting independent experiments, running demonstrations, contents, starting and playing games. Educational facilities are required to enable all visitors to touch them in order to familiarize themselves with the principle of their operation (through the description and intuitively).

Exhibition zones should be arranged so as to permit the modification and extension of individual positions - with the development of knowledge in question, during operation, aims and objectives of the exhibition. Similarly, multimedia content - should be so constructed as to permit the modification and extension of the content. This modification is necessary due to both the advancement of science, as well as the need to maintain the attractiveness of the exhibition and maintain regular customers (the exhibition must be "alive" and introduce new elements). The use of the exhibition for education on outside the school should be conducted according to the principles of "education through play" (the use of interactive installations, but also with the use of multimedia technology).

The area in which its activities are permanent forms of education should be fitted with sanitary and electrical installations, must meet safety requirements - identical with the ones for school workshops and chemical laboratories.

Permanent forms of education should be carried out with the use of interactive models, but it should also be possible to perform more complex and demanding experiments - supervised by monitors prepared to carry out such activities and / or educators. No less than half of the experiments described in the scenarios of classes in the natural sciences (referred to later in this paper) should be conducted by the students themselves in groups, while others - as a demonstrations for everyone, performed by selected students under the supervision of a teacher.

The exhibition should apply activation and interactive techniques. Instruments should be used to facilitate observation - children should be taught how to properly apply them in action. Created systems and models are designed to allow experimentation, scientific experiment, documenting experiences, planning for future experiments. Conditions

8 should be created for the student to work independently with different sources of information.

Installations / models should be used for the implementation of school education, the implementation of independent curricula. Prerequisite for a successful and attractive schooling is the selection of topics and to create conditions for achieving the objectives set out in the core curriculum - introduced by the Minister of Education. CNiT should be part of the implementation of the history, civic and environmental education. Education in the Centre should form part of the educational goals of the new core curriculum (general requirements). The exposition should contain a range of content specified in the core curriculum (specific requirements). Educational Scenarios should precisely describe the procedure of achieving the objectives set out in the guarantee acquisition of a new core curriculum skills of students and their evaluation (measurable, objective). The Centre should give teachers the conditions for the implementation of the independent curricula. Minister of Education described the learning objectives and content of education in the Rozporządzenie Ministra Edukacji Narodowej z dnia 23 grudnia 2008 r. w sprawie podstawy programowej wychowania przedszkolnego oraz kształcenia ogólnego w poszczególnych typach szkół (Dz. U. 2009 nr 4 poz. 17) as amended by Rozporządzenie Ministra Edukacji Narodowej z dnia 27 sierpnia 2012 r. w sprawie podstawy programowej wychowania przedszkolnego oraz kształcenia ogólnego w poszczególnych typach szkół (Dz. U. 2012 nr 0 poz. 977), Volume: 4 - Historical and civic Education and Volume 5 - environmental education.

Educational Scenarios should also go (essentially - in terms of teaching content) beyond the requirements of the curriculum. Techniques should be used to allow students to create a positive emotional attitude to the subject.

The different paths, areas and facilities available at the exhibition must be guaranteed with the achievement of their objectives: specific both for the Centre, as well as individual tracks and exhibits. The purpose of CNiT is: - Promoting better understanding and popularization of technical culture, - Support for school education in the broad sense of the natural sciences - especially physics and chemistry, - Support for increased public awareness of energy issues of the modern world and building an economy based on knowledge.

An important role is to be performed by the experiment - prepared and carried out individually or in groups. Experiment and related observations in the cognitive process are a unique source of knowledge about the phenomena that surround us, processes and properties of the world around us. The experiment develops the ability of formation and critical verification of the hypotheses formulated in the process of acquiring knowledge. In addition to cognitive function experiment also stimulates intellectual activity, motor and emotional, which increases the durability and effectiveness of the education process. The exhibition in the CNiT is to help develop the skills of planning an experiment, performing manual operations, observation, recording of results, analysis and interpretation of data. The exhibition is not only a major demonstration in technology, physics and chemistry, but also completion, consolidation, extension of the knowledge acquired through school and vocational education. It is to assist in the interpretation of the information that visitors are provided with by the modern media. An important role of the exhibition is to draw attention to the practical aspects of the laws and physico-chemical phenomena. Practical applications aspect should be implemented within each of the proposed paths of visiting, and combined with an

9 interactive form of the message must be a factor in inspiring visitors to conduct your own further research.

1.3.Historic elements of the exhibition and its surroundings

The following technological large-and medium-dimensions of the original equipment of EC-1 Power Plant relics have been selected to be displayed as part of the exhibition: - Boiler room: four coal boilers (two left entirely with the ability to pass through their interior, two left as sections), - Pumping stand: 2 sets of water pumps, - Hall turbine (engine) generator, - The passageway to cooling tower: play part of the cooling system in the cooling tower - Distribution Station /Control Room: insulators, control cabinets, components disconnecting power, transformers reserves (vats transformers performing the functions of water vessels), surge chokes sets, original distribution room equipment parts, historical tables and desks, - Subscriber substation 15/0, 4 kV (modern, currently operating station transformer and power distribution to all CNiT buildings) - Historical staff room (cloak room) - A set of cabinets - electrical distribution frames.

Inside and in the surroundings of the object there will also be exhibited: - Coal boiler drums, - Installation of water demineralization includes a set of steel tanks and piping, - Dust collection systems (electrostatic), - Facilities for the transportation and loading / unloading of coal, - Facilities for the storage of ash and slag.

2. Detailed guidelines for the design and implementation of the exhibition - the descriptive part, the scenarios of multimedia contents

Path one : Energy conversion

The basic premise of Path one "Processing power" is to demonstrate the process of electricity production from primary sources in the environment of historical EC1 plant infrastructure. The essence of the tour is the interweaving of the historical information presented in historic buildings and new content - provided in the form of presentation (or media), demonstrations and experiments. Visitors should learn about the phenomena and laws of physics and chemistry associated with or utilized in the production and transmission of electricity.

Tour starts at 0.00 in the Boiler Room and Pumping Stations, in which coal boilers antique vintage pumps and kits will be displayed. At the level of 4.50 there will be displayed other historic coal-fired boilers (with the possibility to enter them), another complex of historical pumps and antique furnishings of the former Distribution / Control Room. The 7.50 level will display the next level of exhibition of coal boilers, historic turbogenerator, historic old equipment Distribution / Control Room. In the engine room you

10 will see models such as those related the operation of the generator / alternator and the second law of thermodynamics. Historic Control Room equipment elements will be displayed at levels: 4.50, 7.50, 10.50, the the 10.50 level of the Control Room you will also be able to play a strategic game. The first path "Energy conversion" on levels: 4.50, 7.50, 10.50 is designed to feature special areas for demonstrations and experiments of physical and chemical properties. As part of first path "Energy conversion" visitors will be able to visit the Cooling Tower, which displays Foucault pendulum. The diagram for exploring path one: "Energy conversion" is shown on the drawings: AR 01 and AR 02 (Volume II: as the drawing). Schematic layout of models and interactive installations, multimedia and selected elements arranged on this path is illustrated in the drawings: AR 09 and AR 10 (Volume II: as the drawing).

The scenario assumes that the the first path "Processing power" has to be one of the elements that build the identity of the place. Because of the subject matter and the large number of displayed exhibits related to the history of the object this path will be unique.

The particular stations (historical equipment, models, mock-ups, stands and interactive installations) should be provided with the material (comment) popularizing, scientific and educational - placed on physical media (presenters - plaques) and audiovisual media (projections using monitors, monitors with touch covers, projectors). Popularizing, scientific and educational material should consist of a descriptive part (prepared in the form that is activated by visitors to interactive presentations) and the 2d/3d animation, films, audio recordings. It is assumed that multimedia content will be prepared according to the archive material related to the site history. Archival materials should also be used as a stage design motifs.

The scenario assumes that the scientific, educational and popularizing material for path one "Energy conversion" will be prepared, because of its specificity, in a slightly different text form than for the other paths. Descriptive part for scientific, educational and popularizing material, which should be used to prepare the presentation is given in this section. Multimedia part (graphics, video, audio materials) is to be prepared by the exhibition Contractor based on the guidelines included in the description of the respective stations and based on the requirements and guidelines set out in Section 6 of the guidelines .

The historic buildings and technical infrastructure, which have been selected for preservation "on site" will be dealt with in a special way as part of path one "Energy conversion".

Elements of arrangement and stage design, the completion of which is required by the exhibition Contractor, are described in this section under the relevant positions and in Chapter 3 of the guidelines.

STAND: COAL BOILERS Objective: Presentation of coal-fired boilers used in EC1 Combined Heat And Power Plant (CHP). Scientific and educational value: Coal boilers are EC1 technology relics. In addition to presenting their history and visualizing their operations the scale of the objects should be underlined as well.

The exhibition of four preserved coal-fired boilers is provided at three levels: 0.00, +4.50, +7.50.

At the level of 0.00 the presented content will relate to the own knowledge of visitors of the history and culture of technology that the visitors should already possess and so to refer to associations. It will be a prelude to the more advanced content displayed in the rest of the path. At the level +4.50 presented content will refer to the construction and boiler technology. At this level, visitors will have the opportunity to enter the two boilers. At the level +7.50 visitors will be able to see boilers from the highest level of exposition. Boilers are "alive" thanks to modern techniques of projection (mapping, large size projections) and suitable arrangement solutions (Lighting Effects. Sound recordings (creating-mood-sound-recordings) which will accompany the screenings will complement the created atmosphere. The scenario assumes that the topics presented in the vicinity of boilers will be related to the history of the site (level 0.00) and the development of the energy sector. The visit to the Boiler Room will be continued on the path created in the Engine Room and the Pump Room.

Description of the guidelines for arranging stations: see Chapter 3 of this report.

Boiler room, level 0.00:

Equipment and AV equipment designed for the stations: 4 stations, each equipped with a 21.5'' monitor with touch pad, computer and software, three directional speakers (required technical equipment and AV equipment are set out in Chapter 4 of the guidelines, the description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of the guidelines).

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content: monitor [ts 1.01]: 1. FIRE - LIGHTNING - ELECTRICITY - HUMAN: The history of mankind is inextricably linked to the use of fire. The fire gave light and warmth. But the fire also destroyed, killed and frightened. Human, by controlling the fear of fire, was able to use it intentionally. Some believe that the ability to use the energy contained in nature distinguishes human from animals. With the development of civilization, people aspired to gain a better understanding of fire, its features, kindling and maintaining. Mastering the ability to use fire changed the living conditions and needs of people. Fire gave human heat, and gave him the opportunity to prepare healthy food, facilitate deforestation. Harnessed element has become a boon. A similar breakthrough happened many thousands of years later, the discovery and harnessing of electricity. It had to take a long time before something that scared but intrigued at the same time (for example, observed as lightning during a storm) was understood and intentionally used. The Industrial Revolution, of which one of symbols was electricity, was such a breakthrough as the Neolithic revolution. Supply of electricity and heat for people today just as important as the supply of air, water and food. It is impossible today to imagine human life without electricity. On a daily basis using a computer or power toothbrush has made human’s life more comfortable. Electricity is used for healthcare and prolonging life (life-saving equipment - AEG, ECG). People have become accustomed today to "carry" electricity wit them. For some, it saves lives, eg a pacemaker. Others took to portable electrical devices such as electronic watches, mobile phones, and ensuring an adequate level of battery charge has become as important and obvious as eating breakfast. Electricity has not only made everyday life easier, but contributed to the creation of a virtual reality - the world of computers, smartphones, tablets, Internet social networks.

2. PROMETHEUS: Prometheus is a character from Greek mythology. Prometheus took pity on the people who did not cope with the forces of nature, and taught them how to build simple tools. He also wanted to give people fire. However, this was met with opposition from Zeus, who feared the empowerment of people. Despite awareness of future punishment, Prometheus stole fire from the gods and gave it to people.

Animations, Graphics: Required animation are combined 2d-3d technology illustrating the issues addressed in the descriptive part, including the myth of Prometheus passing fire on to people. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The total duration of the animation: 60 seconds.

monitor [ts 1.02]: BEFORE YOU START VISITING THE POWER PLANT: In its heyday the plant in Łódź was one of the three largest power plants in Poland. Until the middle of the eighteenth century Łódź was a small town located in scenic forests and abundant rivers. At the end of the eighteenth century Łódź had 190 inhabitants. The town's development is linked to the creation of the textile industry and inviting weavers from Germany to settle there. After a period of handicraft textile industry entered the era of the industrial development. In the nineteenth century Łódź surpassed in terms of population much larger industrial (Zgierz) and administrative (Piotrkow) centres, becoming a major industrial center in the Congress Kingdom. In 1913, the population grew to 506 000. Industries and factories contributed to the design and development of the city. With the factories many working class districts were built. The city centre attracted trade and small factories. Dominant factories were textile mills (spinning, weaving, finisher), which used their own engines of up to 75 hp. Industrial demand for electricity has steadily increased. There were also plans to, like in other cities, create the night lighting of the streets. The idea to build a power plant in Łódź came into being. In 1906, "Electric Lighting Company in 1886" took over concession for the construction and operation of power plants the company "Siemens & Halske" and started the construction of central station and laying cable network. Initially, the project assumed only four turbine units with a total capacity of 6000 kV, but during construction it has changed. Four water-tube boilers built on 315 m2 of heatable area of 12 atm. resilience (Fitzner and Gamper) with pumps, wagon tippler and coal handling equipment, two turbine sets MAN-West (Maschinenfabrik Augsburg-Nürnberg Siemens) at 1300 kVA, 300 V, 1500 rev. / Min., The 18-ton crane, two cooling towers with a capacity of 650 m3/hr. each, and a well. On 18 September 1907 turbine set 1 was was switched on for the first time. This day can be considered the most important in the history of Łódź power plant. The power could not keep up with the growing demand from the new customers. Production of electricity continuously increased until the outbreak of the First World War. 90% of the electricity produced in Łódź power plant was used to power engines - whereas in Warsaw was almost all the energy was used for lighting. During the war as the industry was hardly operating there were no customers to sell power to. The recovery came after the war and the withdrawal of the troops. In 1922, production reached its maximum capacity. Manufacturers have had problems with getting coal while the power plant did not have such problems. Already during the assembly of turbine set 1 and 2 the third turbine set was ordered and installed in 1908. Also, two more cooling towers were built and two new boilers were installed. After that turbine set 4 was installed. Also in the same year, a new well was drilled. In the following year the construction of the machine room for further turbine sets was begun (the last wall had been made provisionally in mind the next expansion). The boiler room was originally designed for 12 boilers.

In 1910, they added turbine set 5 (the power of 4380 kVA) and four boilers. A year later turbine set 6 (with a capacity of 6250 kVA), and the following year further 2 boilers added as well as four additional cooling towers. Altogether the facility already had eight cooling towers. The third artesian well drilled. There was no room for further development. As a result, the Second Expansion Program to increase the power capacity in order to provide electricity for the growing needs of the city was accepted. Initially when planning the development, immediately after starting the turbine set 9, and before reaching the peak of 30 000 kW, only the needs of the city of Łódź were taken into account, without taking into account the growing demand of the county or district of Łódź - the existing network did not cover these areas. Initially it was intended to increase the power of central unit in the existing buildings, removing older boilers and the oldest turbine units. Technical problems that may have arisen as a result of these changes, however, seemed to be unsolvable. The obstacle proved to exist in the building distribution systems and the need to move to a higher voltage on the network, and this is due to the large voltage drop on the outskirts of the town and preparations to start power supply outside the city limits. Existing buildings and the plant site lacked space for distribution transformers which would increase the voltage. The decision was made to build a new central station. This solution enabled future expansion. Adjacent land occupied by a factory and machinery foundry was purchased for the new central station. The second expansion included: boiler buildings, pump room, engine room and distribution room, turbine set 22 000 kW, four boilers with heaing surface of about 1000 m2 each, 5 feed pumps, pipelines, water supply tanks, gantry crane for 85 tons, distribution equipment for seven turbines with eight transformers of 16 000 kVA, overhead cable extension and a cooling capacity of 7600 m3/hr. The second expansion included later sewage development for the whole area and the construction of wells No. 5, after it turned out that the recently drilled well No. 4 is not able to provide the required amount of water. The whole CHP plant complex was many times later rebuilt and expanded later. Power production ceased in it as late as in 2005.

Animations, Graphics: Required is a fictionalized film with elements of animation using archival materials (photographs, archival films) illustrating the issues raised in the descriptive section. Duration: about 5 minutes. Requires own production and licensed content.

monitor [ts 1.03]: 1. FROM THE BEGINNING, OR DELIVERY OF COAL TO THE BOILERS: For the production of electricity (the boiler operation) coal was needed. It was delivered it to the vast store area located in front of the boiler. Coal unloading was carried out by two tipplers. Leaning wagon at 45 ° coal poured into a special funnel. Then coal was transported by conveyors to the bunkers located over boilers. After weighing on automatic scales coal was transported from the bunkers to the boilers down the pipes. The unloading of coal from the wagons was mechanized in 1929 by the construction of an overhead cable car. It was suspended at a height of 16 meters, the length of the gantry crane track was 125 meters.

2. ASH AND SLAG REMOVAL. BOILER BY "STOCZNIA GDAŃSKA" COMPANY: After burning of coal in the boilers ash and slag are discarded outside. Removal of slag and ash was done with water. At the end of the furnace slag fell into dropping funnels sintered in large lumps, the size of which depend on the type of coal. The solids were crushed by engine powered slag breakers. The slag and ash were placed in the flushing device from which the water was washing them into channels in the floor and transported them to special pumps. Pumps moved a mixture of water, slag and ash, and, two pipes, pumped the ash outside the boiler room.

In the upper ashpan reservoir water was percolating from ash and slag through the gravel and sand layer. After that, water was dropping to the bottom reservoir of the tank. From that, centrifugal pump was taking water back to the system. Device efficiency was designed for 12 tons/hour. Closing entire process in a single device helped to keep cleanliness in a power plant. The ash slag concrete tanks was removed by overhead cable buckets and transported to the vicinity of the coal store, from which it was transported by carts. Clean slag was used for construction purposes. In order to obtain clean slag of a certain size, carts transported coal slag from the square to a separate building, where, with the machine by "Krupp", it was passed through a sieve. Slag obtained in this way had a specific grain size up to 8 mm, 8-25 mm, over 25 mm. Unburned carbon was separated from the slag by means of an electromagnetic cylinder, and then used again in the boilers. Boiler by "Stocznia Gdańska" Company had four funnels suspended in two rows.

Animations, Graphics: Required animation techniques combine 2d-3d to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - Delivery and unloading of coal, coal boiler hopper, - Emptying the boiler of ash and slag, slag crushing and screening, - Structure of the boiler by "Gdansk Shipyards" Company, visible at this level and technological processes taking place in it. Required own production. The use of archival materials is recommended (photographs, archival files). The total duration of the animation: about 3 minutes.

monitor [ts 1.04]: ASH AND SLAG REMOVAL. BOILER BY "L. ZIELENIEWSKI I S-KA" COMPANY: Fly ash falling to the inside of funnels was pushed out to the downpipes with worms, powered by engines with a capacity of 2.75 hp. Slag and ash was removed with water. Boiler by "L. Zieleniewski and S-Ka " Company was produced by a Zieleniewski company Krakow - one of the largest , manufacturers of machinery and equipment for the industry in Central Europe. Each boiler by "L. Zieleniewski and S-Ka" company had eight hoppers suspended in two rows. The boiler room displays four sectional water-tube boilers of resilience of 35 atmospheres. The water tube of water tube boiler is a tube of small diameter, through which water flows, and which on the outside is surrounded by hot exhaust gases. On the ground level, the lower parts of the boiler, there are preserved: - A mechanism for the removal of slag and ash, - Conveyor part, - Cells with transformers (for power supply to boiler fan motors ).

Animations, Graphics: Required animation techniques combine 2d-3d to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - Structure of the bottom part of the boiler by "L. Zieleniewski and S-Ka" company, visible at this level and technological processes taking place in it. - Structure and technological processes associated with the displayed mechanism for slag and ash removal using the conveyor. Requires own production. It is recommended that the use of archival materials (photographs, archival files). Duration of the animation: about 3 minutes.

At this level scenario assumes:

- lighting effects for lower parts of boilers, - playing sound recordings: sounds of work of historic boilers, sounds of people at work (whistles, commands). The required duration of audio material: about 5 minutes.

Another historical element at this level showroom is the CONVEYOR - conveyor belt, used in various places of the power plant. Preserved and exhibited at the level of 0.00 conveyor part was associated with the operation of the boilers. The space above the conveyor should be used for large-scale exhibition of copies of archival photographic materials related to the power plant and EC1 power plant. It is planned to display 16 copies of archival photographs on plexi panels. 8.00 mm size 120.00 cm x 90.00 cm, suspended from the ceiling on steel cables with weights. For the place and the way in which the images are displayed are shown on the conceptual drawings, conceptual AR 3, AR 14 (Volume II: the descriptive part).

Boiler Room level 4.50:

Equipment and AV equipment designed for the positions: 4 stations, each equipped with a 21.5'' monitor with touch pad, computer and software, six directional speakers, six projectors, in addition, 2 LED walls - each consisting of 12 46'' screens ( required technical equipment and AV equipment are set out in Section 4 of the guidelines, a description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of the guidelines).

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content: monitor [ts 1.09]: STRUCTURE AND TYPES OF BOILERS: In boilers grills were placed over the ash pan. Coal from bunkers, was moved over scales and reached the furnace chamber. Emitted heat warmed boilers. Boilers in power plants have large and complex technological equipment. In power plants / heat and power plant barrel boilers, cylindrical boilers, cylindrical with z pre-heaters („boilers”), furnace tube, smoke tube, combination. Around the boilers there will be stands and passageways to operate them. On the walls behind the boiler there will be oil switches for the respective engines.

Animations, Graphics: Required animation techniques combine 2d-3d to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - Structure of the boiler: cylindrical, furnace tube, smoke tube, combination, - The structure of the combustion chamber and technological processes that take place in it. Required own production Recommended the use of archives (photographs). The total duration of the animation: about 5 minutes.

monitor [ts 1.10]: BOILER BY "STOCZNIA GDAŃSKA" COMPANY: Heatable surfaces of the boiler were respectively: 1 085 m2 boiler, superheater - 580 m2, water heater - 600 m2, 560 m2 air heater. Average boiler capacity was 44 tons of steam per hour, and the max. capacity 55 tonnes / h Superheated steam temperature was 425°C.

Guaranteed boiler efficiency was at 81%. An important part of the boiler were chain grates with the "Walter" system blower of an area of 40.5 m2. Grids consisted of two equal parts. Each part was driven by a DC motor with 4 kW motor and speed control. Motor regulators were connected with a chain drive and adjusted together (synchronous speed grids). Under-blower chambers of grids were divided into four sections, opened and closed with flaps, adjustable levers on the front of the boiler. Air was forced by two fans placed over the boilers through two tubular heaters where it warmed up to 100 ° C and from there it reached the boilers. Combustion chamber with a height of 7.5 meters had its front wall separated by the pipes with a diameter of 10 cm, which were part of the boiler water circulation. Interior of the chamber was lined with refractory bricks anchored to the iron construction of the boiler. The exterior walls were lined with thermalite brick. Walls of the furnace at the grates are protected by a water-cooled tube boiler circulation. The stack effect was produced by two fans driven by the same engine as under blower fans. Water heating system by "Babcock & Wilcox" was fitted at the top of the boiler. Boiler drum was forged from a single block of confluent steel II, its dimensions are: diameter: 140 cm, length 880 cm, wall thickness: 4.5 cm. Over the boiler drum a forged steam tank was placed with a diameter of 80 cm, length 56.8 cm and 2.8 cm thick coat. The boiler drum was connected to the tank with 40 pipe with the diameter of 9 cm. All surfaces of the boiler were inclined at the angle of 45° - such a solution was to guarantee that the ash wouldn’t be deposited on the walls but fell into ash hoppers.

Animations, Graphics: Required animation techniques combine 2d-3d to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - Construction of boiler components by “Stocznia Gdańska” company: (chain grates, under blower chamber, combustion chamber, fans, water heating system, boiler drum, steam tank) and the technological processes involving them. Required own production. We recommend the use of archival materials (photographs). The total duration of the animation: about 5 minutes.

monitor [ts 1.11]: BOILER by "L.ZIELENIEWSKI I S-KA" COMPANY: Heatable surfaces were respectively: 1035 m2 - boiler, superheater - 256 m2, water heater (economizer) - 399 m2, 1500 m2 air heater. Average boiler efficiency was 37.5 tons of steam per hour, and the maximum 50 tons / h Superheated steam temperature was 425 ° C. Guaranteed boiler efficiency was at 81%. Chain grate system "Babcock & Wilcox" (area 41.9 m2, width 6.5 m) was provided on both sides of the drives, one working and the other serving as a reserve. Controllable speed of these engines was enabled precise adjustment the speed of the grid. Two fans of the "Simon" type, placed on boilers, pumped air under grates through a plate heater, in which the air was heated to the temperature of 150 ° C, taking heat from the exhaust gases. The drive for these fans was provided by two engines of 55 kW, with variable speed. This allowed to regulate the amount of air needed for combustion of coal and control combustion. Heated air got under the grids from five sections. Sections were fitted with flaps that allowed turning off specific parts of grids. Furnace chamber had the height of 6.5 meters. The height of the boiler should ensure good combustion of coal and the use of radiant heat. The chamber does not have a front vault. The walls were made of shaped refractory bricks, anchored to the iron structure the boiler.

The sides of the furnace were protected from refraction and slag build-up by fitting water-cooled tube boiler circulation. Boiler brickwork above water tubes was made of thermalite bricks attached to the sheet which constituted lagging for the boiler. The stack effect was created by two exhaust fans of the "Simon" system driven by the same type as the under blower, but with the power of 80 kW. The boiler had only one transverse boiler drum with the diameter of 122 cm and the length of 10.25 m. The wall thickness was 6 cm. The drum was forged from a single block of confluent steel. The bottom of the drum constituted one part with the coat - there were no rivets or seams. The drum a pressure vessel with a cylindrical shape. Its purpose was to provide water tubes with water. In the tubes occurred vaporization, whereas in the drum water was separated from the vapor. This solution provided a rapid movement of water flowing inside opłomek, which increased the exchange of energy and boiler efficiency. A riveted steam dryer with a diameter of 61 cm, length of 3,035 meters and a wall thickness of 1.7 cm was placed on the drum. The dryer was connected to a the drum with a spout w świetle 20 cm. The purpose of steam dryer was to stop water droplets carried by the jet of steam, thereby increasing its dryness. The water heater was placed at the top of the boiler. It consisted of a horizontal straight parts of square in section arranged in two vertical rows, interconnected with a number of inclined, drawn iron pipes.

Animations, Graphics: Required animation techniques combine 2d-3d to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - Construction of boiler components by "L.Zielniewski i S-ka" (chain grates, plate warmer, under blower chambers, combustion chamber, fans, water heater, boiler drum, steam tank) and the technological processes involved. Requires own production. We recommend the use of archival materials (photographs). The total duration of the animation: about 5 minutes.

monitor [ts 1.12]: TECHNOLOGY IMPROVING BOILERS PERFORMANCE Animations, Graphics: Required animation techniques combine 2d-3d to illustrate the evolution of technology and changes in the following areas: - steam pressure in boilers, - Superheating steam, - Heating water, - Heating air, - The size of the boiler heated surface, - Heat flow area, - The size of the intensity of the grid, - material and construction solutions, - Execution of boilers, - Self-regulation. The presentation of the above solutions should include:a Dingler boliler with preheater, a water-tube boiler, a Steinmüller water-tube boiler. Required own production. Allowed to use licensed materials. The total duration of the animation: about 10 minutes.

At this level of boiler exhibition scenario assumes: - Playing sound recordings: the work of historic boilers, sounds of people at work (whistle commands - the recording can not be a repetition of recordings from level 0.00)., The time required for audio material: about 5 min.;

- Mapping - theme: boiler cover vibration, alternating the colors of fire, projection of material in the form of looping on the walls of boilers with the use of projectors is assumed [1.01 pr, pr 1.02 pr 1.03 pr 1.04 pr 1.05 pr 1.06].

In the immediate vicinity of large boilers scenario assumes projections on two walls with seamless monitors (2 x 12 pcs, monitors LED 46'' [1.01 mn, mn 1.02]). The content subject: - Presentation of work of a power plant : technological cycle - Film & Animation made in technology combining 2d-3d, looped projection; - Presentation of work of a power plant: steam production under high pressure - Film & Animation made in technology combining 2d-3d, looped projection. Required to prepare a high-quality material with a total time of 20 minutes, divided into sequences of 2 x 10 minutes.

From this level of the exposition visitors will be able to enter the two coal-fired boilers. Due to the dimensions of the boiler and the size of the passageway the stay in the combustion chamber may not be long - in fact it will limited to passing through the interior. This visit should be used to render the character of this piece of equipment, the specifics of the work process. The interior of the boiler clearly brings to mind associations with the heat and fire. These associations are to be exposed and enhanced with scenographic and multimedia effects. Visible and preserved technological systems should be highlighted with professional flexible LED elements with uniform illumination (fluorescent glowing effect). LED hoses with visible point light sources are not permitted due to inconsistency with the assumptions . It is required the the light intensity can be freely dimmable, RGB bulb holders enable smooth change of the color of light: change the color temperature in the range from 2400 to 6500K. Color rendering index Ra> 85 Complementing this lighting will be LED lights, similar to those used for lighting outlets (the lower parts of boilers - exposed at the level of 0.00), with continuously adjustable intensity and color. Musical control is required by the built-in microphone with adjustable sensitivity and automatic mode. Both types of lighting should cooperate with a central exhibition lighting control system. Lighting should be complemented by specially prepared material rendering sound of the boiler in operation.

STAND: WATER PUMPS Objective: Presentation of pumping technology as part of EC1. Scientific and educational value: pumping station is an important part of the process of electricity generation in EC1. Gathered here original equipment are technical relics.

Two sets of water pumps will be presented at the level of 0.00 and +4.50.

Pump room, the level of 0.00:

Equipment and devices designed for AV stands: 21.5'' monitor with touch pad and PC (required technical equipment and AV equipment are set out in Section 4 of this report, the description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report).

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content: monitor [ts 0.04]:

WATER PUMPS Pumps were used in many places of the CHP plant. Water pumps installed for the purposes of coal boiler in pumping room at level 0.00 and at level +4.50. High-pressure pumps for feeding steam boilers were used. Steam pumps allowed pumping water into the tank in an emergency.

Animations, Graphics: Required animation techniques combine 2d-3d to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - Construction of the water pump and its role in the technological processes. Required own production. We recommend the use of archival material (photographs). The total duration of the animation: about 3 minutes.

Pump room, level +4.50:

Equipment and AV equipment designed for the stand: 23'' monitor with a computer - 2 pcs. (Required technical equipment and AV equipment are set out in Section 4 of this report, the description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report).

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content: monitor [mn 1.05 mn 1.06]: WATER PUMP Animations, Graphics: Requires film with animated elements about the structure and the operation of the pump room and the work of systems using water pumps. Duration: about 3 minutes looped projection on the screen [mn 1.05]. Required own production. We recommend the use of archival material (photographs).

Required animation is prepared in a combined technique of 2d-3d to illustrate the role and operation of pumps in an emergency. Animation Duration: about 3 minutes. looped projection on the screen [mn 1.06]. Requires own production.

STAND: TURBINE SET-GENERATOR

Objective: Presentation of the generator as part of the EC1 technology. Scientific and educational value: Generator is an essential part of almost all types of power plants. This is one of the most "spectacular" historical objects presented in the technical infrastructure of CNIT. The purpose of the station is to explain the construction of the generator and showing it in motion. The generator is a device protected by a cover and it is not possible to show its work during normal operation.

Equipment and AV equipment designed for the stand: 6 projectors with a set of projection screens (required technical equipment and AV equipment are set out in Section 4 of the guideline, for the description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - see Chapter 6 of this report).

Required multimedia content: projectors [1.07 pr, pr 1.08, 1.09 pr, pr 1.10 pr 1.11 pr 1.12]: Requires large format (sets of projection screens Tuplex Visio or equivalent, with a total length of 1800.00 cm and a height of 220.00 cm) 3d animation technology section presents the operation of the generator and its components.

Animation should be prepared with attention to detail. We recommend the use of archival materials (technical documentation) to prepare the animation. Required own production. The total duration of the animation: about 5 minutes. Conceptual drawings of the stand: Volume II: drawing part , figure AR 15, AR 16, AR 17.

At this level showroom scenario involves the display of models, including an interactive model.

STAND: 1/ ELECTRIC GENERATOR 2/TURBINE Construction of the stations - technical description: The team consists of two stations: the generator (interactive model) and turbine (model). Platform structure made of steel profiles 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Dimensions of the platforms, 2 pcs: 100,00 cm (L) x 30.00 cm (W) x 75.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform cover: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated gray, gloss. Model Generator will be the station at which visitors will be able to to produce electricity using their physical strength. The model of the turbine and the generator will be mounted on the counter . Components of the models should be painted (highlighted) in order to facilitate understanding of the phenomenon. The position requires a light source (incandescent bulb). Visitors will be able to transmit power to the generator by turning the crank and produce a charge, which will be forwarded to the light source. A manual crank is permitted to be replaced with a bicycle and transfer energy to the model by a special gear system. Best practice:

In order to improve the educational and expository values , light source can be mounted on a stylized T. A Edison / J Swan's light bulb - in this case, the light source must be protected from unauthorized unscrewing by the public, such as an additional lens or locking the thread. Required prototype preparation. It is allowed to purchase the finished model with crank generator. Ensure the service access to all the elements of the station. Conceptual drawings of the stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 117 The station "Turbine" - it is not an interactive model but it is a cross-section model. The station is also marked in drawing AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.1.10.

The position of an interactive model of the generator will be equipped with a warning notice as well as the instruction manual and a brief commentary (explanation of the phenomenon). Technical drawing of the plaque : AR 30.3 (Volume II: as the drawing).

Text to be placed on the plaque:

GENERATOR: INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Spin the crank. What happens to the light bulb? 2. How does the intensity of light vary depending on the speed with which turn the crank?

Why is this happening? By turning the crank you produce a magnetic field in the generator. In the generator mechanical energy is converted into electricity. Turning the crank produces an alternating magnetic field, which in turn gives rise to an electric field. Because both of these fields are present together we are can observe the electromagnetic field. The produced electric current generator is used to power a light bulb.

Equipment and AV planned for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 1.19]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

The generator is called the heart of any power station, because it is where electricity is produced. However, before this energy will go to the public, it will be sent through thick cables to a transformer in which the voltage increase occurs. Only then electricity can be distributed by power lines across the country. This is to reduce the energy loss during transmission over long distances. The voltage in transmission lines from the power plant is more than 500 000 volts (V). The substations reverse the process, ie, the voltage is reduced in transformers. In an even smaller substations electrical current is distributed to the recipients. The current in the home electricity is a 230V (115V in the U.S.) or 380V. Meters mounted at recipients homes measure how much electricity was used. A type of the electric generator is a prądnica.

The turbine converses enthalpy (potential energy) gas (steam heat) into another form of energy, such as mechanical energy. Then, the mechanical energy is transferred through the shaft to the generator. Part of the energy absorbed by the turbine is "wasted" - waste heat is produced. The greater the energy loss, the lower is the internal efficiency of the turbine. Not all of the energy supplied to the system is also transformed, which depends on the mechanical efficiency of the device. In the mid- twentieth century, the efficiency of wind turbines did not exceed 70%. Currently used turbine efficiency is over 90%. In accordance with the law of conservation of energy, which in thermodynamics expresses the first law of thermodynamics, the efficiency can not be greater than unity or 100%.

Animations, Graphics: Required animations and presentations in technology combine 2d-3d to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - The process of energy conversion in the turbine powered by steam, - The process of generating electricity in the generator,

- Construction of a turbogenerator. Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed. The duration of the animation and presentation: 120 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - See Chapter 6 of the guidelines.

STAND: SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS Objective: Demonstration of the basics of conversion of thermal energy into mechanical energy. Scientific and educational value: Conversion of heat energy into mechanical energy is the basis of thermal power plants. The cyclic heating and cooling of steam is the key to understanding this important process.

Construction of the station - technical description: Construction of the platform is made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 150.00 cm (L) x 150.00 cm (W) x 75.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. The platform Coverage and the top: 0.7 cm steel, powder coated, gray, gloss. The position should be bolted to the floor or supported on steel feet with hard rubber in contact area with the ground.

There is a genuine two-stroke car engine mounted on the counter - shown in cross- section. The visitor will be able to, applying the appropriate force to the handle, move the piston in the cylinder . The model should be protected with plexiglass cover so that the user cannot touch the engine components.

The station is marked in figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.1.11.

The station will be equipped with a warning notice with the instruction manual and a brief commentary (explanation of the phenomenon). Technical drawing of the plaque: AR 30.3 (Volume II: drawing part). Text to be placed on a plate: PISTON ENGINE: INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Spin the crank and try to move the piston in the cylinder. 2. How much strength you need to use to do it? How does the piston move in the cylinder? 3. What happens when you stop spinning the crank?

Why is this happening? The source of such energy in the internal combustion engine is burning pressurized fuel mixture. The pressure of combusted fuel mixture in a car engine causes the piston to reciprocate in the cylinder. The piston "receives" the energy from the burning fuel and transfers it to the other parts of the crank mechanism. The internal combustion engine uses a compression and expansion of the thermodynamic medium (gas) to produce a torque or force. In the internal combustion engine hot gas is obtained by burning fuel. Traffic is not possible without a regular supply of necessary energy (fuel).

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 1.20]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS Thermodynamics researches the effects of all physical and chemical changes that affect the change in internal energy of the mutually interacting bodies. These changes take place according to certain laws - described by laws of thermodynamics. It is well known that you cannot build a perpetual motion machine, the machine that produces more energy than it is supplied with. The second law of thermodynamics can be formulated in several ways. Lord William Thomson Kelvin preferred the following version: "There is no such process whose only effect would be to get a certain amount of heat from the tank and replace it in the equivalent amount of work." To properly understand this definition, consider the power plant that produces electricity. Water which is heated and brought to the boil evaporates, and the high pressure is directed onto the turbine blades. This allows the turbine to rotate, generating electrical power. Of course we would like the energy put in heating water to be completely converted into the energy rotating the turbine. Unfortunately the second law of thermodynamics excludes such an option! The efficiency of this process can never be one hundred percent. In this case, the energy loss will be, for example, due to friction that occurs in the bearing of the turbine. Another version of the second law of thermodynamics says that it is not possible to build a perpetual motion machine of the second kind, which is the engine that could convert the whole absorbed heat into mechanical energy such as, for example, rotating the turbine.

Animations, Graphics: Required animations and presentations in technology combine 2d-3d to illustrate: - Operation of the internal combustion engine, - The transfer of energy in a car engine crank mechanism, - Carnot cycle, Rankine cycles. Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed. The total duration of the animation and presentation: 60 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - see Chapter 6 of the guidelines.

STAND: POWER PLANT MODELS AND MOCK-UPS

The scenario assumes that models and mock-ups of different types of power plants will play a very important cognitive and educational role in Path "Processing power”. They have to show the diversity of technology applied in energetics and the scale of power of power plants . This requires the implementation of rysunek warsztatowy and realization of 10 physical models: 8 power plant mock-ups intended to be placed in the boiler room and two models intended to be placed in the engine room.

Boiler Room, level 4.50: Physical mock-ups for power plants should be arranged in the Boiler Room taking into account the topics of primary energy sources (conventional and alternative) and the shape of the models, size, access to the mains (electricity, water) - if they are required for the station. Attention should be paid to the need to drain some of the moisture

24 produced by models and suggested the most effective and most cost-effective solution for future maintenance.

STAND: COAL POWER PLANT MOCK-UP - BEŁCHATÓW POWER PLANT Purpose and objectives: The choice of this power plant as a model for a coal-fired power models is justified by the scale of the project: Bełchatow power plant is the largest thermal power plant in Poland, whose production makes up one-fifth of domestic energy production. The presented type of power plant also allows for good illustratration of the operation of other coal-fired plants in Poland. The steam cooling system in Bełchatow power plant and was constructed similarly to the former CHP plant in Łódź - by means of cooling towers. Bełchatów Power Plant 1 is also located in the Łódź region.

Construction of the station - technical description: The position should consist of the following elements: - Platform, - Transparent cover: mock-up cover, - Power station mock-up, - Apparatus for the production of smoke and steam, the apparatus control system, - Lighting of the model, - Consumables.

Platforms should have the dimensions: length: 370.00 cm Width: 370.00 cm Height: 75.00 cm (+ / - 10% for all dimensions). Construction of the platform is to be made of steel with reinforcement placed in the center stretching from the base to the top. Expected weight of models: min. 50 kg + weight of the glass cover:Equipment for the production of smoke and steam, installations and control mechanism the necessary structural calculations must be done during realization. Platform wall cover : steel - stainless brushed steel, thickness: 0.4-0.6 cm. Steam production device installations and control mechanism components should be built in the platform. Holes for the installation and wiring linking mechanisms with the mock-up should be made in the counter of the platform. Platforms should be covered with sound- absorbing material on the inside. Service access must be ensured to all the elements of the mock-up is. Locks should not be visible to the public or concealed.

Mock-up cover should be made of glass and be of the length and width as the platform. Cover height: 72 cm (+ / - 10%). Cover should be made of glass OptiWhite (optical glass-odżelazione) with the thickness of 6 mm. Glass panels should be fixed with metal braces or clear silicone (preferred). Ensure staff access to all the models for cleaning and maintenance.

The mock-up of Bełchatów Power Station should have dimensions in plan: 200.00 cm x 200.00 cm (+ / - 10%). The model must be made in accordance with the scale in conceptual drawings: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 84-90. The station is also marked in the figure AR 08 (Volume II: drawing part) symbol: M.1.0.1 It is assumed to realize the mock-up using the following materials: - Buildings: laser-cut plastic, made by a 3d printer or castings; transparent plexiglass fillings, cooling towers and chimneys should be made of materials resistant to moisture, colouring: all buildings with the surroundings in the shades white or gray, Power Plant energy production blocks in original color (yellow), stacks with white and red stripes,cooling towers in the color of concrete, - Railway line system: rails (typical for model trains) laid on the bed of imitation of sand or on model making mats, - Roads: gray tekstura, glued foil material with light gray granular texture,

- Green areas:ground model making mat in light green, green grass sprinkle, green cardboard The model should be made with great attention to detail. The model should be illuminated with combined light from above: white and yellow.

Installation to produce “smoke” and steam must be used. Imitation of white smoke should come from the two chimneys, steam should come from the six cooling towers. To produce smoke for a chimney it is recommended to use an installation consisting of a smoke generator (or two smaller smoke generators), water tank (min. 30 liters) fluid tank (minimum 5 liters). All components of the system that should not be visible should be built in the platform or in the additional platform placed behind the station. Automatic control of the smoke generator operation must be ensured. For the production of steam in the cooling tower the method of ultrasound (acoustic cavitation) or cavitation pump (hydrosonic) should be used. It is recommended to use one device for all the cooling towers. It is acceptable to replace steam generation with white smoke generated imitation of steam. An effective way to remove the cold and moisture and protect the metal parts of the platform and the bottom of the mock-up from to the establishment of frost must be applied (eg using extra plastic cover). For all electrical and sanitary installations ensure transmitter or manual control from service level and automatic disconnection in case of lack of water or failure. Make sure that the sound of working devices does not disrupt the visitors. If necessary, additional muting should be applied in the platform of the station.

In the room with the model there should be a dehumidifier removing moisture from the room. It is recommended to use the device adapted for wall mounting. Application of the device is expected to dry the air for the surface of approximately 100 m2. Range of operation: relative humidity of 40% to 100%, from the minimum temperature of 3 ° C to the maximum temperature of 30 ° C. Power consumption should not exceed 400 W. moisture removal for T = 20 ° C, RH = 60% min. 2.5 l / day, for T = 30 ° C, RH = 80%: min. 7.5 l / day. Sound level at 1 m distance should not exceed 50 dB (A). Ensure access to 230 V power supply and an outlet for the condensed liquid. Draining should be carried out by gravity pipe fi 32 PP through a trap to the nearest sewage. The appliance should have an air filter. It is required that the device has the ability to maintain a constant level of humidity in the room (electronic hygrostat), which will automatically turn the unit when needed.

The station will be accompanied by: - The mock-up description (printing on foil, transparent) - Touch screen with multi-media content referring to the subject of the station.

The mock-up description: BEŁCHATÓW 1 POWER PLANT Power plant type: lignite-fired thermal power plant

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 1.05]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report. The user interface should allow access / selection the following text and multimedia content:

Description of plant operation: Explanatory material should be present the whole process of electricity production in a coal-fired power plant: - the conversion of chemical energy into the heat of exhaust gases; - heat transfer to water tanks, the formation of steam;

- transfer of steam energy to the turbine; - conversion of mechanical energy into electricity in the generator; - electric power transmission over long distances. There should be a description of the technology used in cooling towers. Commentary (text layer) should also explain: - Conditions for plant locations (lignite deposits) - The reasons why some plants use lignite while others use coal, - Pros and cons of open-pit and underground mines (shaft mine).

Physico-chemical processes: Developed material should partly serve as commentary to the prepared animation in combined 2d-3d technique presenting key elements and chemical compounds and chemical reactions for electricity production technologies based on lignite. The material should include the following information: - Coal: background information, the place in the periodic table, the distribution of inorganic carbon and organic carbon, the carbon content in fossil fuels (including natural gas, oil, coal and lignite, peat); - The distribution and composition of natural deposits of coal and lignite; - Industrial coal mining; - Compounds of carbon, hydrocarbons - chemical structure; - The role of coal in the Industrial Revolution; - Evaporation, boiling, condensation (with reference to the use of steam power plants); - Compression, decompression of gases (with reference to the use of steam power plants); - Combustion as a chemical reaction of the combustible material (coal) and the oxidant (oxygen in the air); - Catalysis - Accelerating the speed of a chemical reaction under the influence of the added catalyst; - Electrofilters and electrostatic force: the use of electrostatic force (Coulomb's law), electrifying particles, electrical discharge of particles on the electrode and mechanical removal; - The phenomenon of electromagnetic induction: the construction and operation of the transformer; - Conversion of mechanical energy into electrical energy, construction and operation of the generator.

History of coal power plants in Poland and worldwide. Bełchatów Power Stand: The presented material should describe the development of coal power plants in Poland and in the world, taking into account / showing: - The use of coal-fired boilers to drive machines and equipment the late seventeenth century, - Launch of the first municipal power plant: in New York (1882), Milan (1883), St. Petersburg (1883), Berlin (1884); - Launch of the first municipal power plant on Polish land: Podgórze (1900), Radom (1901) Powiśle power station ( Warsaw power plant and Warsaw City power plant - 1904), Łódź (1907); - The situation in Poland after World War I: about 280 working plants with the total capacity of 210 MW; - The situation in Poland in 1938: more than 3000 operating power plants with the total capacity of 1668 MW, among which the largest were: Łaziska Power Plant (105 MW) Łódź Power Plant (101 MW) Powiśle Power Plant (83 MW)Poznan Power Plant (42 MW); - The most modern coal-fired power plants in Poland, Belchatow I and II, Turow, Pątnów, Adamów, Kozienice, Opole, Dolna Odra, Połaniec, Rybnik, Jaworzno III;

- The creation of a national grid system, the inclusion of the Polish power system into the energy system of Western countries (UCPTE), connecting the Polish power system via submarine cables the Swedish system; - Electricity consumption per capita in Poland and other countries; - Innovative solutions used in the Belchatow II power plant.

Animations and Presentations: - 3d animation: explanation of steam production process under pressure; animation duration: about 30 seconds; - 3d animation: explanation of the operation of electrofilters and explanation of what the - cogeneration is; animation duration: about 30 seconds; - 2d animation: explanation of the technological cycle in a coal power plant; animation duration: about 30 seconds; - Graphics (cross-sectional diagram): construction of a power plant - with the possibility of extending the selected fragments (not less than 10 elements) and the ability to edit text with additional information (in boxes); - 2d animation: the construction of a transformer, generator design, animation duration: about 30 seconds; - 2d presentation using photographs: Bełchatow I power plant, BełchatowII power plant, the largest Polish power plants operating on the basis of lignite (Turow, Pątnów, Adams) and coal (Kozienice, Opole, Dolna Odra, Połaniec, Rybnik, Jaworzno III); - Animation in combined 2d-3d: key elements and chemical compounds and chemical reactions for electricity production technologies based on lignite; animation duration: about 120 seconds. Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - see Chapter 6 of the guidelines.

STAND: NUCLEAR POWER PLANT MOCK-UP Purpose and objectives: The mock-up will be a cross- section of the power plant building, such as: the reactor building, the building of the conventional part (turbine sets). A nuclear power plant is an object inside in which there are the most interesting machinery and equipment from the point of view if visitors,therefore it is advisable to present a mock-up in cross section. It is recommended to make a mock-up, which will occupy a larger area within the platform than the other models in order to obtain dimensions allowing for more accurate presentation of the section. The cooling tower will produce steam or clear smoke imitating it. The mock-up will include part of a body of water.

Construction of the station - technical description: The station should consist of the following elements: - Platform, - Transparent mock-up cover, - Model of the power plant, - Apparatus for the production of smoke and steam with control system, - Model lighting, - Consumables.

Platforms should have the dimensions: length: 400.00 cm Width: 225.00 cm Height: 75.00 cm (+ / - 10% for all dimensions). Construction of the platform shall be made of steel profiles with reinforcement placed through the center from the base to the top. Expected weight of models: min. 50 kg + weight of the glass cover:Equipment for the production of smoke and steam, installations

28 and control mechanism the necessary structural calculations must be done during realization. Platform wall cover : steel - stainless brushed steel, thickness: 0.4-0.6 cm. Steam production device installations and control mechanism components should be built in the platform. Holes for the installation and wiring linking mechanisms with the mock-up should be made in the counter of the platform. Platforms should be covered with sound- absorbing material on the inside. Service access must be ensured to all the elements of the mock-up is. Locks should not be visible to the public or concealed. Mock-up cover should be made of glass and be of the length and width as the platform. Cover height: 70 cm (+ / - 10%). Cover should be made of glass OptiWhite (low iron optical glass) with the thickness of 6 mm. Glass panels should be fixed with metal braces or clear silicone (preferred). Ensure staff access to all the models for cleaning and maintenance.

The mock-up should have the dimensions in plan: 400.00 cm x 225.00 cm (+ / - 10%). The mock-up must be made to scale in accordance with conceptual drawings: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 98-101. The station is also marked in the figure AR 08 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.1.0.2 It is assumed to realize the mock-up using the following materials: - Buildings: laser-cut plastic, made by a 3d printer or castings; transparent plexiglass fillings, cooling towers and chimneys should be made of materials resistant to moisture, colouring: all buildings with the surroundings in the shades white or gray,cooling towers in the color of concrete - Details in cross-section: basic elements of the reactor building, colour in accordance with the attached conceptual drawing and: reactor - red, steam generator - blue in shades of light and dark, elements in distinctive colors to symbolize piping of the power plant - red for primary, dark blue for the secondary circuit, light blue for the steam, generators (transparent cover, turbine components in metal color), crane and gantry cranes in orange and yellow, - Roads: texture gray, glued foil material with light gray granular texture, - Green areas:ground model making mat in light green, green grass sprinkle, green cardboard - Water: plexi dyed in dark blue shade with "water effect" paint applied on it , or the base of milk blue plexiglass type with the "water effect" paint, The model should be made with great attention to detail, in particular the internal components of models. The model should be illuminated with combined light from above. Cross-section of buildings from above and front should allow lighting components inside buildings, elements inside the section of the building should be adequately lit, in the absence of a satisfactory result, they should be additionally illuminated with spotlights. Lighting of individual parts, such as the reactor should be considered.

A device for generating steam must be used. Steam should come from the cooling tower. For the production of steam in the cooling tower the method of ultrasound (acoustic cavitation) or cavitation pump (hydrosonic) should be used. It is acceptable to replace steam generation white smoke generated imitation of steam. An effective way to remove the cold and moisture and protect the metal parts of the platform and the bottom of the mock-up from to the establishment of frost must be applied (eg using extra plastic cover). For all electrical and sanitary installations should ensure that the transmitter control or manual control of the level of service and automatic disconnection in case of lack of water or failure. Make sure that the sound of working devices does not disrupt the visitors. If necessary, additional muting should be applied in the platform of the station.

The station will be accompanied by: - The mock-up description (printing on foil, transparent) - Touch screen with multi-media content referring to the subject of the station.

The mock-up description: NUCLEAR POWER PLANT Model poglądowy (cross section)

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 1.06]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection the following text and multimedia content:

Description of plant operation: Explanatory material should be present the whole process of electricity production in a nuclear power plant: - The production of electricity using energy from nuclear fission; - Obtaining steam from the heat generated by the nuclear reactor; - Transfer of steam energy to the turbine; - -Conversion of mechanical energy into electricity in the generator; - Electric power transmission over long distances. Comment (text layer) should also explain: - Two systems, which operate in nuclear power plants: Boiling Water Reactor (BWR) and pressurized water reactor (PWR); - The construction of a nuclear reactor.

Nuclear physics, nuclear energetics: The material should include the following information: - Explanation of terms of atomic power plant and nuclear power plant - The discovery of radioactivity, - Presentation of information about Nobel Prize winners: Marie Curie and the discovery of the element radium, Ernest Rutherford (discoverer of the atomic nucleus) - discovery of detachment of the two protons in the nucleus of radium, spontaneous radioactive decay as the source of radioactive radiation, studies of radiation produced by certain chemical elements , the discovery of radiation components: positive electrical charge rays - alpha, radiation negative electrical charge - beta radiation, - -Presentation of the signs of radioactivity used in the world and explanation of their meaning and how to behave in their vicinity.

Nuclear energetics in Poland and in the world:

The present material is to include / demonstrate: - The countries that use nuclear power, - Ranking of countries according to installed capacity and share of the electricity production, - Information on the most commonly used reactor: PWR- pressurized water reactors (65%) and BWR- boiling water reactors (22%), followed by heavy reactors, graphite, gas-cooled, fast-neutron, and others, - Information about research and experimental reactors, - Information about the experimental reactor at Świerk. - Reactors not located in power plants, which are used to generate electricity, such as submarines, aircraft carriers, icebreakers, spacecraft and space probes - The use of nuclear power by neighbouring countries, - The future of nuclear power plants in Poland and abroad.

Nuclear power plant control desktop. Animation or simple software (game) is required. Nuclear power plant control system (desktop screen) is a short animation or software that allows you to modify the basic parameters. The aim is to show the impact of individual components on the work of the others, in particular, the temperature of the reactor core. An example of such a panel is given below. The desktop can be simplified or more complex:

Example of a desktop that can be used in animations or applications.

Animations and Presentations: - 2d animation: the phenomenon of radioactivity: alpha, beta and gamma; animation duration: about 45 seconds (total), - Animation or a simple simulation: a nuclear power plant control system (desktop screen) - a short animation or software that allows you to modify the basic factors; purpose: to show the impact of individual components on the work of others, including, in particular, the temperature of the reactor core - as in the provided in this paper visual desktop scheme, duration of the animated version: about 45 seconds, - Graphics: BWR power plant diagram (boiling water reactor), - Graphics: diagram of PWR nuclear plant (pressurized water reactor) - Graphics: radioactivity signs (basic sign), additional sign since 2007, - Graphics: the construction of the reactor,

- Graphics: graphic showing the range of the effects of the radioactive cloud after the explosion at Chernobyl, - 2d presentation using photographs: pictures of at least 5 five existing nuclear power plants, pictures of the unfinished nuclear power plant in Żarnowiec - 2d presentation using photographs: photos of the reactor explosion at Chernobyl and Fukushima - Graphics: Map showing the power of nuclear reactors in MW according to the ranking of countries (World or European Union), indicating the countries that are currently building nuclear power plants and the countries which already have nuclear power plants (excluding the countries that are in the planning stage) - Graphics: Map showing the nuclear power plants in Europe (highlight the countries that have nuclear power plants, and mark the cities in which the plants are located (this can be done showing the number of rectors in the plant - city, without giving the name of the city).

Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - see Chapter 6 of the guidelines.

STAND: GEOTHERMAL POWER MOCK-UP Purpose and objectives: It is important to show the basement of the geothermal power plant,, where there are boreholes. Cold water is pumped into one of them and hot water is extracted out of the other one. Much of the mock-up will constitute a landscape, completed by Iceland skyline printed on glass (longer rear pane) and the aurora borealis (shorter pane).

Construction of the station - technical description: The station should consist of the following elements: - Platform, - Transparent mock-up cover, on both sides of the cover translucent overprint - Model of the power plant, - Apparatus for the production of smoke and steam with control system, - Model lighting, - Consumables.

Platforms should have the dimensions: length: 200.00 cm Width: 100.00 cm Height: 75.00 cm (+ / - 10% for all dimensions). Construction of the platform shall be made of steel profiles with reinforcement placed through the center from the base to the top. Expected weight of models: min. 50 kg + weight of the glass cover:Equipment for the production of steam, installations and control mechanism the necessary structural calculations must be done during realization. Platform wall cover : steel - stainless brushed steel, thickness: 0.4-0.6 cm. Steam production device installations and control mechanism components should be built in the platform. Holes for the installation and wiring linking mechanisms with the mock-up should be made in the counter of the platform. Platforms should be covered with sound- absorbing material on the inside. Service access must be ensured to all the elements of the mock-up is. Locks should not be visible to the public or concealed.

Mock-up cover should be made of glass and be of the length and width as the platform. Cover height: 40 cm (+ / - 10%). Cover should be made of glass OptiWhite (low iron optical glass) with the thickness of 6 mm. Overprint on the glass cover: longer rear pane (Iceland skyline), shorter pane (the aurora borealis-green) Glass panels should be fixed with metal braces or clear silicone (preferred). Ensure staff access to all the models for cleaning and maintenance.

Physical mock-up of Plant Nesjavellir with the surroundings should have dimensions in plan: 200.00 cm x 100.00 cm (+ / - 10%). The model must be made to scale in accordance with conceptual drawings: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 107-114. The station is also additionally marked in the figure AR 08 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.1.0.3 It is assumed to make the mock-up using the following materials: - Top: plaster or plastic material, model making foam, the base can also be made from XPS, the ground vegetation should be applied in light and dark green and rock colour, vegetation and rocks as similar as possible to their natural color in the warmer months. You can also paint the area before applying the vegetation. It is important to execute landscapes. The essence of the model is to present the above-ground and underground parts of the power plant, above-ground model combined with a vast background is to show that the core of the plant is the underground part , - Buildings: laser-cut plastic, made with 3d printer or castings; plexiglass transparent fillings, all the buildings in silver, stacks of buildings in silver, - Roads:gray texture, glued foil material with light gray granular texture, - Green areas: model making of ground mat in light green, sprinkle with grass, green material: plant mat and tufts of vegetation in places, or the ground painted and covered with vegetation, - -The geyser basin should be brighter, use water effect or the effect of foam or snow (protect against water), ( connection to the steam generator may be considered) - Details: all pipes in silver, - Water: similar to the natural shade of water , blue dyed plexi with the "water effect" coat of paint, or the painted ground before applying water imitating gel - "Boreholes" in the side walls of the platform: the holes will be symbolized by translucent tubes in blue and red - provide backlight for the tubes. Length of tubes: reaching the layer simulating the hot rocks. Behind an extra window in the platform serving as the background for "boreholes" there will be material composed of natural stones and debris stacked in layers, the layer of "hot rock" should be thicker. The thickness of the background measured from the pane into the mock-up about 10-20 cm. The model should be illuminated with light from above combining white and yellow.

A steam generating device must be used. Steam should come out from the chimneys, the emission of steam from the geyser basin may be considered. For the production of steam the method of ultrasound (acoustic cavitation) or cavitation pump (hydrosonic) should be used. It is advisable to use one device for all the stacks ( and possible the geyser as well). It is acceptable to replace steam generation with white smoke generated imitation of steam. An effective way to remove the cold and moisture and protect the metal parts of the platform and the bottom of the mock-up from to the establishment of frost must be applied (eg using extra plastic cover). For all electrical and sanitary installations should ensure that the transmitter control or manual control of the level of service and automatic disconnection in case of lack of water or failure. Make sure that the sound of working devices does not disrupt the visitors. If necessary, additional muting should be applied in the platform of the station.

33 the maximum temperature of 30 ° C. Power consumption should not exceed 400 W. moisture removal for T = 20 ° C, RH = 60% min. 2.5 l / day, for T = 30 ° C, RH = 80%: min. 7.5 l / day. Sound level at 1 m distance should not exceed 50 dB (A). Ensure access to 230 V power supply and an outlet for the condensed liquid. Draining should be carried out by gravity pipe fi 32 PP through a trap to the nearest sewage. The appliance should have an air filter. It is required that the device has the ability to maintain a constant level of humidity in the room (electronic hygrostat), which will automatically turn the unit when needed.

The position will be accompanied by: - A mock-up (printing on foil, transparent) - Touch screen with multi-media content for a subject position.

Mock-up description: POWER PLANT IN NESJAVELLIR (ICELAND) Type of plant: Geothermal power

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 1.07]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection the following text and multimedia content:

Explanation of what geothermal energy is: Explanatory material is to include: - The use of geothermal energy from the Earth's interior is made possible by a radioactive phenomena, - The issue of the occurrence of hot springs and geysers.

Construction and operation of geothermal power plants: The material should include the following information: - Explaining that the principle of operation of geothermal power plants involves pumping cold water from the Earth's surface to the layer of hot rocks, if at is not found there, and pumping the hot water through the other borehole, - Thanks to the heat of the steam obtained, which powsr the turbine, and as in the case of conventional power plants where mechanical energy is transferred to the generator.

Geothermal power plants in Poland and in the world: The presented material should include: - The history of the use of geothermal power plants, (information on the first geothermal heat plant, which was launched in 1850 in Lardarello,Italy and the launch of the world's first geothermal power plant in 1904 in the same city, - Information about geothermal systems in Poland in Podhale and Łódź region.

Animations and Presentations: - 3d animation: explanation of the phenomenon of water circuit and water penetration into the inner layers of rock in natural conditions using a geyser as the example (rain, cracks in rocks, hot crystalline rock, steam - a geyser, hot water - hot spring). Highlighting the temperature in interior of the earth, the time of the animation: about 30 seconds; - 3d animation: production of electricity in a geothermal power plant - showing the flow of water in geothermal power plants: hot rocks, heat exchanger, turbine generator, returning cooled steam, cooling towers, pumps, pumping cooled water back into the ground. Animated elements: arrows, steam, the inflow and outflow

hot / cold water in the boreholes. Water temperature at the end of boreholes should be highlighted; animation duration: about 45 seconds; - Graphics: cross-section through the layers of the earth, indicating successive layers and boreholes extracting hot water and returning cold water back into the interior of the earth. It is important to show the scale (ground part of the geothermal power plant is a small part of it, the most important structure is located deep underground) - therefore the notice indicating how deep it is necessary for boreholes to reach must be placed (usually 3 to 5 km, depending on the water temperature). It should be explained that some deposits conduct heat poorly and it requires drilling even deeper - to the hot rock layer; - 2d presentation using photographs: 4 images of the power plant which is presented as the mock-up, pictures of other plants of the same type with the name of the site and the country in which they are located; - 2d presentation using photographs: geothermal power plants in Poland, the use of geothermal energy in the Łódź region. Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - see Chapter 6 of the guidelines.

STAND: TIDAL POWER PLANT MOCK-UP Purpose and objectives: Selection of the power plant is justified the great attractiveness of the model (the only model, which will use real water). It is a moving model showing the operation of a tidal power plant and the phenomenon of capturing energy from ocean waves. The content will include explanation of the origin of tidal power. The so-called "Salter's Duck" is a floating device that produces electricity by harmonic motion of floating parts. In such systems, the devices rise and fall following the movement of the waves which generates electricity.

Construction of the station - technical description: The station should consist of the following elements: - Platform, - Transparent body: five sides (aquarium) - A mock-up of the 'duck' - created to imitate "Salter's Duck" - A mechanism to generate waves, - Model lighting.

Platforms should have the following dimensions: length: 100.00 cm Width: 60.00 cm Height: 70.00 cm (+ / - 10% for all dimensions). Construction of the platform is to be made of steel with reinforcement placed in the center stretching from the base to the top or using structures applied in professional aquarium cabinets. The significant weight of the model due to the weight of water has to be taken into consideration. Therefore the necessary structural calculations must be done during realization stage. Covering the walls of the platform: steel - stainless brushed steel, thickness. 0.4-0.6 cm. The sheet must be protected from moisture. The top of the platform should have holes for the installation and wiring connecting mechanisms hidden in the platform of the mock-up. The top of the platform (or the side) may require execution of holes if the pump is used. All the external pipes on the should be made of a transparent material. Platforms should be covered with sound-absorbing material on the inside (sound of pumps or mechanisms creating waves). Ensure that all elements of the mock-up are available for service. Locks should not be visible to the public or concealed.

The mock-up cover should be made of glass and be of the same length and width as the platform. Cover height: 70 cm (+ / - 10%). The cover constitutes a body of water. It should be made of OptiWhite glass (optical low-iron glass) with the thickness of 12 mm. For glass joining use transparent silicone. The station will be filled with water to the maximum of 2/3 height and the minimum of half height.

The station is marked on the drawing AR 08 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.1.0.4 It is assumed to execute the mock-up including the following elements: - "Duck", - Mechanisms for producing waves. The station of tidal power plant mock-up will require the production of a working element - the so-called "Duck". The movable ("duck") uses the horizontal movement of water - "jumping onthe waves" and is attached to the bottom in the manner similar to reality (Option 1). However, the use of a model inspired by research stations, such as the original Stephen Salter research project located at the University of Edinburgh can be considered. (Option 2). "Salter's Duck" is a teardrop-shaped device designed to move on the waves of the sea / ocean. The unit performs harmonic motion of the floating parts of these devices. The surface of water behind the "duck" is smoother than before the part struck by the wave. The size of the movable part is dependent on the type and strength of the waves - should be as large as possible, but should not significantly disrupt the proportions of the underwater parts (option 1). In the second option of the mechanism maintaining the "duck" afloat is located under the surface of water. The material from which the "duck" will be made is to be suitable for the strength and size of the waves, the color of the mobile part of the "duck" - red or yellow. If the station is created according to option 1, it is necessary to prepare the bottom that will enable securing movable (submerged) parts of the device. This bottom must be rigid, synthetic material should imitate the colour and rolling shape of a natural bottom.. In Option 2, the bottom may be left in the form of a glass panel.

It is required to install mechanisms for the production of sea waves. Waves should have the height of approximately 2.5 - 4 cm, depending on the movable element used ( its sensitivity and size) of the duck. The following example of how to generate waves may be followed: on the short side of the tank there should be an immersed additional wall that is attached to the bottom of the tank and makes movements achieving the greatest range at the upper edge (acting like a fan). Even incisions in the "moving wall" may be executed to facilitate the return to the starting position and the return of water. The mechanism repulsing the "moving wall" should be located behind this part, so that the generated wave will not meet with the resistance of the elements of the mechanism creating waves.

The mock-up should be illuminated with white light from above.

The station will include: - A mock-up (printing on foil, transparent) - Touch screen with multi-media content for the subject of the station.

Description of the mock-up: MARINE POWER PLANT ( THE USE OF SEA WAVES) Demonstrative model "Salter's Duck"

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 1.08]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection the following text and multimedia content:

Sea tides: The material should include the following information: - The creation of tides (high and low tides) as a result of the Earth approaching and moving away from the Moon and the Sun, - Presentation of the map of tides, - Explanation why marine power is not used in Poland, - Explanation of the phenomenon of the strongest tides, and when the tides are the weakest, - The use of information about tides in the modern ship transport.

The importance of tides for the evolution of the Earth in ancient times: The material should include the following information: - The role of tides the life creation on the planet : at the time the Moon was closer to the Earth (about 3-4 million years ago) - the distance was twice as short as it is today - the impact on our planet was stronger as receding water transported mineral material, which was important for the developing life in the oceans, - Tides play a role in slowing down the rotation of the Earth. Imperceptibly prolonging day and night, which originally lasted only six hours.

Tidal power plants in the world: The material should include the following information: - The purpose of the application of designs allowing the use of marine tidal energy (resources) - Presentation of types of power plants using sea and ocean tides, - Historical information, interesting facts, such as the first power plant that uses tidal energy which was built in 1966 in France with the power of 240 MW, - Advantages and disadvantages of using this type of power plant (estuaries salination and erosion of the banks), - Power plant using wave and tidal energy: Kaplan’s turbine, Wells’ turbine, - "Rafts" - the use of vertical movement of water.

Animations and Presentations: - 3d animation: Showing the impact of the sun and moon on the tides (ebb and flow) on the Earth. Clarifying the role of the gravitational force in this phenomenon, and the centrifugal force caused by rotation of the Earth, the duration of the animation: about 30 seconds; - 2d animation: The Solar System, Earth and Moon in a straight line and the creation of the strongest tides, their influence of changes in their position on the distribution of water on the planet, the duration of the animation: about 30 seconds; - Graphics: Maps showing the tides (selective presentation of the most interesting phenomena on the basis of the Tide Tables) at different points on the Earth, including the information referring to Poland; - Graphics: show the different types of power plants using marine power: sea tides, ocean waves(Kaplan’s turbine, Wells’ turbine), the energy of ocean currents (power submerged under water) animation duration: about 30 seconds; - 2d presentation using photographs: pictures of operating power plants, including the plant presented as the mock-up and images of other plants using tidal power; - 3d Graphics:Kaplan’s turbine, Wells’ turbine, "raft" and "duck" (4 images). Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of the guidelines.

STAND: MOCK-UP OF A SOLAR POWER PLANT Purpose and objectives: The solar cell will be shown in real size. Presenting visitors with a genuine solar cell and displaying content that contains photos of solar power plants, and graphically presenting the processes taking place in it seem to be the most interesting solutions for the visitors.

Construction of the station - technical description: The position should consist of the following elements: - Photovoltaic cell in real size, - Structure supporting the cell, - Transparent cover: mock-up cover, - Mock-up lighting.

Platforms should have the dimensions: length: 200.00 cm Width: 100.00 cm Height: 75.00 cm (+ / - 10% for all dimensions). Construction of the platform should be made of steel profiles with reinforcement placed through the center from the base to the top. Expected weight of models: min. 50 kg + weight of the glass cover: the necessary structural calculations must be done during realization. Platform wall cover : steel - stainless brushed steel, thickness: 0.4-0.6 cm. Service access must be ensured to all the elements of the mock-up. Locks should not be visible to the public or concealed.

Mock-up cover should be made of glass and be of the length and width as the platform. Cover height: 40 cm (+ / - 10%). Cover should be made of glass OptiWhite (low iron optical glass) with the thickness of 6 mm. Combining glass with metal braces or clear silicone (preferred). Ensure staff access to all the models for cleaning and maintenance.

The station is aditionally indicated in the figure AR 08 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.1.0.6.

The presentation of a real solar cell is intended. The element should not be smaller than: height 80 cm, width 60 cm (+ / - 10% for all dimensions). The piece should be mounted diagonally at an angle of 55 ° - 75 °. Supporting structure may be prepared according to any suitable design including stainless steel metal support (rod) or OptiWhite glass wall connecting the upper side of the platform. The deck of the platform must be covered by a light green base mat imitating ground with green grass typical of model making applications. It is planned to place the photovoltaic cell of a rectangular shape on its shorter side on the table.

Model is to be lit with yellow light from above.

The station will include: - The mock-up (printing on foil, transparent) - Touch screen with multi-media content for the subject of the station.

Description of the mock-up: SOLAR POWER PLANT Solar cell in real size

AV equipment for the station : - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 1.14].

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

Description of the construction of a photovoltaic cell: The material should include the following information: - The use of solar energy that reaches the Earth in the form of light and heat is possible with solar cells (photovoltaic) - The construction of solar cells: the outer layer of glass, an n-type semiconductor (negative), the electric field (potential barrier), p-type semiconductor (positive), the negative electrode, the positive electrode, - Introduction of the inventor of the photovoltaic effect - discovered in 1839 by the the French physicist Alexander E. Becquerel, - Explanation why the cells are produced in a dark color.

The home use of solar energy: The material should include the following information: - Using solar energy to heat water in your home and produce electricity for household needs, - Solar collector solutions used in homes.

Other uses of solar energy on an industrial scale and space exploration: The presented material is to include: - Use of solar power in the production of electricity on an industrial scale, - The use of solar power on orbital stations and artificial satellites in space.

Animations and Presentations: - 3d animation: presentation the movement of electrons between the semiconductor pn when exposed to light. The level of detail: show the movement of photons and electrons between semiconductors; animation duration: about 30 seconds, - 3d graphics: cross-section of a photovoltaic cell, - 3d graphics: a cross-section of a house heated and powered by solar panels (photovoltaic cell or solar vacuum tube). It should show each item in a section of the collector used in home solutions, the direction of the sun on a sloping roof, marking/signing elements of the cycle, such as the absorption of solar radiation by cells installed on the roof, heat transfer to the heater by a pump, heating water in the tank or collection of electrical energy in the battery, - 2d presentation using photographs: a picture of a particular power plant in the world utilizing the phenomenon described in the contents on an industrial scale, plant images composed of mirrors that use the sun's energy to heat water and produce steam, the picture of space station or a communication satellite / space telescope with the visible solar panels. Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of the Guidelines.

STAND: HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT Purpose and objectives: Hoover Dam is the most famous of this type of dam and has been a model for other hydroelectric plants. The presented dam is an arch-gravity dam, where part of the water pressure is transferred on the slopes of the valley.

Construction of the station - technical description:

The station should consist of the following elements: - Platform, - Transparent cover: mock-up cover, - The mock-up of the power plant, - The mock-up lighting.

The platform should have the dimensions: length: 300.00 cm Width: 171.00 cm Height: 75.00 cm (+ / - 10% for all dimensions). Construction of the platform should be made of steel profiles with reinforcement placed through the center from the base to the top. Expected weight of models: min. 50 kg + weight of the glass cover: the necessary structural calculations must be done during realization. Platform wall cover : steel - stainless brushed steel, thickness: 0.4-0.6 cm. Service access must be ensured to all the elements of the mock-up. Locks should not be visible to the public or concealed.

Mock-up cover should be made of glass and be of the length and width as the platform. Cover height: 72 cm (+ / - 10%). Cover should be made of glass OptiWhite (low iron optical glass) with the thickness of 6 mm. Combining glass with metal braces or clear silicone (preferred). Ensure staff access to all the models for cleaning and maintenance.

Physical Model of the Hoover Dam should have dimensions in plan: 300.00 cm x 171.00 cm (+ / - 10%). The model must be made to scale in accordance with conceptual drawings: Volume II: drawing part, figure AR 91-97. The station is also indicated in the figure AR 08 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.1.0.8 The mock-up is to be made using the following materials: - Top: impregnated plaster, painted with acrylic paints, apply light sprinkle, use the right color (shades of brown, beige, red, gray) - a reference to the original colors, - Buildings: balsa, model making cardboard, 3d printing, where windows are required use plexiglass (milk) and the bays using a darker tone than building color - sandstone, shades of beige, gray, - The dam: cast from mold - rigid plaster material, concrete- painted with paint to match the original color, dam securely fastened to the base, - Water: acrylic dyed light blue plexi with "water effect" applied, or the base made of milk blue plexiglass, and painted "water effect" paint, a color distinction is to be made between upper and lower water level, - Road: dark gray, material with a slightly grainy texture The model should be made with great attention to detail. The model should be illuminated with combined white and yellow light from above.

The station will include: - The mock-up description (printing on adhesive foil, transparent) - Touch screen with multi-media content for the subject of the station.

The mock-up description: HOOVER DAM (USA) Type of power plant: hydroelectric power

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 1.16]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

Description of plant operation: Explanatory material should be present the whole the process of electricity production in a hydroelectric power plant: - Accumulation of water and its use in the process of electricity generation, - The demonstration of how water flows around the hydroelectric turbine in a spiral movement, and how its performance is increased by the use of guide vanes water directing water on the turbine blades.

The history of hydroelectric power exploitation and it disadvantages: The material should include the following information: - the Greek Wheel: early water wheels in the first century BC which were set horizontally, - the use of a vertical wheel and construction of larger structures and generating more power, - The largest hydroelectric plant in the world is the Three Gorges Dam in China on the Yangtze River with the capacity over 18 000 MW, - It is alleged that as a result of the construction of the Three Gorges Dam many villages were flooded with numerous valuable historical monuments, environmentalists argue that it may lead to the extinction of many fish and aquatic mammals, the dam also prevents self-purification of rivers. However, most concerns are related to the geological risk - heavy weight of the accumulated water can cause earthquakes, and the dam is located on a large fault. There are frequent landslides from the slopes of the mountains to the tank.

The laws of physics: The material which describing / demonstrating the following issues is to be presented: - Accumulation of the potential energy by the dam, - The conversion of potential energy into kinetic energy of water, - Kinetic energy conversion into mechanical energy of the turbine - The transfer of mechanical energy from the turbine to the generator and electricity production by the generator, - The use of water pressure, in addition to its mass and velocity, - Using the laws of physics in the construction of dams: gravity dams - use of construction mass to withstand water pressure (dam in Solina), the use of the curved shape withstand the water pressure.

Animations and Presentations: - 3d animation: Showing the operation of hydroelectric power plant in cross-section. Simplification is to show the entire model. Animation scenario should include elements such as: The dam stops the flow of water so that the potential energy is stored, the water flows through tubes to the turbine (arrows or "effect of moving water"), turbine rotation, marking that rotation was transferred to the generator, showing the flow water out of the hydroelectric power plant; animation duration: about 30 seconds; - 3d animation: the presentation of hydroelectric turbines ( as in spiral with an indication of guide vanes, the rotation of the shaft) The construction and operation of the turbine is to be demonstrated with high accuracy and detail; animation duration: about 30 seconds; - Graphics: types of wheels used in early solutions: Greek wheel, overshot wheel, others. Graphic presentation of the flow direction and the shaft in the middle of the wheel; - 2d presentation using photographs: photos of the plant presented by the mock- up, photos of similar type plants in Poland (the dam in Plichowice) and the largest

and most interesting structures of this type in the world (such as the Three Gorges Dam); Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - see Chapter 6 of the guidelines.

STAND: WIND POWER PLANT MOCK-UP Purpose and objectives: WIND TURBINE TO SCALE (CROSS-SECTION) The presentation of a cross-section of a wind turbine in operation has a considerable educational value and seems to be the most appropriate way to present this topic.

Construction of the station - technical description: The position should consist of the following elements: - Platform, - Transparent cover: mock-up cover, - A model of a wind turbine and a part of the mast, - A mechanism for moving the rotor, - Mock-up lighting.

Platforms should have the dimensions: length: 100.00 cm Width: 100.00 cm Height: 75.00 cm (+ / - 10% for all dimensions). Construction of the platform should be made of steel profiles with reinforcement placed through the center from the base to the top. Expected weight of models: min. 50 kg + weight of the glass cover: the necessary structural calculations must be done during realization. Platform wall cover : steel - stainless brushed steel, thickness: 0.4-0.6 cm. The platform will be equipped with a mechanism for propelling the moving parts such as rotor with vanes using an electric motor and control components built in the platform Holes for the installation and wiring linking mechanisms with the mock-up should be made in the counter of the platform. Platforms should be covered with sound-absorbing material on the inside. Service access must be ensured to all the elements of the mock-up is. Locks should not be visible to the public or concealed.

Mock-up cover should be made of glass and be of the length and width as the platform. Cover height: 120 cm (+ / - 10%). Cover should be made of glass OptiWhite (optical glass-odżelazione) with the thickness of 6 mm. Glass panels should be fixed with metal braces or clear silicone (preferred). Ensure staff access to all the models for cleaning and maintenance.

Physical mock-up of a wind turbine placed on the mast (tower).Part of the cover should be made to ensure access to the inside from the side of the cover.The rotor with vanes should be in a glass cover with its dimensions dependent on the platform size. The mast is to be made of steel. Moving parts inside are to be painted in primary colors. The cover in white. The minimal dimensions of the elements: width of the rotor blades 70 cm, the height of the mast with the rotor 90 cm. Fan drive mechanism: electric motor min. 75 W. Please select and verify the power so that the rotor rotates freely. The speed of rotation of the rotor should be selected so that the shoulders were visible as well as the movement of shafts. Engine power will also depend on: rotor weight, the vane pattern, the final size of the model.

The position is also indicated in the figure AR 08 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.1.0.5

Graphic Source: www.zielonaenergia.eco.pl

The model should illuminate with combined white and yellow light from above.

The station will include: - The mock-up description (printing on adhesive transparent foil,) - Touch screen with multi-media content for the station subject.

Description of the mock-up: WIND TURBINE TO SCALE (CROSS-SECTION) Type of power plant: wind turbine

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 1.13]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

Description of the construction of the plant: Explanatory material should be presented to describe the whole process of electricity generation in a wind power plant: - The transfer of mechanical energy into individual components of the wind turbine, increasing and decreasing revolutions.

The laws of physics: The material should include the following information: - The lift force, - Conversion of mechanical energy of the revolving rotor blades into electricity,

- Disadvantages of wind power, the phenomenon of "silent wind"-when a larger area is not windy. Wind turbines operate on average about three times less per year than conventional power plants, and therefore the construction of wind turbines should consider the fact that in order to obtain comparable power it is necessary to provide three times more wind power than that indicated by their capacity.

History of wind turbines: The material should include the following information: - The use of windmills in the tenth century to pump water and grind grain, - Wind farms - a combination of several wind turbines - Vertical windmills.

Animations and Presentations: - 3d animation: showing a cross-section of a wind turbine in operation, coupled with the movement of the rotating rotor. It should show the moving parts inside: gearbox / transmission system, the chain (if applicable), the movement of the turbine, generator ( cross-section not required). The effect of a moving camera or the use of arrows; animation duration: about 30 seconds; - 3d animation: presentation of the generator and the phenomenon of magnetic induction, animation duration: about 15 seconds; - 2d animation: an animated diagram showing the wind force on the rotor. The visual explanation of why the wing rotates, resulting in slower and faster rotation of the rotor at the same direction and wind force. Presenting the solution which sets the rotor facing the wind direction, animation duration: about 30 seconds; - 2d animation: The demonstration, in the animated diagram, of wind impact on the rotor blade, the formation of the lift force, duration of the animation: about 15 seconds; - 2d presentation using photographs: photos of a particular operating plant using the phenomenon described in the contents on an industrial scale. Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of the guidelines.

STAND: PUMPED STORAGE HYDROELECTRIC PLANT Purpose and objectives: The selection of the plant in Żarnowiec seems to be justified not only the scale of the project ( the largest such plant in Poland), but it is also a model for clear presentation of the differences between the dam and pumped storage plants. Considering the presentation of Hoover Dam located in the USA, it seems reasonable to show a hydrological object located in Poland as well. The Contractor should, in particular, highlight the important elements of the project such as derywacyjny pipeline located between the upper and lower reservoir, with applied color (may differ from the actual brightness), materials (metal, shining), placing trees to render the scale. However, if such solutions prove insufficient the scale of these elements may be enlarged. The model should clearly show the level difference between the upper and lower body of water, if the proposed scale does not allow for such an effect it may not maintain it completely.

Construction of the station - technical description: The station should consist of the following elements: - Platform, - Transparent cover: mock-up cover, - The power plant mock-up, - The mock-up lighting.

Platform should have the dimensions: length: 300.00 cm Width: 150.00 cm Height: 75.00 cm (+ / - 10% for all dimensions). Construction of the platform should be made of steel profiles with reinforcement placed through the center from the base to the top. Expected weight of models: min. 50 kg + weight of the glass cover: the necessary structural calculations must be done during realization. Platform wall cover : steel - stainless brushed steel, thickness: 0.4-0.6 cm.

Service access must be ensured to all the elements of the mock-up is. Locks should not be visible to the public or concealed.

Mock-up cover should be made of glass and be of the length and width as the platform. Cover height: 75 cm (+ / - 10%). Cover should be made of glass OptiWhite (optical glass-odżelazione) with the thickness of 6 mm. Glass panels should be fixed with metal braces or clear silicone (preferred). Ensure staff access to all the models for cleaning and maintenance.

Physical mock-up of pumped storage in Żarnowiec should have dimensions in plan: 200.00 cm x 100.00 cm (+ / - 10%). The model must be made to scale in accordance with conceptual drawings: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 102-106. The station is also indicated in the figure AR 08 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.1.0.7 The mock-up is to be made using the following materials: - Top: plaster or plastic material, model making foam, the base can also be made from XPS, the ground vegetation should be applied in light and dark green and rock colour, vegetation and rocks as similar as possible to their natural color in the warmer months.You can use the grass imitation mat plus vegetation, vegetation itself is low, without trees. It is also possible to paint the area before applying the vegetation. - Buildings: balsa or 3d printing, color of the buildings - shades of beige, gray. - The dam: cast from mold - rigid plaster material, concrete- painted with paint to match the original color, dam securely fastened to the base, - Water: acrylic dyed light blue plexi with "water effect" applied, or the base made of milk blue plexiglass, and painted "water effect" paint, a color distinction is to be made between upper and lower water level, - Road: dark gray, material with a slightly grainy texture - Surroundings: vegetable mat with tufts of vegetation places, or the base painted and covered with plants - Green: modeling mat imitating ground in light green colour,grass sprinkle on green cardboard The model should be made with great attention to detail. The model should be illuminated with combined white and yellow light from above.

The station will include: - The mock-up description (printing on adhesive foil, transparent) - Touch screen with multi-media content for the subject of the station.

Description of the mock-up: Pumped storage power plant in Żarnowiec Type of plant: pumped storage

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 1.15]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

Description of the construction of the plant: Explanatory material should be presented to describe the whole process of electricity generation in the presented power plant: - Description of the construction allowing for exploitation of the potential energy of the water accumulated in the higher reservoir in the production of electricity, - The process of pumping water into the higher reservoir and exploitation of the potential energy of accumulated water in electricity production, - Explanation of the application of a pumped storage plant as a battery: water from the upper reservoir is drained into the bottom reservoir at times of increased electricity demand. When the amount of energy produced is higher than the demand (e.g. at night), the water is pumped to the higher reservoir. Water reservoir in this case acts as an energy accumulator. This is an effective way to store energy, especially in combination with other types of power plants, which are dependent on the weather such as solar power or wind power.

Animations and Presentations: - 3d animation: Showing the operation of a pumped storage power station in cross- section. The process simplification applies showing the entire model. Created animation should include elements such as:the power plant uses potential energy of water stored in the higher reservoir, water flows to the turbine tube (arrows or " moving water effect"), turbine rotation highlighting the transfer of energy to the generator, showing the flow of water out of the hydroelectric power plant, emptying the top reservoir and filling up the bottom reservoir (day), pumping water from the lower reservoir to the upper reservoir (night).; animation duration: about 30 seconds; - 2d presentation using photographs: photos of a particular operating plant presented as the mock-up and images of other plants of the same type. Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of the guidelines.

SET OF STATIONS: DISTRIBUTION/CONTROL ROOM The scenario assumes that AV systems and equipment with multimedia content will be composed with the historic pieces of equipment which will be exposed on levels: +4.50, +7.50, +10.50. Multimedia content should be prepared in the form of animation and presentation prepared in a combined 2d-3d with text layer. The content should be a comment / description for the gathered and displayed historic equipment: buildings and sets of objects, their function in the process of switching on and off high voltage energy,anti surge protection, control and management of power lines and power grid. Another topic that should be illustrated by animated presentations and copies of archival materials (photographs, filed materials ) are the working conditions in power plants. The history of EC1 is to be shown from the perspective of people - managers and employees and show day-to-day operation of the power plant. The history of EC1 power and CHP plants must also show the background of the city. It should emphasize the importance of electricity and heat supply for the development of Łódź - industry, transport, urbanization. Local processes should be shown in a broader context on a regional, national, European and global level. The required material is to be prepared in the form of presentations and animations of a total duration of about 40 minutes. It is recommended to use of archival materials to the greatest possible extent. Required own production, but licensed materials are also allowed.

AV equipment intended for this part of exhibition was specified on the drawings: AR 1, AR 2, AR 8, AR 8.1, AR 9 AR 9.1, AR 10, AR 10.1 (Volume II: Part drawing), and in Chapter 4 of the guidelines.

A separate part of Path 1 "energy conversion" is a strategy game on level +10.50 in the Control/Distribution Room. Conditions must be created for it by using a dedicated AV equipment. 39 sets of computers with monitors are to be used for the purpose of the game [mn 1.31 - 1.69 mn] and 10 sets of projector with computer [pr1.13 - pr1.14 and pr1.16 - pr1.21 and pr1.23-pr1.24]. The equipment that is not used for the purpose of the strategy game should be used to present the history of power and CHP plants. The game should be Contractor’s own production, prepared on the basis of the following assumptions:

Assumptions of the game: The game cannot be based on the exchange of money. The game can be played by an infinite number of players, depending on the number of stations. Rules of the game: The game ends in 2050. Initial date is integrated with the current calendar. Starting the game: The player chooses its first plant selecting from the following plants: coal, hydro, wind, solar, nuclear, geothermal. In various landscapes of a fictional country (controlled by the player) several type plants can be built. Playing the game: To stay in the game you must provide the sufficient amount of electricity for the growing needs of the country. The difficulty lies in the fact that the plants are built with the surplus of power capacity , and it is not possible to increase this capacity( by expansion) but it’s necessary to build a new plant. The key is to anticipate the increase in demand for electricity.The variable factor is the growing number of inhabitants,also it is a random variable. You have an impact on the number of people by making suitable decisions such as accepting or rejecting offers of holding major events in the country (sports, olympics, conferences, festivals, fairs, etc.) or a setting up manufacturing plants in a city in your country (the appearance of the investor). Upon the acceptance of an offer, the size of population in the country or in individual cities increases (the player does not know the exact growth). In other cases the population increases slowly but steadily. You can build a new power plant every few years (rather short periods can be determined), when the opportunity arises. The main factor is the time,population growth may create such an opportunity sooner. The smaller the plant, the faster it will be possible to build it. It is the player's decision whether they wish to build one large plant with more power, or several smaller ones, and how they use the natural resources. It is allowed to use pairs of factors if needed: for example,a university and natural resources for nuclear power or coal with a large space for the coal plant, etc. or simplify to a single factor. User Module: building structure connections between the players on the basis of a honeycomb. Each of the participants is a neighbor of another player. This means that players can each trade: exchanging or surrendering resources (communication between players limited to the functions of the game, players cannot engage in normal conversation) and to determine the relationship with neighbors as friendly / neutral / hostile. Target group (dependent on age): middle school, high school.

THE ZONE FOR PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL DEMONSTRATIONS AND PRESENTATIONS

The zone for physical and chemical demonstrations and presentations should be divided into sectors in which different, depending on the subject matter and complexity, forms of classes will take place. The following presentations should take place in separate sectors: - Demonstrations related to chemical processes - requiring special precautions and security and only to be conducted only by trained personnel, - Physical and chemical experiments carried out under the guidance of a teacher or CNIT staff (as part of extra-curricular or independent curriculum based education) - Simple physical and chemical experiments performed by pupils in the care of the CNIT staff. The contractor of the exhibition should create conditions for the implementation of the above forms through the design and implementation of models and experimental stations and the purchase of necessary laboratory equipment and first usables.

Models for high voltage demonstrations:

TESLA COIL Construction of the station - technical description:

Construction of the platform shall be made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm and wood. Platform dimensions: 60.00 cm (L) x 60.00 cm (W) x 40.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / - 10%. Platform cover: mdf or plywood. The station is to be mounted with M20 screws to the concrete floor. Attached to the platform there should be the primary circuit comprising: - The power transformer (1pc), - Chokes (2 pcs), - Capacitor (2 pieces, including: Security), - Magneto (2 pieces, including: Security), - The primary coil of heavy wire (one piece). The secondary unit shall consist of: - Capacitor (1 pc), - Electrodes made in the form of a torus (1 pc), - The secondary coil of fine wire coils (one piece). The resonant frequency of the secondary circuit must be the same as of the primary circuit. Careful selection of individual components and materials should be made during the prototype testing stage, so that the desired final result can be achieved. Power supply wiring for the station is to be placed inside the cover and be protected from damage. Please provide the inspection hole in the cover of the station maintenance. The station is to be provided with the sign and a warning notice for people with pacemakers. Conceptual drawing of the stand: Volume II: Part drawing, figure AR 51

JACOB'S LADDER Construction of the station - technical description: Construction of the platform is to be made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm and wood. Platform dimensions: 50.00 cm (L) x 15.00 cm (W) x 200.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform cover: mdf or plywood. The station is to be mounted with M20 screws to the concrete floor. Two pairs of insulators should be installed in the front of the platform. The insulators are mounted to insulators, with two electrodes open towards the top, steel bars (Φ0, 50cm, length 160.00 cm each). Electrodes are to be attached in such a manner

48 as not to touch each other at any point. No part of the electrodes is to protrude beyond the station. Careful selection of individual components and materials should be made during the prototype testing stage, so that the desired final result can be achieved. Power supply wiring for the station is to be placed inside the cover and be protected from damage. Please provide the inspection hole in the cover of the station maintenance. The station is to be provided with the sign and a warning notice for people with pacemakers. Conceptual drawing of the stand: Volume II: Part drawing, figure AR 48.

VAN DE GRAAFF GENERATOR Construction of the platform shall be made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm and wood. Platform dimensions: 50.00 cm (L) x 50.00 cm (W) x 15.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / - 10%. Platform cover: mdf or plywood. The station is to be mounted with M20 screws to the concrete floor. The demonstration station is to consist of the following elements: - Generator - Electrode - metal bowl with a brush receiving charge from the belt, - The lower electrode, - Conveyor belt - Pulley - Grounded arm. Careful selection of individual components and materials should be made during the prototype testing stage, so that the desired final result can be achieved. Power supply wiring for the station is to be placed inside the cover and be protected from damage. Please provide the inspection hole in the cover of the station maintenance. The station is to be provided with the sign and a warning notice for people with pacemakers. Conceptual drawing of the stand: Volume II: Part drawing, figure AR 48

The stations: Van der Graaf generator, Tesla Coil, Jacob's Ladder are stations demonstrating high voltage and lightnings. Construction equipment requires the preparation of design documentation and testing of prototypes. The room in which demonstrations will be carried out must be prepared so as to keep all the rigors of security. The room cannot be used for any purpose other than demonstrations of high voltage. Access to the room will be possible only in the presence of personnel trained to operate the equipment.

Stations for physical and chemical experiments.

ATOM LIGHT EMISSIONS IN THE EXCITED STATES The station comprises: 1. automated Bunsen burner (see Figure 1) activated with the button mounted on the case of a fume hood which cannot be opened by the visitors(locked door with the key available for the staff only) 2. tray with the storage of incinerated substances - placing a chemical compound or an element over the flame of the burner, the tray is operated by pressing the corresponding button on the fume hood cover.

a. pressing the button marked sodium - the burner flame ignites, the tray arm places sodium in the flame - the visitor observes an intense yellow color of sodium combustion b. pressing the button marked strontium - the burner flame ignites, the tray arm places strontium in the flame - the visitor observes an intense carmine color of strontium combustion c. the burner flame ignites, the tray arm places potassium in the flame - the visitor observes an intense purple color of potassium combustion d. and so on... depending on the type of elements contained on the tray, 3. The fume hood must have ventilation with the fume exhaust outlet on the outside of the building, the side windows can display information on the presented phenomena. 4. conditions are to be created for optimal observation of different colors of burning elements: a. the teaspoon for combustion placed at the end of the feeder arm cannot colored the flame itself and should be made from platinum, it should be calcined before use in to get rid of the surface ions which may tint the flame; b. burner flame must produce a clear, peaceful, standing flame with a white center and a large, blue, barely visible halo; c. observation of burner flame colour change must be done against a white background in a room with a white light or in darkness.

STAND: INVISIBLE INKS Construction of the station - technical description: Each station consists of: laboratory table with sink connected to the sewage system, made of materials, resistant to the chemicals. It is suggested to use system solutions, developed for chemical classes in schools, universities and other locations suitable for the implementation of chemical experiments. Tables should be equipped with digestive system and cabinets. Cabinets should be equipped for: supply of reagents and auxiliary materials, sufficient for a day experiences - different, depending on the presented material and space for the unused at a time. Cabinets should be able to be locked with a key – not for unauthorized persons. Similar secure fixtures should be used for fittings of the table (eg Buchnsen burners, gas supply, etc.) from being accessed by third parties and Visitors. At each table has also be found the list, which will be marked daily stocks and their consumption. The stand also includes: blank plain paper, 3 flat containers such as a plastic tray with flanges, a solution of iodine in potassium iodide, a hair dryer with warm air blower, a lamp with a strong light bulb, lemon juice, milk , flour, distilled water, painting brush, 3 150.0 ml beakers and a dropper. The station should be also equipped with a UV lamp, pen, writing in a way only visible under UV light, a few banknotes (clearly marked copies or originals that came out of use, to avoid suspicion about their possible destruction) from different countries, and have imprinted elements which change color under ultraviolet radiation.

The station is to be provided with: - An information plaque / instruction manual, - Touch screen with multi-media content for the subject of the station.

Text to be placed on the plaque: INVISIBLE INKS Invisible inks are chemical substances of organic or inorganic type. Some of them can be detected by heating, as they are then oxidized, or chemically, or using light (or UV). They can be applied on paper with a stamp, brush, pen or printing devices. Their characteristic feature is that when applied on paper and dried, they become invisible to the human eye.

INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Place a new sheet of paper in the container and paint it with a little lemon juice, and then leave it to dry. 2. Next place another sheet of paper in the container and paint it with a little milk, and then leave it to dry. 3. Similarly place the third sheet of paper in the container and paint it with a little water with flour, and then leave it to dry. 4. Next dry all the pages with a hairdryer. 5. Place the sheets painted with lemon juice and milk under the light bulb, and then make the observation. 6. Apply a few drops of liquid iodine with a dropper on the sheet painted with water and flour and observe the changes. Paint any design on a sheet of paper with the pen and look at the banknote, and then make observations using a UV lamp.

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report. The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

INVISIBLE INKS

Law and physico-chemical phenomena: oxidation, reduction, steganography

Basic commentary When heated materials such as lemon juice and milk are oxidized and become darker, as can be seen on the sheet. Under the influence of Lugol's solution places painted with water with flour change the color to blue. This allows you to notice what was there previously written or painted.

Extended commentary Lemon juice containing citric acid and milk containing lactose due to the temperature rise becomes clearly visible on a piece of paper as they become darker. After immersion in a solution of iodine sheets with texts applied with invisible inks on them remain brighter than places without ink application. Starch granules contain two components: amylose and amylopectin. Amylose forms a complex with iodine in blue colour due to the fact that it has an ordered helix structure of the hollow interior filled with iodine. During the warm-helix develops, iodine is released and turns blue. Iodine is introduced in the form of I2 in the KI, because it is poorly soluble in water. In conclusion, the indicator for the detection of starch iodine in a solution of KI. The process is a chemical induction of invisible ink.

Practical application: In today's world there are many chemicals that are used asinvisible ink. Not everyone realizes that even banknotes use a type of writing invisible to the naked eye, which is visible under a UV lamp. This is one of many ways to hinder counterfeiters work. Similarly, the method (invisible ink pen) is also used by the police, in order to label goods. And in the event of theft or loss this signature helps to identify the object. Even ordinary postal stamps contain the elements in invisible inks. Each of them is signed by the issuer in certain way only known to them. Shipment marked in such a way that it is read by the scanner at the post sorting plant at the same time checks whether the value of the stamps is appropriate and whether there have been re-used. Inks are also use for for storing sensitive information in the offices and in general steganography. Invisible

51 inks have also become a symbol of "Cold War" and espionage as such (not just industrial).

Trivia, the history of discovery: It turns out that a large number of substances used in everyday life can be invisible inks, eg milk, fruit juice, cola, vinegar, wine, colorful metal salts, flour, etc. Invisible inks have been used since ancient times to store confidential information. In World War I and II periods they were used by the military secret service. Even at the present time i modern techniques of steganography invisible inks and markers are used for labeling valuable materials. These notices are only visible under UV light or other special types of lights, there are also some that are visible only when heated or moistened.

STAND: CHEMICAL COLOUR REACTIONS Construction of the station - technical description: Each station consists of: laboratory table with sink connected to the sewage system, made of materials, resistant to the chemicals. It is suggested to use system solutions, developed for chemical classes in schools, universities and other locations suitable for the implementation of chemical experiments. Tables should be equipped with digestive system and cabinets. Cabinets should be equipped for: supply of reagents and auxiliary materials, sufficient for a day experiences - different, depending on the presented material and space for the unused at a time. Cabinets should be able to be locked with a key – not for unauthorized persons. Similar secure fixtures should be used for fittings of the table (eg Buchnsen burners, gas supply, etc.) from being accessed by third parties and Visitors. At each table has also be found the list, which will be marked daily stocks and their consumption. The stand also includes: a reagent kit including: NaOH , CuCl2, KSCN , FeCl3 or Fe (NO3) 2, HCl, distilled water tank, crystals KMnO4, NiCl 2, 1% solution of dmg (dimethylglyoxime), goggles, a set of test tubes, test tube rack, protective gloves, beakers for different volumes for solution, spatula, glass rod ..

The station is to be provided with: - An information plaque / instruction manual, - Touch screen with multi-media content for the subject of the station.

Text to be placed on the plaque:

CHEMICAL COLOUR REACTIONS Chemistry is one of the most spectacular branches of science. It is because owing to chemistry it is possible to explain why the merger of two gas may produce liquid (H2 and O2 and H2O), why a combination of two blue reagents may produce colorless substance (Mohr's salt, methylene blue, EDTA) INSTRUCTION MANUAL A: 1. Conduct experiments with care, do not inhale vapors, watch out for contact with the eyes and skin. 2. Pour the solution of CuCl2 into a test tube, and then add some small amount of NaOH. Observe the occurring changes.

INSTRUCTION MANUAL B: 1. Conduct experiments with care, do not inhale vapors, watch out for contact with the eyes and skin. 2. To a test tube with a solution of FeCl3 pour in a few drops of a solution of potassium thiocyanate i.e. potassium thiocyanate (KSCN). Observe the occurring changes.

INSTRUCTION MANUAL C: 1. Conduct experiments with care, do not inhale vapors, watch out for contact with the eyes and skin. 2. Into the test tube with a solution of nickel chloride (II) NiCl2 put a few drops of Dmg (dimethylglyoxime) ie. Czugajew’s reagent. Observe the occurring changes. INSTRUCTION MANUAL D: 1. Conduct experiments with care, do not inhale vapors, watch out for contact with the eyes and skin. 2. Prepare three test tubes and fill in each of them with previously prepared solution of permanganate (VII) solution. Add a small amount of R-NaOH to the first one, and a small quantity of r-ru HCl to the second one, and leave the third one for some time outside.

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set.

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

CHEMICAL COLOUR REACTIONS Laws and physico-chemical phenomena: homogeneous mixture, heterogeneous mixture, filtration, evaporation

Basic commentary A After the addition of NaOH to CuCl2 solution a blue gelatinous residue is formed which reminds blue Jell-O. The intense blue color indicates the presence of a hydroxide, copper (II) or Cu (OH) 2 This compound is insoluble in water.

Basic commentary B After adding a small amount of a solution of potassium thiocyanate (KSCN) to the solution of FeCl3 with rust-colored discoloration, the colour change into a blood - red is visible. This indicates a chemical reaction that occurred. The resulting compound thiocyanate iron (III) of the formula Fe (SCN) 3 gives the color. The produced solution is similar to the color of the blood.

Basic commentary C To a solution of nickel (II) put a few drops of dimethylglyoxime with a dropper. Notice the interesting color created by a pink complex compound of nickel and dimethylglyoxime.

Basic commentary D Into three tubes put a solution of KMnO4 Add a small amount of R-NaOH to the first one, and a small quantity of HCl to the second one, and leave the third one for some time outside. As a result of the presence of an alkali the purple-pink color of the solution turns green. The result is a new manganese compound (VI). In the second test tube solution discolors and becomes slightly pink or colorless. A manganese compound (II) value is created. In the third tube after a certain time the solution becomes covered with brown coating, because in a neutral environment a manganese compound (IV)is formed.

Extended commentary A The following chemical reaction occurs: CuCl2 + 2NaOH -> Cu (OH) 2 + 2 NaCl Blue gelatinous residue is the compound Cu (OH) 2. It is an example of a precipitation reaction.

Extended commentary B 3KSCN FeCl3 + -> Fe (SCN) 3 + 3 KCl The compound Fe (SCN) 3 gives the blood - red color of the solution.

Extended commentary C C4H8N2O2 NiCl2 + 2 -> 2 HCl + NiC8H14N4O4 The compound colouring the residue pink is NiC8H14N4O4

Extended commentary D Tube 1: MnO4-+ e--> MnO42-(alkaline environment) green color of the solution Tube 2: MnO 4-8 H + + 5 e--> Mn2 + + 4 H2O (acidic) color disappears or is pale pink. Tube 3: MnO4-+ 2H2O + 3e--> MnO2 + 4 OH-(neutral environment) formed manganese (IV) with a brown color.

Practical application: Cu (OH) 2 can be widely used, for example, in the production of pesticides - copper fungicides are used in horticulture and agriculture. Thiocyanate can be widely used particularly in qualitative chemical analysis as a reagent for detection of iron (III). Characteristic bloody color is owing to compound Fe (SCN) 3 Thiocyanate iron (III) can also be applied on film sets to imitate human blood. Manganate (VII) solution is a compound of a wide range of applications: as a disinfectant, a strong oxidizing agent in quantitative analysis to determine concentrations of the solutions.

Trivia, the history of discovery: The chemical reactions whose products or substrates are colored are called colour reactions. The color change during the reaction is of fundamental importance in chemical analysis of qualitative and quantitative type. Czugajew’s reagent was named after the Russian professor at the Technical University in St. Petersburg, who researched complex compounds and organic reagents.

STAND: CHROMATOGRAPHY-THE SEPARATION OF COLOUR MIXTURES Construction of the station - technical description: Each station consists of: laboratory table with sink connected to the sewage system, made of materials, resistant to the chemicals. It is suggested to use system solutions, developed for chemical classes in schools, universities and other locations suitable for the implementation of chemical experiments. Tables should be equipped with digestive system and cabinets. Cabinets should be equipped for: supply of reagents and auxiliary materials, sufficient for a day experiences - different, depending on the presented material and space for the unused at a time. Cabinets should be able to be locked with a key – not for unauthorized persons. Similar secure fixtures should be used for fittings of the table (eg Buchnsen burners, gas supply, etc.) from being accessed by third parties and Visitors. At each table has also be found the list, which will be marked daily stocks and their consumption. The stand also includes: Pipette (plastic, glass watch with a hole in the axle, a Petri dish, funnel, filter paper or paper)

The station is to be provided with: - An information plaque / instruction manual , - Touch screen with multi-media content for the subject of the station.

Text to be placed on the plaque:

CHROMATOGRAPHY-THE SEPARATION OF COLOUR MIXTURES INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Wrap the glass stick in a strip of tissue paper, so that its length allowed the suspension of the paper in the lid of a jar. 2. Apply the paint from the marker just above the stick. 3. Dip the stick in acetone (so that the paper was immersed), twist the top to close or close the jar with the ground glass stopper. 4. Describe the effect of separating the dye-forming substances.

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

CHROMATOGRAPHY-THE SEPARATION OF COLOUR MIXTURES Laws and physico-chemical phenomena: homogeneous mixture, heterogeneous mixture, filtration, evaporation

Basic commentary: The experiment shows the principle the operation of the simplest chromatograph, in which the solid phase is a filter paper (filter paper) and the distilled water is the mobile phase. The mixture, which will be subject to separation may be ink, which by means of a dropper or pipette is applied to the center of the paper (a cut out paper circle). After some time, the occurrence of colored rings arranged centrally can be observed. These are compounds, which are components of the ink separated by application of the liquid moving through filter paper (capillary migration of liquids).

Extended commentary: Thanks to the phenomenon of the capillary rise (capillarity) acetone "travels" up paper strip, "taking" a substance contained in the ink from the felt-tip marker. After a while, you can see the separation of the substance, in this case,on the paper strip.

Practical application: Methods of separation homogeneous material, ie the salt from the water, have been used since ancient times. Salt was evaporated from seawater for food production. Similar methods of filtration using a fabric or sieves have been known known for thousands of years.

Trivia, the history of discovery: Filtration methods are used in everyday life in the kitchen, in the industry, sewage treatment, etc. Similarly, the solubility is used for dissolving sugar while sweetening tea or coffee, salting soup, etc.

STAND: ELECTROLYTIC SURFACE COATING Construction of the station - technical description: Each station consists of: laboratory table with sink connected to the sewage system, made of materials, resistant to the chemicals. It is suggested to use system solutions, developed for chemical classes in schools, universities and other locations suitable for the implementation of chemical experiments. Tables should be equipped with digestive system and cabinets. Cabinets should be equipped for: supply of reagents and auxiliary materials, sufficient for a day experiences - different, depending on the presented material and space for the unused at a time. Cabinets should be able to be locked with a key – not for unauthorized persons. Similar secure fixtures should be used for fittings of the table (eg Buchnsen burners, gas supply,

55 etc.) from being accessed by third parties and Visitors. At each table has also be found the list, which will be marked daily stocks and their consumption. The stand also includes: a set for electrolysis (beaker 1.00 l), held in position by a laboratory stand and feet, two metal/graphite electrodes, wires extending from electrodes, the DC power source - battery (4.50 V), the bulb bridge circuit, CuCl2 solution (30%),, goggles, abrasive papers (gram. 100 (ISO-6344)).

The station is to be provided with: - An information plaque / instruction manual , - Touch screen with multi-media content for the subject of the station.

Text to be placed on the plaque:

ELECTROLYTIC SURFACE COATING The best-known types of electrolytic surface coating include the change of one coating (eg metal) to another: silver plating, gold plating, copper and others. INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Fill a container made of plastic or glass with (more than half of the vessel)the solution of CuCl2 (cupric chloride (II) - green liquid). 2. Attach electrodes using feet to the stand. 3. Then dip the electrode in the liquid, at least to the half of their height. The electrodes cannot touch each other. 4. Connect the wires to the electrodes and the battery, plug the bulb with the "tripod" in the circuit. The light bulb will glow slightly. 5. Observe the occurring changes.

AV equipment for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

ELECTROLYTIC SURFACE COATING Laws and physico-chemical phenomena: oxidation, reduction, plating, electrolysis

Basic commentary: DC current flowing from the battery degrades copper salts into two materials: copper metal and chlorine gas. One of the electrodes will produce the brown coating or metallic copper. The second electrode will produce gas bubbles of chlorine. The coating of one electrode is one of the copper plating, coating or covering of the body with another compound or element.

Extended commentary In the solution of CuCl2 there are present Cu2 + ions and Cl-So copper cations and chloride anions. In connection with the current flow through the solution, the copper cations are attracted to the negative electrode pole (-), and chloride anions to the positive electrode pole (+). The poles are in accordance with the battery terminals. On the negative electrode, copper atoms CU0 arise, and at the positive electrode CL02 chlorine bubbles. Cu 2 + +2 e -> CU0 reduction 2Cl-- 2e -> CL02 oxidation The positive electrode in electrolysis is called the anode and the negative the cathode. The names come from the kind of attracted ions. The above reaction is an

56 electrochemical reaction, and the process is part of the redox reaction (oxidation and reduction).

Practical application: Electrochemical processes are used in the production of pure metals. They often replace metallurgical processes, which are not capable of receiving such pure metals. Plating process is used for coating metals or alloys exposed to corrosion. For this purpose salts of precious metals are used (Cr, Ni, Cu, Ag, etc.) Most electroplating is applied to items that we want to be protected from environmental factors (eg, gold plating - corrosion protection), or to improve aesthetics (eg chrome plating, silver plating).

Trivia, the history of discovery: These phenomena have been discovered among other things thanks to the experiments conducted by the English physicist and chemist Michael Faraday. He formulated the laws of electrolysis in the first half of the nineteenth century. However, there is evidence that a few thousand years ago, people tried to cover the surfaces of the known metals, with protective coatings, aiming to protect them from adverse weather conditions.

STAND: ALKALI METAL SALTS Construction of the station- technical description: Each station consists of: laboratory table with sink connected to the sewage system, made of materials, resistant to the chemicals. It is suggested to use system solutions, developed for chemical classes in schools, universities and other locations suitable for the implementation of chemical experiments. Tables should be equipped with digestive system and cabinets. Cabinets should be equipped for: supply of reagents and auxiliary materials, sufficient for a day experiences - different, depending on the presented material and space for the unused at a time. Cabinets should be able to be locked with a key – not for unauthorized persons. Similar secure fixtures should be used for fittings of the table (eg Buchnsen burners, gas supply, etc.) from being accessed by third parties and Visitors. At each table has also be found the list, which will be marked daily stocks and their consumption. The stand also includes: access to natural gas, water, Bunsen burner, the burner hose connected to the gas valve, platinum rod with a thermally insulated handle for the flame analysis , salt solutions: CaCl2, NaCl, KCl, LiCl, CsCl, SrCl2, BaCl2, matches or a gas lighter, glass containers for on reagents with caps.

The station is to be provided with: - An information plaque / instruction manual , - Touch screen with multi-media content for the subject of the station.

The text to be placed on the plaque:

ALKALI METAL SALTS Glimmering flames are nothing but various colors of flame. However, these colors can be achieved, among others, by the alkali metal salts (i.e. lying in the first two groups of the periodic table). Flame analysis, which is very spectacular and can be observed in this station, refers to substance evaluation according to the color of the flame. The station shows that different substances burn in different colors, not just "red", as one might think. INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Light a match / lighter and open the gas valve, in order to ignite the burner. 2. Pick up the platinum rod and calcinate it in the flame until the yellow flame is no longer visible. 3. Immerse the rod successively in the prepared solutions and place it in the flame.

4. Describe the color change.

AV equipment and for the station : - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / selection of the following text and multimedia content:

ALKALI METAL SALTS Laws and physico-chemical phenomena: salts, flame analysis, detection of metal salts

Basic commentary: Metal salts places in the burner flame display characteristic coloration. This allows you to identify the substance you are dealing with. However, the burner which can reach a high temperature is required. However, salts are compounds which are the result of the replacement (partial or complete) of hydrogen atoms (in acid), or other groups with electrophilic properties. The process of identifying the substance according to the color of the flame is called flame analysis. Different colors of tested substances can be obtained: brick red, yellow, pink, carmine- red, blue, carmine, green. Frequent rod calcination helps to observe the correct color flame of the test substance.

Extended commentary: Alkali metal salts (group 1 of the periodic table) color the flame in various colors. Particular color effect is due to the presence of certain metal ions. It is most convenient way to carry out the experiment, when tested salts are volatile salts, such as chlorides. In the above experiment, the following coloring was obtained: Ca2 + brick-red Na + yellow K + pink Li + dark Cs + blue (cyan) Sr2 + carmine-red Ba2 + Green Flame analysis of metal salts enables very fast qualitative analysis of the test substance. Used rod must be made of a precious metal, preferably platinum, in order not corrode and enter into reaction with other ions.

Practical application: This is the method used in chemical laboratories for fast qualitative analysis of metal salts. The characteristic color of the flames of individual ions are widely used for the manufacture of pyrotechnics materials such as firecrackers and fireworks.

Trivia, the history of discovery: The experiments are quite visually spectacular and demonstrate a wide range of chemistry. Some of these experiments were developed many years ago. The flourishing period of sciences development including chemistry occurred in the late eighteenth and early nineteenth century, when a number of explanations for alchemical experiments was found. Including, for example, the research of Paracelsus, John Dalton's theory, the discoveries of H. Cavendish, A. Lavoisier, J. Śniadecki and other scientists.

The above, safe experiments - will be a permanent offer of CNIT. In addition to the above the CNIT will offer a special educational program (permanent offer) - in which it will be possible to safely conduct more complex experiments - requiring special precautions and safeguards.

It is required to purchase and deliver the following EQUIPMENT:

Laboratory tables: Required lab tables of separate ‘island’ type - 4 pieces with dimensions of table 3000 x 1500 mm (+ / -15%), height: 750 mm. At one end station with double sinks, chamber with dimensions 295 x 145 mm (+ / -15%). In each of the sink tap fittings produced from laboratory chemical resistant coated material. Table finish in accordance with DIN EN 13150 for safe working with harmful substances. Media: taps for hot and cold water, 230v sockets Tables should be made of modular elements that enable the configuration of the structure. Tables are to be fitted with: - Worktops with edges - Supporting structure (cabinet with legs) - Installation top - Sinks mounted into the worktop. Frame is made of hollow profiles (30x30x2 - all dimensions + / -10%) coated steel chemical resistant epoxy powder paint. Frames with feet with adjustable table height level in the range of 60 - 80 mm.

Fume hoods: Required two metal fume hoods, steel structure completely without the use of wood- based materials, with the worktop lowered to 750 mm. Slotted ventilation design. Undercounter cabinet ventilated, made of chemical-resistant powder-coated steel with epoxy paint, attached to the fume hood ventilation system. Required driver with an airflow sensor to ensure full compliance with the requirements of EN-14175. Two 230V sockets,? beaker and two leakers (spout) cold water, controlled from the front panel. Material solutions: Top: - Solid ceramic frit - Large size ceramics - Epoxy resin - Polypropylene Work chamber lining: - Chemical-resistant powder-coated steel with epoxy paint - Ceramics - Resins - Polypropylene Window: - Steel frame - MDF frame with sliding glass - Aluminum frame - Tempered glass Additional equipment: - Additional socket 230v and 380v - Additional water spout - Flammable and technical gases spout - Residual-current device - Automatic window control

- Protect the system manual - Automatic ventilation control Required parameters: Width (mm) 1280 1580 1880 Depth (mm) 940 Height (closed / open window (mm) 2325 / 2575 Table height (mm) 900 Working chamber: 1150 1450 1750 width (mm) 700 700 700 depth (mm) 1260 1260 1260 Height (mm) Maximum window opening (mm) 750 Recommended flow with the window open (m3/h) 600-950 750-1250 900-1500 The recommended speed of the airflow in the 0,3 - 0,5 window opening (m/s) Ventilation flange (mm) Ø160 Ø200 Ø250

Laboratory Cabinets: Required 2 pcs of cabinets for chemicals - dangerous substances (2 pcs - glass, 2 pieces - full). Made entirely of a chemically resistant, non-corrosive material, which ensures long life despite storing aggressive materials. System doors which open independently, divided into: acids / bases. The guides are made of polypropylene. Trays made of polypropylene with locking extension. Separate side ventilation channel. Equipped with a fan or the possibility of connection to an existing installation. Secure tray shape preventing the contained substance spill. Compliance with PN EN 14727.

Path two: Development of knowledge and civilization

Tour starts on level + 7.50, where in the engine room is located at station "Simple machines: Bike on line" Engine Room) and "Alchemist's Laboratory" (switchgear). The main element of path 2: "The development of knowledge and civilization" is located at +10.50. Walking at this level begins with "The Time Machine" - a multimedia journey back in time to the days of the industrial era. In path 2. Visitors can also use a separate external entrance, visit the lowest level Cold Room- of the building in which is mounted Foucault pendulum. Visiting scheme of path 2: "The development of knowledge and civilization" is shown on the drawings: AR 03 and AR 04 (Volume II: element drawing). Schematic deployment models and interactive installations, multimedia and selected elements on this path arrangement is illustrated in the drawings: AR 09 and AR 10 (Volume II: element drawing).

The basic idea of the script of the path "Development of knowledge and civilization" is the presentation of natural phenomena underlying the findings, concepts, laws of physics and chemistry. Each of the stations will be equipped with: - Model / interactive installation, - A plate with a brief commentary and instruction manual model / system,

- Audio-visual material with multimedia science teaching and popularizing.

Material for research and teaching and popularizing should consist of the following elements: - A reference to the rules and physico-chemical phenomena (which are illustrated by the station), - Fundamental and expanded commentaries (with the option chosen by the user), - Presentation of practical applications, - History of discovery, curiosities. Material research and teaching and popularizing should consist of a descriptive element (prepared in the form an interactive presentation triggered by the Visitor) and animation 2d / 3d, films, recordings. Descriptive layer materials for research teaching and outreach, which should be used to prepare a presentation is given in this section. Multimedia layer (graphics, video, auditory materials) to be prepared by the Contractor of the exhibition based on the guidelines contained in the description of the respective stations and based on the requirements and guidelines set out in Section 6 of this report.

Elements of arrangement and setting, the completion of which the Contractor is obliged, are described in this section under the relevant stations and in Chapter 3 of this report.

STAND: SIMPLE MACHINES - BIKE ON LINE Station construction - technical description: The basic elements of the station include: - bicycle with bilateral handlebars and a set of oppositely disposed saddles: allows driving in both directions without turning the vehicle, vehicle construction steel, reinforced, loaded with weight / ballast guarantees a stable ride with a load of up to 90 kg; wheel with a groove around the perimeter contoured so as to make it easy but safely to roll on a steel guide - lines; - Steel cable stretched axially along the post - a guide for the bike wheel, - steel cable (top) for the suspension of a mountaineering harness - stretched axially along the station, - platforms mounted on both sides of the platform grating allows getting on and off the bike and to change direction, - openwork balustrade protection - fixed on both sides of each of the platforms, - Full climbing harness with an assurance line, structural clip hooks, pulleys connected by a transport block to the top steel line, - Two-element safety net protection of high strength polypropylene with steel rope edge – stretched out in plane motion under the rope, protecting User in the event of a fall, allowing the free movement of suspended ballast, - Helmet for work at height - 2 pcs. The proposed length of the stand: 2100.00 cm (+ / -15%). All items should be calculated and designed in detail at the design and testing of prototype workshop so that the station was completely safe for users. Standard solution: Heureka, Helsinki and the Palace of Wonders, Budapest. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: element drawing, fig. AR 47.

The station is a demonstration model. A limited number of users under the supervision of a staff of the Centre will be able to make use of the station.

Station is not expected to be provided with AV equipment, or with additional information boards.

ALCHEMIST'S LABORATORY

The Alchemist's Laboratory conditions should be created to carry out chemical experiments - as element of a special offer to Visitors or as element of the original programs of education and extracurricular activities. Due to the long duration of the visit which path 2 "Development of knowledge and civilization" requires it is not expected as element of exploring this path that separate experiments and experience will be carried out at the Alchemist Laboratory. The offer will be targeted at schools, however, a element of the experimental station at +10.50 may be used and continue the tour in the Alchemist Laboratory and perform experiments that were agreed upon with schools. The chemical experiments on offer are prepared by workers of CNiT during the exhibition. So it should be possible to perform chemical experiments and similar difficulty to that described on path 1 "Energy conversion". To do so requires the purchase and delivery of EQUIPMENT:

Additional equipment: - Additional socket 230v and 380v - Additional water spout - Flammable and technical gases spout - Residual-current device - Automatic window control - Protect the system manual - Automatic ventilation control Required parameters: Width (mm) 1280 1580 1880 Depth (mm) 940 Height (closed / open window (mm) 2325 / 2575 Table height (mm) 900 Working chamber: 1150 1450 1750 width (mm) 700 700 700 depth (mm) 1260 1260 1260 Height (mm) Maximum window opening (mm) 750 Recommended flow with the window open (m3/h) 600-950 750-1250 900-1500 The recommended speed of the airflow in the 0,3 - 0,5 window opening (m/s) Ventilation flange (mm) Ø160 Ø200 Ø250

ZONE: THE TIME MACHINE Visiting at this level begins with "The Time Machine": moving walkway through the animation and multimedia presentations zone is to be a symbolic movement to: - Pre-industrial era (until the development of modern science, technology and civilization) - era of construction and development of power plants EC1. Travelling the "Time Machine" should be a"climatic" introduction to the subject presented at the exhibition.

The scenario assumes that in the recesses of windows, screens will be installed, which will be present archival material related to the creation and operation of power plants / thermal-electric plants. Work conditions and work culture will be accentuated and shown. On the other monitors should be presented prepared before hand, combined animation technique 2d - 3d showing the "climate" of the industrial revolution and the most prominent figures of physicists and engineers from the XVIII-XX century Multimedia content in this site should operate with minimal text - the emphasis should

63 primarily be on the image. Not expected at this site is the use of auditory materials due to located in close proximity, experimental stations (including stations related to acoustics). Multimedia content will be presented in the form of a looped projection on 13 screens [mn 2.24 mn 2.25 mn 2.36]. Requires own production, but also allows for licensed materials. Total duration of the presentations and animations for zone "Time Machine": 30 minutes.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

STAND: RADIOACTIVITY PHENOMENON

Objective: Presentation of the phenomenon of radioactivity. Scientific and educational value: The experiment is to show how anti –radiation coverage material is made and the impact of its thickness on the absorbtion of radiation from radioactive decay.

Station construction- technical description: The platform construction is 10/10 or 20/20 mm steel. Platform dimensions: 220.00 cm (L) x 20.00 cm (W) x 90.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform Coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder -coated, gray, gloss. Station mounted on or bolted to the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable height supports.

At both ends of the platform top should be mounted axial/alignment (welded) tubes - stainless steel brackets Φ2 ,00-3, 00cm. At their tops should to be installed leaden pipes Φ approximately 5.00 inches, inside which will be placed the gamma-ray source and detector, connected by three rods – guide bars (Φ0 ,50-1, 00cm, steel) holding rollers/disks in station. Tube with the radiation source must be protected with aluminum foil of 0.10cm thickness. in order to prevent leakage of radiation outside in an uncontrolled manner. The source of radiation is e.g. americium 241 (the number to be chosen experimentally, at the stage of final testing of prototypes). Radioactive element usage in amounts not endangering life or health of Visitors and/ or employees, the nature and amount of the element absolutely cannot lead to a radiation hazard. Geiger-Muller counter should show changes in the radiation source. During final testing of prototypes, station should be checked to ascertain whether it meets the legal regulations concerning radiation. The pipe on the opposite side of the source of radiation is to remain empty in the middle and has to be connected to i G-M counter with the display visible to the visitor. An appropriate unit should be chosen: both in terms of scope of sensitivity as well as the possibilities to observe the changes in device readings by Visitors. The detector should be properly prepared and calibrated: the readings set correctly for different radiation intensities. Components at risk of radiation must be fully enclosed with translucent plexi panels. 1.00-2.00 cm. At the top of the guide, at regular intervals, place three sets of rollers/disks at 6.00 pc one set. Rollers/disks, Φ6, 00 cm, on the edge of the hole should be able to enter the guide, rollers/disks must be able to freely circulate on the plane transverse of the guide. Rollers/disks should be made of three different materials: wood, aluminum, steel (each set from separate material). The type of wood, steel and aluminum - to be selected at the prototyping stage, together with a selection of the amount of radioactive material and the selection and setting of the G-M in such a way that the station was safe for

Visitors and employees, but at the same time possible to observe the phenomenon. It should be possible for elementicular groups of rollers/disks to independently rotate, so that any number of rollers of a given material can block the path of radiation particles. The other two steel rails are designed to stabilize and lock rollers/disks, one of the rails should hold the rollers/disks in station not blocking flow of radiation, so that it does not turn spontaneously and one of them should prevent rotation of 360 ° by the User. Laying rollers relative to each other must be determined experimentally, at the stage of final testing of prototypes. A separate roller/disk should be made of plexiglass - the same, as which is made the tubes with the radiation source. Roller/disk should be mounted similarly on the guide as described in the above, three sets of rollers/disks. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: element drawing, fig. AR 32. The station is also indicated in figure AR 10 (Volume II: element drawing) symbol: M.2.16. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

RADIOACTIVITY PHENOMENON INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Turn down your own choice, of any number of rollers/disks made of the same material and observe the indication detector (G-M counter). 2. Repeat the experiment with a different combination of rollers/disks. 3. Repeat the experiment using a roller/disk made of plexiglass. 4. How to change the meter, depending on the number and type of rollers/disks, which block radiation? WHY DOES THIS HAPPEN? For over a hundred years the phenomenon of radioactivity has been known and studied. It is the ability of nuclei to decay. During the decay, particles of alpha, beta and gamma are emitted. This process can also occurs in the opposite direction. That the material on which alpha, beta or gamma particles fall absorbs some of them – it is then referred to as absorption of radiation. Different materials have different absorption capabilities (stopping) radiation.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.16]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / to select the following text and multimedia content:

RADIOACTIVITY PHENOMENON Law and physico-chemical phenomena: radiation, radioactivity, absorption of radiation, radiation protection, nuclear decay

Fundamental commentary: Each atom consists of a nucleus with a positive charge and negatively charged electrons orbiting it. The atomic nucleus on the other hand is composed of positively charged protons and neutrons deprived of electric charge. The fact is that the chemical element is determined by the number of protons contained in the core (e.g., hydrogen has a single proton nucleus, helium two, etc.) Atoms of the same number of protons but a different number of neutrons are called isotopes of one element. Number of neutrons in the nucleus of an atom cannot be arbitrary. When there are too many or too few, the nucleus is no longer stable. Nuclear disintegration leads to radiation, in which particles of alpha,

65 beta and gamma are emitted. This radiation can be absorbed by materials: various materials to varying degrees absorb radiation (radiation absorption).

Expanded commentary: The phenomenon of radioactivity is when the radiation source emits particles that begin to interact with the surrounding matter. This interaction causes the disappearance of alpha, beta or gamma radiation particles - as they distance themselves from the radiation source. Fading occurs as a result of the impact of particles emitted from radioactive processes of ambient atoms, whereby they are precipitated and ultimately their energy is absorbed by matter. The change in the intensity of radiation describes the exponential decay: I (x) = I0 e^(-μ x) where: x - is the distance from the radiation source, I0- intensity of the radiation on the surface of the radioactive source. The coefficient "μ" structure describes the effectiveness of radiation absorption by the material and depends on the density of the material (e.g. it is higher for water than that of water vapor) and the type of radiation and the atomic structure of the material through which the radiation passes.

Practical application: Currently radioactivity is commonly used in medicine to determine the activity of various organs such as the thyroid gland. Radiation is an ubiquitous phenomenon: at any time radiation can penetrate the human body. Even the interior of the body is radioactive! Each kiloGRam of our body is characterized by activity of about 50 radioactive disintegrations per second (one radioactive decay per second is 1 becquerel). The radioactive element in the human body is primarily potassium 40: located mainly in the bones. When we open tap water radon 222 in the form of gas is released. It comes from the alpha decay of radium 226 which in turn is the product of the natural decay of uranium 238.Natural radon inhaled in this way, is responsible for about half of the radiation dose naturally absorbed by people every year, in Poland. This element gets into the water, because the rocks are dissolved by water flowing through them (in a process continuously ongoing for hundreds of thousands of years) and elements which are located in the rocks, including radioactive, get into the water. However, do not be afraid - the water is not contaminated. It is also the only source of radiation in daily life. The vast majority of the radiation dose that the human body receives each year comes from natural sources. Almost half as a result of inhalation of radon-222, which comes out of the ground, as well as from construction materials. Increased doses of radiation affecting us over the years may increase the likelihood of developing serious illness. On the other hand, so-called. Radiation hormesis theory says that exposing the body to higher radiation can have positive effects on the body, which is taught to repair damage at the cellular level and thus increases its resistance. Proponents of this theory are in Poland where they have several spas where you can swim in radon. Other sources of radiation are, among others.: Cosmic rays (eg, it will affect the storage life of "flash", because they may be unreadable after a few years of non-use), X-rays or conventional particle detectors (eg smoke detectors, in which there is americium 241 - the same element as at our station).

Trivia, history of discovery: The phenomenon of radioactivity was discovered by French physicist Henri Becquerel in 1896, studying the phenomenon of phosphorescence. He noted that the films treated with uranium salt not exposed earlier to sunlight are already darkening at the point of application of the film. Further studies have shown that the new radiation source is not just uranium salt , but each chemical compound containing a sufficient amount of uranium and metalic uranium. He managed to find a semi-quantitative relationship between the power of the new radiation emitted, and the content of uranium in the sample.

Maria Sklodowska-Curie, at the instigation of Becquerel, along with her husband Pierre Curie began to investigate this phenomenon, and noted that some of the uranium ore have much more radioactivity than would result from the presence of the uranium. Marie and Pierre Curie made strenuous attempts to isolate compounds of uranium from uranium ore. They discovered and isolated a new element, radium, which was many times more radioactive than uranium. Isolating the element enabled a closer examination of quantitative emission energy depending on the content of the radioactive element in the sample and the discovery that the radioactivity is in fact an issue of the three different types of radiation, and the transformation of one element into another (such as radium to radon gas) as a result of radioactive decay. The phenomenon of radioactivity was also dealt with then by Ernest Rutherford, discoverer of the atomic nucleus. Rutherford received a sample of pure uranium from Becquerel to examine the radiation emitted there from. Rutherford broke down radiation into three components, called: alpha, beta and gamma. Rutherford's most important achievement in this field was the finding that alpha radiation is a stream of He2 + (4He nuclei).

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - Emission of radiation in the atomic nucleus changes, - how different types of materials capture different types of radiation (alpha, beta, gamma) and to identify the best materials to protect against them. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The duration of the animation and presentation: 30 seconds. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: BERNOULLI’S PRINCIPLE - station 1

Objective: Demonstration of Bernoulli’s principle, the law of fluid dynamics and hydrodynamic paradox. Scientific and educational value: The station is intended to illustrate Bernoulli law and show his example (hydrodynamic paradox) that physics is not necessarily what it seems logical, it is true, and in accordance with its laws.

Station construction - technical description: Platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 400.00 cm (L) x 160.00 cm (W) x 90.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Steel supports + hard rubber at the interface with the ground. Glass Installation dimensions: 330.00 cm (L) x 140.00 cm (width), 60.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Installation should be made of tempered safety glass. During final testing of prototypes, and prior to the implementation, by calculating the stress and strain rates, the appropriate glass thickness and manner of joining with the panels should be chosen. The height of a column of liquid in the tank (in a glass construction) at rest is expected to be about 30, 00cm. Inside the tank is put parallel to each other two hulls of seagoing vessels measuring approximately 180.00 cm x 40.00 cm, made of plastic, for the necessary experiments

67 for the proper conduct of rigidity and strength of the hull. To the upper element of the sides should be attached rubber layer (thickness 2.00 cm, the waterproof glue) in order to protect the mutual collisions. Inside the tank to shorter edge install a tube (stainless steel, Φ2, 50cm) stabilizing the station of the vessels, while, through its flexible attachment to the vessel wall, permitting flexible mooring and deflection from the longitudinal axis during the experiment. Along the tank should be two drag lines (steel, coated, Φ 0.50 cm), attached to the tank wall on the one side and to the stabilization tube on the other tube. Lines should be dragged through the keel of each vessel parallel to the deck. On the cover of the platform should be installed a timer button, activating the pump located inside the platform. The task of the pump is to push fluid in the direction: from the wall to which is installed the stabilizing tube in the opposite direction - from where the excess fluid is returned (via a filter system) to a holding tank and from there back to the pump. As the phenomenon experienced brings closer together the sides of the vessels during the liquid flow parallel to the sides, at the stage of final testing of prototypes, the power of the pump and other components of the station (mass model, the length and flexibility of the mounting links stabilizing tube) should be adjusted in such a way that that the experiment will last approximately 20s. Ensure that periodical inspection of all elements of the station is available. The station should be fitted with the water installation (supply, sanitation). Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: element drawing, figure AR 62. The station is also indicated in fig. AR 10 (Volume II: element drawing) symbol: M.2.31. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on the plate:

BERNOULLI’S PRINCIPLE INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Start the pump by pressing the water flow button. 2. How vessels behave, when the water flows between them at high speed? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Some phenomena observed in nature defy "common sense". In such a situation we are dealing with the case of hydrodynamic paradox. Where the flow narrows, water pressure does not increase, but decreases. Water copes "copes" with constriction by increasing its flow velocity.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.40]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

BERNOULLI’S PRINCIPLE Law and physico-chemical phenomena: Bernoulli’s principle, the law of fluid dynamics, hydrodynamic paradox

Fundamental commentary: Bernoulli's principle states that for an inviscid flow, an increase in the speed of the fluid occurs simultaneously with a decrease in pressure or a decrease in the fluid's potential energy. Liquid flowing through the tapered section of a tube increases its flow velocity, and if the tube expands - slows down. This relationship does not seem to be obvious to the observer.

Bernoulli’s principle in practice can be seen in many situations, "contrary to common sense." An example might be a ball placed under a stream of liquid rises to the top.

Expanded commentary: This states that, in a steady flow, the sum of all forms of mechanical energy in a fluid along a streamline is the same at all points on that streamline. This requires that the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy remain constant. Thus an increase in the speed of the fluid occurs proportionately with an increase in both its dynamic pressure and kinetic energy, and a decrease in its static pressure and potential energy Bernoulli law is as follows: (v^ 2) / 2 + Φ + w = const. where: Φ - potential energy per unit mass, w - enthalpy per unit mass.

Practical application: Bernoulli’s Principle is one of the fundamental principles, the use of which in practice allows you to describe the principle of operation and design objects to measure the pressure exerted by the flowing fluid. By changing the cross-section of pipe through which fluid flows, you can control the speed of its flow. Bernoulli's Principle is used in the production, such as fridges that everyone has at home. Tubes that are at the back of the fridge, have different diameters, which forces change in the flow speed of the fluid - coolant that's in them.

Trivia, history of discovery: Daniel Bernoulli was a Swiss scholar who lived in the eighteenth century was one of the greatest physicists of his time, creator of the principle that bears his name – Bernoulli’s Principle. Many members of his family have also served in physics and mathematics. An example might be, for example his uncle (Jakob Bernoulli), who defined the Euler number "e". It is used for example in mathematics to determine the base of natural logarithm and is ≈ 2.7182818 ...

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - To show how the principle can explain "gravitation" of bodies - in this case, the close vessels sailing in close proximity. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The total duration of the animation and presentation: 20 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: BERNOULLI’S PRINCIPLE – STATION 2

Objective: Demonstration of Bernoulli’s principle, the law of fluid dynamics, hydrodynamic paradox. Scientific and educational value: The station is illustrated by the principle of Bernoulli and shows by his example that physics is not necessarily what seems logical, is true, and in accordance with its laws.

Station construction - technical description: Platform made of 10/10 or 20/20 mm steel. Platform dimensions: 100.00 cm (L) x 100.00 cm (W) x 50.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss.

Station on concrete floor mounted or fitted with adjustable legs or legs of steel + hard rubber in contact with the ground. Station height: 250.00 cm (+ / -10%). The platform is secured by (welded) openwork design of pipes (Φ2, 50cm, stainless steel) with a height of approximately 130.00 cm supporting a tank with water placed on the top. The water tank is made in the shape of a ball with a diameter of 50.00 cm - glass or transparent plastic. Element of the structure from platform surface to a height of about 130.00 cm is to be built with walls of glass 2.2.1to protect Visitors (from potential spills) and to protect the station. On the platform should be built a pump, pumping water into the glass container located at the top of the structure. The platform should be furnished with the pump start button. Tubes for water circulation should be made of transparent Plexiglas Φ 4,00-4,50 cm. The lower element of the piping must be horizontal, wherein a portion of this section should have a narrowed cross section (up to 2,00-2,50 cm). Use a liquid crystal display meter, with built-in batteries, and in two places on the horizontal portion of the tube, one at its larger diameter, the second smaller. In the water tank placed on top a sensor should be put, with indications which should correlate to the work of the pump. Work station surface/ counter top must be shaped in such a way that there is no water splashing and that it flows down into the pump. The precise diameters of pipes, tubes profiling, profiling the surface of the countertop, the pump power and the amount of liquid in circulation should be determined and selected at the stage of final testing of prototypes in such a way that the experiment be possible to carry out and the intended effect be observed by the Visitor. Ensure that periodical inspection should be available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: element drawing, fig. AR 63. The station is also indicated in the fig. AR 10 (Volume II: element drawing) symbol: M.2.32. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

BERNOULLI’S PRINCIPLE INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Start the pump by pressing the button. Wait until the water starts to flowing down from the tank. 2. What value is indicated by the meter located on the narrow piece of the horizontal section of the tube? 3. What value is indicated by the meter placed on the wider cross-section of the horizontal piece of pipe? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? The water flow pressure does not increase at the narrow fragment, but decreases. Water copes "copes" with constriction by increasing its flow velocity. This phenomenon is often used in practice, even in the flowmeters.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.41]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

BERNOULLI’S PRINCIPLE

Law and physico-chemical phenomena: Bernoulli’s principle, the law of fluid dynamics, hydrodynamic paradox

Fundamental commentary Bernoulli Law defines the relationship between the velocity of the flowing liquid, and the pressure at the flow. The liquid flows through the tapered tube section increases its flow velocity, and if the tube expands - slows down. This relationship does not seem to be obvious to the observer, which is why it is called "hydrodynamic paradox". Error in the common logic is based on the assumption that the fluid in the constriction of its volume is reduced in proportion to the change in pipe cross- section, and thus should increase the pressure. This occurs, however, different. The compressibility in the case of low speed almost does not occur. Fluid "deals” with constriction by increasing flow velocity. This means that the fluid in the first constriction accelerates, while at the end of the constriction slows down. Speed change is possible only through the action of forces within the fluid that causes a pressure changes.

Expanded commentary Bernoulli law states that the sum of kinetic energy, potential and the pressure of the weight of the fluid flow set is perfect constant. If you're dealing with a faster flow of liquid in the system, it will mean pressure drop. Speaking of perfect fluid can be neglected effects such as fluid viscosity and turbulent motion, ie phenomena that interfere with the movement of the liquid. Considering Bernoulli’s principle it is worth remembering that pressure measured at the any site (static pressure) is, in contrast to the dynamic pressure, unrelated to the speed of movement. Another form of Bernoulli’s principle says that the sum of static and dynamic pressure is to be constant. So if one of them increases, the other must decrease. Bernoulli’s principle is as follows: (v ^ 2) / 2 + Φ + w = const where: Φ - potential energy per unit mass, in - enthalpy per unit mass. Liquids are liquids generally less compressible. The flow rate of liquid in the rigid conduit is inversely proportional to the cross-sectional area at a given location. According to the stream continuity equation, assuming that the temperature of the incompressible fluid is constant and the same for each cable section, the volume of fluid entering and flowing out in a second section of any point is constant (because the liquid fills the pipe and not being incompressible can accumulate anywhere): Q = V / t where: Q - flow volume(m3 / s), V - volume (m3), t - time (s).

Practical application: Bernoulli’s Principle is the only fundamental law, the use of which in practice, allows you to describe the principle of operation and design a device to measure the pressure of liquids. By changing the cross-section of a pipe through which liquid flows you can control its flow rate. Bernoulli’s Principle is used in practice, in flowmeters for measuring fluid flow and sometimes also the flow of gases. With flowmeters, flow can be measured by volume or weight of the moving substance through a given surface perpendicular to the flow direction.

Trivia, history of discovery: Daniel Bernoulli was a Swiss mathematician and physicist living in the eighteenth century. Lectured in St. Petersburg and Basel. He is the author of the principle that bears his name – Bernoulli’s Principle. Bernoulli law applies to both liquids and gases. Many persons in the wealthy Bernoulli family were involved in mathematics and physics.

Uncle Daniel – e.g. Jakob Bernoulli defined the Euler number :"e". It is used, among other things In mathematics, to determine the base of natural logarithm and is ≈ 2.7182818...

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - The relationship between the velocity of the liquid flow and cross flow - The relationship between the velocity of the flowing liquid, and the pressure at the flow point. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The duration of the animation: 20 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: ELECTRICAL CHARGE – ELECTRON GUN

Objective: Presentation of the way an electron gun operates. Scientific and educational value: The experiment is designed to show a flowchart of an electron gun in operation - the behavior of electric charge in a vacuum.

Station construction - technical description: Platform made of 10/10 or 20/20 mm steel. Platform dimensions: 120.00 cm (L) x 30.00 cm (W) x 75.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Station is erected on the concrete floor and fitted with adjustable legs for height. The platform surface should be fitted with two axial stainless steel brackets Φ2 ,00-3, 00cm. The brackets will be used as conduits (cable to plot voltage electron). The brackets must be mounted with plexiglas tube with a diameter of 10.00 inches and length of about 105.00 cm. Inside there is to be a glass tube (Φ4, 00 cm, close to vacuum). On one side, the length of about 5.00 cm glass tube to be coated on the inside with fluorescence foil. Foil type must be chosen at the stage of final testing of prototypes in such a way that the electrons ejected from an electron gun when falling on it causes it to glow. Electron beam gun should be placed at the opposite end of the glass tube. The electrons will move in the inner tube in the electric field, the voltage should be selected so as to be able to get the effect of residual gas lighting in the tube. On the platform surface should also be located: - switches (two regulators e.g. slide) for controlling the voltage value by the Visitor, - bar magnet (min size: 10.00 cm (W) x 3.00 cm (L) x 3.00 cm (H)) fixed (Φ steel cable 0.30 cm) to the top platform, the magnet should be protected with a thin a layer of plexiglass, wire length should allow for the application of the magnet to the enclosure of glass to the curvature of the electron trajectory. Ensure periodical inspection to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: element drawing, fig. AR 36. The station is also indicated in fig. AR 10 (Volume II: element drawing) symbol: M.2.21. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

ELECTRICAL CHARGE – ELECTRON GUN INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Note the greenish spot on the fluorescent foil and bursts of flashes inside the glass tube. Spot and flashes are caused by electrons emitted from the electron beam gun. 2. Move the slider, one way then the next and watch the behavior of the spots on the foil and flashes in the glass tube. Does the movement of the electrons change? 3. Attach the magnet to the tube and watch the behavior of the spots on the foil and flashes in the glass tube. Does the movement of the electrons change? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? At the station is an empty bubble, in which there is only a little gas. Changing the generator voltages will change the behavior of moving electrons emitted by the electron beam gun. The change of moving electrons also causes a magnetic field.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.21]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

ELECTRICAL CHARGE- ELECTRON GUN Law and physico-chemical phenomena: cathode rays, electron gun, electron

Fundamental commentary: When applying suitable voltage to rarefied gases, we will see first, illumination of the fluorescent coating, and then the lighted gas itself. The phenomenon of luminous coating is caused by the emission of electrons from the electron gun located at the narrow end of the tube. Electrons from it enters the electric field in the region where they are accelerated. After traveling the entire length of the tube, they collide with the wall coated with fluorescent paint, where they lose their energy. Electron energy loss can be seen as a glowing fluorescent paint. If the electric field in the electrons get enough energy, their random collisions with gas remains, cause ionization of the gas atoms and their glow.

Expanded commentary Cathode ends emit electrons of charge q = 1.602 × 10-19C. They then get into the area of the electric field. This field is generated by a simple capacitor, to the cover of which a voltage difference is applied. This causes kinetic energy to be given to the electrons: Ek = Uq = (mV ^ 2) / 2 where: Ek - kinetic energy of the electron, q - electron charge, U - voltage difference on the cover of a capacitor, m - mass of the electron, V - velocity of the electron after leaving the electric field. Electrons leaving this area, if it has sufficiently high energy, it may ionize the gas remains located in the tube, causing it to glow. If the energy is too low, it will travel the entire length of the tube and as a result of a collision with atoms of fluorescent paint will destroy all its kinetic energy. Fluorescent paint atoms excited on electron impact will emit greenish light. If the magnet nears the tube, the moving electrons will begin to gain additional energy: Fa = F_B / m This force will cause an electron in accordance with Newton's second principle to accelerate in the direction of the force. The force acting on the electron as a result of the approximation of the magnet is a magnetic force, a component of the Lorentz force:

F_B = q (v) × B This force acts perpendicular to the direction of movement of electrons, and therefore alter their path of movement, but not the speed. As can be seen, the approach moves the magnet spots visible on the foil.

Practical application: Currently, cathode rays and cathode lamps can be found every day in health facilities as a source of X-ray radiation (radiation "X"), in GRoundrows of LCD screens (so-called "flat" monitors, screens), and the electron beam gun in CRT ( TV kinescope, computer monitors "old generation"). The discovery of the electron and the vacuum tube made it possible to construct a CRT TV. The cathode electron beam gun 'shoot' the electrons into the vacuum chamber, where the magnetic field appropriately deflects the path of their flight. The electrons finally hit the screen, causing it to glow.

Trivia, history of discovery: In 1705, scientists first observed that the spark produced by the electrostatic machine jumps farther in rarefied air than in air which is under normal pressure. In 1838, Michael Faraday tried to pass current through a glass tube containing rarefied air. During the experiment, he noticed a strange arc extending from the anode (positive electrode) almost to the cathode (negative electrode). The only place where the light was not observed, was the area just in front of the cathode. This area was called "Faraday dark space." Hence began a long and "turbulent" period of research into the phenomenon of this light, given the name cathode rays. In 1855, a new type of vacuum pump was invented, which allows to obtain a much lower pressure, allowing the further development of research on cathode rays. In 1879, the English physicist William Crookes built and unveiled a new device called Crookes tube. He said that the thin foil, on which a beam of cathode rays was focused, warms up. It was a proof of the fact that the rays, whatever they may be, transfer energy. Crooks's second observation was that the beam exerts a force - momentum transfer. Crooks’s ownership was shown by inserting into the vacuum tube a paddle wheel so that the blades were in the path of the cathode rays, when the cathode rays fell on the paddles, the wheel began to move. In the second half of the nineteenth century, two models describing cathode rays emerged. Scientists divided into opposing camps - supporters of the first (corpuscular) and second (wave) model. In 1895, Wilhelm Roentgen while experimenting with Crookes tube rays discovered the "X". For their discovery of in 1901, Roentgen received the first Nobel Prize in physics. In 1902, Joseph John Thomson and Ernest Rutherford published the work "On the conduction of electricity by gases." It argued that conductivity was "thanks to" present in the gas particles endowed with electric charge (electron). Thomson and Rutherford experimentally determined charge to mass ratio. For his work on the nature of cathode rays and the discovery of the electron Joseph John Thomson received in 1906 the Nobel Prize. Thompson was a member of the Polish Academy of Sciences in Krakow.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - To show the principles of plot electron and cathode rays. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The duration of the animation: 30 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: OPERATION OF A MICROWAVE OVEN

Objective: To show how the microwave works. Scientific and educational value: Showing the effects of microwaves on the example of the oven. Presentation of how the device heats the products that are in it (for example, thermographic foil) not using for this purpose classic "fuel".

Station construction - technical description: Platform made of 10/10 or 20/20 mm steel. Platform dimensions: 120.00 cm (L) x 50.00 cm (W) x 90.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel plate, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Station erected concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height. On the platform surface is affixed a microwave magnetron no worse than 1.00 kW. Factory exterior of the product is to be converted into transparent Plexiglas (thickness 0.6 cm) to make it possible to observe the equipment in operation. Microwave door should be made of mesh shield (protection from microwave). The density of the screen grid must be chosen at the stage of final testing of prototypes in such a way as to allow the visitor to view the interior of the device, including thermographic ball. The microwave’s operating time, temperature and other functions should be blocked to prevent changes. In the platform housing must be mounted a push button, which will launch the microwave with the pre-programmed parameters (time, temperature and other functions, if equipped with same). These parameters should be adjusted at the stage of final testing of prototypes, taking into account the nature of the material from which the balls are to be made in such a way that the visitors have the opportunity to observe the phenomenon. Inside the machine should also be a"heated" object - a ball made of thermographic foil (Φ16, 00cm), located on a rotating base (may be serial plate, purchased with the device, and if not - is to have approvals to allow for the use of it in the microwave oven), which under the influence of heat changes color. Next to the oven to the countertop should be fixed on a base (stainless steel, 8.00 cm (W) x 8.00 cm (L) x 1.00 cm (thickness)) ball of the same type, made of the same material and possible to be touched by the Visitor. The possibility to install in the interior a RFID transmitter should be considered, or a different system, making it difficult to take(stealing) material from the station. The station should be clearly marked with graphics informing of the risks to people with pacemakers. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: element drawing, fig. AR 33 The station is also indicated in fig. AR 10 (Volume II: element drawing) symbol: M.2.06. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

CAUTION WITH PACEMAKERS!

OPERATING A MICROWAVE OVEN INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Turn on the microwave 2. Touch (hold) the foil next to the oven with your hand and watch it change color. 3. What happens to the object placed in the microwave? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING?

Items placed in the microwave changes color as a result of heating. As is the thermographic foil when touched. The increase in temperature in the microwave is the result of vibrations caused by the waves emitted by the device.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.06]. The required technical equipment and AV equipment are set out in Section 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

OPERATION OF A MICROWAVE Law and physico-chemical phenomena: electromagnetic waves, microwaves, resonance

Fundamental commentary: In a microwave oven electromagnetic waves with radar frequencies are produced - the most popular frequency used in domestic microwave ovens is 2.45 GHz (gigahertz). These waves are emitted into the microwave, then bounces off the metal walls and a metal grid mounted in the door so as to repeatedly go through a heated dish and "efficiently" cook it. Electromagnetic waves in the microwave cause oscillation (rotation) contained in a fog of water molecules. They, in turn, give off by rubbing, their energy to other components of the dish. In a nutshell we can say that the first microwave cooks water throughout the dish, and then only it heats the remaining ingredients.

Expanded commentary Liquid water because of its very strong damping of vibrations does not have a clear resonance frequency, but strongly absorbs electromagnetic waves in a fairly wide range of microwave frequencies. The frequency of the microwave oven must be located in this area and is the result of a compromise between the available frequencies in the band of non-interfering with other devices, and safe for humans and the depth of penetration of the waves in food. At a frequency of 2.45 GHz water molecules vibrate fast enough to provide good absorption of electromagnetic waves, and thus the rapid heating of food. But microwaves penetrate only about 2.5 cm (depending on the water content of the heated product). At lower frequencies the waves would penetrate deeper, but permeated by a thin structure, thus warming the food would last longer. The choice of such frequency microwaves makes transmission of electromagnetic wave energy to the heated material effective only if it contains a large amount of water (also in bound form) or when the other chemical components of the resonant frequency are emitted in the range of microwaves. Metals deflect microwaves and heat up to a negligible extent. However, if in the oven there aren’t bodies to absorb microwave energy, as a result of multiple deflections, intensity of eddy currents in a metal housing oven becomes so large that they heat up the metal casing. Microwaves pass through most ceramics, glass and plastic, because these materials heat up weakly in the microwave oven and are used for the manufacture of their internal components.

Practical application: Microwaves are used in many fields of science and technology, from the military to communications and ending with meteorology. Most known methods waves use are: to measure distance, signal transmission and heating. The first example is to determine distance by measuring the time elapsed since the sending wave, the reflection from an obstacle to return to the measuring instrument. Knowing the speed of propagation of the wave can calculate the distance covered. This method is used for example in military radars. "Weapons" shields, a way to confuse radar, there is the "stealth" technology used, among others. in aircrafts. Such planes are

"undetectable" to radar, because of the waves reflected from them at different angles, which makes it difficult / impossible to determine the station of the points that make up the image of the plane. For this reason, instead of aircraft contour the radar displays only an indefinite set of points. Cell phones, radios, wireless internet and TV use to transfer information waves of different frequencies, which are the carriers of signals, data carriers. Wave energy is also used in the microwave oven for quick reheating of food. Since the 1960s, scientists have been considering the possibility of producing energy in space, which would be sent to Earth using microwaves.

Trivia, history of discovery: Sometimes it happens that the water heated in an uncracked microwave dish reaches a temperature higher than boiling point going unnoticed to the superheated liquid state. It does not differ from the appearance of the water when the temperature is less than the boiling point (not skimming, there are no bubbles of gas). This is dangerous, since boiling can be easily initiated by shaking the vessel or adding boiling embryos (eg by pouring tea) - when suddenly a large amount of hot steam arises. For meals prepared or heated in a microwave oven to be most delicious and similar to cooked using traditional methods, it is recommended that you use the oven with the minimum possible power and long warm-up. The phenomenon of heating food with microwaves was discovered accidentally American engineer Percy Spencer in 1947 during research on the generation of electromagnetic waves used in radar devices (frequency 1 - 40 GHz). With this discovery the first microwave oven was launched. The first was called "Radar Range" and was large in size: it was 1.65 m in height and a large mass of 338 kg.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - The movement of the microwaves inside a microwave, - The principle of heating food in a microwave (moving and bouncing microwaves). Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The duration of the animation: 20 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: LED DIODE

Objective: Presentation of radio operation Scientific and educational value: The experiment is intended to familiarize the user with the principle of radio operation, showing that it can build by oneself. An important aspect is also to show many applications of diodes.

Station construction- technical description: Platform made of 10/10 or 20/20 mm steel. Platform dimensions: 150.00 cm (L) x 40.00 cm (W) x 90.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated GRay, gloss. Station mounted/erected on concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height regulation. At both ends of the surface’s axis, approximately 20.00 cm from the edge of it, should be fitted antenna masts, so that it was possible to change their station. The antenna

77 should be made of copper wire Φ 1 mm. During final testing of prototypes the height and spacing of towers and antennas should be chosen in order to be able to receive the radio signal. On the counter station top, within easy reach of the Visitors, should also be found: - Detector with a crystal of galena (permanently attached) - Coil with control dial, so that visitors will be able to tune into adequate waves. At the front side of the station will be a built in high resistant speaker. The exact type and volume of the speaker should be determined at the stage of final testing of prototypes in such a way as to make it capable of was to listen to the radio clearly with good / very good quality and volume, and to avoid hampering visiting the rest of the exhibition. The station have headphones/ headset (1.00 cpl.) so that the Visitor may have the opportunity to listen to the broadcast at a quality not worse than the speaker. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: element drawing, figure AR 31 The station is also indicated in the fig. AR 10 (Volume II: element drawing) symbol: M.2.39. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on a plate:

LED DIODE INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Adjust the antenna and search for a radio station by rotating knob. 2. If you have problems with reception, use your headphones and speaker. WHY DOES THIS HAPPEN? Radio reception is possible thanks to the diode. The LED diode is not the only popular recently diode, there is also the crystal diode and laser diode. Each of them, despite the fact that it is used in different devices, lets you enjoy the rewards of electronics, without which most people today would not be able to exist in daily life: radio, television, telephones, computers, CD and DVD players, and cash registers.

Equipment and AV for stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.48]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

LED DIODE Law and physico-chemical phenomena: LED, asymmetric conductivity, semiconductors

Fundamental commentary: The LED is a device with two electrodes conducting electrical current well only in one direction (and virtually non-conductive in the other). Currently, a semiconductor diode is made of two layers of semiconductors: n-type (cathode) and p (anode). Applying a positive voltage on the anode and the cathode causes a negative current flow. In the forward direction, with low voltage, a semiconductor diode conducts poorly – only after crossing the so-called. threshold voltage (dependent, among others. on gases contained therein) forward current increases rapidly. Upon application of a reverse diode it passes to a so-called barrier state. When the diode is in the barrier state, only a small amount of current called reverse current flows through it. In the barrier direction reverse current intensity has a value of several microamperes. Reverse current value almost does not depend on the value of the applied voltage, it however, depends on the temperature and properties of the material.

Expanded commentary The main feature of semiconductor diodes is rectification of alternating current, but their range of application is much wider. N-type semiconductor (negative) formed by doping the semiconductor (silicon germanium) with other elements so that the current carriers are mainly electrons (negative charges). Atoms impurities (donors) remain in the crystal lattice, while the free electrons from the valence shell transfer charges. Analogously the p-type semiconductor (positive) is formed by doping a semiconductor (silicon, germanium) with other elements, so that cargo carriers become holes in the last shell electrons of dopant atoms. The current in the p-type semiconductor carry positive charges. Dopant atoms are herein referred to as acceptors. If it does not try out any of the electric field near the crossroads of pin free charge carriers (holes and electrons) move (diffuse), which is caused by the difference in carrier concentration. When the electrons move into the p-type region, while the holes to the area of the n-type, there is a recombination between the carriers. Recombination is the "combination" of electron with hole, thus causing the "immobilization" of the two free carriers. Thus, recombination of carriers reduces on both sides of the joint, resulting in close contact, the only exposed dopant ions: positive donors and negative acceptors. These ions produce an electric field which prevents further diffusion of carriers. As a result, near the joints a layer of space charge is formed, also called a depletion layer (i.e. practically having no free carriers), or the barrier layer. Still a positive charge on the n inhibits the flow of holes from the p, while the negative charge on the p inhibits the flow of electrons from the n. In other words, the carrier flow virtually ceases.

Practical application: The LED is one of the most widespread inventions. It has its origins back in the industrial age, but it is impossible to imagine the digital age without LED. With LEDs it became possible to transfer bulk messages over long distances better than the telegraph, faster than the press - through the radio, and in later years also by newer inventions and systems: television, web. Given the multitude of applications ranging from displays in mobile phones, TV screens, radios, personal computers, CD, DVD, Blu-ray, optical fibers, range finders, cash registers - LEDs are undoubtedly some of the most important achievements of the "digital revolution". Semiconductor lasers (laser diodes) are also used in laser pointers, rangefinders - enabling fast and accurate measurements (in construction, surveying). They are used by the military: they are used e.g. for guiding the missile on target - to identify (and sometimes illuminate) a target.

Trivia, history of discovery: The first LEDs were crystal detectors and vacuum diodes. In 1874, German scientist Karl Ferdinand Braun discovered the "unilateral conduction" of crystals. Braun patented the crystal rectifier in 1899. Braun in 1909, together with Guglielmo Marconi received the Nobel Prize for "contributions to the development of wireless telegraphy". In 1894, an Indian scientist Jagadish Chandra Bose was first to use the crystal to detect radio waves. The crystal detector had been practically used for wireless telegraphy by Greenleaf Whittier Pickard, who discovered that it can be applied to silicon crystal (1903) and patented this discovery in 1906. Other experimenters tried to use for similar purposes many other substances, of which the most common was galena (lead sulfide) - cheap and easy to obtain. The unit was replaced by a crystal vacuum diode in the 1920s. After obtaining high-purity semiconductor vacuum diodes were, in the 1950s, replaced by a germanium diode. One of the first people who established Polish Radio, was Leopold Skulski - councilor and mayor of Łódź in 1917-1919. Skulski was the Chairman of the advisory board of the Polish Radio until 1936.

One of the few radio production centers in the interwar period was Łódź. IKA Radio Engineering Plant was one of the largest companies in Łódź. They were founded in 1929 and operated until World War II. The owners of Radio Engineering IKA Works were Joseph Kalinowski and Andrew Sobczyk. IKA had its plant at 40 Cegielniana St (later Pomeranian). In the second half of the 1930s, the company developed and implemented into production in every season several models of receivers, which was characterized by a high level of technique and design. During the Second World War, under the name Radiotechnische Fabrik IKA Litzmannstadt continued its operations and produced radios, but under German occupation management - the product was available only for the Germans.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - principle of operation of a semiconductor diode and the movement of charge carriers. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The duration of the animation: 20 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: OBLIQUE PROJECTION Objective: Demonstration of motion in the gravitational field of the Earth. Scientific and educational value: Oblique projection is a combination of uniformly variable and uniformly rectilinear motions. The result of this combination is a parabolic trajectory. Observation is subject to range and height and trajectory of motion. Choice of inclination angle and the value of the initial speed is element of an interactive show.

Station construction - technical description: Construction of the platform is made of steel 20/40 mm. Platform dimensions: 400.00 cm (L) x 120.00 cm (W) x 50.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Side covers of the platform: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Station mounted/erected on concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs/supports or legs of steel + hard rubber in contact with the ground. Station top/counter made of laminate approximately 3.00 cm thickness. Station top tilting, inclination angle regulated by actuators (8 pcs :4 pcs main, 4 pcs supporting). Station top inclination angle to be adjusted by the Visitors using a control button. The station top is fitted with a ball launcher (spring loaded) for projecting balls at a given angle in the direction of baskets. The launcher pitch angle should be noted (pitch every 10 °), so that visitors can consciously adjust the angle of the shot. The station top is also fitted with a grid for "ammunition" - balls made of different materials: lightweight wood, foam, plastic. Balls should be made of non-toxic materials, painted in different colors, depending on the material used to make them. It may be allows to put in their interiors RFID transmitters or different system operating similarly, to hinder Visitors from taking the launching balls from the station. Perpendicular to the top, along the edge should be mounted a “recoil” control (coated metal mesh, width 30.00 cm) to prevent balls from falling out of station. On the platform should be built in servo control mechanism for the station top tilt setting. Ensure that periodical inspection is available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: element drawing, figure AR 80

The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: element drawing) symbol: M.2.44. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

OBLIQUE PROJECTION INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Put the ball in the ball launcher. 2. Adjust the angle of the shot. 3. Button to adjust the angle of the station top/counter. 4. Shoot, trying to get to one of the baskets. Try a ball of a different material. What do you observe? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Oblique projecting is one of the most common type of projection in everyday life (eg, basketball, rifle shooting). It is a "combination" combination of uniform motion horizontally and accelerated or delayed vertically. The behavior of the body in motion (at what height and distance it flies) depends on the strength and the angle at which it is set in motion.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.55] - Projector + computer [pr 2.09]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

OBLIQUE PROJECTION Law and physico-chemical phenomena: horizontal projection, vertical projection, components of motion, uniform motion Fundamental commentary Oblique projection consists of two types of motion: uniform linear (the axis parallel to the GRound), and alternating uniform (in a direction perpendicular to the ground). The behavior of the body in motion (at what height and distance it flies) depends on the strength and the angle at which it is set in motion. For a body to fly its highest, it is necessary to give it a direction perpendicular to the surface of the earth (about 90 °). On the other hand, for it to fly as far as possible, set it in motion at 45 ° angle to the ground. The maximum distance that a body can fly, is called the shot range. At the station the inclination angle change of the top/counter in conjunction with the change of the angle of projection launcher allows you to see the values of the gravitational acceleration from 0 ° (when the top/counter and launcher are aligned horizontally - shot from every angle of the launcher results in a further straight motion) to 90 ° (table and launcher are in the vertical station).

Expanded commentary: Oblique projection is a combination of uniform motion horizontally and accelerated or delayed motion vertically. In the horizontal direction the acceleration is equal to zero, which means that the speed is constant and has a value of the horizontal component of the initial speed. The vertical movement is constant acceleration or deceleration downwards. Velocity component in this direction is initially returned to the top, but sometimes drops to zero (retarded motion). At the highest station of the body component the velocity is zero. After passing through the highest point, the speed

81 changes the return oppositely and its value in that direction begins to rise (accelerated motion). The maximum distance that a body can fly, is called the shot range. At the station the inclination angle change of the top/counter in conjunction with the change of the angle of projection launcher allows you to see the values of the gravitational acceleration from 0 ° (when the top/counter and launcher are aligned horizontally - shot from every angle of the launcher results in a further straight motion) to 90 ° (table and launcher are in the vertical station). For the ball to fly at its highest, it must be fired at a right angle to the base of the launch. Such a movement is called a rising motion. For the ball to fly its farthest, you should shoot it at 45 degrees - then, when fired, the velocity of vector components: horizontal and vertical have equal value. It turns out that such a situation is optimal if you want to achieve the largest possible range. This fact can also be proven by using mathematical calculations such as calculus.

Practical application: Oblique projection is one of the most common types of motion in nature. An example of an oblique projection is a kicked ball in motion, the movement of a ball fired from a cannon, as well as the movement a long jumper. One of the people who must be able to put into practice " the principle “ of the oblique projection, and others, related, are gunners. An efficient gunner had to be a great physicist, who at the firing took into account not only the distance of the enemy from his guns, but the weather and the quality of his gun. These are all elements affecting the accuracy of shot. Today on the battlefield for all of these elements to correspond, computers rather than people are used. "Ordinary" shooters still have to be careful where they aim. They always take the into consideration that the bullet / arrow / spear, which is to fly to the target, must be fired at a slight angle upward. Professionals are able to achieve this without additional calculations, taking into account their own experience, there hands automatically set the appropriate line. But amateurs only after much trial and error, are able to estimate the output of an effective shot - the relationship between the angle of the shot, projectile mass and initial velocity. Athletes such as football players, darts players and basketball players also take into account the laws of oblique projection. Like the shooters, they must have the right angle and the right force to shoot, to score points and win.

Trivia, history of discovery: Artillery is today the most popular kind of heavy weapon, which is used in any armed conflict. One of the biggest launcher that has ever been produced and used on the battlefield, was the Paris-Geschütz, "Big Bertha" (World War I) and V3 (World War II). The most famous of these is the "Big Bertha" which operated by dozens of soldiers. Its name apparently comes from the wife of the owner of Krupp companies, who designed and produced it. It weighed 43 t moved on its own platform and its projectile weighed over 800 kg. By comparison, a 26-meter city tram from the second decade of the twenty-first century, weighs about 30 tons

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - Oblique projection is a combination of uniform motion horizontally and accelerated or delayed motion vertically Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The duration of the animation and presentation: 20 seconds. Required is a fictionalized film with elements of animation, which is illustrated using oblique projection principles: in sport, on the battlefield. The length of footage: about 120 seconds. Looped projection will take place at the station - using a projector and screen.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT

Objective: The demonstration of the photoelectric effect. Scientific and educational value: The photoelectric effect, discovered in the late nineteenth century, was one of the so- called evidence of "corpuscular duality - wave" light, i.e. its dual nature. The explanation of this theory by Albert Einstein, for which he received the Nobel Prize in 1921, has become one of the impulses of the development of quantum mechanics.

Station construction - technical description: Platform made of 10/10 or 20/20 mm steel. Platform dimensions: 60.00 cm (L) x 30.00 cm (W) x 90.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / - 10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated gray, gloss. Station mounted/erected on concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height regulation. At the center of the station top/counter an electroscope is fitted. To the electrode of the electroscope is to be installed a zinc plate 10 x 10 x 0.5 cm. On the counter/top of the station should be installed in addition: - incandescent lamp (100 W) - attached to a bracket which simultaneously represents a cable tray, covered with a transparent plexiglas case, - UV light source - fixed to a bracket which simultaneously represents a cable tray, covered with a transparent plexiglas case with strong UV protection, - ebonite rod attached to the platform with flexible cord, - woolen cloth, - sandpaper, substance100 On the side of the platform under the station top/counter should be installed the incandescent light and UV light switches. Ensure that periodical inspection should be available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: element drawing, figure AR 50 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: element drawing) symbol: M.2.25. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: as the drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

THE PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Vigorously rub the ebonite rod with the cloth. 2. Then touch the electrified electroscope rod - electroscope pointer should lean. If not, repeat step 1 3. Using the control panel start the bulb (press the button), and after a while turn it off. Does incandescent light has an effect on the deflection of electroscope pointer? 4. Start a UV lamp (button), and after a while turn it off. Does the light from a UV lamp has an impact on the deflection of the electroscope pointer? 5. If you do not observe changes in the pointer lean of the electroscope during the whole experiment, wipe the zinc plate located on electroscope with sandpaper, and then repeat the experiment. WHY IS THIS HAPPENING?

The observed phenomenon is based on toppling an electron from a metal surface by a particle of light ( photon). The photoelectric effect, discovered in the late nineteenth century to today is one of the so-called evidence. "Dual behavior of light" ("duality - wave") light. The explanation by Albert Einstein, for which he received the Nobel Prize in 1921, was one of the main impulses for development of a new field of science - quantum mechanics.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.29]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

THE PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT Law and physico-chemical phenomena: electromagnetic waves, cosmic rays, radiation, wave-particle duality

Fundamental commentary The observed phenomenon is based on toppling an electron from the metal surface by a particle of light (photon). For this, you need a source of light - here: UV lamp and incandescent bulb and metal from which the photon must be toppled. In this case it is the electroscope. First, "accumulate" negative charges on electroscope, for example by applying the ebonite rod to it. The rod must be pre-charged negative, by rubbing it with a cloth. When it touches the electroscope, the electrons move from the bar on the electroscope. This can be seen by checking the lean change of the electroscope’s pointer. Mounted lamps emit light at different wavelengths: one visible (white, 400-700 nm) and the second UV (ultraviolet to 350 nm). Since the wavelength depends on the energy of photons - the longer it is, the less is the energy. Well you can see it as: UV lamp is able to more efficiently discharge the electroscope than incandescent lamp because it emits a wave of much shorter length.

Expanded commentary: Begin by looking at the issue of light through the quantum theory, which is the smallest possible portion of energy. The nature of light is dual, "double" - the light behaves as an electromagnetic wave and as a stream of particles, or photons. This property is called duality - wave. Photoelectric binds together both the nature of light. To knock out an electron from the surface of the negatively charged metal plates, it should be referred to a stream of light from incandescent lamps. The frequency of the photons sent from the lamp depends on the length of the electromagnetic wave. The energy that reaches the photon's frequency depends, not on the intensity of light (meaning a type of light, not the flash). The energy of a photon whose source is an incandescent lamp is too small that it can knock out an electron from the surface of the plate. UV lamp emits radiation whose wavelength is shorter, but this is tantamount to transfer more energy. A particle with such energy is able to knock out an electron and at the same time causing the collapse electroscope discharge instructions. The minimum frequency of the photon, which causes the so-called photoelectric effect. cut-off frequency. An important concept is the work function, which is the lowest energy we need to provide the electron with to leave a body. The phenomenon explained above is defined precisely as the external photoelectric effect. The second kind of photoelectric effect is internal. It involves changing the parameters of the relevant conductors - such as resistance under the influence of incidental light.

Practical application:

The photoelectric effect is used in photocells, solar cells, and also provides the foundation for the modern movie cameras and cameras. The principle of operation is the same as in the above stand: because different wavelength topples a different number of electrons, just count how the length that photons fall on which place on the (the matrix), and the result is saved. In this way, CCD work - equivalent to films and cinematograph films, recording images in digital devices such as cameras, video cameras. The photoelectric effect can also be seen after a certain time, without exposure to the plates of light sources . Cosmic rays reaching the earth (which is a manifestation of solar activity, as well as explosions of new stars), cause toppling of enough charges to discharge the electroscope.

Trivia, history of discovery: This phenomenon was accidentally discovered by Heinrich Hertz dealing with the phenomenon of generating electromagnetic waves. He noted that the spark passing through the zinc balls in his device is changed depending on the lighting. Hertz did not yet understand the nature of the observed phenomena. The photoelectric effect was explained by Albert Einstein, who for justifying this phenomenon in 1921 received the Nobel Prize. Einstein's theory was proved experimentally by Robert Milikan, so the most important equation for the photoelectric effect is called the Einstein – Milikan model.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - Wave-particle duality of light, - Photon energy dependence on the wavelength. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The duration of the animation and presentation: 40 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: PRODUCTION OF ELECTRICAL AND MAGNETIC FIELDS - DATA FORCE FIELDS

Objective: Demonstrating the concept of the physical field. Scientific and educational value: Electrostatic and magnetic fields are strong and easy to generate and visualize interactions. The electrostatic field is an example of the source field, and the magnetic field - rotating field, which is characterized by the absence of the source, in this case called "magnetic monopoly." Show should include the presentation of impact loads one- and dissimilar, and magnetic field source.

Construction of station - technical description: The station comprises two elements: - The first element relates to the production of the electric field, - The second element relates to the preparation of the magnetic field. Construction of the platform is made of 10/10 or 20/20 mm steel. Platform Coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Station on the concrete floor mounted or fitted with adjustable legs for height Platform top have the dimensions: 200.00 cm x 90.00 cm (all dimensions: + / -10%). Height: 75.00 cm. In the part of the station for producing the electric field should be put the following:

85 plasma ball (Φ30, 00cm, + / -5.00 cm) on an additional small platform and a set of three short colored lamps attached to the table top (with a length of line that allows the lamps close to the ball). Lamp base in a place where the ball is embedded , should contain an electric oscillating circuit, which supplies the inner electrode with a high voltage of variable polarization (the device in terms of size and voltage and current frequency should be selected at prototype testing stage). The second element of the station dealing with the magnetic field should be put with two magnets one permanently attached to the counter, the second to be installed in such a way as to be able to perform rotations around the first magnet (moving magnet using a mechanism such as: crank, chain, sprockets , crank moving magnet should be mounted on a counter or on the side of the platform, in a way that is safe for the user, chain and sprockets - hidden under the counter). Between the magnets put a large amount of small metal balls. All of these elements must be built in with plexiglass. Ensure that periodical inspection should be available to all elements of the station. The station must be provided with description and sign warning for people with pacemakers.

Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 46 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.22. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing of information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

Caution with pacemakers!

GENERATION OF ELECTRICAL AND MAGNETIC FIELDS – DATA OF FIELDS’ FORCE INSTRUCTIONS: EXPERIMENT A – interaction of electrical field: 1. Go to the plasma ball. 2. Touch the ball by hand and observe the behavior of the gas inside. 3. Bring the lamp situated close to the station next to the ball. What do you see? EXPERIMENT B – interaction of magnetic field: 1. Within the table, where there are two magnets, with a crank ,move one of them. 2. Watch the metal balls. What do you see? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Discharges in the ball and lighting the gas in the lamps is caused by alternating electromagnetic fields. The movement of the metal balls is as a result of an alternating magnetic field. So the electric field and magnetic - are invisible to the human eye, but are all the time around us.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.22]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

GENERATION OF ELECTRICAL AND MAGNETIC FIELDS - DATA FORCE FIELDS Law and physico-chemical phenomena: electric field, electromagnetic waves, potential difference, central field magnetic field lines of the magnetic field, the magnetic poles

Fundamental commentary: Inside the ball filled with thin gas is an electrode. When you put a hand to it, there is a so-called. potential difference, or voltage electric charge transfer in order to compensate. The movement of electrical charges to the current flow. Current inside the ball creates a plasma - highly ionized gas. Arranged along the electric field lines from the center of the ball to the outside. In every direction. The potential difference between the central electrode and the finger is much greater than between the central electrode and any point in the ball. Placing a finger on the surface of the ball causes excitation of gas molecules in the fluorescent lamp and hence it glows: the creation of a small lightning. Around the ball is produced alternating electromagnetic field that causes excitation of gas molecules in the fluorescent lamp, hence the glow. However, the magnet generates a magnetic field around itself. Changing the position of the magnets relative to each other will change the magnetic field. Metal balls attracted by the magnet place themselves along the lines of that field that is currently established between the two magnets. The electromagnetic field is a system of two fields: the electric field and the magnetic field. These fields are interrelated. The concept of the electric field and electric field strength was introduced in the mid- nineteenth century by English physicist Michael Faraday . The electric field generated by the electric charge is the source field: magnetic field force lines begin and end on charges. The basic laws that describe the electromagnetic field are Maxwell's equations. They show, among others, that the magnetic field is sourceless: magnetic field lines are closed.

Expanded commentary: Inside the ball filled with thin gas is an electrode. The moment a hand is placed there is the potential difference between the hand and the electrode. Current begins to flow, which causes ionization of the gas and the formation of a plasma. Plasma filaments follow almost along the lines of the electric field, so you can see the tiny "lightning" always wandering in the largest difference of potential, which is from the electrode to the fingers. In the place where they are located, the electric field is largest. Changing hand distance results in change of the electric field. Changing this field will, in turn, create a magnetic field and the creation of an electromagnetic wave that travels not only in the ball, but also beyond. Its getting to the lamp results in stimulation of the gas contained inside hence the glow. The magnet is a source of magnetic field. Movement of one of the magnets relative to the other causes a change in magnetic field. Metal balls attracted to the magnet will always move along the field lines produced by the two magnets. It should be noted that, in one setting the magnets are facing each other with the same polarity and in the second opposite. The magnetic field lines differ in layout from the electric field lines. Moreover, the configuration of the lines depends on the sources of the field, or magnets. The concept of energy in the electric field and the term field lines were formulated by M. Faraday in describing the interaction of electric charges. The electric field generated by the electric charge is the source field: magnetic field force lines begin and end on charges. The loads imposed generate static electricity. The basic laws that describe the electromagnetic field are Maxwell's equations. Currently enrolling them as a set of four equations, called: Faraday's law of electromagnetic induction, Ampère ‘s law, Gauss's law for electricity and Gauss’s law for magnetism. From these equations it follows that: - the source of an electric field are electrical charges (electric field lines may start and end on charges), - the magnetic field is sourceless (magnetic field lines are closed) - varying in time magnetic field produces a vortex electric field (the field lines are closed)

- moving loads (e.g. flowing current) and a variable electric field produces eddy magnetic field (the field lines are closed).

Practical application: Fields: Electrical and magnetic - occur naturally. They are also used in a conscious manner by man. An example of a natural discharge is lightning – a discharge in the atmosphere associated with a storm. The earth itself is a big magnet. Earth's magnetic field protects from solar wind. The human also creates an electric field, it is small, but necessary for the proper functioning of the nervous system.

Electromagnetic induction is used for producing electric current: in current generators, generators. Both the electric field and magnetic is used in electronic devices: radios, televisions, computers, mobile phones, washing machines, dishwashers. Different types of electromagnetic fields surround people every day: when walking down the street under high-voltage lines, walking around the shops full of large LED screens, talking on a cell phone, travelling by tram, train or subway.

Trivia, history of discovery: The electric field was described by Michael Faraday in the nineteenth century, He dealt with, inter alia, the study of interactions between charges. He also discovered electromagnetic induction, which is the production of eddy current by changing the magnetic field around a coil. A great contribution to the study of electromagnetic interactions and the development of the theory in connection with this (electrodynamics) was done by James Clerk Maxwell. In his honor, the four basic equations of electrodynamics are called Maxwell's equations. It is believed that in some birds, the Earth's magnetic field is responsible for their orientation in space: it is thanks to this that the annual, seasonal flights of these birds to the same nesting sites despite the considerable distance is possible.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - the dynamic pattern of the electrostatic field as the source field: produced around a negative charge and a positive charge, - the dynamic pattern of the magnetic field as a rotating field: produced around the magnet, and the Earth. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. Animation Duration: 10 seconds each.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: ANTI-FRICTION TABLE

Objective: Showing the principles of momentum and the rules for its behavior and springy collisions (elastic). Scientific and educational value: Show is to observe simple experiments on the air table (providing movement with minimum friction). The basis of the difference in relation to the known shows e.g. in

88 school is the feasibility of collisions in two dimensions. Items that will take part in this experiment, are plastic discs of different mass.

Construction of Stations - technical description: Construction of the platform made of 10/10 or 20/20 mm steel. Platform hexagonal cross-section. Platform height: 40,00 cm. counter/top height of 12.00 cm and 58.00 cm side length. All measurements + / -10%. Station on the concrete floor mounted or fitted with adjustable legs or legs of steel + hard rubber in contact with the ground. Platform Coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Mounted on the platform should be a double thick top approximately 2.00 cm. the underside closed with a hole for airflow. Upside with perforated stainless steel sheet, like a grid lined with alcantara covering. The number and size of mesh perforations should be determined at the stage of final testing of the prototype so that it was possible to conduct experiments and obtain the desired effect. There should be a built-in timer switch for airflow on the top/counter. Deck should be enclosed along the entire circumference with a band of steel (stainless steel, 5.00 cm (thickness), 8.00 cm (H), powder-coated ,gray, gloss). On the periphery of top/counter "pockets" should be placed (bay) for discs. Rings should be made of lightweight plastic with hard grains, GR. min 1 mm, diameter100, 150, 200 mm. It is allowed to be placed inside each a RFID transmitter, or operating on a different system, impeding the taking away of discs from the Station. The platform should be installed with two quiet centrifugal fans, min. power. 1.3 kW each. The side walls of the platform – will obtain air by suppression. Ensure that periodical inspection be available to all elements of the Station.

Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, fig. AR 61 The Station is also indicated in the fig. AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.46. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of Stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: as the drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

ANTI-FRICTION TABLE INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Start the air table, by running the air blower (by pressing the button on the table). 2. Take two identical rings, put both on the table at a certain distance from each other. 3. Move one of them, setting it in motion with your hand and giving it a direction to hit the second. Try to hit exactly in the middle - let the track the of moving the ring pass through the center of the still ring. 4. For comparison: strike off center, targeting more "to the side". 5. Start one of the rings in slow motion, and then the second hit it, as before, in several different ways. 6. Repeat the experiment, using rings of different masses. What do you notice? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? As a result of elastic collisions two bodies interact with each other. The collision effect depends on the type of collision (central - means in the center, off center) and the mass and material of which both bodies are made of. If the rings are made of the same material and differ only in the mass, after the central collision ("the center") of the rings they will move on exactly the same line as before the collision, in addition they will, "exchange" speeds. When we use objects with different masses, then after the impact we will be able to see a change in the speed of the body struck.

The easiest way to see it is by using the air track / top / surface air (while reducing friction).

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [TS 2.57] - Projector + computer [pr 2.11]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

ANTI-FRICTION TABLE Law and physico-chemical phenomena: elastic collision, inelastic collision, momentum, friction

Fundamental commentary: With elastic collisions, everyone has to deal with every day (roughly speaking) - placing a book on the table, making steps and clapping hands. To thoroughly investigate them we reduce friction by using the airbag. Depending on the type of collision (central - means in the center, off center) and the mass and material of which are made up the colliding bodies with each other, the result is different. If all test bodies are made of the same material and differ only in the mass, after central collision they will continue moving in precisely the same line as before the collision, in addition, "they exchange" speeds. In a particular case where one of them is stationary before the collision, the second after hitting stops at the spot, and the first will move with second’s speed. When they collide off center (off center collision), the bodies "veer off" in different directions, depending on the area of collision. When you use bodies with different masses to experiment, after impact you will be able to see a change in the speed of the body struck. It will move more slowly, if its mass is greater than the weight, which struck it, and otherwise - faster. The movement of objects is called momentum. The momentum of the material is equal to the product of its mass and velocity. ITS direction and sense are consistent with the direction and speed of the return of the object.

Expanded commentary: Collisions are usually short-lived phenomena, resulting from the contact between two moving objects relative to each other. Elastic collisions (also known as flexible) is called a collision, which in the final state are the same objects as in the original (no distortion, collapse) and when their kinetic energy is retained. The collision in which kinetic energy is stored is called inelastic collision. After impact, the body is moving with the same speed as if they were a single object. Collisions that can be observed on a macroscopic scale, only after a close look can be considered as elastic, because a small amount of the energy is always lost, for example in the form of acoustic waves (sound colliding objects) or in the form of heat dissipation. In the analysis of such impacts, it is assumed that you can skip the interaction with other bodies and the principle of conservation of momentum will be fulfilled. The momentum of the material is equal to the product of its mass and velocity. Momentum is the size of the vector - the direction and sense are consistent with the direction and speed of the return of the object. The principle of conservation of momentum says that in an isolated system (i.e. one in which no forces or external forces are in balance) vector sum momenta of all elements remains constant. When two bodies of equal mass collide centrally (which is the case when the two move in a straight line), the direction of the final momentum will be maintained and the objects after the collision will be moving on the same line. If the masses are equal, then the

90 body "exchange their" speeds. When the tracks colliding bodies do not lie on one line, this is called a collision off center. In this case, the objects "veer off" in various directions, but still their vector sum is equal to the sum of momenta before collision.

Practical application: Elastic collisions (elastic) have a variety of practical applications. Collision of billiard balls can be considered close to flexible, because rolling friction on a pool table is very small. Similarly, in curling, where heavy granite stones gliding across the ice collide with each other. Based on the principle of conservation of momentum operate e.g. an aircraft propeller or boat propeller. Throwing out backwards- air (aircraft) or water (ship), they gain forward momentum. The principles of conservation of momentum is used in rocket engines and aircraft engines. Inside the engine combustion chamber an explosive mixture is burned, and the resulting gas stream with a large momentum is ejected through a nozzle at the rear of the missile or the piston moves in the vehicle engine. This results in a "kickback" aircraft (or missile member). If you are standing in a boat at near shore and you jump on land, you get momentum in the same direction of your jump. Thus, the boat is given momentum in the opposite direction, causing it to distance itself from the shore. To carefully examine the impact of bodies we reduce friction by using the airbag. Airbag technologies are used in conveyor belts, air tracks, and even icebreakers (ice fragments move away from the hull).

Trivia, history of discovery: The first attempts to formulate the principle of conservation of momentum can already be found in Descartes, although he had not yet formalized the concept of momentum. The concept of momentum was introduced to science by Isaac Newton (1643 - 1727), who formulated a policy to conserve it. The device, which illustrates the law of conservation of momentum and energy in elastic collisions of balls, is called Newton's cradle. In nature, the recoil force is used, for example, by some aquatic animals such as jellyfish, squid and octopus, which move in the water because of it. Quick movements, shrink the body, throwing back the water, so that they gain momentum in the opposite direction. During radioactive decay or nuclear reactions, emissions of particles from the nucleus, which results in a recoil of the atomic nucleus. Collision of galaxies that move around the Sun the comet, which is not bound by gravity in the solar system, but the path is deflected under the action of gravity, a phenomenon also regarded as a collision, even though it lasts infinitely longer than a collision, which can be seen every day.

Animations, Graphics: Are required animations and presentations in technology combined 2d-3d illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - Demonstrate the principles of elastic and inelastic collisions of bodies and the distribution of vector quantities. Requires own production, but also allowed licensed materials. The duration of the animation and presentation: 30 seconds. Requires fictionalized footage showing: - Operation of Newton's cradle, - Occurrence in nature (animate and inanimate) principle of conservation of momentum. The amount of time footage: about 120 seconds. Looped projection will take place at the Station - using the projector and screen. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: FREE FALL OF THE OBJECTS

Objective: Presentation of free fall time depending on body weight. Scientific and educational value: Free fall of bodies is one of the most frequently observed, of the basic physical phenomena, which are inspired to build the foundations of classical mechanics. On the other hand, daily observation of reality led to a false interpretation of this phenomenon and is today one of the major mistakes that shape false "physical intuition."

Construction of Station - technical description: Construction of the platform made of 10/10 or 20/20 mm steel. Platform dimensions: 220.00 cm (L) x 20.00 cm (W) x 75.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform Coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Station mounted on concrete floor. In the platform will be built two pumps to lower the pressure in the plexiglass pipes set up on the platform. On the top of platform should be built a rubber base to allow a tight fit, yet simple, laying of the pipes - the base should be tightly connected with the pumps. On the top or on a side wall of the platform should be built buttons to start the pumps and pressure indicators. The Station is to be equipped with two tubes made of plexiglas, diameter of about 8.00 cm and length of about 100, 00cm. The Station shall also be equipped with: two glass plates diameter of 10.00 cm (for covering pipes), two magnets, metal rings and pieces of paper - the material will be stored in a drawer on the platform. Using the Station can be taken care of by Center staff. Ensure that periodical inspection be available to all elements of the Station. Conceptual drawing of Stand: Volume II: element drawing, fig. AR 72 The Station is also indicated in the fig. AR 10 (Volume II: element drawing) symbol: M.2.47. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of Stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

FREE FALL OF THE OBJECTS INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Put one over the other: metal ring, paper, glass lid, magnet. Cover pipe outlet tightly with glass lid so that the magnet is at the top. 2. Remove the magnet from the glass cover. How do the metal ring and paper fall to the bottom of the tube? What falls faster? 3. Repeat step No. 1 4. Lower the pressure in the pipe by pressing a button on the table. Wait until the pressure gauge moves to the green zone. 5. Remove the magnet from the glass cover. How do the metal ring and paper fall to the bottom of the tube? What falls faster? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Intuition tells us that heavier bodies fall to the earth always slower than the lighter. Meanwhile, Galileo throwing various objects from the Leaning Tower of Pisa proved that the free-fall time of a body is not dependent on its mass.

Equipment and AV for the Station :

- LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [TS 2.58] - Projector + computer [pr 2.12]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

FREE FALL OF THE OBJECTS Law and physico-chemical phenomena: free fall of bodies, the force of gravity, vacuum, air resistance

Fundamental commentary: Free fall is motion caused only by the force of gravity. In the experiment, at the station the object is not thrown to the ground, but will be allowed it to fall by itself. The acceleration is the same for each object. However, the larger the weight, the greater the force (gravity) acts on the body. This means that, for example, a piece of metal, will be subjected to more force of more value than paper. However, during the fall, there is a resistance force caused by "pushing up" the object by air molecules. Air resistance depends largely on the speed of the body (the faster something moves, it encounters more resistance). A falling piece of paper does not deal well with overcoming air molecules, which is why resistance force grows rapidly braking its movement. More massive objects, of a more compact shape (piece of metal), better overcome air resistance and thus resistance force increases more slowly - hence the difference in time of fall in the air. Net force acting on the object plays a key role, the higher it is, means that the acceleration, the body achieves is close to the value of acceleration of gravity. When the experiment is performed in a vacuum objects do not encounter resistance and fall with the same acceleration, for the time of their fall is the same.

Expanded commentary: More weight means more gravity value - these values are proportional, due to Newton's second law: F = m * a where "a" is a constant for a given set of acceleration. In this case, it relates to the Earth and is about 9.8 m/m2 (depending on the location and direction of fall). This weight is called the inert mass. Its size determines how the body copes with the resistance movement - in this case, the air molecules. Air resistance depends largely on the speed of the body (specifically from the square: v2), which means that the faster something moves the larger the resistance it encounters. Everyone can feel this effect when riding fast on a bike, especially on a windy day. The faster you go, the more power needs to be put into pedaling. Items with small inertial mass, like a piece of paper, cope weakly with resistance movement, they break rapidly ( they experience retarded motion). At some point, resistance force is large enough that it balances the force of gravity. Determined then is the maximum speed of a falling body, the so-called velocity limit. More massive objects better overcome resistance to motion, which means they do not manage to achieve this speed - the force of gravity at all times may be greater than the force of resistance in their case. The resultant force acting on an object determines the acceleration with which the body is moving. The acceleration values are constantly changing depending on the resistance. The higher the resultant, the closer the acceleration value will be to the value of the acceleration of gravity. In the case of vacuum resultant force is simply the force of gravity. The acceleration of each body is the same.

Practical application: We have free fall whenever we drop something . However, in this situation, there can be seen a number of elements specific to that type of movement. However, it is well- illustrated by the parachutist from a plane. The jumper uses the phenomenon of free fall and the so-called velocity limit. The smaller the area, and the greater the weight, the

93 faster he falls. If he falls backwards, he will fall more slowly than if he remained upright. This is because the maximum possible speed (limit) in this case is smaller. Despite constant weight , sufficient only is the alignment of the body, to change the speed of fall. It is due to air resistance, it is possible to effectively use the parachute, because it slows down the flight of the jumper (among others. by increasing the surface impact by of the jumper with air). Birds of prey "dive", if they want to hunt prey by keeping their wings close to the body, in such a way as to minimize air resistance. Air resistance is the enemy of all the constructors of vehicles, including cars. The better the car handles resistance movement, the less fuel consumed and reaches higher speeds.

Trivia, history of discovery: The fact that every object on Earth, regardless of the weight falls freely with the same acceleration, was showed by Galileo, according to the biography written by his pupil Vincenzo Viviani, in 1600, he dropped items from the Leaning Tower of Pisa. Free fall is closely linked with the principles of Newton, in Principia Mathematica, published in 1697. According to the first principle of dynamics: if on a body no force is applied or forces are balanced, the body is at rest or moves in a rectilinear uniform motion. The first rule introduces the concept of inertia: it is the ability of objects to resist any change of motion (a measure of the inertia of the body is its mass). The second rule expresses the relationship between acceleration, force and mass. According to it the speed of a moving body is proportional to the applied force. The third principle of dynamics implies that the impact of bodies are always reciprocal: the strength of interaction of two bodies share the same values, the same direction, opposite directions and different application points.

Weightlessness has its origin in free fall. The force acting on each body is called the weight. And the weight of the body is a measure of the impact with the ground. Each body is composed of atoms, and when added in the atomic weight of each of them will receive a weight. It is a constant for each place. Weight on the other hand depends on the speed (hence the question that an object on the moon would weigh six times less). In zero gravity, which is caused by free fall, the body does not weigh anything - does not interact with the substrate which means it is weightless. Astronauts located in the orbiting around the Earth space station also fall freely! This is a fall in the direction of our planet, however, they are moving perpendicular to the direction of the fall at high speed, thereby maintaining the proper height. Physicists under the concept of the mass distinguish between two types - the inertial mass (measure of inertia associated with Newton's second law, F = m * a) and gravitational mass (related to the law of universal gravitation, F = G * (M * m/r2). inertial mass relates to the inertia of the body which measures the speed change under the influence of an applied force. Nevertheless, both the above-mentioned weighTS are equal (as is clear from the experiment), despite the fact that classical mechanics deals with the physics of motion it does not explain why. The force of gravity is different in different places, for example in Łódź it is ≈ 9.81 m/s2.

Animations, graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - To show how different bodies behave during free fall. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The duration of the animation: 20 seconds. Required is a fictionalized film with elements of animation showing: - Galileo's legendary experiment at the Leaning Tower of Pisa. The amount of footage: about 120 seconds. Looped projection will take place at the Station - using projector and screen.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: AERODYNAMICS – LIFT POWER

Objective: Presentation of lift (force). Scientific and educational value: With experience you can tell why the plane flies and see what is lift and on what it depends.

Construction of Station - technical description: Construction of the platform is made of 10/10 mm, 20/20, 40/40 mm steel. Platform dimensions: 350.00 cm (L) x 100.00 cm (W) x 80.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Additional platform is required as a base for the fan. Platform Coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Station on the concrete floor mounted or fitted with adjustable legs or legs of steel + hard rubber in contact with the Ground. Next to platform should be mounted an industrial fan that blows a linear air flow to the Station. The station top should be covered with transparent plexiglass. 0.70 cm (plate size: 300,00 x50, 00cm, 100,00 x50, 00cm - all dimensions + / -10%). Approx. 70.00 cm from the edge of the blower should be installed an air velocity meter (LCD display with built-in battery). During final testing of prototypes, it should be set in such a place where there is little possibility to impair airflow. Approx. 200.00 cm from the edge of the blower should be mounted a guide bar (Φ3 tube, 00cm, stainless steel), and on it the model of a wing, in such a way that it was possible to change both the angle of the wing and the wing movement in the direction: up - down. The guide bar, which is attached to the side of the model is to be suspended from spring dynamometers (2.00 units, each with a battery), protruding outside the chamber, showing the weight of the model on the LCD screen. End of the tunnel should be obscured by a safety and dissipating net for the stream coming out of the air tunnel (stainless steel, GR. 2-3 mm, bolted to steel brackeTS rigidly attached to the platform). In the housing of the station must be installed a push button activating the fan with the timer set for about 20 seconds Ensure that periodical inspection should be available to all elemenTS of the station. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, fig. AR 65 The Station is also indicated in the fig. AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.29. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of Stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

AERODYNAMICS – LIFT POWER INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Start the fan with push button. 2. How does the location of the wing change when you change the angle of the wing? 3. How do the values of the forces acting on the wing change (read carefully the display on the dynamometer and indicator of air stream speed)? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING?

Depending on the angle of the wing relative to the air stream the lift of the wing increases or decreases. Increasing the angle increases lift and raising of the wings. The higher the lift, the better you can take advantage of wind power.

Equipment and AV for the station : - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [TS 2.38] - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 5 sets. [TS 2.33, 2.34 TS, TS 2.35, 2.36 TS, TS 2.37] - Projector + computer [pr 2.05]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

AERODYNAMICS – LIFT Law and physico-chemical phenomena: lift force, Newton's second law, Newton's third law, the law of Bernoulli

Fundamental commentary: The lifting force is the force acting on the body moving in a fluid (fluids physics are called gases and liquids). The lifting force is perpendicular to the direction of movement. The body acts on fluid when a proportional force is applied according to Newton's second law. The liquid in the reaction exerts a flow on a body with a force of equal value, but opposite direction - according to Newton's third principle. The most common example is the lift of an aircraft wing. Lifting force acts e.g. on the wings and tail of a plane, the propeller blades or rotors of a helicopter, sail of a boat, the rudder, keel or sword, the blade turbines and compressors. It also works on flying missiles and rockets. Additional 'wings' of racing cars, producing a lifting force downward, causing increased pressure on the roadway, thus increasing traction. Lifting force is sometimes a detrimental factor and you need to take special steps to avoid its impact. For example, roofs and chimneys are subjected to lift. In areas where there are strong winds, roofs and chimneys are designed in such a way as to prevent the formation of lift, because it can lead to construction disaster.

Expanded commentary: The lifting force is caused when the body moving relative to the fluid changes the total amount of momentum of the fluid surrounding the body in the direction proportional to the movement. The body reacts when the fluid force prescribed by the second law of dynamics is applied. The liquid in the reaction exerts a flow on a body with a force of equal value, but opposite direction ( third law of dynamics). This force is directly the result of pressure on the surface of the body. These pressures from the movement are different for different points of the surface of the wing, and the lift force is the resultant of all the elementary forces, resulting from the exettion of pressure on the corresponding elements of the body surface. This force can be calculated using the formula: F = C_z ρS V ^ 2/2 where: S - the area of the wing, V - velocity, ρ - density of the fluid, Cz - lift coefficient [C_Z = 2m (α-α_0], where m - coefficient depending on the profile of the wing, α - angle of attack, α0 - angle of attack at which the lift is "0 N". Often the reason for lift is explained as the elements of fluid mechanics - according to the Bernoulli principle. The difference in pressure creates lift on the false premise that the respective molecules moving above and below the flap must meet behind the flap. As a result of convexity of the upper part of the flap they have to go a long way - the flow velocity of the upper part of the flap is greater than the bottom. Greater speed must

96 match the lower pressure. The difference in pressure creates lift. In fact, the molecules that are next to each other in front of the flap, do not meet behind it. Attempts to calculate the lift in such a way that leads to results contrary with reality. According to this theory, the lift force depends only on the shape of the wings, and not on the angle of attack, which is inconsistent with the experiment. The experiment with a the airplane flying inverted when the lift "should" act in the opposite direction than "normal" is impossible to carry out.

Practical application: When driving a car on the highway the car’s body work is affected by lift force acting up and trying to lift the vehicle away from the surface. You can feel its effects, if you put your hand out the window and will change their position in relation to the moving car. If the hand is positioned almost parallel to the road, you can feel the lift force is trying to lift it up or down (depending on the minor changes of the angle). To counteract this effect, which can cause serious accidents, cars have mounted spoilers, with the task of creating the lift force acting down and pressing the vehicle to the ground.

Trivia, history of discovery: The first successful flight of a machine heavier than air (glider) was performed in 1904, by English engineer George Cayley. During tests, and many attempts with kites he showed that the elevation of a human in the air depends on the need of a proper lift. In 1853, he built a full-scale glider, which along with a passenger performed the first flight. Another well-known designer and test pilot Otto Lilienthal was a German author who published in 1889 the book "Flight of the bird as a basis for art the of flying". Lilienthal was the author of 18 flying machine projects. The first controlled flight "motor apparatus" (aircraft) took place in 1903 in Kitty Hawk (USA) and was performed by two brothers: Orvill and Wilbur Wright. This 40-meter flight a biplane was revolutionary for the development of aviation. Since that time the designers have managed to build machines with record-breaking speeds, even several times in excess of the speed of sound. One of the biggest is the Antonov 225 aircraft, designed in the Soviet Union. It is so GReat that the Wright brothers' flight could take place in the interior (taking into account such distance and the height at which the first aircraft in history flew). Antonov 225 is now used to transport large loads. It is also adapted to carry a shuttle (Buran) on its back.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - performance and change in the magnitude of lift, depending on the angle of the body. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. Animation Duration: 10 seconds each.

As a summary of the issues related to aerodynamics and hydrodynamics are required animations and videos that projection will take place on entering this zone on five monitors with touch pads and on the screen using the projector. Required animations are prepared in combined 2d-3d technology. Fiction films, documentaries, using archival materials are required. Required topics: - The use of research results in the design of vehicles, ships, aircraft, - research in wind tunnels, - the fastest cars, - deep sea explorers (studies using bathyscaph) - the largest and fastest submarines - aviation pioneers, the flight of the Wright brothers , - the biggest and the fastest airplanes - records of machines: speed, height, depth. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

This material should have a total length of 20 minutes.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: THE DOPPLER EFFECT FOR LIGHT Objective: Presentation of the Doppler effect for the light. Scientific and educational value: The Doppler effect is much better known for the sound waves, but not everyone knows that it is also for the light. The presentation of this phenomenon will take the form of a multimedia presentation: it is not an experiment station.

Technical description of the Stand: For presentation purposes a darkened exhibition space should be isolated: the projection wheels (diameter: 300.00 cm, height at the highest point: 400.00 cm - all dimensions: + / -15%). The ceiling should be made as a dome. Sub-construction - steel profiles system: two- sided g.-k cover plates . with the exception of area (wall space) needed for the projection. The projection plane will create back projection. Along the wall near the floor line should be mounted lights (LED tubes) forming a bloom effect. Side walls not intended for projection should be covered with vinyl printing: A “bird’s eye” night panorama of Łódź. A sliding door with an arch to suit the walls of the dome ,with roller mechanism and moving on steel bridge rails should be installed. The dome painted in dark blue. On the floor: certified hygienic carpet, non flammable, colored dark green. In the center of the room should be mounted a pipe (steel, powder-coated, matte, height 250.00 cm) which is a rack for projectors and cable and computer routes simultaneously .The pipe is a rack and at the same time a place for the light source at the summit, shielded with a perforated diaphragm, the light will imitate the of map of the heavens/cosmos (as an alternative/ LED lighting may be placed on the dome). In the room will be seats - puffs in the shape of stars (6.00 pc). Conceptual drawing of Stand: Volume II: Element drawing, fig. AR 68 Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of Stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Equipment and AV for the Station : - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [TS 2.18], placed on the outside of the Station (beyond the barrier) - Projector + computer: 4 pcs. [Pr 2.01 pr 2.02 pr 2.03 pr 2.04] - speakers. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

As multimedia content for projection using a projector is required to prepare animation in a combined 2d-3d technique to illustrate the text: 1: Why is the night sky dark? Is it just that the sun isn’t shining on the half of the Earth, where you are located? Or maybe the explanation is quite different.. 2: We think that the sky is dark at night. During the day, when the weather is nice and the clouds do not interfere with the observation of the sky above us seems to be a beautiful blue color. This is because the sunlight is scattered in the Earth's atmosphere. If our planet was devoid of the gas shell, the sky would overtly seen as a black abyss - as it appears, for example, on the moon - even when the sun shines there. Therefore, we should rephrase the question: why is the cosmos is dark?

3: Space is full of stars. Teeming with stars, which are after all very bright - sometimes even brighter than our Sun. In an infinite, eternal universe, no matter which way we look, we should always see a star. Looking for some directions, we find the stars that are very close to us, turning our gaze elsewhere, we will have to look very far - but we always find a star or a cluster of them. So, the sky should be as bright as the sun - both day and night! And if not, does that mean that at some distance from us there is a limit at which stars and galaxies just end? Some extremity of the universe, after which there is no longer anything? 4: Evidence suggests that the universe as we know, has no limit. Instead, consider the time. The universe is not eternal – it has a beginning in time. The age of the universe is currently estimated at about 13.7 billion years (13.7 • 109). This means that the light from very, very distant stars did not have enough time to reach us. And this despite the fact that the speed of light is extremely high - in a vacuum it is 299 792 458 m / s Yes, almost 300 million m / s! You can also look at it this way. When we turn our telescopes towards the really far reaches of the universe, we see them in the state they were in when the light was emitted from there. We will get in this way to the places where there was still stars, which light we see. But that's not the only reason why a significant section of the night sky seems to be dark. 5: The universe is constantly expanding. This means that distant stars and galaxies are still moving farther away from us. In wave optics light is perceived as an electromagnetic wave. The star is the source of the wave. If the source - the observed star – is moving away from us, the length the new wave coming to us increases. This phenomenon is called the Doppler effect. The GReatest length of visible light is red - hence the name of the observed effect of light: red shift. When the stars are really far away and moving away from us very quickly, they seem to be more and more red. At the end of the emitted wave length it goes beyond the scale of the visibility and turns into infrared . And if we cannot observe them. Therefore telescopes to take pictures of distant stars, work in infrared. That's why we think the cosmos is dark.

Requires own production. Animation Duration: 15 minutes.

Beyond the area a monitor will be placed with touch pad [TS 2.18]. The user interface should allow access / select the following content:

THE DOPPLER EFFECT What is?

The Doppler effect is the change in frequency of a wave (or other periodic event) for an observer moving relative to its source. It is commonly heard when a vehicle sounding a siren or horn approaches, passes, and recedes from an observer. The received frequency is higher (compared to the emitted frequency) during the approach, it is identical at the instant of passing by, and it is lower during the recession. The relative changes in frequency can be explained as follows. When the source of the waves is moving toward the observer, each successive wave crest is emitted from a position closer to the observer than the previous wave. Therefore each wave takes slightly less time to reach the observer than the previous wave. Therefore the time between the arrival of successive wave crests at the observer is reduced, causing an increase in the frequency. While they are travelling, the distance between successive wave fronts is reduced; so the waves "bunch together". Conversely, if the source of

99 waves is moving away from the observer, each wave is emitted from a position farther from the observer than the previous wave, so the arrival time between successive waves is increased, reducing the frequency. The distance between successive wave fronts is increased, so the waves "spread out". For waves that propagate in a medium, such as sound waves, the velocity of the observer and of the source are relative to the medium in which the waves are transmitted.

The discovery and application: This effect was first described in 1842, by Christian Andreas Doppler: he observed it as a change in the color of light under the influence of movement in the system of double stars. The Doppler effect is used to determine the speed of zooming wave sources. The measurement measures the time required for a wave traveling a path from the source to the observer and the observer to the source. The test body is treated first as a receiver of waves, then as a sender of waves. The Doppler effect for radio waves is based on the Doppler radar principle. Doppler weather radars used for observing and forecasting the weather, measure and compare the movement of clouds and air. Thanks to these measurements we can predict storms and tornadoes.

Relativistic Doppler effect: The effect of changing the frequency of light is called the relativistic Doppler effect. If the source and recorder wave move relative to each other, there is a time dilation resulting from the special theory of relativity. Time dilation phenomenon in the measurement of time differences transactions carried out simultaneously in two different reference systems, one of which moves relative to the other. The measurement relates to the duration of the same phenomenon. Time dilation predicted the special theory of relativity, by Albert Einstein, and it has been confirmed experimentally (confirmed the validity of Einstein's theory.) According to the general theory of relativity,measurements of various quantities are relative to the velocities of observers. In particular, space and time can dilate . Atoms of the light emitting surface of the sun sending waves that can be received on the Earth have a lower frequency than is the case with the same atoms studied in the laboratory. General relativity describes the phenomenon of time dilation near a large mass. In general relativity, it is assumed that gravity is the result of the curvature of spacetime around a mass. The rate of passage of time in a so-called. inertial reference system is fixed, and the slowing of time at the surface of low-mass planets, rotating at a constant speed is impossible to determine. Time dilation can be determined only at the large, concentrated masses and velocities close to the speed of light.

Escape to the infrared. The Doppler effect in astronomy: Almost all observable galaxies are red-shifted (towards GReater wavelengths). The farther away a galaxy is from Earth, the more its light in the visible range is red, i.e. shifted to larger wavelengths. On this basis, by analogy with the Doppler law, it is believed that the universe is expanding: in all directions, even more. Starlight characterize the spectral lines: depending on contained therein atoms. These atoms emit electromagnetic waves that "lengthen" with space. For example, when in a distant galaxy supernova explodes, its light may need several billion years to reach Earth. At that time, the space its waves traverse, is expanding, increasing their length. The further the supernova, the larger the difference between wavelength recorded on the earth, and the message sent by the source. The change in frequency or wavelength concludes by comparing the position of the characteristic spectral lines with the spectrum recorded on Earth. If the star is moving

100 away from the observer, all the spectral lines are shifted toward the red (to the waves of greater length). Starting from these observations, and the theory that the universe’s expansion is accelerating even more than before and that today it is continually expanding, it can be hypothesized that the universe was confined to an even smaller space a long time ago. The so-called. The Big Bang caused a rapid "growth" of the universe. This phenomenon of shifting to the infrared spectra by galaxies was observed for the first time in 1929, by the American astronomer Edwin Hubble and interpreted it as an escape (moving away) of galaxies. Until the mid 1960s, the Big Bang hypothesis (Big Bang) coexisted with the hypothesis of the stationary state (Steady State) - the eternal, unchanging universe. To confirm the big bang theory as true is attributed to Arno Penzias and Robert Wilson of Bell Telephone Laboratories discovery of residual traces of radiation – (cosmic microwave background radiation) predicted theory of residue after the Big Bang. Residual radiation (relic) is the trace of energy, which almost evenly fills the entire observable universe, and corresponds to a temperature of about 3 degrees Kelvin (or above absolute zero, or about minus 273 degrees Celsius). The "hum" of the radiation which uniformly fills space, is interpreted as an offset radiation produced during the Big Bang. Thanks to the Doppler effect several extrasolar planetary systems have been discovered. If a star creates a gravitationally bound system with another object (such as a planet) then the two bodies orbit a common center of mass. Measurements of displacement of spectral lines of some stars have shown that the planets orbit it. In this way, hundreds of giant planets have been discovered outside our solar system. Based on the movement of the stars we cannot just conclude if there are planetary systems around stars. We can also calculate the mass of the system: star - planet.

Animation / presentation in a mixed technique of 2d-3d are required to present: - The essence of the Doppler effect for the light, - Spectral redshift galaxies. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The duration of the animation: 20 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

GROUP OF STATIONS: SPEED OF SOUND

Objective: Measurement of acoustic wave velocity and demonstration of the effect of the accompanying shock wave when the speed of sound is exceeded. Scientific and educational value: Exceeding the speed (barrier) of sound is one of the most spectacular, but less understood sound effects. While the sound of a passing plane is identified by exceeding the sound barrier, a "crack" of the whip is no longer associated with this phenomenon.

Station A: SPEED OF SOUND – ARTISTIC INSTALLATION Construction of Stations - technical description: The installation is intended to allow observation: - Different times of sound propagation based on the medium carrying the sound waves - Weakening of the sound wave with increasing distance. Installation should be made of colorful plastic pipes. The Station should be made as an artistic installation while maintaining the functions necessary to perform the planned experiment. Ensure to achieve the desired acoustic level effect: The user should notice that the sound travels through the air faster than in a "labyrinth" of pipes. Inside the

101 installation, depending on the need, an audio amplifier should be mounted. It must be assumed that the Station needs to be equipped with headphones, microphone and speakers. Pipes should be fixed to the wall so as to allow convenient, uninterrupted listening for at least two people. The amount and type of material should be selected at the stage of final testing of prototypes. On the floor, in a permanent, visible and easily recognizable way, should be marked the place (sticker in, fluorescent-colored in stark contrast and cut off from the color of the rest of the floor), on which the user will stand when performing the experiment. Conceptual drawing of Stations: Volume II: Element drawing, fig. AR 52 The Station is also indicated in the fig. AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.40. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of Stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate: SPEED OF SOUND INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Stand in the place marked with "X". 2. Say something to the pipe at the same time, and next to it. Can you hear the difference in time, which is between the sound "leaving" the pipe, and "in the air"? Do you see the difference in the intensity of the sound? 3. Repeat the experiment with a friend, parent: One of you speak, the other listens. Do you see the difference in time which is between the noise "leaving" the tube, and "from the air"? Do you see the difference in the intensity of the sound? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? The speed of sound depends on the area (from the center) in which it propagates. If the sound gets into a reasonably long maze, from which it cannot escape, you can see the "delay". With the increase in the distance the sound travels, its intensity decreases.

Equipment and AV for the Station : - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [TS 2.49] - Monitors 23'' + computer; 3 sets. [mn 2.11 mn 2.12 mn 2.13]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

SPEED OF SOUND Law and physico-chemical phenomena: sound waves, speed of sound

Fundamental commentary: Sound is defined by an acoustic wave, which is formed by disruption of a medium. For example, clapping sends a sound wave that travels through the air. The basic values that describe such a wave is frequency (determines the sound pitch) and amplitude (determines the intensity volume ). Acoustic waves propagate always in a medium (unlike electromagnetic waves, such as light, which spread in the absence of the medium). Media in which sound can move, are elastic media such as solids, liquid, gas. The speed of sound is different in different media. Sound waves coming out from a sound source decreases with the increasing the distance from the source.

102

Expanded commentary: Physicists define the sound source as a mechanical disruption of a medium. This may be e.g., a clap of hands in the air. This disruption is spreading all around, in the form of a wave, talk of the sound wave. It can reach the ears thus creating a feeling of hearing. One of the important characteristics of a sound wave is its frequency, which is linked closely to the amount of sound. The unit of frequency is Hertz (Hz). If the wave again reaches its highest point, after one second, we are talking then of one Hertz (1 Hz). The amplitude of the sound wave is the distance between the lowest and the highest point of the sound curve. Acoustic waves propagate always in a medium (unlike electromagnetic waves, such as light, which spread in the absence of the medium). Media in which sound can move, are elastic media such as solids, liquid, gas. The speed of sound is different in different media. Sound waves coming out from a sound source decreases with the increasing distance from the source. Weakening it depends on the directional properties of the source and of the environment in which the wave is spreading. Sound intensity is inversely proportional to the square of the distance from the source. Doubling of the distance from the source then corresponds to a fourfold decrease in volume.

Practical application: Issues connected with sounds are not associated only with culture (music, vocals), but also many other areas of life, such as automotive, health, and even transportation. In the construction industry, to protect people from excessive noise, are used. sound- absorbing material, i.e. not allowing sound waves to bounce from one angle. This material acts like a classic breakwater- that breaks the waves of the sea.

Trivia, history of discovery: Sound intensity decreases rapidly with distance. Scientifically, sound was already dealt with by Pythagoras, who rightly sought a mathematical relationships in music. Using a tense string he searched for a harmonious balance between sounds. Appropriate sounds have been assigned to planets, creating a. harmony of the spheres. The first sound recording was made in 1860 by Édouard-Léon Scott de Martinville using phonautograph.

Animations, Graphics: Animation / presentation in mixed 2d-3d technique are required to present: - Dependence of propagation of sound waves on the medium in which it propagates, - A decrease in sound intensity with distance. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The total duration of the animation: 30 seconds. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

It is further required to prepare an animation / presentation in mixed, 2d-3d technique and live action film with elements of animation, featuring: - The formation and propagation of sound waves, - The division of acoustic waves due to frequency, - Ghost Wave: simple sounds, harmonic sounds, noise ratio, noise. The required duration of this material: about 10 minutes. Looped projection of these materials (animations, videos) will take place at the Station - using three monitors [mn 2.11 mn 2.12 mn 2.13].

Station B: THE PHYSICS OF CRACKING WHIP

103

Construction of Stations- technical description: The Station requires an separate room in the exhibition area: separation for a circular projection 450.00 cm in diameter, with a height of 250.00 cm - all dimensions: + / - 10%. Construction of the separation: steel profiles 50/50 mm or 60/60 mm, painted (color - like housing: grid). Housing construction: mesh or perforated sheet allows safe observation of the interior, color silver. Spacing and size of perforation of mesh / mesh should be fixed at the stage of final testing of prototypes, in such a way as to ensure the safety of Users and spectators. The entrance to the room: sliding doors, arched, rollers on the rails of steel, construction of steel, lining: mesh or perforated sheet. In the room on the floor, in a permanent, visible and easily recognizable way, should be marked the place (sticker in, fluorescent-colored in stark contrast and cut off from the color of the rest of the floor), on which the user will stand when performing the experiment. Equipment of Stand: whip. Length of the whip, the flexibility and the material should be selected during the final stage of testing prototypes in such a way to make it possible to carry out the experiment and the achievement of the objective of the experimental effect. Conceptual drawing of Stand: Volume II: Element drawing, fig. AR 43 The Station is also indicated in the fig. AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.37. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of Stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate: SPEED OF SOUND INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Take the whip. Make sure you are alone in the room. 2. Take a wide swing and try to crack the whip. 3. If you hear a distinctive sound, it means that the tip of the whip exceeds the speed of 1 Mach (speed of sound). WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Sonic boom is the sound crossing the sound barrier. Despite the fact that the speed of this seems to be impossible to cross for a mere mortal, yet everyone is able to do so. The end of the whip moves faster than sound, as evidenced by the thunderous noise heard.

Equipment and AV for the Stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.46]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

SPEED OF SOUND Law and physico-chemical phenomena: sound waves, thunder sound, speed of sound, sound barrier, shock wave Fundamental commentary: Sound is defined by an acoustic wave, which is formed by disruption of a medium. Acoustic waves propagate always in a medium (unlike electromagnetic waves, such as light, which spreads in the absence of the medium). The speed of sound is different in different media. In air, at 15 ° C, the velocity of sound is equal to 340.3 m / s ≈ 1225 km / h This rate varies as the air parameters change.

104

Sound barrier is a term referring to the phenomena that occur when flying close to the speed of sound.

Expanded commentary: Acoustic waves propagate always in a medium (other than electromagnetic waves that propagate without a medium). The speed of sound is different in different media. In air, at 15 ° C, the velocity of sound is equal to 340.3 m / s ≈ 1225 km / h This rate varies as the air parameters change. Sonic boom is a sound effect accompanying the propagation of the shock wave. It is produced by an object moving at supersonic speed, explosion or lightning. Sound barrier is a term referring to the phenomena that occur when flying close to the speed of sound. At a speed exactly equal to the speed of sound there is nothing unusual, and in particular does not arise sonic boom. Strong sound waves heard as thunder, sometimes erroneously are called shockwaves. Meanwhile, shock waves are formed during a strong explosion, of body movement at supersonic speed. The shock wave propagate and quickly disappears, causing a temperature rise in the medium of propagation (eg, air). After releasing the subsonic speed becomes a simple sound wave of large amplitude. The air intense transit shock wave at a short distance from the source accompanies production of a characteristic haze due to condensation of water: cloud Prandtl-Glauerta.

Trivia: Sonic boom that occurs beyond the speed of sound, is one of the reasons why commercial supersonic aircraft (except Concorde) did not gain popularity. The speed of sound in air is 340.3 m / s (1225km / h), and e.g. of diamond 18000m / s Name of the speed of sound "mach" is named after the Austrian physicist Ernst Mach.

Animations, Graphics: Preparation of a film with elements of animation in mixed 2d-3d technique is required to present: - The emergence of the Prandtl-Glauerta cloud behind an aircraft. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The total duration of the animation: 20 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

Station C: THE DOPPLER EFFECT - SOUND Construction of Station - technical description: The Station consists of a track - rail (steel profile) attached with spacers to the ceiling, a length of about 50.00 meters (+ / -15%). On such a prepared track will move a trolley on wheels with a speaker, from which will flow a signal (sound) of one fixed frequency. Trolley power - electric. Set: trolley + speaker also can be equipped with a strobe. The frequency of the signal and the speed of the trolley must be selected during the final stage of testing prototypes. In the room on the floor, in a permanent, visible and easily recognizable way, should be marked the place (sticker in, fluorescent-colored in stark contrast and cut off from the color of the rest of the floor), on which the user will stand when performing the experiment. Conceptual drawing of Stand: Volume II: Element drawing, fig. AR 45 The Station is also indicated in the fig. AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.43. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of Stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

105

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: as the drawing). Text to be placed on plate: SPEED OF SOUND INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Be stationary and observe moving speaker. 2. What is the impact on the signal strength and the distance? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Everyday we can observe the siren of an ambulance driven through an adjacent street, first it is high (when it is far away from us), and then gradually decreases (when the ambulance is approaching us.) We are dealing with the Doppler effect - the phenomenon observed for the waves. It depends on the formation of the difference in wave frequency sent by the source and recorded by the observer. For waves propagating in the medium, including sound waves, the effect depends on the speed of the observer and the source of the medium in which these waves propagate. When the source emits a wave all the time with the same frequency without moving, the distance between successive crests of the wave is the same in all directions. When the sound source is moving the distance between successive crests is dependent on the direction of wave propagation. The stationary observer can receive a wave of a different frequency than it is emitted.

For the Station no AV equipment is provided.

Station D: WAVES Construction of Station - technical description: Construction of platform made of 10/10 or 20/20 mm steel. Platform dimensions: 400.00 cm (L) x 88.00 cm (W) x 120.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform Coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated ,gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs or legs of steel + hard rubber in contact with the ground. The platform will be placed a glass tank with water dimensions: 300.00 cm (L) x 80.00 cm (W) x 50.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Installation should be made of hardened safety glass. During final testing of prototypes, and prior to the implementation should be chosen, by calculating the stress and strain rates, the appropriate glass thickness and manner of joining the panels. In the tank must be fitted, a mechanism consisting of a needle, which is mounted an electric ram (movement: up - down) with frequency regulation. The purpose of ram is hitting the surface of the liquid, depending on the selected settings. The platform should have a built in pump to circulate the water and the water tank (water circuit). The mechanism of the needle and the flow of liquid should be chosen at the stage of final testing of prototypes, so that visitors can adjust the frequency of strokes required to produce the desired effect of the experiment. The Station should be fitted with water (supply, sanitation). Ensure that periodical inspection should be available to all elements of the Station. Conceptual drawing of Stand: Volume II: Element drawing, fig. AR 71 The Station is also indicated in the fig. AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.38. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of Stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

106

WAVES: INSTRUCTIONS: 1. With the ram provoke ripples in the water. 2. Change the frequency of the ram. Does changing the frequency has an impact on the behavior of the wave? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? At the point of contact of liquid with the air surface tension is formed, which causes the liquid surface to act like a resilient membrane. With the ram you can cause a wave. Waves propagated in the water are a good illustration (analogy) of mechanical waves (eg sound) - invisible to humans.

Equipment and AV for the Stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.47]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

WAVES: Commentary: Waves propagated in the water are a good illustration (analogy) of acoustic waves - invisible to humans. A wave is a disturbance propagating in a medium or through space. Sound is defined by an acoustic wave, which is formed by disruption of the medium. This disorder is spreading all around, in the form of a wave, talking about sound wave. For example, clapping sends a sound wave that travels in the air. The energy source of the acoustic wave is the oscillator (audio source). Acoustic waves always propagate in a medium - unlike electromagnetic waves (eg light) that spread without the medium. Acoustic waves can propagate in solids, liquids and gases. The acoustic wave of liquids and gases is a longitudinal wave, the solids may be either a longitudinal wave or a lateral. The acoustic waves cannot propagate in a vacuum. The level of intensity of the acoustic wave are expressed in bels [B] or decibels [dB]. Basic values that describe a wave are frequency (determines the sound pitch) and amplitude (determines the intensity volume). One of the important characteristics of a sound wave is its frequency, which is linked closely to the amount of sound (the higher the frequency, the sound is higher). The unit of frequency is Hertz (Hz). If the wave again reaches its highest point, after one second, it is called one Hertzu (1 Hz). The amplitude of the sound wave is the distance between the lowest and the highest point of the sound curve. Directly related to the intensity of the sound. Doppler effect is a phenomenon of changes in frequency of the sound that is heard when the source is moving. When it nears the listener, it increases its frequency when it moves away the frequency decreases. When the source emits a wave continually with the same frequency and is motionless, the distance between successive crests of the wave is the same in all directions.

Disruptions of the medium and wave formation should not be confused with the concept of the shock wave. The shock waves are formed during a strong explosion, of body movement at supersonic speed. The shock wave propagated quickly disappears, causing a temperature rise in the medium of propagation (eg, air).

Animations, Graphics:

107

Required to prepare is a mixed technique of animation in 2d-3d presenting: - The wave nature of mechanical waves, - The generation and propagation of acoustic waves in the medium. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The total duration of the animation: 60 seconds. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

Station E: ACOUSTIC ANALYSIS OF SOUND Construction of station - technical description: The station requires a separate room in the exhibition area: separation for a circular projection 320.00 cm in diameter, with a height of 250.00 cm - all dimensions: + / - 10%. Construction of the separation: steel profiles 50/50 mm or 60/60 mm. Housing construction from the outside: plasterboard plate, THK. 0,80-1,20 cm. From the inside: plate bent laminated THK. 0,80-1,20 cm, clad with sound-absorbing material. The entrance to the room: sliding doors, arched, rollers on rails of steel, construction steel, lining: wood or plasterboard plate. In walls of the room must be incorporated four speakers of 50W each. On the opposite side of the entrance should be prepared the station to analyze the sound spectrum. The station is to be equipped with a microphone, decibel meter. Apparatus will make it possible to define the composition of the sound frequency. The Fourier transform will be assumed ss a basic method of analysis. The analyzer will display the frequency spectrum on the screen. Along with the apparatus the orderer is to provide instruction manual and warranty documents. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 42 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.42. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Using the analyzer can be under the supervision of staff. Individual use of multimedia content will be prepared for the station.

Equipment and AV for station : - LCD 21.5 "with touch pad + komputer4, 4 pcs. [ts 2.51, ts 2.52 ts 2.53, ts 2.54]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

ACOUSTICS AND ANALYSIS OF SPECTRAL SOUND: Commentary: Physicists define the sound source as mechanical disruption of the medium. This may be, for example, a clap hands in the air. This disruption spreads all around, in the form of a wave, hence the talk about the sound wave. It can reach the ears creating a feeling of hearing. Basic values that describe the wave is the frequency ( determines the sound pitch ) and amplitude (determines the intensity volume). The frequency is closely related to the amount of sound. The higher the wave frequency, the higher is the sound. The unit of frequency is Hertz (Hz). If the wave again reaches its highest station, after one second, talk is then of one Hertz (1 Hz).

108

The amplitude of the sound wave is the distance between the lowest and the highest point of the sound curve. Directly related to the intensity of the sound. The level of intensity of the acoustic wave is expressed in bels [B] or decibels [dB].

Practical application: Issues connected with sounds are not associated only with culture (music, vocals), but also many other areas of life. Because sound are acoustic waves that propagate in a medium, and hearing - one of the most important senses - enables detection, reception, different sounds can cause various reactions. But not only audible sounds are affecting us. some believe that the so-called. "brown note", the sound inaudible by humans, has an effect on the human gut. On the other hand, the system LRAD (long range acoustic device), that is, very simply, directional speaker with high volume, which is used by law enforcement to control a crowd. Is aim to deter people / groups of people by creating for them extremely negative listening experience. Of course, there are also versions designed for military purposes. However, not only law enforcement use sound to control human behavior. Even on television sounds in the appropriate frequencies can influence the development of viewer anxiety,agitation and other emotions.

Trivia, history of discovery: The sound of music "a" lying between the second and third lines of staff has a frequency of 440 Hz. Dogs can hear sounds with frequencies up to 40,000 Hz, 100,000 Hz bats and dolphins 200,000 Hz. The pain threshold for the human ear is a sound intensity of 120 dB. The scale of sound intensity is logarithmic, so the values of 50 dB and 60 dB difference is small, but 100 dB and 110 dB is a very big difference. Sound intensity decreases rapidly with distance. The sounds played by different instruments may have the same basic frequency (determined by the wave with the lowest frequency), even so the sounds played are easily distinguishable - this is due to the different composition of the waves with higher frequencies, the so-called. higher harmonics of individual instruments. In music, we define this phenomenon as the color of the instrument. Scientifically, sound already dealt with by Pythagoras, who rightly sought a mathematical relationships in music. Using a tense string he searched for a harmonious balance between sounds. Appropriate sounds are assigned to planets, creating a. harmony of the spheres. The first sound recording was made in 1860 by Édouard-Léon Scott de Martinville using a phonautograph. The first sound recording by means of the phonautograph, which could also play a sound, was in 1877, accomplished by Thomas Alva Edison. Stimulated by a vibrating diaphragm sound ,vibrations were conveyed to a needle which made grooves on the tin foil applied to a rotating shaft. Repeat passage of the needle along the carved grooves on the shaft allowed the setting in motion of another membrane and the transfer of vibrations in the voice tube, thereby reproducing sound.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in mixed 2d-3d technology and documentary films with elements of animation to illustrate are required: - sound frequency: For a variety of sources, - The amplitude of sound: for different sources, - Color, - The methods of analysis, of frequency and amplitude, - Imaging frequency and amplitude - with concrete examples - Specialized acoustic analysis.

109

Requires own production, but also allows for licensed materials. Total duration of the animation, presentations and videos: 10 minutes.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: CONDUCTIVITY OF A CONDUCTOR AND SEMICONDUCTOR

Objective: To show by example of experiment, the differences in the operation a conductor and a semiconductor. Scientific and educational value: The differences in the conduction of current in conductors and semiconductors are known to everyone, but not everyone is aware of them. The station is to bring knowledge of where these differences come from, and how they can be verified experimentally.

Construction of station - technical description: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 90.00 cm (L) x 60.00 cm (W) x 90.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / - 10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height. To the top/counter should be a affixed a container made of transparent plexi. Measuring 0.70 cm THK and dimensions 60.00 cm (L) x 40.00 cm (W) x 30.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. At the bottom of the container will be mounted a heating and cooling component (e.g., Peltier effect and heater), and the whole tank filled with glycol. The vessel will be fitted with two ohmmeters each with electronic displays. To them, on steel cables (Φ0, 10cm) already in the tank, should be suspended, on one a conductor, and other a semiconductor. Calibrating the meter and in particular the conductor and semiconductor types must be determined at the stage of final testing of prototypes in such a way that the intended effect of the experiment was clearly visible. The visitors have to be able to change the temperature of the liquid in the range 0° C- 50° C with a knob mounted in the housing of the platform. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 37 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.27. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

CONDUCTIVITY OF A CONDUCTOR AND SEMICONDUCTOR INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Adjust the temperature in the tank with knob. 2. How does the resistance of the conductor and semiconductor change after a temperature change? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Everyone uses current daily. Devices through which current flows heat up, for example, an electric kettle, computer power supply. The heat is a result of the resistance which the elements of the device pose to loads flowing through the device. The electrical resistance may be varied depending on the material from which the device is made and the temperature at which works.

110

Equipment and AV for stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.31]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

CONDUCTIVITY OF A CONDUCTOR AND SEMICONDUCTOR Law and physico-chemical phenomena: conductor, semiconductor, resistivity, conductivity

Fundamental commentaryary: According to the laws of quantum mechanics, an electron in an atom can have the power of well-defined values. These values, plotted on the diagram of energy in the form of horizontal lines are called energy levels. When atoms join in a solid "blend in one ‘ follows of particular energy levels, which results in the formation of energy bands (the sum of the individual energy levels). The highest band completely filled by electrons is called baseband (valence), the next band (partially filled or empty) conduction band. From the point of view of electrical properties it is necessary to distinguish five cases of filled energy bands in solids: 1. highest populated level in an atom is half-filled; 2. baseband (completely filled) and the conduction band (empty) overlap to form an effective one partially filled band, but with a very large number of electrons; 3. baseband contact "with the conduction band; 4. baseband and the conduction band (empty) lie in the energy scale relatively close together, so close that although there is an empty band electrons can easily move there; 5. baseband and the conduction band (empty) lie relatively far apart, so that the transfer of electrons to the conduction band is virtually impossible. Electrons can move freely in the body over long distances only if they are in the conduction band (hence its name). The first two cases correspond to the situation in metals (very high number of charge carriers), the fifth case is an insulator, the third and fourth case is - semiconductor. In the case of a semiconductor, electrons can move from the base-band to the conduction band by providing them with a certain amount of energy. Energy can be accomplished, e.g., by heating the body (then at the cost of thermal energy vibrations of atoms, electrons can move to the conduction band) or by irradiating it with a suitable light (then electrons move at the expense of the energy of the photons consumed by it- it is called. Internal photoelectric effect) . The higher the temperature, the more charge carriers in the semiconductor, in both the conduction band and in the base band. When electrons, which moved to the conduction band, from the baseband remain they leave empty spaces called holes. Thus as the temperature increases in semi conductors the electrical resistance decreases. The conductors and the heat causes the metal lattice vibrations. Moving electrons in the metal are thus are more likely to "clash" with the atoms of the network and exchange their kinetic energy into thermal energy, resulting in an increase in electrical resistance of the conductor.

Expanded commentaryary: Resistance, also called resistivity depends on the shape of the material, which is made of electrically conductive element. The resistance can be expressed by the formula: R = ρ L / S where: ρ - resistivity, l - length of the conductor, S - cross section of the conductor. Resistivity is the size characteristic of each material separately. This value depends on its construction and can be expressed by the following formula:

111

ρ = 1 / (q μ n) where q - the value of the elementary charge conduction, n - concentration of cargo in the conduction band, μ - mobility of goods. In semiconductors as the temperature increases, more and more loads is likely to get to the conduction band. The result is that the concentration of conductivity load increases, thereby decreasing resistivity. In metals, on the other hand increasing temperature decreases the mobility of loads, or the possibility of their freedom of movement in the conductor. The lower the coefficient μ (mobility of load), the resistivity is greater.

Practical application: Electronics is one of the areas of science, which often uses the phenomenon of conductivity and semiconductivity. Conductors and semiconductors, in certain conditions, can conduct electrons in a controlled manner, and therefore they are used, among others. for the production of electrical and electronic equipment. And the use of these devices is so wide that there is probably no area of life today, which would not be touched. With the prevalence of use of devices that base their operation on the phenomenon of conductivity and semiconductivity, it is believed that we live in a time of "revolution". Knowledge of the behavior of conductors depending on temperature also allowed the design of high voltage power lines to minimize losses during the transmission of electricity over long distances. Also allowed the construction of more robust electrical equipment for producing heat - heaters, kettles, coffee machines. Knowledge of changes in resistance in semiconductors with change in temperature allowed for the construction of electronic temperature gauges such as electronic thermometers.

Trivia, history of discovery: In 1731, S Gray discovered that some bodies do not conduct electricity ( called an insulators later), while others conduct electricity very well ( called a conductors later). Gray noted that conductors are all metals. Later, it was found that there are bodies that exist with indirect properties they were eventually called semiconductors. Of vital importance was the discovery of the electron in 1897 by JJ Thomson. The discovery of Thomas, was supported by the theoretical work of Lorentz which strengthened the belief in the power structure of metals. In 1900, P. Drude developed the electronic theory of metals, by which the electrical conductivity of solids are determined by "electron gas". In 1927, W. Pauli and 1928 A. Sommerfeld said that, in accordance with the principles of quantum mechanics, the electron gas in metals cannot be regarded as a classic, but it has to be considered as a quantum gas: it is a collection of interacting wave matter (electron waves).

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - The method (Scheme) of operation of a conductor and semiconductor: similarities and differences, the flow of electrons. Requires own production, but also allows for licensed materials. The duration of the animation: 30 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: WILSON CLOUD CHAMBER

112

Objective: "Reveal" by the example of the cloud chamber, radiation and how radioactive particles move. Scientific and educational value: Cloud chamber is relatively simple to build way to show how radiation particles move. Everyone will have heard about radiation, about the dangers, but not everyone is able to imagine them. The station should allow ocular belief that radiation however exists.

Construction of station - technical description: Construction of the platform, on which will be placed the cloud chambers, constructed of steel CMX1 1.00-2.00cm x 1.00-2, 00cm. Platform coverage: steel sheet, thickness. 0.7 cm, powder-coated gray gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height. Platform deck has the dimensions: 3250.00 cm x 60.00 cm (all dimensions: + / -10%). height: 75.00 cm. The cloud chamber is a sealed container made of transparent plexiglas plates (thickness 0.70 cm) with dimensions of 50.00 cm x 50.00 cm x 50.00 cm. The chamber should have a cooling component: Peltier and underneath a thick aluminum plate. 0.50 cm of dimensions 50.00 cm x 50.00 cm, cooled from the bottom. The walls of the chamber, from the inside, with mounted lighting sets (white light). Under the the top plate of the chamber should be a tray (stainless steel, THK. 0.50 cm) in which must be a sponge soaked in isopropyl alcohol. Above it is put a heating element - spiral heater. In each chamber, place different radioactive material: clock face with uranium glass, open smoke detector, autunite ore (the amount should be determined empirically during the testing stage of prototypes in order to allow the carrying out of the experiment, but at the same time ensure the safety of both staff and Visitors) . The last chamber should be empty: it will be used for the observation of cosmic rays. On the station counter of each chamber a button should be mounted - light switch for individual chambers with built-in sleep timer, set to a constant of 2 minutes. Due to the use of radioactive material conditions must be met for radiological protection. The final assessment of the chamber should be carried out on the prototype. Ensure that periodical inspection should be available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 34 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.23. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

WILSON CLOUD CHAMBER INSTRUCTIONS 1. Turn on the light in the chamber 2. Follow flight paths of particles of radiation. WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Human senses are adapted for observation of one type of radiation - electromagnetic radiation. In nature, however, there are other types of radiation: all the time "surrounding" us. It is ionizing radiation. You can see them in the station where the Wilson chambers are placed ( cloud chambers), which are being used in the study of radiation since 1900

Equipment and AV for stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [TS 2.23].

113

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

WILSON CLOUD CHAMBER Law and physico-chemical phenomena: radiation α, β, γ, ionizing radiation, cosmic radiation

Fundamental commentaryary: Everyday everyone has to deal with ionizing radiation. The main source of radiation are surrounding rocks, the air we breathe, and the cosmos. Daily doses of radiation that the human body absorbs is called natural radiation. So a kilogram of bananas is the source of about 125 particles of ionizing radiation per second (125 Becquerel - Bq), a liter of milk - 50 Bq. Man himself not only absorbs ionizing radiation, but also is a source of about 10,000 particles per second, of ionizing radiation (10,000 Bq).

Expanded commentaryary: Ionising radiation can be divided into α (alpha), β (beta), γ (gamma), and neutron radiation. Alpha particle is composed of two protons and neutrons. They are endowed therefore with a double positive elementary load. It is a less penetrating radiation, and can be stopped by skin or a piece of paper. Beta radiation consists of freely moving electrons and their antiparticles - positrons. It has a negative or positive charge. It is more penetrating radiation than alpha, and to stop needs usually just a few millimeters metal of sheet. Alpha and beta radiation is the primary ionizing radiation, which itself carries an electric charge and thus can ionize the surrounding it matter. Gamma rays are otherwise photons (particles - quanta of light) endowed with great energy. It is a high penetrating radiation: in order to reduce the amount of gamma radiation by half, needs to be used a shielding lead sheet with a thickness of 1 cm. Neutron radiation, are free-moving neutrons. It is the most harmful type of radiation, as it freely passes through most materials. It is easy to interact with molecules of similar mass, e.g. hydrogen, which can easily interact with the tissues. Neutron radiation protection needs a thick multilayer cover. Gamma and neutron radiation is a secondary radiation, which means that it does not carry the same load, but ionizes the matter which it passes through.

Practical application: Ionizing radiation is widely used in everyday life. It can be found not only in smoke detectors (very common in workplaces, homes, railway wagons), but also in devices that eliminate static electricity from the air. Ionizing radiation is commonly used in medicine, spice disinfectants, stopping the germination of seeds, potatoes, destroying grain insects.

Trivia, history of discovery: The existence of ionizing radiation has been known only for a hundred years, to be exact - since 1895, when the German physicist Wilhelm Conrad Roentgen discovered the mysterious radiation, which he called the radiation "X". This does not mean, however, that ionizing radiation is a new element that man has introduced into the environment. A year after the success of X-rays, the French physicist Henri Becquerel made another discovery - the phenomenon of radioactivity. We found that in nature there are elements (specifically - isotopes) radioactive (radioactive), which are unstable and output radiation as a result of spontaneous decay of atomic nuclei, so it is a natural source of ionizing radiation. These include for example uranium, thorium and their decaying products such as radium. The latter was discovered in 1898 by Maria Sklodowska-Curie and Pierre Curie.

114

The notes of Mari Curie from the years 1890-1910 are now considered to be strong sources of ionizing radiation that are not allowed to be held in the hands. Physicists have noted that some minerals, such as autunite, are a natural source of radiation and leave in cloud chambers α particle tracks. They saw also that the fluorescence of substances used in industry can be linked to the issue of ionizing radiation (eg, glowing in the dark tips of watches are also a source of ionizing particles). In 1912, W. F. Hess- balloon flight found that natural radiation is rooted not only on Earth, but also in space. Conducted in the years 1923-1926 R.K. Millikan experiments, which used, among others. cloud chambers, have shown that radiation particle tracks directly indicate the origin of cosmic rays.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d illustrate are required to present the issues addressed in the narrative: - Radiation α, β, γ, neutron and movement of radioactive particles. Requires own production, but also allows for licensed materials. Animation Duration: 60 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: SIMPLE MACHINES

Objective: Demonstration of the principle of conservation of energy, direct demonstration of simple machines. Scientific and educational value: Simple machines are designed experiments to show the Visitor how they can more optimally harness the power of their muscles when performing tasks such as lifting weights. The principles of operation of simple machines is based on a significant part of the machinery used today.

Construction of station - technical description: The station consists of a set of pulleys: fixed, movable, pulley block and a bilateral lever. Visitors using the selected type of simple machine raises himself, another person, or weight. Fixed pulley: The base unit (platform) should be made of plastic and aluminum (Φ90, 00cm). To it, from the bottom, should be attached a damper (bumper, THK. 10.00 cm, stainless steel) allows gentle stopping of device on the ground (hard rubber, thickness 10, 00cm). To the platform and the bumper will be affixed at the same time (welded) four triangular stiffeners (stainless steel, THK. 2.00 cm). To the flooring is attached a tube (Φ4, 00cm, length. 140.00 cm), passing through a layer of rubber and bumper, positioned axially on which the platform "slides" (motion: up-down). To the base of the platform is fixed a tube (Φ3, 60cm, length 200.00 cm made of plastic and light metal). At a height of 45.00 cm to the tube will be attached a milled limiter/stop . To the ceiling should be fixed a profile / beam (steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss) on which will be suspended the pulley line (steel, Φ10 ,00-15, 00cm). Size of steel profile / beam and the way it is mounted to the ceiling must be determined and calculated at the stage of final testing of prototypes in such a way as to be able to withstand heavy use. The end of the tube should be completed in such a way as to be able to mount to it the canopy rope (Φ1, 40cm, in accordance with ISO-1181, length of about 300.00 cm after knotting) with nodes on it - in order to enable pulling-up.

Movable pulley:

115

The base unit (platform) should be made of plastic and light metal (Φ120, 00cm). To it, from the bottom, should be attached a damper (bumper, THK. 10.00 cm, stainless steel) allows gentle stopping of device on the ground (hard rubber, 12.00 cm). The platform and bumper will be fixed at the same time (welded) four triangular stiffeners (stainless steel, THK. 2.00 cm). To the flooring is attached a tube (Φ4, 00cm, length: 140.00 cm), passing through a layer of rubber and bumper, positioned axially, on which "slides" the platform (motion: up-down). To the base of the platform is fixed a tube (Φ3, 60cm, length 200.00 cm made of plastic and light metal). At a height of 45.00 cm to the tube is attached a milled limiter/stop. To the ceiling should be affixed a profile / beam (steel, powder-coated ,gray, gloss) to which will be suspended a solid line pulley (Φ10 ,00-15, 00cm, steel) and movable pulley (Φ10 ,00-15, 00cm, steel ). Size of steel profile / beam and the way it is mounted to the ceiling must be determined and calculated at the stage of final testing of prototypes, in such a way as to be able to withstand heavy use. To the beam is attached: fixed pulley and rope passing through the final steel tube attached to the platform. The lines of the canopy (Φ1, 40cm, in accordance with ISO-1181, length approximately 350.00 cm after knotting), with nodes in order to enable pulling- up. Pulley block: The base unit (platform) should be made of plastic and aluminum (Φ90, 00cm). To it, from the bottom, should be attached damper (bumper, THK. 10.00 cm, stainless steel) allows gentle stopping of device on the ground (hard rubber, thickness 10, 00cm). The platform should be installed with metal openwork basket with bags filled with sand, with common weight of 80.00 kg. The whole is enclosed by tubular steel balustrade (Φ3, 00cm, stainless steel). The construction will be suspended on a set of two connected manifolds moving. To the ceiling should be fixed a profile / steel beam for the suspension of one of the manifold - the manifold will consist of three pulleys with linear diameter: 30.00 cm, 20.00 cm and 10.00 cm. Below you will find a second manifold consisting of three pulleys, diameter: 10.00 cm, 20.00 cm and 30.00 cm. The whole set is connected to properly wound rope (wire rope, THK. 2.00 cm). To the beams mounted in the ceiling will be affixed a fixed pulley line (Φ10, 00cm, steel, THK. 2.00 cm). To the top of the vertical pipe attached to the platform will be attached the canopy rope (Φ1, 40cm, in accordance with ISO-1181, length of about 300.00 cm after knotting ) with nodes to enable pulling- up. Hold-down brackets are required, or protective sheets (plexiglass) - to prevent improper conduct of rope. The size of all mechanical and structural elements should be chosen at the stage of final testing of prototypes, in such a way that the device is able to withstand wear and tear. Bilateral lever: The base unit (platform) should be made of plastic and aluminum (Φ90, 00cm). To the bottom, is attached a damper (bumper, THK. 10.00 cm, stainless steel) allows gentle stopping of device on the ground (hard rubber, thickness 10, 00cm). To the platform and bumper will be fixed at the same time (welded) four triangular stiffeners (stainless steel, THK. 2.00 cm). Attached to the flooring is a tube (Φ4, 00cm, length: 140.00 cm), passing through a layer of rubber and bumper, positioned axially, on which"slides" the platform (motion: up-down). To the base platform is fixed a tube (Φ3, 60cm, length 200.00 cm made of plastic and light metal). To the ceiling should be fixed a profile / beam steel (powder coated gray, gloss), from which will be suspended the lever arm: closed profile (L 460,00-4,80 cm). Lever arms - uneven (it should be ensured by spreading the beam using the point of suspension) the shorter should be installed the platform, on the longer side at equal distances hang the canopy rope (Φ1, 40cm, in accordance with ISO-1181, length of about 180 , 00cm after knotting of nodes to enable the pulling-up). On the side of the long arm should be mounted the limiter/stop. The size of all mechanical and structural elements should be chosen at the stage of final testing of prototypes, in such a way that the device is able to withstand wear and tear.

Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 57 (fixed pulley), AR 58 (movable pulley), AR 59 (pulley block), AR 60 (bilateral lever).

116

Stations are also labeled in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.45. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on the plate (one common for all models):

SIMPLE MACHINES INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Stand on the platform and pulling the rope, try to pull up using a fixed pulley. 2. Stand on the platform and pulling the rope, try to pull up using the movable pulley. Was the same force as before needed to pull up? 3. Stand next to a platform with pulley and try to lift the weight of a mass of 80 kg. Would it be possible to pull up without the benefit of the pulley block? 4. Stand next to the bilateral lever and try to raise the person on the platform. Use the rope suspended at different distances from the person you pick. When do you use the most, and when the least force? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Simple machines are used to assist in getting the job done. In contrast to machines that do all the work for man, simple machines allow "only" to change the direction of the force and its return. Simple machines do not allow to perform less work, but it makes it lighter.

Equipment and AV for the set of stations: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [TS 2.56]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

SIMPLE MACHINES Law and physico-chemical phenomena: the principle of conservation of energy, force, force direction

Fundamental commentaryary: Simple machines are simple devices that make it easy to perform mechanical work by changing the value and the return force that acts on the body. The main principle of their operation is to get the job done with less effort, but in the long run. All simple machines"abide by the" golden rule of mechanics: "how much is gained on the way, so you lose in strenght." It often happens that simple machines are components of more complex machines.

Expanded commentaryary: Simple machines are devices that do not reduce work and "only" facilitate its execution. Allow it to operate at a lower power in the long run and do the same job as the action of a strong force on the shorter run. The most popular are simple machines: the one-sided lever and double-sided lever, inclined plane, wedge, screw, winch, fixed pulley and movable pulleys, pulley blocks and gear. These machines make it possible to perform a specific job, replacing much force with much smaller - but in keeping with the principle of conservation of energy and the rule of balancing the forces. The bilateral / two- sided lever is a rigid object that could carry lateral loads, such as a beam or a rod suspended or supported, to which both sides of the axis of rotation operates forces of compatible returns. For the lever to be in equilibrium, the forces applied on both sides of the arms must be inversely proportional to the length of the arms.

117

A variation of the bilateral lever is the fixed pulley. It is an example of bilateral equal arm lever, in which r1 = r2. For this reason, it does not change the value of the force F, but only its direction. Movable pulley is a kind of one-sided lever of length equal to the diameter of the pulley. It reduces by half the size of the active force which must be used to pick up the body. The body weight being lifted is distributed on two equals, one of which is the strength of the active. Pulley block is a simple machine consisting of a system of fixed and movable pulleys. Allows lifting heavy weights reducing the active force as many times, as the amount of movable pulleys it consists of.

Practical application: Simple machines we use almost anywhere. The principle of the one-sided lever has been used among others in the construction of vehicle lifts and wheelbarrows. Shovels, hammers, pliers, a cracker is also an example of one-sided lever. A typical example of a two-sided lever is the swing. Contemporary two-sided levers are used as a structural element of many tools such as: scissors, crowbars, pliers, can openers, various measuring instruments (sensors), machine parts such as the gear lever in the car, the control lever machine tools and lifting equipment. Also, the human body is a system of sustained strong lever, which form a skeleton. Because the bones are connected by joints, we can move and pick up objects. Joints and bones form a one-sided lever system.

Trivia, history of discovery: The oldest form of bilateral leverage cranes were used in large buildings. The oldest dates back to around 550 BC, and it was used in ancient Greece to erect buildings that have survived to the present day. Establishment of the pulley is attributed to the Greek scientist and inventor Archimedes, who in 250 BC, applied for the first time single-pulley system and ropes to move a military ship. According to Plutarch, Archimedes showed that invention by alone moving a three mast warship by himself during the launching of the vessel.

Animations, Graphics: Requires animations prepared in combined 2d-3d, technology to illustrating the issues addressed in the narrative: - Operation of two simple machines selected and the size of the applied forces and their change. Requires own production, but also allows for licensed materials. The duration of the animation: 20 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY AT HOME

Objective: Demonstrate the use of known laws of nature in everyday life. Scientific and educational value: The purpose of this part of the exhibition is to show the Visitors the diversity of use of law and physical phenomena in everyday life. In a part of the exhibition arranged as a flat are presented the devices of which their operation is presented in multimedia presentations. The sample list of exhibits is not closed: formula of arrangement of this exposition should enable its expansion, depending on the developments in technology or changes in other exhibits of the path "Development of knowledge and civilization."

118

Construction of station - technical description: The station consists of a specially designed area divided into three parts - the kitchen, living room and bathroom. In various parts are located models of the devices / household equipment associated with the stations or phenomena illustrated on the path of "Development of science and technology". The station presents “cross-sections” of the devices ": so that we have evidence of both the factory housing (partially removed) and the interior. Schematic arrangement of the overall stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 28 The band stations are also marked on the drawing AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbols: M.2.01, M.2.02, M.2.03, M.2.04 M.2.05, M.2.07, M.2.08, M.2.09, M .2.10, M.2.11, M.2.12, M.2.13, M.2.14. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

The group of stations "science and technology in the home" will not be equipped with information boards. The exception is the station of "Operation of the microwave" – the object placed also in this area (this station was described separately).

Equipment and AV for the stations: - LCD 21.5 "with touch pad + PC for each monitor, 13 pcs. [ts 2.01, 2.02 ts, ts 2.03, 2.04 ts, ts 2.05, 2.07 ts, ts 2.08, 2.09 ts, ts 2.10, 2.11 ts, ts 2.12, 2.13 ts, ts 2.14]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

REFRIGERATOR: Commentaryary Refrigerator consists of several main parts: the compressor, the condenser (bent tubes at the back of the refrigerator), the cooling fins or grates with a condenser, expansion valve (tapered tube) and the evaporator. The cycle starts with the compressor, which collects the gas. The compressor increases the pressure (and thus temperature), and further circulates to the elements. The cooling gas reaches the condenser, which transfers the heat setting (paradoxically it gets warmer in the refrigerator). Thus cooled gas is circulated further to the expansion valve. After passing through the expansion valve, the pressure and temperature decreases very rapidly. The cooling gas reaches the evaporator, which absorbs heat from the refrigerator (finally gets cold). After this step, the gas returns to the compressor and the cycle starts again. This arrangement is called a heat pump. History: Before the invention of the refrigerator coolers were used - food stored in them was cooled by natural or artificial ice. Ice-coolers were often hollowed inside rocks or slopes. Natural ice was imported or collected in the winter and stored in special warehouses, which created problems and was expensive. Partially remedied sometime ago by the production of artificial ice - the first plant of this ice, started in the mid-nineteenth century in the United States, and later in the UK and France. The first refrigerator was built in Munich (Germany) in 1871 for the production of the local brewery. The first electric refrigerator intended for households appeared on the market in 1913 (the U.S., the device sold under the brand name Domelre). Refrigerator-freezer designed for households was launched in 1939, by the Swedish company Electrolux.

119

Animations, Graphics: Required, is drawn animation technique of combined 2d-3d, which illustrating the operation of the refrigerator - schematic showing the flow of gas and the temperature distribution, prepared on the basis of the scanned object placed on the exhibition. Animation Duration: 15 seconds. Requires own production.

INDUCTION PLATE: Commentaryary: Induction cooking uses electromagnetic induction. The microwave circuit is a transmitter for generating a high-frequency voltage. Current passes through the inductor. When we put the dish on a metal plate, a magnetic field is generated. At the bottom of the pot eddy currents arise warming dish. History: The first "induction plates" were used in the late nineteenth century, but the equipment for households was popularized in the 1970s in the U.S. (initially functioned as a single burner portable stove).

Animations, Graphics: Required, is drawn animation technique of combined 2d-3d which illustrates the effect of the induction hob - schematic showing of the flow of current, temperature distribution, eddy currents, prepared on the basis of the scanned object placed on the exhibition. Animation Duration: about 10 seconds. Requires own production.

ELECTRIC OVEN: Commentaryary Most electric ovens have two coils of wire at the top and bottom of the device. Coil temperature rises when current flows through them. It creates a warm environment, which heat the interior of the oven. Baking temperature control is to determine the proper value, which heats up the coil. Currently in ovens fans are placed forcing air circulation inside them (popular "hot air"). History: The first kitchen ovens and electric stoves for households was launched in the U.S. in the late nineteenth / twentieth century by "Carpenter Electric Company."

Animations, Graphics: Required, is drawn animation technique of combined 2d-3d which illustrates the operation of an electric oven - schematic showing of the flow of current, temperature distribution, prepared on the basis of the scanned object placed on the exhibition. Animation Duration: about 10 seconds. Requires own production.

ELECTRICAL OUTLET: Commentaryary: There are different types of electrical outlets, depending on the frequency of the current flowing in the power supply. In Poland, there is a standard socket with two holes (the so- called. Conductor phase and neutral) with a pin (the ground wire). The phasing conductor of the outlets in Poland is 230 V (in the three-phase power system the interfacial voltage is 400 V). History: Electrical outlets in homes appeared along with the electrical system: without them there is no way of connecting electrical equipment to the network. The more portable electrical

120 appliances in our homes, the more we are surrounded by outlets. The shape and design of the outlets in various countries is different due to the different standard value.

Animations, Graphics: Required, is drawn animation technique of combined 2d-3d which illustrates the current flow in the network and the electrical outlet. Animation Duration: about 10 seconds. Requires own production.

MIXER: Commentaryary: The most important element in the kitchen mixer is the circuit converting the motor rotation mixer. It consists of a rotor and a set of gears which allow to achieve high- speed rotation. The first mixers contained no engine, and were usually made of metal. Movement of mixer was with a small crank. History: Mixer driven manually patented in 1870 by Walter Scott (USA). The first electric mixer was built in 1908 by Herbert Johnston (USA). Animations, Graphics: Required, is drawn animation technique of combined 2d-3d which illustrates the mechanisms of action of the mixer. Animation Duration: about 10 seconds. Requires own production.

MOVIE CAMERA: Commentaryary: The camera consists of a lens and a sealed light-sensitive material on which the image is recorded. In the case of professional film cameras it is light-sensitive film (long. tape perforated around the edges of the material) wound on a roll and placed in the film holder. In another type of camera - a popular digital camera - the image falls on the electronic matrix and is stored on media such as a magnetic disk or memory card. The camera contains a complex optical system including lenses and prisms (usually pentagonal). The cameras use internal photoelectric effect, namely a change of resistance inside them, conductors. The most important thing of the camera is the process of changing the luminance (light reflected from an object that falls into the lens) into an electrical signal. History: The predecessor was the kinescope camera - a projector designed for a single viewer, designed by Thomas Alva Edison around 1889 That invention was inspired by the Lumière brothers, who constructed it in 1895, received a patent for a "device suitable for receiving and viewing chronophotographic pictures where the tape designed to receive pictures or the pictures contained is moved intermittently, characterized by periods of rest, with claws or pins included in the holes on the edges of the tape. "first recorded by them and publicly opened the film was" Workers Leaving the Factory "(Paris , 1895). The first manual film camera invented a Pole - Kazimierz Prószyński. Digital video recordings were made popular in the 1990's. In the next decade, thanks to miniaturization and reduction of production costs, it became available for just about everyone.

Animations, Graphics: Required, is drawn animation technique of combined 2d-3d image registering and illustrating the principles of the light-sensitive material and the process of conversion into an electrical signal luminance. Animation Duration: 30 seconds. Requires own production.

121

VACUUM: Commentaryary: The heart of the vacuum cleaner is an electric motor whose function is to suck air. Sucked in together with the air is dust and dirt which usually goes to a material or paper bag. History: The first prototypes appeared in the USA at the beginning of the second half of the nineteenth century, and they were hand-operated devices. Electric vacuum sucking in dust and up for rent, was invented in 1901 by an Englishman Hubert Booth. The first portable device of this type was developed by James Murray Spangler (USA, 1906). Cheap and intended for household vacuum cleaners hit the market in the mid-twentieth century

Animations, Graphics: Required ,is drawn animation technique of combined 2d-3d which illustrates the operation of a vacuum cleaner - schematic showing of the circulation of air, prepared on the basis of the scanned objects placed on the exhibition. Animation Duration: about 10 seconds. Requires own production.

DRYER: Commentaryary: A hair dryer is composed of an electric motor, heater in the shape of a spiral, turbine, and the thermostat. Motor moves the turbine, which draws in air. The air then passes through the coil where it is heated and thrown out of the device. The thermostat is designed to protect the hair dryer from overheating. History: The first dryer was developed by Polish engineer Michael Doliwo-Dobrovolsky (chief engineer of German factories AEG) in 1899. Cheap and intended for households hair dryers hit the market in the mid-twentieth century

Animations, Graphics: Required, is drawn animation technique of combined 2d-3d which illustrates the operation of the dryer, prepared on the basis of the scanned object placed on the exhibition. Animation Duration: about 10 seconds. Requires own production.

WASHING MACHINE: Commentary: The "Heart" of the washing machine is the drum driven by an electric motor. The drum is fed water by a solenoid valve which controls the flow, the task of the pump is pumping out water after use. The necessary elements are the heater, electromagnetic lock and timer, the electronic system controlling machine operation. History: The constructor of the first machine is accredited to American James King (1851). Electrically powered washing machines began to be built from 1899, one of the first such solution was the washing machine drum, which was built in 1907 by Alva Fisher. The first automatic washing machines were released to the U.S. market in 1937 One of the most popular washing machines manufactured in Poland was "Frances" -

122 produced in Kielce Metal Products Plant (where the SHL motorcycles were produced ). It was a rotor washing machine (the drum in it did not move much like today's washing machines), with the rotor, sometimes also with the option to heat water and with a wringer.

Animations, Graphics: Required is drawn animation technique of combined 2d-3d which illustrates the operation of the washing machine, prepared on the basis of the scanned object placed on the exhibition. Animation Duration: 15 seconds. Requires own production.

COMPUTER: Commentary: A computer set can be divided into a central unit and an input and output device, to which we include a keyboard, mouse and monitor. The CPU consists of integrated circuits connected in assembly. The biggest is the motherboard to which is installed the whole package of additional components: expansion cards (video, network, sound), working memory in the form of the following integrated circuits, magnetic disks for data storage, device for reading and writing data on removable media, power supply, cooling elements and the most important part of the CPU – the processor. An important part of the set is the monitor. In this day and age LCD monitor has become a standard. It consists of a layer of liquid crystal which, when voltage is applied to them (the electrodes) transmit light. History: In 1936, the English mathematician Alan Turing designed a machine learning algorithm for performing even the most complex algorithms. Turing’s machine is considered one of the most important electronic constructions. In 1939, the U.S. constructed using specialized vacuum tubes, a prototype computer: a machine for solving systems of linear algebraic equations. In 1941 in Germany, Konrad Zuse built a fully automated computer of functional program. In 1951 in the U.S. for the first time a computer was offered on the market for sale for (ENIAC), the processing of numerical data and text. In 1975 the first personal computer was displayed: the construction of MITS - ALTAIR 8800. The turn of 1950/1960s accounted for the mass production of computers, IBM, created the standard software. In the 1970s, developing production-based on computer chips. In 1976, Apple I, one of the first complete personal computer enters the market. In 1981, a microcomputer IBM PC enters the market. In 1984, Macintosh enters the market: a personal computer from Apple. It has a graphical user interface: windows, icons, pull-down menus. The control is done with a mouse. At the end of the 1990s, PDAs appear on the market. In Poland in the 1970s Jacek Karpinski developed a novel by minicomputer K-202, one of the first personal computers. The most famous Polish computer designs include: Odra, Mera, Elwro.

Required fictionalized film with elements of animation illustrating: - The history of the production of computers in Poland. The duration of the film with elements of animation: a total of about 5 minutes. Requires own production - licensed material may be allowed .

TV:

123

Commentary: TV "old style", so called. CRT picture tubes contain a kinescope (light imaging - like big glass bubbles) and electron beam guns. The received signal from the satellite dish is broken into parts. Each of the primary colors (red, green, blue) has its own signal which is transmitted to electronic guns. From three guns are launched electron beams of electrons on the surface of the kinescope (from the inside), which is coated with a special material - phosphor, which glows when "bombing" by the gun begins, and displays a colored spot on the screen (image). History: The first television transmitters, operating in the medium wave band, were in the 1920's. In the years 1924-1926 in the USA John Logie Baird demonstrated the first efficient television systems (transmitters and receivers): black-and-white television. In 1928, the designer also developed transmitters and color television receivers. In 1929 the BBC launched an experimental, and in 1936, regular broadcasts of TV programs. In 1940, the U.S. began to broadcast experimental television broadcasts in color, with the current system color reproduction.

Poland's first television broadcast took place already in 1931. In 1937, in Warsaw was established an experimental television station, and the first public demonstration of trial television broadcasting on 26 August 1939 After World War II Polish Television began regular TV broadcasts in 1952, and from 1953 began broadcasts also in color in Poland. Receivers of domestic production were: Turkus, Fala, Neptun.

Animations, Graphics: Required fictionalized film with elements of animation illustrating: - The history of television in Poland, the history of television production in Poland - Operation of CRT TVs, prepared on the basis of the scanned a object placed on display, and LED TVs - Operation of digital television. The duration of the film with elements of animation: a total of about 5 minutes. Requires own production – licensed material may be allowed material.

BULB: Commentary: Incandescent lamp consists of a tungsten filament placed in a glass bubble and surrounded by a mixture of noble gases. Switching on the lamp, we make the current flows through the fiber. Warm fibers at high temperatures begin to gloss. History: In 1878, Joseph Wilson Swan patented the first bulb suitable for the practical use (British patent). In 1879, Thomas Alva Edison patented a light bulb (U.S. Patent).

Animations, Graphics: Required fictionalized film with elements of animation illustrating: - The history of light bulbs, operation of electric light bulbs: the oldest and the latest types. The duration of the film with elements: about 5 minutes. Requires own production - licensed material may be used.

RADIO: Commentary: The radio is made up of: a receiving antenna, input circuit, a demodulator and electroacoustic transducer. The receiving antenna is used to receive electromagnetic

124 waves of a certain frequency, which can be changed (usually by means of a knob). The role of the input circuits, is to select a specific wave of noise and interference with our surroundings. Radio waves are modulated (changed) in order to be able to distinguish them from the waves coming from other sources (even from other electrical devices). The received wave is therefore demodulated, or achieves their original properties. This wave, contains information about the electrical signals that the transducer converts to sounds coming from the speaker.

History: In 1894, the Italian Guglielmo Marconi received the first radio communication. In 1903, the Dane Valdemar Poulsen built the arc transmitter and used it make the first radio broadcast of the human voice. The first public radio station began working in Pittsburgh (USA) in 1920, at the same time, the first factory-produced radios went on sale. In 1922, a radio station was launched in the USSR.

In Poland, the first test radio program aired in 1925. Constant radio broadcast began in 1926. In 1931 a broadcasting station that covered and reach around 90% of the then Poland was established. One of the most popular radio receivers first introduced to the market in Poland was Detefon - with a crystal detector, built in 1929 by Wilhelm Rotkiewicz.

Animations, Graphics: Required fictionalized film with elements of animation illustrating: - The history of radio in Poland, history of producing radios in Poland - Principle of traditional radio. The duration of the film with elements of animation: a total of about 5 minutes. Requires own production - licensed material may be used.

ELECTRIC GUITAR: Commentary: For playing the electric guitar, unlike the acoustic guitar electricity is needed. When tugging strings, we create tension. In the body of the guitar are in fact transducers containing magnets and a coil. The strings are therefore in a magnetic field, and the vibrations cause the formation of an induction current in the coil. The corresponding voltage is transferred to a guitar amp, where an electrical signal is amplified and then processed by the transducer. After passing through the transducer, we get an acoustic wave coming out of the speaker.

History: The founder of the electric guitar is considered to be George Beauchamp (1931). At the turn of 1940/1950s several types of electric guitars entered the market, the next decade popularized this type of instrument – e.g. among the creators of music.

Animations, Graphics: Required is drawn animation technique of combined 2d-3d which illustrates: - Operation of the electric guitar and its most important components. Animation Duration: 30 seconds Requires own production.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

SET OF STATIONS: INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION. NEWTON RINGS

125

Objective: Experimental show of diffraction and interference, and the formation of Newton rings. Scientific and educational value: Diffraction and interference effects are basic waveforms and their observation for light is considered as proof of the applicability of the wave description. A spectacular illustration of this phenomenon are known as Newton rings.

STAND: INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION Construction of station - technical description: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 60.00 cm (L) x 60.00 cm (W) x 70.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / - 10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated , gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height. On the counter/top of platform is mounted a lamp with adjustable colors: red, green and white. Above the light source is set thick polycarbonate plate. 0.60 cm. To the top of the platform is attached a flexible cord rod PC: Ø 10-15 mm, length 20,00- 25,00 cm transparent. Ensure that periodical inspection should be available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 70 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.34.1.

STAND: NEWTON RINGS Construction of station - technical description: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. The station should have dimensions: 60.00 cm x 60.00 cm, height: 100.00 cm - of which platform: 50.00 cm (all dimensions: + / -10%). Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated , gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height. The top is affixed the housing of experimental station proper, made of MDF or laminate, with external dimensions: 60.00 cm (L) x 60.00 cm (W) x 50.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10% . On the platform surface, inside the housing, on a glass top THK. 1.00 cm should be mounted lens of high focal length: 40,00 cm. On the upper panel of platform, from the inside, should be installed a light source with adjustable colors: red, green and white - with the ability to adjust its position. In the top plate of the platform should be an opening to perform to observation of the phenomenon. Ensure that periodical inspection should be available to all elements of the station. Implementation of experiment with Newton's rings may encounter difficulties in the case of too many Visitors for the simultaneous use of the station, so you should strive to create optimal conditions for the individual observations by the proper arrangement of other elements (presenter, monitor, board). Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 66 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.34. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION. NEWTON RINGS INSTRUCTIONS: Go to station 1 and take a look at the lens placed inside.

126

How do the circles spread on the surface? Change the color of the light source. How does the rings change under the influence of different colors of light? Go to the No. 2 station and look at the plate of polycarbonate. Touch plate with transparent rod. How do the rings arrange themselves? Change the color of the light source. How does the rings change under the influence of different colors of light? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Phenomena that observe the interference (overlapping) and diffraction (splitting up): one of the basic phenomena that describe the wave nature of light. These phenomena can be observed in the form of so-called. Newton rings.

Equipment and AV for stations (for both the above stations): - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [TS 2.43]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION OF WAVES. NEWTON RINGS Law and physico-chemical phenomena: Wave optics, wave nature of light, interference of light waves, diffraction of light waves

Fundamental commentary: Before it was discovered that light is a wave, to describe light a geometrical optic model depicting a ray of light was used. In this model, the "particles" of light is moving away from the source in straight lines. In optics, light wave is considered in terms of the electromagnetic wave. Interference, one of the most important concepts of wave optics, the phenomenon when waves that encounter each other combine through superposition to create a new wave of larger or smaller amplitude (extinction or strengthening of the wave occurs). According to the principle of "superposittion" in any point of the area to which reach two waves of the same kind, the resulting wave is the sum of the component waves. When the waves have the same frequency - for example, come from the same source - the observed interference effects become even more interesting: we can then observe "Newton's rings". The light passing through the edges of opaque objects, or through the slots of dimensions comparable with the wavelength, is flexing. Each slot is the source of a new wave. The phenomenon of when it encounters an obstacle that bends the wave or when it spreads after emerging from an opening is called diffraction.

Expanded commentary: In optics, light wave is considered in terms of the electromagnetic wave. Interference is one of the most characteristic of traveling waves and the observation of light is considered to be one of a factual description of the light wave. Newton ring effect arises is an interference pattern caused by the reflection of light between two surfaces—a spherical surface and an adjacent flat surface. When viewed with monochromatic light, Newton's rings appear as a series of concentric, alternating bright and dark rings centered at the point of contact between the two surfaces. When viewed with white light, it forms a concentric-ring pattern of rainbow colors, because the different wavelengths of light interfere at different thicknesses of the air layer between the surfaces. Green light has a wavelength smaller than red, so - as compared with red light - the observed interference fringes are slightly smaller in the case of the use of green light.

127

White light is a mixture of colors, or waves of different lengths - hence, if the light used in the experiment, is not a monochromatic (one color), instead of the single-color thin ring there would be a wider and multicolored. The light passing through the edges of opaque objects, or through the slots of dimensions comparable with the wave’s length, is flexing. Each slot becomes a primary source of a new wave. The phenomenon of bending wave on the edges of the holes or apertures is called diffraction. Diffraction is a phenomenon of wave diffraction on obstacles of similar dimensions to its length. If it is assumed that the refractive index of air is approximately 1.0, in polycarbonate the value rises to 1.55.

Practical application: Optical interferometer is a device that operates on the basis of the mechanism of interference (overlapping) of light waves. Measuring the spatial distribution of the bands, and the intensity of light, allows for very accurate data of the length and the distance of the wave. The interferometer has contributed to the overthrow of the false "theory of ether" and confirm the theory of relativity. Interferometry is also used in spectroscopy – the method of testing substances that specifies, for e.g., composition, chemical structure or surface structure. Such techniques are commonly used in various fields of chemistry, physics, and also in industry. However diversified interferometry, is a technique used in astronomy. Used in independent radio telescopes, located at large distances from each other. They receive the data that "in all form a whole", and together they can be analyzed. Newton's rings there are also undesirable. When scanning transparent materials, film, photos and the like, in the resulting image files appears in the image bands. It is sometimes difficult to remove, so a special method to avoid this effect is used.

Trivia, history of discovery: Newton's rings were the first scientific analysis subjected to scrutiny in 1663,by independent of one another British scientists Robert Boyle and Robert Hooke. Hooke described this phenomenon explained it to be the wave nature of light. The phenomenon of color ring takes its name from the name of Isaac Newton, who around 1717, for the first time thoroughly described it. In 1887, Albert Michelson and Edward Morley conducted an experiment in which using the interferometer showed that the speed of light is constant regardless of the motion of the observer. The phenomenon of Newton's rings can be observed in nature such as on the surface of water: pond, pool or puddle, an oily "movie" is created. This patch takes on an unusual rainbow of colors. White Light Interference in thin layers is the basis of the phenomenon of iridescence. Characteristic of the effect of beautiful, shimmering spots are a riot of colors including in opal or on the wings of some species of butterflies. Interference can be seen when watching colorful soap bubbles.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - the phenomenon (chart) of wave interference, - the phenomenon ( chart) of diffraction of waves. Requires own production, but also allows for licensed materials. Duration of animation: a total of about 30 seconds. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

128

STAND: RAINBOW COLOURS - DEPENDENCE OF THE EMISSION SPECTRUM ON THE COMPOSITION OF GAS, SUNLIGHT SPECTRUM

Objective: To show dependence of the emission spectrum on the gas composition, of the spectrum of sunlight. Scientific and educational value: Show the phenomenon of splitting of white light into its components. The explanation that "white" is an outcome of different colors into one. Experience has also shown that the light refracts at the border of different surfaces. To prove that the color of monochromatic light depends on the length of its wave. Construction of station - technical description: Construction of the station is made of steel profiles 10/10, 20/20 and 40/40 mm. Station platform with a trapezoidal projection, length 200.00 cm and 320.00 cm and a depth of 25.00 cm (all dimensions + / -10%) should be attached to the base with M20 screws. Platform housing construction: steel sheet thickness. 0.70 cm, powder coated ,gray, gloss. To the platform is mounted a rack (steel profiles, THK. 1.00 cm), with dimensions: length - 320.00 cm, height - 160.00 cm (all dimensions + / -10%). The central party must be fitted with laminated shelves THK. 0,80-1,40 cm, in black, matte, anti-interference of light sources from a variety of sources. The middle part of the station will be placed where the light source and prisms and a diffraction grid, should be separated from the Users by a plexiglass sheet. On the back of the housing should run a cable channel for the cable power light sources placed on the station. On the station put the following: - A diffraction grid, - A prism (for each of the light sources), - Two white screens for the projection of the spectrum, - Different light sources: halogen lamp, sodium lamp, bulb, potassium helium lamp, LED bulb RGB. The station should be equipped with cruise control light sources. Control of halogen light and LED should also be possible using the monitor with a touch screen. Prisms, the density of the diffraction gating, the power lamps to be selected at the final stage of testing prototype in such a way as to achieve the expected effect of the experiment. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 39 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.35. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

RAINBOW COLOURS INSTRUCTIONS: 1. What is the effect on the right screen produces light after passing through a prism? Is this effect is the same for the light from each of the bulbs? 2. What effect on the left screen produces light after passing through the diffraction grid? Is this effect the same for the light from each of the bulbs? 3. Turning the knobs or using your monitor, you can change the brightness of some bulbs. Does this have an impact on the image on the screen? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? The white color of light is an outcome of different colors into one. After passing through a prism light splits: to color components. A similar effect is observed in the case of the

129 rainbow. It is called: light spectrum. It happens when light refracts on the border of different surfaces. After passing through a diffraction grid light also refracts.

Equipment and AV for stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.44] - Monitor 23'' + PC, 2 sets. [2.08 mn, mn 2.09]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

RAINBOW COLOURS - DEPENDENCE OF THE EMISSION SPECTRUM ON THE COMPOSITION OF GAS, SUNLIGHT SPECTRUM Law and physico-chemical phenomena: rainbow, diffraction, interference, spectral lines, emission spectrum

Fundamental commentary: All hot bodies emit light - not always visible. Starting from below the color of a red - called infrared (IR) to the color blue, and further to the light called ultraviolet (UV). Lit incandescent material is called the thermal emission. Using a prism used the phenomenon called "refraction of light" on the border of the prism and air. Light of different wavelengths (different colors) collapses at the border of the two centers at different angles. If a breakdown occurs twice, that splits white light into component waves. Each wave moves in a different way from the point of contact of the light beam from the prism edge. In nature, rainbow is formed in such a way: water droplets act as a prism, the light passing through the first collapses at the border of the air and drops ("bumping" into it), and then drops and air ("falling out"). The larger the droplet, the clearer the rainbow becomes. The collapse of the lights and light deflection are two different phenomena. Refraction of light, such as in a prism, is connected with the medium. The light will almost always break down when changing medium through which it passes. Deflection is different in nature: there is a single site. Changing the direction of propagation of light takes place at the edges of obstacles and in their vicinity. Such a phenomenon occurs when light is passing through the diffraction grid. Each slot of the grid becomes the source of a new wave. Wave propagating from the slots overlap. As each wave is of different length, the waves reinforce or extinguish (as waves reunite at sea). The screen shows the location of different colors corresponding to different wavelengths. The emission spectrum is a picture of electromagnetic radiation emitted by the body. For solids and liquids emission spectrum is continuous. For simple carbon gases emission spectrum is recorded in the form of bands. For gas atoms with complex structure emission spectrum is recorded in the form of strips.

Expanded commentary: Passage of light through the prism is a phenomenon called "refraction". Refraction of light is connected with the medium. The light will almost always break down when changing medium through which passes. Light of different wavelengths is refracted at the boundary of two centers at different angles. If a breakdown occurs twice, that splits white light into component waves. The light passing through the edges of opaque objects, or through slots of comparable dimensions with the wavelength is deflection (diffraction).

130

The collapse of the lights and light deflection are two different phenomena. The deflection occurs at a single center. Changing the direction of propagation of light takes place at the edges of obstacles and in their vicinity. Using a diffraction grid can receive mirror replicas of two rainbows separated by a white stripe. In each slit diffraction of the grid is a separate light source (wave). Light that is wave propagates from the slot and encounters the passing waves from other slots, then we have to deal with the interference of the waves. As each wave is of a different length, they are mutually reinforcing or diminishing. On the screen we see a place of different colors corresponding to different wavelengths – colors/shades. The diffraction grid can better split spectral lines, the more the scratches on one millimeter of the grid (this is called a fixed grid). In the case where the angle difference for each wavelength is increasing, then the interval between the wavelengths of the screen is becoming greater. Fixed grids are determined by the following formula: d sin (n) = n λ where λ-wavelength, d - constant mesh, n - spectrum. The emission spectrum is a picture of electromagnetic radiation emitted by the body. The emission spectrum is formed when the electric-charged electrons, atoms, molecules or fragments of the particles forming the body of data, being transferred from the excited state of higher energy to a lower energy state. Spectroscopic spectrum is recorded image radiation spread over a particular frequency, wavelength or energy. For solids and liquids emission spectrum is continuous. For simple carbon gases emission spectrum often takes the form of a series of well separated frequencies that spectrometers record in the form of bands. The arrangement of these bands clearly indicates the presence of a specific element in the gas and is called the atomic spectrum. Gas atoms with complex structure gives the spectrum band.

Practical application: Often, looking at the shiny side of a CD or DVD you can see "colors of the rainbow" - it is also an example of the diffraction grid. The effect is not intentional, but it is well illustrated by the way in which data is stored on the disc. Laser burns on the grooves, the arrangement of which is analyzed by a computer and converted into a string of ones and zeros, and from themselves reflected light, creating a rainbow. This type of diffraction grid are reflective mesh. Diffraction phenomenon is also used in devices called light spectroscopes, in which the sample is passed through the light beam. Depending on whether / how reflected from or how it will go (ie how many and what color components will be absorbed by it), one can determine its composition. This technique is called absorption, since the sample absorbs certain components of the light. Diffraction grids are also used in large liquid crystal displays and cinema projectors. If not for the phenomenon of refraction of light, there wouldn’t also be fiber - currently the most efficient way to quickly transfer large amounts of data over long distances. The light which is transmitted in such a way as to reflect off the walls of the cable - with the least loss of energy. It is generally the use of the diffraction grid in the optical fiber lines that get rid of noise and signal regeneration.

Trivia, history of discovery: The light dispersion phenomenon is a phenomenon known for centuries. For centuries, people watched the rainbow, which is formed after dispersion of the rays of light on color components by raindrops. A similar effect could be observed in temples, when incidental light at a right angle shone through the stained glass windows. Experiments with dispersion of light through a prism were performed in the years 1665- 1666 by Isaac Newton. One of the most well-known experiment of interference and diffraction was carried out in 1801 by Thomas Young, consisting of coherent light passing through two closely spaced

131 slits and observing the resulting image on the screen. Young observed that on the screen were bright and dark bands in areas where light is extinguished or reinforced.

Monitor with touch pad [TS 2.44] should be used for the presentation of theoretical issues (text layer) and to adjust the LED and halogen lights - used in the experiment.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - The phenomenon of diffraction and interference of waves - scheme refraction, strengthening and wave damping, - Spectroscopic spectrum of different elements. The duration of the animation and presentation: about 60 seconds. Animations will be displayed on the monitors: 2.08 mn, mn 2.09 (a looped projection).

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: MEASURING THE SPEED OF LIGHT

Objective: Showing one of the methods for measuring the speed of light. Scientific and educational value: The letters "c", by which is defined in physics the speed of light, conceals years of, experimentation, and even the Nobel Prize. However, since the value of the speed which is in the equations given as physical constants are used in many fields of life, not only strictly scientific, we should allow the Visitor to determine its individually, experimentally.

Construction of station - technical description: Station Description The station is made up of: - rail: aluminum track mounted in the floor, mounting of flooring rails - using a floor with a slope made of laminate, composite or hardened rubber and secured to the floor (concrete floor) with screws and glue, the length of the rails: min. 500cm, - pole with a transmitter: to provide the opportunity to move the pole on the rail in the range of 100-400cm from the receiver, - metal strip, length 500cm, rolled into a tube which is the base transmitter - transmitter: router (transmitter wifi) with glass body (laminated glass, THK 1, 00cm, transparent), attached to a profile made of stainless steel, with cables lain in the middle - it should be a mobile element, moving on rail, - receiver: monitor with touch pad computer, fixed to the ground by way of a substructure (steel sections) monitor housing, building computer and substructure should be made of stainless steel. The installation of the various elements of the experiment must be verified at the stage of final testing of prototypes. The whole station has to be stable and durable - suitable for heavy use. Both the monitor and the substructure of the router to be connected to a graduated scale showing the precise distance, self coiling. Graduation will include both SI units and Imperial. Particularly clearly visible should be the basic units and their multiples, Imperial units must be readable, although of significantly smaller characters and a different color from that of the SI. Daily access to a router should be predicted, computer, and monitor the technical staff to minimize measurement error. Since the measurement will be carried out by measuring

132 the average time needed for traveling wave from the source to the receiver and back, at the stage of final testing of prototypes the right model of the device and its software should be chosen. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 41 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.17. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

MEASURING THE SPEED OF LIGHT INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Slide the pole of the transmitter, unciol the tape and read the distance. Enter it into the computer using the monitor, and then press on the screen the "start" button. What result did you receive? 2. Do measurements for a few distance. What result did you recieve? How does the accuracy / error of measurements change? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? One of the most important values in modern science and technology is the speed of light in vacuum. Using the same computer, you can measure the speed of light and see how big it is. Thanks to the achievements of modern technology, measurement of the speed of light can now be performed under near domestic conditions: having only available a receiver and a transmitter wifi. From the transmitter to the receiver is sent a signal which is reflected back to the transmitter. The signal traveling between the transmitter and the receiver is an electromagnetic wave like light. The difference in relation to the light is different only in the length and frequency of the wave. Speed remains the same. By measuring the speed of wifi signal we measure at the same time the speed of light.

Equipment and AV for stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [ts 2.17] - LCD monitor 12 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set., [ts 2.17.1]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

MEASURING THE SPEED OF LIGHT Law and physico-chemical phenomena: the speed of light, the physical constants

Fundamental commentary: One of the basic physical quantities used in today's science and technology is the speed of light. If the distance that an electromagnetic wave has to overcome is divided by the amount of time it takes it to do it, the number obtained in this way is called the speed of light: marked with the symbol "c". c = S / t The speed of light is so critical because its value in a vacuum is the maximum speed at which the universe can propagate all the particles and signals. The speed of light in vacuum is huge and is approximately 300.000 km / s (three hundred thousand kilometers per second). To better imagine how big this number is, you can imagine that a hypothetical highway route from Łódź to Zakopane, which could be overcome in about 4.5 hours, you can go through moving with the speed of light in 0.001 seconds (one thousandth of a second).

133

Expanded commentary: The speed of the electromagnetic wave (including light) depends on the medium in which the wave moves. It reaches maximum value in vacuum. Unlike other known waves (eg sound), electromagnetic wave propagation does not need to resort. Proposed in the nineteenth century, the medium in which would propagate electromagnetic wave, is called ether. Michelson-Morley’s experiments showed that ether does not exist. Albert Einstein showed that the concept of ether is unnecessary and based on that formulated the Special Theory of Relativity (1905) and General Relativity (1916). Quantum physics describes electromagnetic radiation as a stream of photons - without masses of elementary particles, whose energy and momentum depend on frequency. Based on the hypothesis of Max Planck, Einstein explained mathematically and described the photoelectric effect. Objects having a non-zero rest mass cannot reach the speed of light in a vacuum, but may be arbitrarily close to it. Instead, they can achieve and exceed the speed of the light a medium, such as water. Such objects, if they have a non-zero electric charge, then emit light called Cherenkov radiation.

Practical application: Knowing the speed of light in a vacuum is the basis of modern science and technology. Exact knowledge of the speed of light has allowed the construction of a global stationing system - GPS. The speed of light is also present in the basic equations of physics as a physical constant. After using it in Maxwell's equations describing the propagation of radio waves, electrical conductivity, etc. calculations that helped build power transmission lines, relays terrestrial and satellite, mobile telephony, can be carried out etc. In quantum mechanics, knowledge of the speed of light allowed the construction of the first processors, electronics development, launching the Internet.

Trivia, history of discovery: The first measurement of the speed of light would was done by Galileo. He decided to conduct the experiment with his assistant, outside the city on two hills having two lighthouses. The very attempt consisted of uncovering and covering the lighthouse, but because of the enormous speed of light and a very large measurement error, it was doomed to failure. Galileo could only estimated that the speed far exceeds, in terms of the current unit, 30 km / s (which is close to the speed of the orbital motion of the Earth around the sun). It was the first recorded attempt to measure the speed of light. In 1676, the Danish astronomer Ole Rømer gave the first estimate of the finite speed of light, noting that light takes less than a second to cover a distance of 3000 French miles or (about 13 000 km). Calculations were based on the observation of the eclipses delay by the planet Jupiter. In 1727, English astronomer James Bradley made the measurement using the aberration of starlight. The quotient of the Earth's orbital velocity and the angle of aberration obtained, calculated, 301 000 km / s The first laboratory measurement of the speed of light was made in 1849 by the French physicist Armand Fizeau using mirrors and gear (this experience can be considered as a modification of the one proposed by Galileo by replacing the second observer' with a mirror). The obtained result 315 300 km / s suffered from systematic error. This method was refined by increasing the distance and the number of teeth - in 1874, the French physicist Alfred Cornu Maria received a score of: 300,030 ± 200 km / s, in 1902, Perrotin 299,880 ± 84 km / s A more accurate method is rotating the mirror proposed in 1838 by François Arago, first used by Jean Foucault in 1850, Foucault in 1862 received a score of 298.000 ± 500 km / s, and in 1882, Simon Newcomb achieved by this method the result 299 810 ± 30 km / s Methods for measuring the speed of light are constantly being developed, resulting in an increase in accuracy. In 1907, Albert Abraham Michelson won the Nobel Prize, among

134 others. for very accurate measurements of the speed of light, conducted since 1878, in 1880 received a score of 299,910 ± 50 km / s, and in the years 1924-1926, with the equipment set on top of a Mount Wilson and Mount San Antonio distant about 35 km, 299.796 ± 4 km / s - similar to the currently adopted. In later measurements mechanical methods have been replaced by electro-optical using the Kerr effect phenomenon. When measuring the velocity of radio waves the cavity resonator method is used. Today's definition of the speed of light 'c' is the value approved by the 17th International Congress on Weights and Measures, which took place in 1983, the value is 299 792 458 m / s (and is used to include the current definition of a meter). Light tries to slow down. The most recent record in experiments with slowing of light is the result of 0.2 mm / s achieved in a French laboratory by dynamically changing the physical properties of the medium in which the light beam was distributed.

Animations, Graphics: Required three animations made in a combined technique of 2d-3d presents the measurement of the speed of light by Galileo-Michelson. Another of the above-described methods (to be selected by the Contractor). The duration of each of the three animation: about 20 seconds. Requires own production, but also allows for licensed materials.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report. It is also necessary to prepare software for the test bench - for the set: monitor- computer [ts 2.17.1].

STAND: ARCHIMEDES’ PRINCIPLE

Objective: Demonstration of Archimedes’ principle. Scientific and educational value: Understanding the fundamental right of hydrostatics, also called the law of Archimedes (of Syracuse) and its practical application by the example of the bathyscaph. Construction of station - technical description: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 200.00 cm (L) x 50.00 cm (W) x 50.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated ,gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs or legs of steel + hard rubber in contact with the ground. On the platform is placed a reservoir with liquid (water) 200.00 cm in height and base dimensions 50.00 cm x 200.00 cm - all dimensions of + / -10%. Installation should be made of tempered safety glass. During final testing of prototypes, and prior to the implementation, by calculating the stress and strain rates, the appropriate glass thickness and manner of joining the panels should be chosen. Depending on the chosen thickness of the glass the structure of the platform and the way it should be built must be adjusted accordingly. The side edges of glass cut and polished 450 or 900, clear adhesive glue. Cutting edge and bonding must be done very carefully, accurately and esthetically. In the tank a model of the bathyscaph will be placed: made of stainless steel THK. 0.3 mm (may be other materials imitating steel), the ballast tanks and observation chamber should be made of transparent materials. The model should be equipped with a sensor that turns on the light in the observation chamber after reaching a certain depth.

135

On the side walls it is recommended that graphics should be to applied: - The depth in meters below sea level - in the form of scales (from "0" to "10994"), - Infographics showing the largest living organisms on certain depths, - Infographics showing the largest bathyscaph dive in history (Mariana Trench), typical submarine submersion. Filling the ballast tanks with water and the air is to be controlled by the Visitors by using the buttons on the housing platform. Inside the platform a pump should be built. The air is supplied to the ballast tanks through a rubber hose (Φ 1.00-2.00 cm). The whole is to be supplied with single phase 230V current. Ensure that periodical inspection should be available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 64 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.33. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate: ARCHIMEDES’ PRINCIPLE INSTRUCTIONS 1. Fill the tanks of the bathyscaph with air. Next fill them with water 2. How does the depth of submersion of the bathyscaph changes? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Bathyscaph can submerse by gradually increasing its weight, which increases as the ballast tanks are filled with water. Filling the tanks with air will make it surface. Buoyant forces acts on a body immersed in water.

Equipment and AV for stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.42]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

ARCHIMEDES’ PRINCIPLE Law and physico-chemical phenomena: water pressure, hydrostatic law, buoyant force/ buoyancy

Fundamental commentary: Bathyscaph can immerse by gradually increasing its weight, which increases as the ballast tanks are filled with water. From the moment when the buoyant force which acts upright and facing up, exceeds the weight of the vessel, it rises to the surface. The state of balance of buoyant force with the weight of the boat is achieved when the model is navigating at a constant depth under water. When the ballast tanks are completely filled, so that the burden of the boat reaches the value in excess of buoyancy, the vessel sinks to the bottom. This behavior of the bathyscaph stems from the basic law of hydrostatics and aerostatics formulated by Archimedes of Syracuse: " Stating that the upward buoyant force exerted on a body immersed in a fluid is equal to the weight of the fluid the body displaces."

Expanded commentary:

136

According to Pascal's law, that states that pressure exerted anywhere in a confined incompressible fluid is transmitted equally in all directions throughout the fluid such that the pressure ratio (initial difference) remains the same. Pressure forces act perpendicularly to the surface of the body and are acting in the opposite direction from the liquid to the body. The resultant pressure acting on the side walls of the body are balanced, because they act at the same value on all sides. Pressure forces acting vertically do not balance because the force acting on the lower wall is always greater than the one that acts on top of the wall. Pressure acting on the bottom wall is equal to the weight of the column of liquid above the bottom surface of the body. Pressure acting on the upper wall of the body is equal to the weight of the column of liquid above the top surface. The difference between these values was adopted and called buoyant force (BC), which is equal to the weight of liquid at the same volume as the volume of a submerged body. F = ρ fluid * g V submerged body where: fluid ρ - density of the fluid (liquid, gas) g - acceleration due to gravity V submerged body - the volume of the submerged body in the fluid. This equation shows the Archimedes' principle, according to which the body immersed in a fluid loses (apparently) a weight equal to the weight fluid displaced by the body. For a body immersed in a liquid BC = ρ fluid * g V submerged body and the force of gravity Q = ρgV. The difference is that the resultant force R = BC - Q = Vg (ρ fluid - ρ) where ρ - density of the body submerged in the liquid. There are therefore three cases: 1. ρ> ρc - body denser than the liquid R <0 - flesh tone, Q> BC 2. ρ = ρc - R = 0 - the body in equilibrium with the liquid at any depth, Q = BC 3. ρ <ρc - liquid denser than the body R> 0 - the body floats partially submerged, Q

Practical application: Archimedes' principle is used in the construction of ships, submarines, helium balloons, hydrogen or hot air (balloons of this type are characterized by a lower density than the air surrounding them). An interesting way to regulate draft is to observe the fish, which in the course of evolution developed swim bladder acting analogically to the function of the ballast tank in a submarine.

Trivia, history of discovery: According to the legend of King Hieron II of Syracuse asked Archimedes to check whether the crown made for him is pure gold - preferably without damaging it. Archimedes had come up with a solution in a bath. He noted that his weight apparently fell as he entered the bath and plunged into the water. Later that day proved how much pure gold weighs, then ran to the king asked him for the crown, which was submerged in a bucket of water. When calculating how much water was displaced by the crown and by checking how much it should be, if it were made of gold he found that the crown was not pure gold.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - experiment by Archimedes. Requires own production, but also allows for licensed materials. Animation Duration: about 20 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

137

SET OF STATIONS: RESONANCE

Objective: Showing resonance and its potentially destructive power. Scientific and educational value: The phenomenon of resonance is known to people for centuries. In particular, a good understanding of the effects of resonance have residents of houses and blocks, whose apartments are adjacent to busy routes (rail, tram, road through). MRI should not be associated only negative, but to show its potentially destructive power is very impressive - resonance is also the source of many beneficial and "friendly" to the eye and ear phenomena.

Construction of stations - technical description: The kit consists of two illustrative stations: - Acoustic resonance - Mechanical resonance.

The station of the acoustic resonance: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 90.00 cm (L) x 90.00 cm (W) x 90.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / - 10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height. On the counter/top a mounted enclosure with plexi. THK 1.00 cm of dimensions 70.00 cm x 70.00 cm x 60.00 cm (all dimensions: + / -10%). On platform is to be installed an automated feeder: to replace glass. It allows for the replacement wine glasses: glasses are carried by the feeder over the top where open to the eyes of viewers, are acoustically broken. The system should automatically after a given time by the Investor to the time, set new utensils on the platform, and used (broken) remove immediately after breakage. Button on the counter station is to run the feeder. On the platform is to be mounted an acoustic speaker with adjustable frequency - a frequency knob to adjust the speaker to be mounted on the housing of the platform. Inside the platform but outside the changing mechanism of the glass should also be built a container for the broken glass. During final testing of prototypes the right system for the exchange of glasses should be chosen in such a way as to ensure the achievement of the desired effect for the experiment and to ensure high reliability of operation. The visitors have to be able to adjust the speaker, tuning it to the resonant frequency of the utensils. Ensure that periodical inspection is available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 44 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.41. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

The station of the mechanical resonance: For the demonstration of mechanical resonance system, will serve pendulums of different lengths: three rubber balls (balls) mounted one above the other (at a height of not less than 250.00 cm above the floor), to a rigid structure. The design should be made of stainless steel pipe, the recommended target shape: Y " with a bar, diameter: Φ10 ,00- 15, 00cm, diameter of arms: Φ8 ,00-5, 00cm, diameter of the bar: Φ8 ,00-5 00cm (all dimensions: + / -5.00 cm). Tubular structure should have restricted rotation: lower part

138 should be embedded in a wider tubular base firmly attached to the flooring (M20 screws). Limited rotation of a tubular structure, and excitation of pendulums, to be provided through a small rotation of one of the arms with rope (canopy rope) and a steel rack. A user moving the upper part of the steel by means of wire and hanger one way then the other way, should be able to excite the pendulum. The pendulum will thus be the excited element, at that same time. Achieving a high amplitude for a pendulum may be possible in the case of matching the right excitation frequency (You should adjust the frequency in order to enforce the swing of a given pendulum). The space around the structures within a radius of 2.00 m should be separated by bended plexiglass so that the viewer does not have the opportunity to be in the way of balls of the moving pendulum. Located at the junction of the bar, hanger and one of the arms of the structure is to allow the excitation of pendulums by a User standing outside the plexiglass partition. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 44.1. The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.41.1. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stand: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

Plate 1: RESONANCE INSTRUCTIONS 1. Press the button on the top and run the feeder of glasses. Wait until the utensil is set. 2. With knob change the frequency of the sound until the utensil starts to vibrate. 3. Tune knob frequency in such a way that the glass is cracked. WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Resonance is a phenomenon that particularly for civil engineers, can sometimes be extremely harmful. Each building can fall into resonance if the appropriate frequency is used. For this reason, soldiers should not march to the same pattern over a footbridge (though they can go). If the construction of a spinning hall resonates in accordance with the work of the great weaving machines it may collapse. In exceptional cases, some objects can thus destroy by" the mere sound".

Plate 2: RESONANCE INSTRUCTIONS 1. Moving the links steadily and not too fast excite the pendulum to move. 2. Choose one pendulum and adjust the frequency of forced moving so that the amplitude of the pendulum swings as large as possible. WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Resonance is the flow of energy between several excited systems. For there to be resonance there must be the same or close frequency vibration circuits and mechanical connection between the systems. An example of such a system are our hands performing movements in a specific rhythm and the pendulum, which, thanks to this action we have set it in motion.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD 21.5 "with touch pad + PC, 2 sets. [2.50 ts, ts 2.62] - Projector + computer with a projection screen, 1 set of [pr 2.08]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

139

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

RESONANCE Law and physico-chemical phenomena: resonance, vibration, frequency,

Fundamental commentary: Each system or object, such as a wine glass, a glass or a bridge or other structure has a specific structure. Usually, it is very difficult to initiate vibration. However, there are some selected frequencies that stimulate vibration at which the desired result can be achieved very quickly. These are called resonant frequencies that can be observed when the forced oscillation frequency approaches the natural frequency. When the vibration exciting force acts on the body quivering with the appropriate frequency, the vibration amplitude can reach a very high value even at low power enforcement. If one wanted to cause a massive stone to swing on a rope, the forcing frequency is equal to two finger pushes per second may be futile, but sometimes one movement, with the same force at the time of four seconds can give you the desired effect.

Expanded commentary: Resonance is a physical phenomenon that is manifested by a sharp increase in the amplitude of the oscillations in a situation when forced vibration frequency gets closer to (is the same) as the vibration frequency. The condition for resonance is equal periods of vibration of own resonating bodies. The phenomenon of resonance is characteristic of all types of vibrations and waves. A plot of the amplitude of the oscillation frequency of the force that enforces them is called the resonance curve. When the a vibration exciting force acts on the body quivering with the appropriate frequency, the vibration amplitude can reach a very high value - even at low power enforcement. Sometimes an oscillator with very low vibration damping is activated at a frequency close to its resonant frequency, and then the system periodically collects and emits energy by changing the amplitude of the cycle. This occurs as a result of the submission of the two vibrations of similar frequencies to periodically change amplitude - beat. Beats are observed for all types of vibration, including also induced waves.

Practical application: Resonance occurs widely in nature and is used in many devices designed by man. Resonance has countless applications. Electric resonance systems are used every time you select a specific radio channel or TV. MRI is of great importance for the process of developing and sound reinforcement in musical instruments such as acoustic guitars. Resonance can be felt, can be checked, for example, by applying anear to the different lengths of pipes. Each of them sounds different, because it only reinforces its own proper sound waves at a frequency in accordance with the resonant frequency of the tube. The phenomenon of resonance we can encounter while travelling on a bus: at a certain angular velocity of rotation of the motor begins to vibrate body parts, mirrors. The phenomenon of resonance must remember even the soldier so that the footbridge through which they march, does not collapse.

Trivia, history of discovery: Resonance was first investigated and described by Galileo during experiments with coupled pendulums. A spectacular example of resonant vibration stimulation was the bridge disaster in Tacoma, USA (1940). The perpetrator, of the disaster turned out to be the wind (and

140 design errors), which led to such vibrations of the construction, after which it collapsed into the river. Fortunately no one was hurt as a result of the construction disaster, but today it is a warning to engineers, none of whom wants to design "Galloping Gerta" (the nickname given to the crossing).

Animations, Graphics: Animations prepared in combined 2d-3d technology are required for the schematic showing of the overlap of the two frequencies and the formation of acoustic resonance. Animation Duration: 30 seconds. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. These animations will be displayed on the touch screen [ts 2.50].

Separate animations prepared in combined 2d-3d technology are required as wellas a fictionalized film with elements of animation showing: - Overlap of the two frequencies and the emergence of mechanical resonance, - Construction disasters that have occurred as a result of mechanical resonance. The total duration of the animation and film: about 5 minutes. We recommend the use of archives and documentaries. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. Animations will be displayed on the touch monitor [ts 2.50]. The film will be presented in the form of a looped projection using a projector [pr 2.08].

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: RUTHERFORD SCATTERING

Objective: To illustrate the principles of Rutherford, who showed the existence of the atomic nucleus. Scientific and educational value: "Rutherford scattering" is an experience that led to the overthrow of Thomson's theory of atomic structure (model "plum-pudding") and led to the creation of a new model of atomic structure. "Rutherford scattering" is one of the most important milestones in the development of science. The conclusions of this experiment is the basis of the whole of modern nuclear physics.

Construction of stations - technical description: The station must be arranged on an area measuring 8-10m x 2-3m (in plan view). Elements of stations: - Stand with a rapid firing carbine using plastic balls - height-adjustable carbine and adjustable angle, adjustable angle should be limited: adapted to the dimensions of the wall located on the opposite side of the station (not be possible to launch balls out beyond the wall - eg towards the viewer), height- adjustments of rifle/ carbine should be able at station (and with rifle) by children and adults; carbine should be provided with an automatic module loading (rate and charging mechanism should be established at the stage of final testing of prototypes, in such a way that the device does not jam making it safe for the user and it was impossible to prevent any of its elements by the user, including ammunition (swallowing), tripod supporting carbine - made of sheet steel, painted black - may be of stainless steel; - Spherical shield (rubber or other non-elastic inelastic material) with a diameter of 2-3 cm with LED light, attached to floor and ceiling with linkages (steel wire jacketed, Φ 0.50 cm) shield should be placed at a distance of 500 -700cm from

141

the rifle rack, on the floor near to the shield should be painted a scale, showing the angles of rebound of the balls - on the scale it should be noted angles: 00, 450,900; scale area must be clearly marked - different colors; - Retaining wall plastic balls that do not hit the target - THK. 2-3 cm, height 250 cm, curved, set on both sides of the spherical shield, the wall should be anchored to the floor (bolts and clamps - stainless steel), wall provide must ensure rebounding of all the balls that do not hit the target, at the stage of prototype testing you have to set the wall lining from the inside (inside the station) additional material that provides springy rebounding (eg, rubber, foam) - the material should be selected to provide rebounding of balls from the wall safe for spectators ( rebounding balls can not get out of the zone by separate wall , reduced thresholds and floor with a slope); - The floor with a slope (1 °) enables balls rolling towards the station of the rifle, with a threshold (h = 10.00 cm-15, 00cm, s = 6.00 cm) separating the floor from viewers, thresholds should be installed around the perimeter of station (except for an area with the plexiglass wall) material for the floor: 2 x THK.12mm OSB or composite boards; material for the thresholds: coated aluminum profiles or composite joists; - Separation of the station from the audience - tape stretched on poles on both sides of the floor, allowed as an alternative separation of the station from spectators will be a wall of plexiglass; poles: Stainless steel, diameter of bars: 65 mm, diameter: 35.00 cm, height: 100 , 00cm (all dimensions: + / -10%) mounting tape, tape color: red. The station is to be "calibrated" so that the possibility of hitting the bull's-eye was the probability of no more than 0.2-0.4 (where one- is certain, 0- is impossible). Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 40 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.15. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

RUTHERFORD SCATTERING INSTRUCTIONS 1. Point carbine in order to hit a ball in the center of the target. 2. Once you hit the target note the angular scale the ball is arranged on the scale beneath the target. 3. How often did you manage to hit the target? Do you hit the shield/target more often than not? 4. At what angular scale most often did your ball rebound off target? At what angular scale did it rebound the bull's-eye, and on what scale when you hit a place further away from the center? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Hitting the target is not easy. Even more difficult is to hit the bull's-eye. Whether you hit the center or to the side shield is indicated by the angle of the rebound of the ball. In the same way as you with the shield, Ernest Rutherford bombarded a very thin foil made of gold with alpha particles. He discovered in this way that the atom is not uniform: other than places where matter is concentrated (atomic nuclei) there is vast "emptiness." Hit the nucleus of an atom with alpha particles is much more difficult than hitting a target with ball fired from a rifle.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.15].

142

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

RUTHERFORD SCATTERING Law and physico-chemical phenomena: Rutherford's experiment, the structure of the atom, the nucleus of the atom, ionizing radiation

Fundamental commentary: "Rutherford scattering" is one of the most fundamental and cutting-edge experiments in physics. With it was possible the rapid development of physical sciences throughout the twentieth and twenty-first century, this experience has proved the existence of the atomic nucleus, and overthrew the whole model accepted at that time of the build of an atom: a model of Thomson's "cakes of raisins." Thomson's model is based on the theory of the structure of matter, which suggested that atoms are made up of microscopic objects that are distributed evenly throughout the atom. "Shooting" to such an atom with alpha particles Rutherford and his colleagues had expected that after going through all the gold foil the alpha particles will continue to fly the original track, with only small deviations. Imagine their surprise when they observed particles that were rebounding in very different angles. It was then understood that the atom is not uniform in its structure: the center of an almost "empty" atom is a small core with a large mass - the atomic nucleus.

Expanded commentary: Rutherford's model, which is now, after some modifications, the accepted model of the atom, was created as a result of studies carried out in 1909, the results of experiments with bombing a very thin layer of gold foil by alpha particles (helium nuclei). He relayed the theory of Joseph John Thomson, who assumed that each atom consists of a homogeneous, positively charged sphere which contains a uniformly distributed and negatively charged electrons (stacked like raisins in a cake). If Thomson's model of the atom was true, then the alpha particles should penetrate the foil without much difficulty, and the path of the alpha particles as a result of a collision with gold atom would be a small deviation. However as a result of the experiment it was found, that the deviation off path of some (too many) of the alpha particles was much larger than expected, and some, after rebounding, returned to the source of radiation. This meant that the atom does not have a uniform structure: it has a clear, concentrated core of a relatively large mass of positively charged - nucleus (Rutherford called its "central charge"). Since a large amount of particles passed through the foil with almost no disturbance, positive medium must be sufficiently small compared to the size of atom. Rutherford carried out experiments to conclude that beyond a small, positively charged "central charge" within the atom is mostly void, and only as large as the dimensions of the atom, a long distance from the nucleus are arranged negative charges - electrons (discovered earlier by Thomson). In developing this theory further concluded that, for the negatively charged electrons and positively charged atomic nucleus, "not crash" into each other due to magnetization, the electrons must be in constant orbital motion around the nucleus. This model of atomic structure reappears in association with the planetary system.

Practical application: The discovery of the atomic nucleus gave birth to nuclear physics: today it is often negatively associated with risks and disasters such as the Chernobyl disaster or nuclear war. But due to the experiments and research of Rutherford we can enjoy the benefits of

143 nuclear power plants, nuclear drive, nuclear medicine, and a whole enormous mass of equipment that use energy secreted during nuclear transformations.

Trivia, history of discovery: The experiments on the scattering of alpha particles at gold foil by Ernest Rutherford were carried out in 1909, along with his students: Hans Geiger and Ernest Marsden. Results of tests of the conducted experiments and new "planetary" model of the Rutherford atom were presented to the public in 1911, and to this year is considered to be the date of the discovery of the atomic nucleus. Ernest Rutherford was so astonished with the results of the experiment that he used to later say, "it was as if you fired a fifteen inch missile at a piece of tissue paper, and the bullet bounced off it and hit you." The gold foil, which Rutherford bombarded with alpha particles, had a thickness of about 10-7m - equivalent to about four layers of gold atoms. The source of alpha particles used in the Rutherford experiment was the element polonium 214Po. The velocity of alpha particle with an energy of 5,5 MeV is, about 15,000 km / s

Rutherford's "Planetary" model of the atom is a very popular image. It is used as a symbol of nuclear power plants and the logos of many organizations involved in the exploration and use of nuclear energy, including: International Atomic Energy Agency.

Animations, Graphics:

Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technology are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - The scheme used in the experiment by Ernest Rutherford (source of alpha, lead collimators, gold foil, screen, microscope to observe the scintillation on the screen), "motion" of alpha particles, alpha particles going through atom, and the rebounding of some of them from the nucleus of an atom from a different angle ; - The construction of the atom: a model of Thomas, model ("planetary") Rutherford, Bohr's model Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. Animation Duration: about 180 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: MOVEMENT OF CHARGES IN AN ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD

Objective: Experimental show of the movement of charges in the electromagnetic field. Scientific and educational value: The station is designed to show the forces of Coulomb and Lorentz in action. The whole experiment will be shown on the example of the electron gun - devices that have been around for decades is / was the basic element of displays. Interactive element at the station is the ability to change the track "flights" of electrons.

Construction of stations - technical description: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 90.00 cm (L) x 50.00 cm (W) x 90.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / - 10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height.

144

On the side of the platform at its own experimental station to put two knobs: to adjust the strength of the electric field and to adjust the strength of the electromagnetic field. Experiment station proper, enclosed with a housing with plexiglass cover (thickness 1 cm), things placed on the platform will consist of: - electron gun - A metal plaque (-) with electron gates - Metal plates under voltage (+) - Fluorescence shield - Electromagnets generating magnetic fields with measure. Interior built with plexiglass to be filled with thin gas. Gate for the electrons should be located in the line of the electron gun. Magnets (with scale) deflecting the electron trajectory should be attached behind the gate for the electrons. The fluorescence shield should be attached to the wall of the housing from the inside. Ensure that periodical inspection is available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 38 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.20. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate: MOVEMENT OF CHARGES IN AN ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD INSTRUCTIONS 1. Using knobs change the path of the electron and observe the fluorescence shield. 2. What effect on the flight path of electrons does a change of: electric and magnetic fields have? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? The electron gun fires a stream of electrons, which is directed in the right direction on the screen. The movement of electrons (speed, direction) is affected by the electromagnetic field and changes in the field.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.20]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

MOVEMENT OF CHARGES IN AN ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD Law and physico-chemical phenomena: electric field, magnetic field, electromagnetic field, electromagnetic induction, the movement of electric charges

Fundamental commentary: Detailed description of the movement of charges in the electromagnetic field is included in the equations of Maxwell - made by him in 1861 .In his first description of Maxwell's equations which were actually a set of ten equations forming the system of equations. Later, this provision had been simplified and is now recorded as a set of four equations, called: Faraday's law of electromagnetic induction, the law of Ampère, Gauss's law for electricity and Gauss’s law for magnetism. Movement of a charge in an electromagnetic field can be divided into two components: electric and magnetic. Electrical component running in the direction of the load and is

145 responsible for the increase in speed of movement to it, and the magnetic component is responsible for the change in movement of the load and does not change its speed.

Expanded commentary: Description of the movement of charges in the electromagnetic field is included in the equations of Maxwell - made by him in 1865 A feature of electric charges is capability of producing electric and magnetic fields, and the interacting with them. In the electromagnetic field on the motion of electric charge acts the Lorentz force F = q E + qv × B Where "E" is the intensity of the electric field, "B" the intensity of the magnetic field, "q" is the value of a moving charge in the electromagnetic field, and "v" is the velocity of the load. As you can see from the equation given above, the movement of charge in an electromagnetic field can be divided into two components: the electric and magnetic qE QVB. Electrical component acts in the direction of movement of the load and is responsible for the increase in moving speed of it, while the magnetic component is responsible for the change of movement of the load, but does not change its speed. According to Coulomb's law the magnitude of the Electrostatics force of interaction between two point charges is directly proportional to the scalar multiplication of the magnitudes of charges and inversely proportional to the square of the distances between them. The charge moving in a magnetic field is force proportional to its value, velocity and magnetic field induction. The direction is perpendicular to the direction of movement of the charge and to the magnetic field lines. The movement of particles in the field of variable intensity must take into account the phenomenon of the electric field due to changes in the magnetic field and the formation of the magnetic field due to changes in the electric field.

Practical application: The laws of motion of electric charges in the electromagnetic field, contained in Maxwell's theory and its expanded version from Lorentz describe the motion of particles in both man-made devices, as well as in nature. In nature, most often one can observe the movement of electrical charges in the form of aurora borealis. With the formulation and application of Maxwell's laws and Lorentz equations, we were able to construct power grids, radio, mobile phones, microwave ovens. Movement of loads in electrical cables is the basic phenomenon through which the current flows. The movement of electrical charges in antennas of mobile networks and mobile phones allow us to communicate with each other at a distance. The use of moving charges in electromagnetic fields led to improvements in televisions. Known to all CRT (now superseded by LCD) is nothing but a tube with an electron gun. The monitors of this type used electron guns emit an electron beam that magnetically deflected ( due to the electrostatic deflection from coils, horizontal and vertical) fell on the phosphor to emit light arousing him. The electron gun is also an element of electron microscopes, electron source in particle accelerators. Establishing of this plant in Łódź, where you are, is also due to the practical application of the laws that govern the motion of electric charges.

Trivia, history of discovery: The movement of electrical charges have been observed since the dawn of history. The most spectacular example is lightning. Even in ancient times men could produce small electrical discharges rubbing amber with wool. In the middle of the eighteenth century for the first time one was able to scientifically describe the interaction between the two charges - Coulomb force.

146

Further research on the electrical charges and their movements have led to more general laws governing the movement of charges, such as Gauss's law (1835) and Faraday's law of induction (1831) but it was only in 1865, James Clerk Maxwell formulated the general rules of the charges in electromagnetic field, which in the late nineteenth century, Hendrik Antoon Lorentz gave the dependence on the Lorentz force which determines the movement of charges in the electromagnetic field. Hendrik Lorentz was a Dutch physicist. In 1925, in his lifetime, the Royal Dutch Academy of Arts and Sciences established the Lorentz Medal - awarded to this day every four years to a prominent physicists theorists.

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - The impact of electromagnetic fields on the movement of electrical charge - showing the effect of the impact of electric and magnetic component. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. Animation Duration: 30 seconds.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES – MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS

Objective: Demonstration of the operation of Maxwell’s law. Scientific and educational value: Electromagnetic waves, hence: magnetic fields, electric fields, light... these are some of the basic concepts of physics. With the knowledge of these laws we can enjoy the benefits of electricity.

Construction of stations - technical description: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 140.00 cm (L) x 50.00 cm (W) - All dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height. counter/top height: 75.00 cm, height of the stand: 205.00 cm (all dimensions: + / - 10%). Attached to the platform should be: - Transmitter: piezoelectric spark, - Receiver: diode set, - construction mechanism (crank, rolls, links - all stainless steel components) allows movement (up - down) the receiver to the transmitter. A set of diodes should be mounted in such a way that a spectator standing on either side of the station without any problem would noticed changes in light intensity. Piezo igniter should be connected to two wires with a length of 50.00 cm with a button on the landing. All items placed on the counter/top of the station should be enclosed by plexiglass THK.0 ,50-0, 70 cm. Ensure that periodical inspection is available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stations: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 35 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.19. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

147

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES INSTRUCTIONS 1. Press the button on the platform. 2. Turn the crank and change the position of the light bulb. 3. How does the power of the light bulbs change, depending on the distance from the magneto? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? The electric current flowing through the electrodes generates a magnetic field. The electric field and magnetic field support each other and move in space, creating an electromagnetic wave. One type of such a wave is light. One of the greatest achievements of nineteenth century physics was to understand and explain the interaction between electric charges, conductors with current and magnetic fields. Full description of these phenomena introduced in 1861, James Clerk Maxwell in the form of "Maxwell's laws."

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.19]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES- MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS Law and physico-chemical phenomena: electromagnetic wave, Maxwell's equations, electromagnetic field

Fundamental commentary: Alternating magnetic field produces an alternating electric field and vice versa: a variable electric field is a source of alternating magnetic field. These fields mutually sustain each other and move, creating an electromagnetic wave. Full description of these phenomena was introduced in 1861, by James Clerk Maxwell in the form of "Maxwell's laws." In his first description of Maxwell's equations were actually a set of ten equations forming the system of equations. Later, this provision had been simplified and is now recorded as a set of four equations, called: Faraday's law of electromagnetic induction, the law Ampère, Gauss's law for electricity and Gauss’s law for magnetism. One type of electromagnetic wave is light. Maxwell's equations first showed that Newtonian mechanics is incompatible with the optic, electrical and magnetic phenomena. This ultimately led to the formulation of the Special Theory of Relativity.

Expanded commentary: According to Maxwell's equations variable electric field gives rise to an alternating magnetic field, which in turn gives rise to an alternating electric field, etc. The formation of alternate stations: the magnetic and electric propagates in a space in the form of electromagnetic waves. A full description of these fields was first formulated in 1861,by James Clerk Maxwell, but a few decades earlier André Marie Ampère formulated a law defining the size of the magnetic field produced by the conductor of electric current, and Michael Faraday discovered that the changing magnetic field produces an electric field. Maxwell proved that rather than thinking separately about the electric and magnetic fields, it should be considered together as one field: electromagnetic. At the same time

148

Maxwell in his works showed that the speed of propagation of disturbances of this field is equal to the speed of light. Maxwell proved the fact that light, so far considered as a separate phenomenon, is in fact an electromagnetic wave and may be produced by the movement of electric charges. From Maxwell's equations can be derived among other things wave equations of the electromagnetic wave and determine the speed of the wave propagating (expanding) in a vacuum (the speed of light). Maxwell's achievements in a very significant way contributed to the formulation of the Special Theory of Relativity.

Practical application: Knowledge and application of Maxwell's equations formed the basis of the so-called. "Second Industrial Revolution", which in the late nineteenth and early twentieth century led to the widespread use of electricity. By using Maxwell's equations can be constructed devices, such as an electric motor, radio, telephone, light bulb. It's hard to imagine the modern world without a car, subway, railway, computers, DVD players, without refrigerators, dishwashers, washing machines. Some of these inventions date back more than 100 years: despite improvements and modifications their operation remains the same. Note that the first transmission and reception of electromagnetic waves other than light in the spectral range was done by Heinrich Hertz in 1886. His experiment is considered the discovery of the electromagnetic waves and confirmed Maxwell's theory. On the basis of Maxwell's theory and Hertz's experiments two engineers and inventors Nicola Tesla and Guglielmo Marconi constructed in the late nineteenth century, the first radios.

Trivia, history of discovery: The phenomenon of electricity was already known in antiquity: it was observed only as attracting small wooden objects by rubbed amber. In the sixteenth century, William Gilbert introduced the concept of electric forces (gr. electron - amber). In 1729, the English scientist Stephen Gray divided bodies into insulators and conductors, in 1734, Frenchman Charles du Fay said there are two types of electric charge: positive (created in rubbed glass) and negative (formed in rubbed ebonite). In 1785, Charles Augustin de Coulomb formulated the law describing the impact of incumbent electric charges. Of great practical importance in the development research of electricity and its use, are the inventions of Alessandro Volta: capacitor (1782) and electrical cell (1800). Rapid development of research on the electrical phenomena occurred in the first half of the nineteenth century: in 1820, Christien Hans Oersted discovered the reciprocal influence of electric and magnetic phenomena, in 1821 Andre Marie Ampere discovered the interaction of magnetic circuits through which current flows in 1826 r . Georg Simon Ohm defined the relationship between the output current and voltage in a circuit. In 1831, Michael Faraday discovered electromagnetic induction (Faraday's law of electromagnetic induction) and, self induction, then built the first electric generator and the electric motor. Gustav Robert Kirchhoff formulated the basic laws of electric currents in circuits (Kirchhoff's law). The exact formulation of the fundamental laws of classical electrodynamics, were given in 1864, by James Clerk Maxwell (Maxwell's equations), and in 1886, Heirich Rudolf Hertz discovered provided for by Maxwell, electromagnetic waves. In 1897, Joseph John Thomson discovered the electron - an elementary particle responsible for the conduction of electricity in metals, in 1909, Robert Andrews Millikan set the size of the elementary charge. In 1905, Albert Einstein explained the magnetic phenomena as relativistic effects caused by the movement of electric charges (special relativity). The highest speed can reach an electromagnetic wave in a vacuum: it is the speed of light in vacuum, amounting to 299 792 458 m / s

149

Animations, Graphics: Animations and presentations in combined 2d-3d technique are required to illustrate the issues addressed in the narrative: - The moving pattern of the electromagnetic wave. Animation Duration: about 20 seconds. Required is a video or 3d animation illustrating the operation of the Crookes mill. The duration of the movie / animation about 10 seconds. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: GYROSCOPE

Objective: Demonstration of the principle of conservation of angular momentum. Scientific and educational value: The principle of conservation of angular momentum is the third (along with the principle of conservation of energy and momentum) conservation principle applied in physics. Show illustrates the phenomenon based on the working prototype of the gyroscope.

Construction of stations - technical description: The station has been designed as a rotating platform Φ60, 00cm. Substructure made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Side cover: steel THK 0, 7cm, powder coated, gray, gloss. Platform coverage: corrugated aluminum sheet, thickness. 0.40 cm. On platform is mounted an armchair with reinforced construction, leather-covered, with both sides fastening seat belts with height adjustment (height adjustment: screw M12, 4.00 units) and with adjustable angle backrest. On the opposite side of the seat should be installed near - with gearbox and electric motor. In front of the seat is mounted steering wheel – gear stick (Φ5 steel tube, 00cm), deflecting gyroscope at a specified angle. Changing the direction of rotation of the station - by using the steering wheel. The gyroscope will be powered by electricity 230 V - and operated only by a member of staff. In addition in the station, at a distance, should be provided a pulpit for switching on and off the power - protected against unauthorized access. Using the station will be possible only in the presence of a member of staff. A safety zone should be provided around the stand: a space free of people (viewers) other than the users of the station. The unit must be stable and firmly embedded in the ground. During construction of the prototype it is necessary to adopt and apply sufficiently lots of safety factors. Ensure that periodical inspection is available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stations: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 67 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.45.1. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

GYROSCOPE INSTRUCTIONS

150

1. Sit on a chair and buckle up. Ask the service to run the gyro. Try to change direction with stick. 2. Try to change the angle of inclination of the seat with stick. What do you feel? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? The higher the rotational speed of the gyro, the better it maintains its position in the plane of rotation. The angular momentum allows to maintain its stable station To change the position of the gyroscope must be applied appropriate strength e.g. inclining it – this way so-called. torque is formed. You can then feel the resistance of the gyroscope - because it is resisting changing the position. Reducing speed causes shaking of the system and reeling of ever-increasing circles.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.19] - Monitor 23'' + PC, 2 sets. [Mn 2.14 mn 2.15]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

GYROSCOPE Law and physico-chemical phenomena: the principle of conservation of angular momentum, moment of force

Fundamental commentary: A gyroscope is a device for measuring or maintaining angular position. The device uses a rapidly rotating disk, which keeps its position in the plane of rotation. The reason for this behavior is the presence of angular momentum. The higher the rotation speed of the gyro, the more stable it remains in place (the better, it maintains its position in the plane of rotation). The position of the rapidly rotating disk of the gyro cannot be impacted or changed by even, the most articulated and bearing pivot. To change the position of your gyro must be applied appropriate strength e.g. inclining it – thus forming so-called. torque. You can then feel the resistance of the gyroscope - because it’s resisting the changing of position. Reducing speed causes shaking of the system and the reeling of ever-increasing circles. This phenomenon is called precession.

Expanded commentary: The rotation equivalent of physical quantities (momentum, force) have their moments (angular momentum, moment of force). Traditional gyros were built primarily as a high speed spinning of a wheel or disk mounted on a frame that allowed it to change its station at any level. After ramping up your momentum allows you to maintain its stable position. Operation of the torque forces resulting from the high-speed rotating object, to maintain a constant plane of rotation, regardless of changes in the position of the rack, on which the disk is mounted. When the gyro is in a stable position, then there is no torque, which determines the motion of the system. When you add weight on one side of the gyroscope, the moment is created , causing that as you decelerate, angular momentum decreases as well. Movement at a continual lower speed will increase shaking of the gyro, this motion is called precession. When you change the position of the gyroscope, e.g. turning, which means changing the torque and angular momentum - the result will be a turn on the side. Due to this behavior of the gyroscope it is possible to use it for navigation devices: any deviation from the specified direction may in fact be signaled. By analogy with the traditional gyro, gyroscopes are also called systems in advanced and miniaturized electronics, such as motion sensors in digital cameras - to preserve the

151 stability and performance of the same high quality photos or built as integrated circuits, sensors, gestures (e.g. smile) installations in digital cameras. In contrast to the conventional gyroscope these devices utilize vibrations and so-called mass center.so- called Coriolis force (for determining the speed of the whole system around a selected axis).

Practical application: The most important use of the gyroscope is to use it as part of gyro-compass: navigation devices used in aircraft, ships, and even tanks. Gyroscopic instrument used in aircraft is an artificial horizon - is used to determine the position of the plane (the angle and tilt) relative to the plane of the local horizon. A gyroscope in the device is powered by an electric current. On gyroscopes - trainers astronauts are tested in order to see how they cope in a state where they do not know which way is up / down and the other directions. A typical example of the everyday use of the gyro effect is the bike. Wheels act as gyroscopes: the faster you can go the easier it is to maintain balance. The device contains in itself gyroscopes, among others, Segway PT, or , two-wheeled electric vehicle. Toys that use gyroscopic phenomenon is known to all as tops when wound remains in one position. The effect of the gyro was used in the construction of the device powerball - used for rehabilitation and exercising joints of the hands. Gyroscopic properties retain bullets fired from a gun rifle.

Trivia, history of discovery: Gyroscope was invented by French scientist Jean Foucault in 1851. Originally this device was to dispel any doubts about the recently performed experiments with the Foucault pendulum , of which behavior is proof of the rotation of the earth. The model presented by the scholar consisted of a disk surrounded by a torus, which can move in any axis. Gyro name comes from a combination of two Greek words - "gyros" that turn and "Scopos" or observe. The behavior of a gyroscope comes from the principle of angular momentum and a lot of rotating bodies have "gyroscopic properties." Earth is also a gyroscope, that constantly rotates around an axis inclined at 66o30' to orbit. This phenomenon occurs with the movement of most celestial bodies. Also, the Earth's axis is such a phenomenon by gravitational interactions with the Sun and the Moon. This causes, inter alia, the so-called shifting. Point of Aries (the intersection of the ecliptic and the celestial equator) and changes in the star designating landmark north direction (not always been, and will be the North Star!).

Animations, Graphics: Required are two animations prepared in combined of 2d-3d technique to illustrate: - Operation of the gyroscope, - Bullet with threaded outlet tube. The duration of each animation: about 10 seconds. Required fiction movies showing the use of gyroscopic effect (looped projection on screens 2.14 mn and 2.15 mn): - Ride a segway, - Indicate the artificial horizon while flying in an aircraft. The duration of each of the films: about 30 seconds. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

152

STAND: - THE LAWS OF IDEAL GAS - ISOTHERMAL, ISOBARIC, ISOCHORIC TRANSFORMATION

Objective: Presentation of the laws of ideal gas. Scientific and educational value: The demonstration of thermal expansion of gas, a practical illustration of thermodynamic changes in gas, imaging the laws of ideal gas.

Construction of stations - technical description: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 100.00 cm (L) x 30.00 cm (W) x 75.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated ,gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height. In the middle will be installed on the counter/top a model of a Stirling engine, painted respectively in order to facilitate understanding of the phenomenon. Cylinder "cold" should be painted with water based on the color # 025669 (RGB in hex), and the cylinder "hot" paint color # A52019. The pistons should be connected to the crankshaft, so that the piston in the cylinder is ahead of the piston in the warm cylinder cold for 1/4 cycle of movement. On the counter is mounted a incandescent bulb - as a heat source. Allow purchase of finished engine model. Cylinder "cold", is to be kept cooled non-stop throughout the exhibition (i.e. during visiting hours), and "warm" is to be run by the Visitors by way of a timer switch/button (time to be determined at the stage of testing the prototype), located in the housing of the station. Engine model is to be encased in transparent plexi. 0.70 cm. The enclosure should be designed so that visitors could set in motion a flywheel device, but do not have the possibility of inserting any objects inside and not be exposed to health risks (e.g. by inserting fingers between the spokes of the flywheel or burnt by heat source). Ensure that periodical inspection is available to all elements of the station. Conceptual drawing of stations: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 53 The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.30. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

LAWS OF IDEAL GAS - ISOTHERMIC, ISOBARIC, ISOCHORIC INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Press the button "heating" hot "cylinder". Wait until the engine warms up. 2. Turn the handwheel towards you. 3. Observe the engine using the temperature difference between the cylinders. 4. At what temperature difference does the engine stop working? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Stirling engine is an engine which works "on air". The device operates using a differencein temperature between the two cylinders: blue ("cold"), and red ("hot").

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.39] - Projector + computer, 1 set. [Pr 2.06]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

153

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

LAWS OF IDEAL GAS - ISOTHERMIC, ISOBARIC, ISOCHORIC Law and physico-chemical phenomena: Laws of ideal, the concept of efficiency, expansion of gases, gas conversion.

Fundamental commentary: Eat engine operates on the same principle as the combustion, but instead of an explosion of the fuel mixture in the cylinder, resulting in pushing the piston in the cylinder, the piston heat engine works as a result of changes in temperature of the working gas (in this case air). This is because hot air expands and increases its volume, and cold "shrinks". The heated air pushes the piston in the engine to the top of the cylinder, while the working gas moves to the cooling zone, of the cold cylinder, where the gas reduces its volume. This in turn causes an effect opposite to the previous one, that is, pushing the piston further down into the cylinder and pushing the hot gas to the top of the cylinder. The system returns to its original state and the cycle repeats itself. Heat engine clearly shows the dependence of the gas pressure on the volume and temperature. This relationship was described in 1934 by Benoît Clapeyron'a.

Expanded commentary: To describe the relationship between the gas temperature (T), pressure (p) and its volume (V) this equation was adopted and formulated in 1934 by Benoît Clapeyron'a called the equation of the state of an ideal gas. p V = n R T where: n - the number indicating the quantity of gas, R - the so-called. universal gas constant (constant physical). This equation was developed adopting should hypothetically idealized model of the gas, thus "perfect", be characterized by the following features: ideal gas consists of moving particles/molecules; particles collide with each other and with the walls of the vessel in which they are located; there is no intermolecular interactions in the gas, except at the moment of collision of particles; volume (size) of the particles are ignored; particle collisions are perfectly elastic. Any, change in the thermodynamic system of gas, causes thermodynamic transformation. Such transformations can occur both during the continuous change of certain physical parameters describing the gases as well as for their constancy. We can differentiate the following transformation of gases: isobaric (constant pressure p = const) isothermal (constant temperature T = const) isochoric (constant volume V = const) adiabatic heat (no heat exchange with the environment Q = 0) polytropic (PVN = const, where n - polytropic exponent) A technical device, which uses a direct relationship between the above-mentioned parameters of the gas is the heat engine, developed by Robert Stirling. It is a machine used to convert thermal energy into mechanical energy without the internal combustion process. Engine operation consists of four thermodynamic cycles, two of them are isothermal transformation (at constant temperature) and two isochoric (at constant volume).

Practical application:

154

Today, the Stirling engine is most commonly used in thermal power generation and renewable energy to produce electricity. Current engines allow warm air to operate at a relatively low temperature difference as low as about 1 ° C, between the heat source and the environment. However, the efficiency of these engines with the temperature difference is very small, it increases with the temperature difference.

Trivia, history of discovery: Stirling engine was invented and patented in 1816 by Robert Stirling. The first time it was used in the Scottish Ayrshire in 1818 to drive the water pump in the mine. Unfortunately, due to defects in materials available at that time, the engine worked only two years, after which it was replaced by a steam engine. Revival of interest in the Stirling engine came in the 1920s thanks to the Dutch company Philips, which was looking for a simple and light engine for a radio that does not require electricity. This was supported by the emergence after World War I of a steel resistant to high temperatures. But it was only in 1947, after ten years of work, a small engine with a power of 30 hp, with a speed of 3000 revolutions per minute, and therefore as efficient as an internal combustion engine was introduced. Another result of this work was a small engine that worked for over 2000 hours. without any obvious damage. The drive concept with a Stirling engine returned in the late 1960's and 1970's, mainly due to rising oil prices. Then the first prototype bus-powered by Stirling was created, but the introduction of this type of engine into production after the oil crisis further remained unprofitable. Stirling engines have had a major impact on the structure of today's conventional submarines. First of all, they extended the time in which they can stay submerged. The first ship powered by Stirling was a Swedish ship Gotland, the heart (during submersion) are two Stirling engines. Thanks to them she can stay for two weeks in total immersion and sail at a speed of 5 knots. The efficiency of these engines is approximately 40%.

Animations, Graphics: Required are, prepared animations of combined 2d-3d technique to illustrate the principle of the Stirling engine.

Animation Duration: about 20 seconds. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. Required is a fictionalized film with elements of animation presenting the history and practice of the Stirling engine - for presentation in the form of a looped projection using a projector [pr 2.06]. Duration: about 3 minutes.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: OPTICAL LINE

Objective: Presentation of the principles of optical geometry. Scientific and educational value: Demonstration of light rays, the principles of reflected light, the practical use of optical geometry.

Construction of stations - technical description: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 170.00 cm (L) x 170.00 cm (W) x 75.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated ,gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height.

155

Be mounted on top of the platform a separate place for the game - experiment. The playing area’s dimensions of 150,00 cm x 150,00 cm, should be graphically divided into smaller areas / squares with dimensions of 10cm x 10 cm. The playing field should be separated along the perimeter by a border(plywood coated cloth) so high that the rays do not extend over the edges. At one extreme field fit a continuous monochromatic light source and start button, the shutter is so set as to allow emission of thin and bright beams of light. Station should be equipped with: - Mirrors 8,00-10,00 cm diameter: 30 pcs sided, 12 pcs bilateral embedded vertically in the stands with brackets, with the possibility of rotation of 45 ° (half mirror) or 22.5 ° (half mirror) - Lock (prevention): 25 pcs - 5 pcs blocking completely (full wooden cubes), 5 pcs translucent passing "diagonally" in both directions (wooden cubes with hollow tunnels), 5 pcs translucent in a straight line both directions, 5 pcs translucent straight line in one direction, the base and sides of the lock should have a diameter 8,00-10,00 cm - Objective: a small prism or sphere with a diameter of 8,00-10,00 cm. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 66.1. The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.36. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

OPTICAL LINE INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Switch on light source with button 2. Set obstacles anywhere on the board (wooden cubes) and the target (prism, sphere). 3. Set the mirror on the board in such a way that the beam of light reaches targets avoiding the obstacles. WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? A thin beam of light in a homogeneous medium (one whose properties do not change at any point) runs in straight lines. On the border centers (air - mirror), the reflection and refraction of light.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.45]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

OPTICAL LINE Law and physico-chemical phenomena: ray of light, geometrical optics, reflection, real image, virtual image

Fundamental commentary: Geometrical optics is a branch of optics, in which the key role is played by the concept of the light rays. It is defined as an infinitely thin beam. In a complex medium (i.e., one whose properties do not change at any point) light-beam-runs in straight lines, while at the border of media it reflects or refracts.

156

A reflection occurs when the boundary of two media changes the direction of light, but remains in the medium in which it propagated originally. Law of reflection says that the angle of reflection equals the angle radius of the incident and they are in the same plane. The mirror is an optical instrument, the purpose of which is to reflect waves. Mirrors can be divided according to shape: flat, concave and convex. Real image is formed if, after reflection from the mirror light rays intersect. And we get as a result of the apparent intersection of the extensions of the real rays. The flat mirror resulting image is apparent, unturned and the same size. The image is displayed in a concave mirror is the image of an apparent when the subject is closer than the focal length, and when the subject is further away, you get the real picture.

Expanded commentary: Geometric optics is an optical phenomena explained by using the concept of the radius. It is defined as an infinitely thin beam. In the homogeneous medium (one that throughout its volume has the same physical and chemical properties) light-beam-runs in a straight line, while at the border of the medium reflection or refraction of light occurs. A reflection occurs when the boundary of two media is changing the direction of propagation of the wave, the wave is in the medium, which was distributed initially. According to the law beam reflection angle of reflection equals the angle of incidence and they remain in a single plane. The mirror is an optical instrument, the purpose of which is to reflect the waves. The mirrors can be classified due to the shape: flat, concave, convex. If, after passing through the optical system light rays intersect, a real image is formed. Image receive as a result of the apparent intersection of the extensions of the real rays. The flat mirror’s resulting image is apparent, unturned and the same size, it is produced by performing mirroring of the plane of the mirror. The image displayed in a concave mirror is the image of an apparent when the subject is closer than the focal length, and when the distance is greater, we get the real picture. The collapse, or change in direction of propagation of the wave, related to the change in the speed of the move to a different medium. Speed change involves a change in wavelength. The phenomenon of refraction has allowed to build lens focusing through light waves. Pierre de Fermat (1601 - 1665) formulated the principle, called by his name, saying that the light moving between two points is always stays locally the shortest optical path (so, it needs to travel the least time). This principle, widely accepted and consistent with intuitive understanding, does not apply to gravitational lensing, when the curvature of the light rays in the gravitational field of massive celestial body, leading to focus the rays occurs.

Practical application: Flat mirrors, each of us use every day - hang in any modern home, it is a mandatory addition to any car. An essential element of many of the more complex systems. Traffic mirror is a convex mirror. It expands the field of view of drivers and other road users, improving road safety and comfort of users. Reflecting telescope is an optical instrument used to observe objects that are far away. Unlike an ordinary telescope, instead of the lenses used in the reflectivity of the mirror. SLR is a common name for a model that has a single lens and built-in mirror body. It redirects the light coming through the lens and allows you to observe your subject through the viewfinder. Venetian mirror is a mirror allows some light through, and some is reflected. In combination with appropriate lighting so the mirror on the one hand reflects like a mirror, on the other transmits light as clear glass. Phoenician mirrors are indispensable to the police interrogation of suspects in the presence of witnesses. Also used in prompters- devices that display text to people facing the camera. Some types of satellite dishes use the mirror as a secondary reflector. In this case, the mirror reflects electromagnetic waves outside the range of the light waves visible.

157

Mindful of the laws of reflection, undetectable fighting machines are being designed. An example is the stealth technology - used in aircraft, ships, tanks. By applying a special coating on the war machines radar waves bounce off of them at a different angle than forthcoming, making it difficult to identify these objects.

Trivia, history of discovery: Euclid (325 - 265 BC) formulated the basic rights of the optical behavior of light rays. Euclid's theories expanded Heron of Alexandria (10 - 70 AD). One of the oldest ways to enhance the lighting in a room was the setting of a torch or lamp in-front the mirror. The first reflector, the reflecting telescope, Isaac Newton constructed around 1670, Modern mirrors are generally made of glass, coated with a thin layer of metal by vacuum vapor destation of the glass. Prior to the application of a metal layer chemical methods were used. Throughout history, polished stones or polished metals - bronze, lead, silver served as mirrors. Mirrors in the fitting areas of stores are often slightly concave. In this mirror we seem to ourselves a little taller and leaner and in the reflection we look better in the clothes we’re trying on. Due to the long focal practically impossible to observe with the naked eye that the mirror is not entirely flat we are fooled. In the culture the mirror often has magical properties. Alice was the second time in the Land of wonders just after passing through the looking glass. Snow White's stepmother was asking her famous question to the mirror: "Mirror, mirror, on the wall, who is fairest of all?"

Animations, Graphics: Required are prepared animations of combined 2d-3d technique to illustrate: - The principles of reflection and refraction, - Practical, civil and military, the use of reflection and refraction phenomena. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: HIGH TEMPERATURE SUPERCONDUCTIVITY

Objective: Presentation of the activities of superconductors and high-temperature superconductors. Scientific and educational value: Demonstration of the properties of superconductors: the substance in which electrical resistance already at liquid nitrogen temperature drops dramatically and the magnetic field "pushes" on the outside. Presentation of the possible practical applications of superconducting materials. Due to the potentially huge opportunities to use these materials in the future, it is necessary to approximate their properties to the public.

Construction of station - technical description: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 350.00 cm (L) x 100.00 cm (W) x 70.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height. On the platform is mounted the experiment station proper. The essential elements of the stand: - Track (single track constructed in the shape of a flattened circle), "rotated" by 90 degrees to the horizontal plane, the ground lined with magnets,

158

- Model magnetic railway - superconductor cooled with liquid nitrogen. The presentation will involve demonstration properties of superconductors at temperatures down to liquid nitrogen temperature. Inside the cable car model was a formed container in which is placed a small superconductor. After pouring liquid nitrogen into the container the material has cooled to liquid nitrogen temperature. When you close the cover model railway container placed on the trolley with magnets can, when activated, by the demonstrator, move around (inside) the track. Magnets on the track will generate eddy currents in the superconductor bringing about the production of a field that will "levitate" the model above the tracks. Wagon, thanks to the properties located in the superconductor, will "memorize" its position relative to the magnets (track). Type of superconductor, magnets, the size and weight of the car, the exact distance and profile of the track - should be selected and determined at the stage of final testing of prototypes. The station should be equipped with protective clothing: gloves and goggles. The station will have a demonstrative character: demonstration will be conducted solely by the staff of the Centre. Ensure supply of liquid nitrogen to the extent necessary to carry out demonstrations. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 37.1. The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.28. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.32] - LCD monitor 23 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Mn 2.07]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

HIGH TEMPERATURE SUPERCONDUCTIVITY Law and physico-chemical phenomena: electrical conductivity, electrical resistance, superconductivity, high temperature superconductivity, electron pairs

Fundamental commentary: Superconductivity is a condition in which the electrical resistance (resistance) is equal to zero. This condition occurs in some materials below a certain temperature, called the critical temperature. The electric current in the superconductor once raised will flow in it as long as the superconductor will be kept at a low temperature. Near zero temperature anhydrous relative amplitude of ions arranged in a crystal lattice decreases and the electrical resistance decreases. One feature of this state is the interaction of electrons with each other. In a "normal" guide electrons move chaotically: the movement of one of them has a major impact on the movement of others. In the superconductor it becomes a collective movement. Electricity does not move individual particles, but electron pairs (Cooper pairs). This phenomenon is explained in the BCS theory - the theory of John Bardeen, Leon Cooper and Robert Shrieffera. Another characteristic of the superconductor results in a "push" from the material of the magnetic field, called the Meissner effect. Superconductors are the most common metal alloys and ceramic frits. If the temperature superconductors is higher than the temperature of nitrogen (77 K) that we are dealing with high-temperature superconductors. Officially, the high

159 temperature superconductivity starts already in the bodies of the critical temperature of more than thirty degrees Kelvin. High-temperature superconductivity is a quantum phenomenon, impossible to explain on the basis of classical physics.

Expanded commentary: The conductors are all metals, their alloys and other elements having in its crystal lattice free electrons as carriers of current. Also liquids and gases can conduct, if they contain a certain amount of positive or negative ions. Electrical conductivity can be divided into ionic (positive ions move, such as in the electrolyte) and electronic (there is the movement of the free electrons, such as metals.) Superconductivity is a phenomenon of exactly zero electrical resistance and expulsion of magnetic fields occurring in certain materials when cooled below a characteristic critical temperature. It was discovered by Dutch physicist Heike Kamerlingh Onnes on April 8, 1911 in Leiden. Like ferromagnetism and atomic spectral lines, superconductivity is a quantum mechanical phenomenon. It is characterized by the Meissner effect, the complete ejection of magnetic field lines from the interior of the superconductor as it transitions into the superconducting state. Transition to superconductivity is explained most BCS theory - the theory of John Bardeen, Leon Cooper and Robert Shrieffera. The theory describes superconductivity as a microscopic effect caused by a condensation of Cooper pairs into a boson-like state. The theoretical understanding of superconductivity is extremely complicated and involved. It is far beyond the scope of this video booklet to attempt to discuss the quantum mechanics of superconductors. However, in this section fundamental terms and phenomena of superconductors will be discussed. Superconductors have the ability to conduct electricity without the loss of energy. When current flows in an ordinary conductor, for example copper wire, some energy is lost. In a light bulb or electric heater, the electrical resistance creates light and heat. In metals such as copper and aluminum, electricity is conducted as outer energy level electrons migrate as individuals from one atom to another. These atoms form a vibrating lattice within the metal conductor; the warmer the metal the more it vibrates. As the electrons begin moving through the maze, they collide with tiny impurities or imperfections in the lattice. When the electrons bump into these obstacles they fly off in all directions and lose energy in the form of heat. Inside a superconductor the behavior of electrons is vastly different. The impurities and lattice are still there, but the movement of the superconducting electrons through the obstacle course is quite different. As the superconducting electrons travel through the conductor they pass unobstructed through the complex lattice. Because they bump into nothing and create no friction they can transmit electricity with no appreciable loss in the current and no loss of energy. The ability of electrons to pass through superconducting material unobstructed has puzzled scientists for many years. The warmer a substance is the more it vibrates. Conversely, the colder a substance is the less it vibrates. Early researchers suggested that fewer atomic vibrations would permit electrons to pass more easily.However this predicts a slow decrease of resistivity with temperature. It soon became apparent that these simple ideas could not explain superconductivity. It is much more complicated than that. The understanding of superconductivity was advanced in 1957 by three American physicists-John Bardeen, Leon Cooper, and John Schrieffer, through their Theories of Superconductivity, know as the BCS Theory. The BCS theory explains superconductivity at temperatures close to absolute zero. Cooper realized that atomic lattice vibrations were directly responsible for unifying the entire current. They forced the electrons to pair up into teams that could pass all of the obstacles which caused resistance in the conductor. These teams of electrons are known as Cooper pairs.Cooper and his colleagues knew that electrons which normally repel one another must feel an overwhelming attraction in superconductors. The answer to this problem was found to be

160 in phonons, packets of sound waves present in the lattice as it vibrates. Although this lattice vibration cannot be heard, its role as a moderator is indispensable. According to the theory, as one negatively charged electron passes by positively charged ions in the lattice of the superconductor, the lattice distorts. This in turn causes phonons to be emitted which forms a trough of positive charges around the electron. Before the electron passes by and before the lattice springs back to its normal position, a second electron is drawn into the trough. It is through this process that two electrons, which should repel one another, link up. The forces exerted by the phonons overcome the electrons' natural repulsion. The electron pairs are coherent with one another as they pass through the conductor in unison. The electrons are screened by the phonons and are separated by some distance. When one of the electrons that make up a Cooper pair and passes close to an ion in the crystal lattice, the attraction between the negative electron and the positive ion cause a vibration to pass from ion to ion until the other electron of the pair absorbs the vibration. The net effect is that the electron has emitted a phonon and the other electron has absorbed the phonon. It is this exchange that keeps the Cooper pairs together. It is important to understand, however, that the pairs are constantly breaking and reforming. Because electrons are indistinguishable particles, it is easier to think of them as permanently paired By pairing off two by two the electrons pass through the superconductor more smoothly. The electron may be thought of as a car racing down a highway. As it speeds along, the car cleaves the air in front of it. Trailing behind the car is a vacuum, a vacancy in the atmosphere quickly filled by inrushing air. A tailgating car would be drawn along with the returning air into this vacuum. The rear car is, effectively, attracted to the one in front. As the negatively charged electrons pass through the crystal lattice of a material they draw the surrounding positive ion cores toward them. As the distorted lattice returns to its normal state another electron passing nearby will be attracted to the positive lattice in much the same way that a tailgater is drawn forward by the leading car. The electrons in the superconducting state are like an array of rapidly moving vehicles. Vacuum regions between cars locks them all into an ordered array as does the condensation of electrons into a macroscopic, quantum ground state. Random gusts of wind across the road can be envisioned to induce collisions, as thermally excited phonons break pairs. With each collision one or two lanes are closed to traffic flow, as a number of single-particle quantum states are eliminated from the macroscopic, many-particle ground state. The BCS theory successfully shows that electrons can be attracted to one another through interactions with the crystalline lattice. This occurs despite the fact that electrons have the same charge. When the atoms of the lattice oscillate as positive and negative regions, the electron pair is alternatively pulled together and pushed apart without a collision. The electron pairing is favorable because it has the effect of putting the material into a lower energy state. When electrons are linked together in pairs, they move through the superconductor in an orderly fashion. As long as the superconductor is cooled to very low temperatures, the Cooper pairs stay intact, due to the reduced molecular motion. As the superconductor gains heat energy the vibrations in the lattice become more violent and break the pairs. As they break, superconductivity diminishes. Superconducting metals and alloys have characteristic transition temperatures from normal conductors to superconductors called Critical Temperature (T). Below the superconducting transition temperature, the resistivity of a material is exactly zero. Superconductors made from different materials have different T values. Among ceramic superconductors, YBaCuOT, is about 90 K while for HBaCaCu0 it is up to 133 K. Since there is no loss in electrical energy when superconductors carry electrical current, relatively narrow wires made of superconducting materials can be used to carry huge currents. However, there is a certain maximum current that these materials can be made to carry, above which they stop being superconductors. If too much current is pushed through a superconductor, it will revert to the normal state even though it may be below its transition temperature. The value of Critical Current Density (J) is a function of temperature; i.e., the colder you keep the superconductor the more current it can carry/

161

For practical applications, J values in excess of 1000 amperes per square millimeter (A/mm), are preferred. An electrical current in a wire creates a magnetic field around a wire. The strength of the magnetic field increases as the current in the wire increases. Because superconductors are able to carry large currents without loss of energy, they are well suited for making strong electromagnets. When a superconductor is cooled below its transition temperature (T) and a magnetic field is increased around it ,the magnetic field remains around the superconductor. Physicists use the capital letter H as the symbol for Magnetic Field. If the magnetic field is increased to a given point the superconductor will go to the normal resistive state. The maximum value for the magnetic field at a given temperature is known as the critical magnetic field and is given the symbol H. For all superconductors there exist a region of temperatures and magnetic fields within which the material is superconducting. Outside this region the material is normal. When the temperature is lowered to below the critical temperature,(T), the superconductor will "push" the field out of itself. It does this by creating surface currents in itself which produces a magnetic field exactly countering the external field, producing a "magnetic mirror". The superconductor becomes perfectly diamagnetic, canceling all magnetic flux in its interior. This perfect diamagnetic property of superconductors is perhaps the most fundamental macroscopic property of a superconductor. Flux exclusion due to what is referred to as the Meissner Effect, can be easily demonstrated in the classroom by lowering the temperature of the superconductor to below its T and placing a small magnet over it. The magnet will begin to float above the superconductor. In most cases the initial magnetic field from the magnet resting on the superconductor will be strong enough that some of the field will penetrate the material, resulting in a nonsuperconducting region. The magnet, therefore, will not levitate as high as one introduced after the superconductive state has been obtained. There are two types of superconductors, Type I and Type II. Very pure samples of lead, mercury, and tin are examples of Type I superconductors. High temperature ceramic superconductors such as YBaCuO (YBCO) and BiCaSrCuO are examples of Type II superconductors. Type I superconductors are very pure metals that typically have critical fields too low for use in superconducting magnets. Magnetic field strength is measured in units of gauss. The earths magnetic field is approximately 0.5 gauss. The field strength at the surface of a neodymium-iron-boron magnet is approximately 16 kilogauss. The strongest type-I superconductor, pure lead has a critical field of about 800 gauss. The unit of a gauss is a very small unit. A much larger unit of field strength is the tesla (T). Ten kilogauss (1 x 10 gauss) is equal to 1 teslaYou will notice that this graph has an Hc1 and Hc2. Below Hc1 the superconductor excludes all magnetic field lines. At field strengths between Hc1 and Hc2 the field begins to intrude into the material. When this occurs the material is said to be in the mixed state, with some of the material in the normal state and part still superconducting. Type I superconductors have Hc too low to be very useful. However, Type II superconductors have much larger Hc2 values. YBCO superconductors have upper critical field values as high as 100 tesla. Type II behavior also helps to explain the Meissner effect. When levitating a magnet with a Type I superconductor, a bowl shape must be used to prevent the magnet from scooting off the superconductor. The magnet is in a state of balanced forces while floating on the surface of expelled field lines. Because the field at the surface of a samarium-cobalt magnet is about 600 G, and the Hc1 for the YBCO superconductor is less that 200 G the pellet is in the mixed state while you are performing the Meissner demonstration. Some of the field lines of the magnet have penetrated the sample and are trapped in defects and grain boundaries in the crystals. This is known as flux pinning. This "locks" the magnet to a region above the pellet. The superconducting state is defined by three very important factors: critical temperature (Tc), critical field (Hc), and critical current density (Jc). Each of these parameters is very dependant on the other two properties present. Maintaining the superconducting state requires that both the magnetic field and the current density, as well as the temperature, remain below the critical values, all of which depend on the

162 material. When considering all three parameters, the plot represents a critical surface. From this surface, and moving toward the origin, the material is superconducting. Regions outside this surface the material is normal or in a less mixed state. When electrons form Cooper pairs, they can share the same quantum wave-function or energy state. This results in a lower energy state for the superconductor. Tc and Hc are values where it becomes favorable for the electron pairs to break apart. The current density larger than the critical value is forced to flow through normal material. This flow through normal material of the mixed state is connected with motion of magnetic field lines past pinning sites. For most practical applications, superconductors must be able to carry high currents and withstand high magnetic field without reverting to its normal state. Higher Hc and Jc values depend upon two important parameters which influence energy minimization, penetration depth and coherence length. Penetration depth is the characteristic length of the fall off of a magnetic field due to surface currents. Coherence length is a measure of the shortest distance over which superconductivity may be established. The ratio of penetration depth to coherence length is known as the Ginzburg-Landau parameter. If this value is greater than 0.7, complete flux exclusion is no longer favorable and flux is allowed to penetrate the superconductor through cores known as vortices. Currents swirling around the normal cores generate magnetic fields parallel to the applied field. These tiny magnetic moments repel each other and move to arrange themselves in an orderly array known as a fluxon lattice. This mixed phase helps to preserve superconductivity between Hc1 to Hc2. It is very important that these vortices do not move in response to magnetic fields if superconductors are to carry large currents. Vortex movement results in resistivity. Vortex movement can be effectively pinned at sites of atomic defects, such as inclusions, impurities, and grain boundaries. Pinning sites can be intentionally introduced into superconducting material by the addition of impurities or through radiation damage. Up to this point those properties of superconductors which are commonly referred to as macroscopic properties, such as the Meissner effect and zero resistance have been discussed. We will now focus on those properties which are often referred to as quantum mechanical or microscopic properties. An example of microscopic properties is the phenomenon of electron tunneling in superconductors. Tunneling is a process arising from the wave nature of the electron. It occurs because of the transport of electrons through spaces that are forbidden by classical physics because of a potential barrier. The tunneling of a pair of electrons between superconductors separated by an insulating barrier was first discovered by Brian Josephson in 1962. Josephson discovered that if two superconducting metals were separated by a thin insulating barrier such as an oxide layer 10 to 20 angstroms thick, it is possible for electron pairs to pass through the barrier without resistance. This is known as the dc Josephson Effect, and is contrary to what happens in ordinary materials, where a potential difference must exist for a current to flow. The current that flows in through a d.c. Josephson junction has a critical current density which is characteristic of junction material and geometry. A Josephson junction consists of two superconductors separated by a thin insulating barrier. Pairs of superconducting electrons will tunnel through the barrier. As long as the current is below the critical current for the junction, there will be zero resistance and no voltage drop across the junction. If it is placed next to a wire with a current running through it, the magnetic field generated by the wire lowers the critical current of the junction. The actual current passing through the junction does not change, but has become greater than the critical current which was lowered. The junction then develops some resistance which causes the current to branch off. The Josephson junction is a superfast switching devise. Josephson junctions can perform switching functions such as switching voltages approximately ten times faster than ordinary semiconducting circuits. This is a distinct advantage in a computer, which depends on short, on-off electrical pulses. Since computer speed is dependent on the time required to transmit signal pulses the junction devices' exceptional switching speed make them ideal for use in super fast and much smaller computers.

How can monocharged electrons be attracted? In simple terms it can be explained that

163 the atoms from which they are superconductors are constructed, reflect to the "common pool" the weakest least conduction electrons, becoming in this way ¬ positively charged ions, ¬ laid down in a regular lattice. Each negatively charged electron moving within the network of positive ions will attract them to it. Thus a density positive charges will be formed, continually moving after the quick "flying" electron. further catching more electron in the batches of "excess "positive charge. Thus, through the mediation network, the first electron attracts the second electron. Such interacting via network of ion- electron are called Cooper pairs. The complex condition associated with the of electrons is referred to as Bose – Einstein condensation. A necessary condition of coexistence of pairs is equal momentum and mass of their medium ( if there is no external electric field). At low temperatures, the paired electrons in superconductors have less energy than separated electrons. When delivered to the hot ions and windows to rattle ¬ frequently around the network nodes, which will lead to the breaking of bonds between the electrons. There are also superconductors where the Cooper pair electrons can not be combined, but the hole. Leadership piercing has most of the so-called superconductors. the second kind. Superconductors are the most common metal alloys and ceramic frits. Superconductivity is observed in a variety of materials: some of the elements (for example, tin, mercury and lead), alloys, oxide ceramics or organic materials. In the superconducting state the elements pass only under very high pressure, either in the form of thin layers. Superconductors are some organic compounds, such as carbon allotropies varieties: fullerenes, nanotubes. The second characteristic of superconductors is the result of pushing the material's magnetic field, called the Meissner effect (in superconductors of the first kind), or focusing magnetic field in the "vortex" (in superconductors of the second kind). If the temperature superconductors is higher than the temperature of nitrogen (77 K) that we are dealing with high-temperature superconductors. The recently discovered high temperature superconductors the critical temperature is 100 K. One of the most popular being sintered ceramic high-temperature superconductor is Bi2Sr2Ca2Cu3O10 with a critical temperature of 110 K.

High-temperature superconductivity is a quantum phenomenon, impossible to explain on the basis of classical physics. Summary statistics of quantum distinguishes fermions from bosons. Each particle is a boson or Fermion, depending on your spin. According to the standard model fermions are elementary particles of "matter", while bosons carry the impact. Spin torque own momentum to particles in the system, which does not perform traversing. In particle physics, bosons are particles having a total spin. Fermions are particles having a fractional spin. In connection with the spin bosons they are completely noninteractable Bose-Einstein statistics. One of its consequences is the existence of a Bose-Einstein condensate, "the fifth" state of matter in which any number of bosons can share the same quantum state. Particle collective behavior is different depending on what they spin. When the spin of the particle is complete, the particles are bosons and are subject to Bose-Einstein statistics. But when we have a half spin particles are fermions and are subject to Fermi-Dirac statistics. Particles with spin and electric charge different from zero generates around itself a weak magnetic field (magnetic moment). The condensed-phase spin interaction may lead to the phenomenon of ferromagnetism. The electric current in the superconductor is transmitted not by a single electron, but related pair of electrons, known as Cooper pairs. Cooper pair is a system of two fermions (e.g. electrons) interacting with each other through oscillations of the crystal lattice. Fermions forming a Cooper pair are half spins (which are directed in opposite directions), but the resultant spin of the system is complete - the Cooper pair is a boson. Electrons

164 forming a Cooper pair are described by wave functions of the waveforms of opposite vectors.

Practical application: Electrical conduction in bodies with zero or near-zero resistance is an opportunity for a revolution in electronics. Developments in science contributes to explore substances that allow current to flow lossless in increasingly higher temperatures. Still, the temperatures are too low for practical applications: the use of superconductors (and keep them in such low temperatures for a long period of time) is expensive and not cost-effective in mass applications. The breakthrough would be to discover a cheap superconductor, which would operate at about 20 ° C. Field applications of superconductors is very broad and partly already recognized. Superconducting coils, which can flow endlessly large currents can be used to produce a very strong magnetic fields, and for this purpose they are used in particle accelerators and certain other devices. Superconducting magnets are also used in industrial generators, plasma and particle accelerators. The phenomenon of superconductivity is used in the superconducting energy bins. The superconductivity in turn is based on magnetic technology. The phenomenon of high-temperature superconductivity were already used in the construction of superconducting bearings.

Trivia, history of discovery: In a typical situation, the current through the resistance ends in a split second. Examining the current flow in the superconductor was kept at low temperatures, without power, the flow of constant current in the loop for about 2 years (experiments definitively stopped due to the high costs associated with maintaining such a low temperature. In 1908, the first condensed helium: at 4.2 K (-269 ° C). From that moment began to develop research into the properties and behavior of matter at low temperatures. The phenomenon of superconductivity was discovered in 1911 by Heike Kamerlingh Onnes in testing the properties of materials at low temperatures. This research was conducted in the cryogenic laboratory in Leiden. Mercury was used in the study because it was relatively easy to get in a station of very high purity. During the measurement of the electrical resistance at a temperature of 4.2 K showed a decrease in electrical resistance by many orders of magnitude. For this discovery Onnes in 1913 received the Nobel Prize. In 1913, the laboratory in Leiden designed a superconducting magnet generating a large magnetic field. The first significant theoretical development of the phenomenon of superconductivity we owe to Fritz London, who concluded that the description of this phenomenon is necessary to incorporate quantum mechanics. He believed that, like electrons in an atom stabilize at set levels of energy, in a superconductor they can be grouped in stable current. In 1933, Fritz Meissner and Robert Ochsenfeld discovered the crowding out effect of the magnetic field in the superconductor. In 1956, Leon Cooper showed that an electric current in superconductors is carried not by a single electron, but pairs of bonded electrons (later called Cooper pairs). BCS theory, describing the transition to superconductivity, was published in 1957, its name comes from the first letters of the names of its creators: John Bardeen, Leon Cooper and Robert Shrieffera. The term high temperature superconductors has been used to define a new family of ceramic materials discovered by Karl Alex Muller and Johannes Georg Bednorz of IBM laboratory in Zurich. For the discovery of these materials Bednorz and Müller in 1986 received the Nobel Prize. Bednorz and Müller discovered high-temperature superconductivity in La2-xBaxCuO2 compounds (compounds called Ba-La-Cu-O or LBCO) in which superconductivity occurred at 35 K which is above the limit, which determined the BCS theory of superconductivity as the temperature limit.

165

Soon, using effects associated with pressure, the initial value of the critical temperature in LBCO (35 K) was raised to 50 K, and in 1987 superconductivity was observed in relation to YBa2Cu3O6 + x in temperature of 90 K (above the temperature of liquid nitrogen). In subsequent years, by modifying the crystal structure and the effects associated with the use of pressure, the critical temperatures of superconductivity of 160 K. Studies on high-temperature superconductivity are being developed in Poland. Already in March 1987 at the Institute of Physics, Polish Academy of Sciences and the Institute of Low Temperature and Structure Research, Polish Academy of Sciences in Wroclaw synthesized compounds and high-temperature superconductors were confirmed, with superconductivity above 90 K.

Animations, Graphics: Required are prepared animations in combined 2d-3d technique to illustrate: - A decrease of resistance in superconductors at low temperatures, - Electron pairs - according to the BCS theory as content for a monitor with touch pad [ts 2.32]. Duration: about 5 minutes. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

Required is a fictionalized film with elements of animation showing: - Practical application of superconductivity and high-temperature superconductivity presentation in the form of a looped projection using the monitor me 2.07. Duration: about 5 minutes. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: LASER

Objective: Presentation of the principles of laser technology. Scientific and educational value: Laser is an example of the implementation of large-scale high-tech. Basic knowledge of laser technology and knowledge about the application is one of the key elements of education and human conscious use of modern technology.

Construction of stations - technical description: Construction of platform made of steel 10/10 or 20/20 mm. Platform dimensions: 400.00 cm (L) x 100.00 cm (W) x 75.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated, gray, gloss. Station mounted on the concrete floor or fitted with adjustable legs for height. Deck/top of platform finished as the side walls or made from thick mdf. 0,80-1,20 cm. Elements of the station (for mounting on the table): - The source of sound waves - speaker connected to a player, - Building speaker size 50.00 cm x 50.00 cm x 50.00 cm (+ / -15%), building walls should be made of mdf or composite and coated on the inside with material well- absorbent to acoustic waves - with the exception of a small portion of Φ1, 00-2,00 cm for the laser, which should be overridden by loosely embedded glass, - Transmitter: Laser - mounted on the tripod fixed to the top platform, with limited adjustability, - Receiver: phototransistor connected to the computer,

166

- Headset - Computer software. Careful selection of individual components and materials shall be made at the prototype testing stage, so that the desired end result can be achieved. As part of the planned experiment, part of the laser beam reflected from the windows should go back to the receiver. After processing, the light signal into an audio signal You should be able to listen to the recording on headphones emitted by the speaker placed in the building. It is permitted to purchase and install the final station, offered on the market, the microphone system with optical laser homing with two types of power supply: mains and battery. Conceptual drawing of stand: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 37.2. The station is also indicated in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.26. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Technical drawing information plate: AR 30.3 (Volume II: element drawing). Text to be placed on plate:

LASER INSTRUCTIONS: At one end of the station is a built-in speaker playing music. The housing absorbs and dampens sound. A fragment of a glazed enclosure. Create your headphones and aim the laser dot at the glass-point. What do you hear in the headphones? WHY IS THIS HAPPENING? Thanks to the precision of the laser beam it is possible to wiretap conversations in enclosed spaces. The wave of laser light is modulated by acoustic vibrations glass: the reflection of the glass laser light becomes a carrier of sound. Such techniques are used by the police to combat crime.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set. [Ts 2.30] - LCD monitor 23 "with touch pad + PC, 2 sets. [2.04 mn, mn 2.05]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

LASER Law and physico-chemical phenomena: stimulated emission, light coherent monochromatic light

Fundamental commentary: This laser device is emitting electromagnetic radiation of visible light, ultraviolet or infrared. White light emitted by the sun or a light bulb is a mixture of light waves of different lengths. Each wavelength corresponds to a different color of light. Monochromatic light is the light of a single wavelength. Both the white light is monochromatic and incoherent, with different phases. Such light often disperse so much that their intensity decreases with increasing distance from the source. The laser light is monochromatic and coherent light: in phase.

167

Light is an electromagnetic wave formed when electrons orbiting the nuclei emit certain portions (quanta) of energy during the transition from one orbit to another (from the outside - a higher energy level to the inside - with a lower energy level). For there to atom-photon emission has to be raised: the electrons must be on the outer orbits. An atom can be excited by providing it with energy: heating, electron bombardment or quanta of light, placed in an electric field of high intensity. During excitation of the atom's electrons absorb energy and jump came on the outer orbits. The laser excited atoms are bombarded with photons. The transition to a lower energy level of the electron in an atom "active medium" laser results in emission of photons, which in turn necessitate the same process in other atoms. Because most of the carbon in the laser is in an excited state, so the number of emitted photons increases exponentially in successive batches of the stimulated emission. The laser light composed of the same photon is light and has the form of a coherent beam with very low divergence. Such light is dispersed in a minimum degree, and the beam can be sent over very long distances with very little loss of energy. Laser radiation energy can be focused on a very small area, thus obtaining a very high power in a narrow area.

Expanded commentary: A laser is a device for emitting electromagnetic radiation of visible light, ultraviolet, infrared, utilizing the phenomenon of stimulated emission. Its job is light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation. White light is a mixture of light waves of different lengths. Each wavelength corresponds to a different color of light. Monochromatic light is the light of a single wavelength. Both the white light is monochromatic and incoherent, with different phases. Such light is often dispersed which means that its intensity decreases with increasing distance from the source. The laser light is monochromatic and coherent light. The laser uses a double, corpuscular-wave nature of light. In prior laser energy supply takes place, for example by the inclusion of an electric current. This is called "pumping" the laser. During the pumping of the laser medium lasered atoms are excited: the electrons are transferred to the higher levels of power. Then, during the spontaneous transition of electrons at a lower level, the emission of photons, which in subsequent carbon induce a process subsequent photon emission. Number of photon avalanche grows in response. This reaction is compounded by mirrors at both ends of the pipe: the light is reflected back and forth, so that more and more carbon sends photons, until the light exits the pipe through the hole at one end. For there to stimulated emission of a photon energy of initiation must be equal to the excitation energy of the atom. Photon emitted by the atom has a frequency (and therefore also the energy), phase and polarity the same as calling photon emission. The direction of movement of both photons is also the same. The laser light composed of identical coherent photons is a light (one wavelength, the same amplitude, constant phase difference in time), and is a polarized beam with very low divergence. Such light is dispersed in a minimal extent, and the focused beam can be transmitted over very long distances with very little loss of energy. Energy ordinary light sources can not concentrate so as to obtain a power density greater than the density of the macula power source. Laser radiation energy so you can concentrate. The laser is easy to get a very low radiation emission line width, which is equivalent to a very high power in a selected, narrow region of the spectrum. The essential parts of the laser are the active medium, resonator optical pumping system. The open medium determines the most important laser parameters, determines the length of the emitted wave, its power, way of pumping, ways to use the laser. Depending on the laser active medium is divided into: gas lasers, forests and solid-liquid lasers, free electron lasers, semiconductor lasers.

168

Practical application: Lasers are widely used in almost all fields of both high-tech, targeted at a small group of customers, as well as technologies commonly available in the market and aimed at a mass audience. The cost of production of the initially expensive and rare equipment is in many cases significantly reduced, making these devices were very widely used, so that now one cannot imagine functioning without them. Lasers are used for example in precision machining of metals and other materials, telecommunications, surveying, medicine (in all sectors), hardware, and IT and AV equipment, digital printing, and modern printing, in trade, military technology.

Trivia, history of discovery: The phenomenon of stimulated emission predicted in his theoretical considerations Albert Einstein. In 1954 he constructed the first maser - microwave amplifier unit by stimulated emission of electromagnetic radiation. It was the unit's principles identical to the laser, but emit radiation at different frequencies. In the second half of the 1950s in the United States were trying to prototype advanced lasers. The first working laser was constructed in 1960, by Theodore Harold Maiman (USA). Active medium ruby crystal was doped. In 1961, he constructed the first gas laser: a helium-neon, and a year later the first neodymium laser. In 1962 he constructed the first semiconductor laser. In 1963 he constructed the first laser liquid. In 1964 he built the first semiconductor laser diode pumping. Polish first laser was built at the Military Technical Academy in Warsaw in 1963 was a laser helium-neon gas generating infrared radiation. At the school was constructed in the following years, other types of lasers, which included, among others used in ophthalmology (at this time was a pioneering implementation). I have high hopes in Poland called. "Blue laser", over which the study was conducted as early as the 1980s. The first such working device was launched in 2001, the "blue laser" is a semiconductor laser (laser diode) based on gallium nitride.

Animations, Graphics: Requires drawn animation in combined 2d-3d technique, illustrates: - The laser. as content for a monitor with touch pad [ts 2.30]. Duration: about 30 seconds. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

Required for animation and film-drama with elements of animation showing: - Blue laser - history of research and implementation in Poland - Implementation of lasers in industry, commerce, technology, everyday life, military technologies presentation in the form of a looped projection displays using 2.04 mn and 2.05 mn. The total duration of the animation and film: about 15 minutes. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

STAND: NOBEL PRIZE Station of the "Nobel Prize" should consist of:

169

- Rectangular blocks, which is accented with images (photographs) winners of the Nobel Prize in physics with chemistry, - Devices and multimedia equipment with multimedia content.

The station is indicated on the drawings AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbol: M.2.24. Item description and additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 5 sets. [Ts 2.24, 2.25, 2.26, 2.27, 2.28], - LCD monitor 23 "+ computer, 2 pcs. [Mn 2.02 mn 2.03]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

As multimedia content, prepare presentations, animations (in a combined of 2d - 3d)technique, videos and comments for all winners of the Nobel Prizes in physics and chemistry from 1901 to present brief biography, scientific achievements, the title of the award. The present form of animation is selected for winning experiments and proficiency. Do not duplicate material presented in other posts. Prepared media content should also be a kind of "countersink knowledge" - extension of the information presented on other sites. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. The duration of the animation, presentations and videos: about 50 minutes.

SET OF STATIONS: SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN OTHER APPLICATIONS

Construction of stations - technical description: Platform construction made of steel 10/10, 20/20 and 40.40 mm. Dimensions platforms

- Model submarine: 300.00 cm (L) x 40.00 cm (W) x 75.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / 10%; - Model railway dept: 300.00 cm (L) x 40.00 cm (W) x 75.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%; - Model car: 420.00 cm (L) x 200.00 cm (W) x 20.00 cm (H) - all dimensions + / -10%. Platform coverage: 0.7 cm steel, powder-coated , gray, gloss. Posts concrete floor mounted or fitted with adjustable feet or feet of steel + hard rubber in contact with the ground. Deck/top of platform finished as the side walls , and the car model with corrugated sheet metal. The platforms should be fitted with: - Model submarine from dismantled pieces of the outer shell and the hull so that the interior of the ship was visible and mechanisms - Model railway magnetic outer portions of the dismantled building so that its visible inside the vehicle and the mechanisms - Car model (scale 1:1) of the dismantled pieces of bodywork so that its visible inside the vehicle and mechanisms, may be put on display the original vehicle. Models should be made in a typical modeling technology, with great attention to detail. Key mechanisms and repetitive elements should be shown across the board. Models should be a mapping of specific types, makes and models - to the decision of the Contractor to choose a specific type, make, and model boat or vehicle. Conceptual drawings of stations: Volume II: Element drawing, figure AR 54, AR 55, AR 56

170

Stations are also labeled in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: Element drawing) symbols: M.2.48, M.2.49, M.2.50. Description of additional guidance to the arrangement of stations: Chapter 3 of this report.

Stations will be equipped with information boards. The platform must provide a statement indicating the model, type, original brand, year of production, the country in which the vehicle or vessel was constructed, and the scale of the model. Commentary to the stations of multimedia content will be posted on the equipment and AV devices.

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer; 3 sets. [Ts 2.59, 2.60 ts, ts 2.61] - LCD monitor 23 "with touch pad + PC, 2 sets. [Mn 2.37, 2.38 mn, mn 2.39]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

CAR: The main structural components and mechanical systems used are: - Body, - Chassis, - Suspension, - Engine system, - Power train and transmission, - Braking system - The steering, - Electrical and hydraulic systems. The key aspects of a car engine system consists of a starter, injection, ignition, power, timing, injection, exhaust, charging, cooling. Driving a motor vehicle. The most common type of car engine is the piston engine. roduced electric cars are also equipped with an electric motor and hybrid cars with a mixture of internal combustion engine and an electric motor. In cars with internal combustion engines: liquid fuel (petrol, diesel), gas (CNG compressed or liquefied: LPG or LNG) can be a source of energy. A key element of the car: the engine - consists of the following components: cylinder head, cylinder block, cylinder liner, flywheel, connecting rod, crankshaft, piston, piston rings, camshaft, turbocharger.

A kind of prototype of a modern car was the steam-powered vehicle - built in 1769 for the French army by Nicolas Joseph Cugnot'a. It uses a reciprocating motion of the piston.

Automotive history began, based on internal combustion engines, in the second half of the nineteenth century, in 1860, Jean-Joseph Etienne Lenoir built and launched an efficient diesel engine, two-stroke, single cylinder, working on a mix of city gas and air, with a capacity of 8.8 kW . This was the first internal combustion piston engine successfully used in several people’s vehicles. In subsequent years, in different countries, a number of more or less successful prototypes of vehicles with internal combustion engines running on different types of fuels were produced. One of the most successful prototype was powered by a petrol engine built in 1875 in Vienna by Siegfried Marcus. It is widely recognized that the first cars were created independently of each other in the workshops of two German engineers: Gottlieb Damilera and Carl Benz.

171

Gottlieb Daimler together with Wilhelm Maybach in 1883, has already built a four- cylinder engine powered by gasoline. Karl Benz in 1885 conducted a successful test of a vehicle equipped with an internal combustion engine and electric start. It was a three-wheeled vehicle: drive was transferred to the two rear wheels and the front was used for control. Large horizontal station flywheel ensured equal work single cylinder engine. Brake pads are pressed against the rim spoked wheels. The vehicle weighs 260 kg. Benz patented it in 1886 In 1886, his first public performance car Gottlieb Daimler. He placed his own design for a four-cylinder gasoline engine chassis, torsion was the whole front axle. After modifications Daimler engine power reached 3.75 hp, which allowed the car to accelerate more than 30 km / h

The first vehicle powered by an electric motor, derived from the electric current battery, built and launched in 1835, Thomas Davenport (USA).

In the Polish lands first public demonstration of auto driving took place in Krakow in 1898 The first Polish car was designed CWS T-1 was constructed by Tadeusz Tanski in the years 1922-1924. CWS car produced in small quantities from 1927 to 1931 in Central Automobile Workshop in Warsaw (CWS). Production ceased in 1931 due to the signing of a license agreement with Fiat to produce the Fiat 508 On the basis of a license agreement with Fiat in 1932, the National Plant Engineering (converted CWS) started the production of the car Polish Fiat 508 Balilla, and in 1935 was introduced to the production of popular model FIAT 508: Ganger. After World War II, car production resumed in Poland in 1951, built from the ground up for FSO Zeran. Instead, proposed earlier, continued cooperation with Fiat in Zeran started the production of Warsaw M20 (licensed Pabiedy - modeled on the Ford). The most popular cars produced in Poland in the second half of the twentieth century were the Warsaw Mermaid (Full Polish design, produced by FSO and FSM in Bielsko- Biala), Fiats (Italian license). Beyond the stage of prototypes and small series did not come out: Smyk and Midget. One of the most interesting prototypes was Beskid - constructed in the early 1980s by Cezary Nawrot, a style reminiscent of the later Renault Twingo. It was the last advanced Polish construction, which, however, was sent to mass production.

MAGNETIC RAIL: Magnetic Rail is a high-speed rail, without the traditional track and without a locomotive. Train, instead of the trolley is moving on a special guide. The track is assembled with electromagnets and the chassis of the cars as well. A set of electromagnets float the train and keep it a few inches above the guide while driving. Another set of electromagnets keeps the train in the desired horizontal station. Additional magnets placed along the track can pull the wagons forward or slow them. Such a "hovercraft" does not have an engine in the usual sense of the word. The electromagnetic field causes the wagons not to have contact with the guide. By using magnets friction wheels are eliminated. Also eliminated is the dynamic interaction: wheel - rail and resonance. Electromagnetic Railways can develop high speeds, have high accelerations, reduce the impact of vibro-acoustic waves emitted into the environment. Railway magnetic usually comes but "traditional circles," but they serve either as a security (for emergencies), or to move at low speeds (when the induced force is too small, sometimes it is insufficient to keep the train on the track). The trolley uses conventional electromagnets and made of superconductors. Currently, there are two magnetic rail systems based on different technologies: - Electrodynamic lift (lift by repulsion) - Electromagnetic lifting (lifting by attraction).

The first experiments on magnetic levitation led already in the 1920s the German

172 engineer Hermann Kemper. In the 1930's he patented his invention and presented a prototype model. In 1962, the first test line built in Japan, followed by the trains moving at a speed of 60 km / h In the 1960s a test magnetic railway line with a length of 1.6 km Eric Laithwait constructed in the UK. In 1969 in Germany, constructed the first railway vehicles Transrapid magnetic generation that, after modifications allowed in the mid-1970s to reach the speed of 400 km / h The first railway line intended for commercial use, based on the technology of electro- raising, opened in 1984 in Birmingham, train reached a maximum speed of 42 km / h (closed after 11 years of service). The second line in the world of commercial magnetic rail launched in 1989 in Berlin (closed it after two years of operation). In 2003 the railway line was opened in Shanghai magnetic (maglev train). It is based on technology developed in Germany. The distance is 30.5 km, flown it in 7 minutes and 20 seconds, and the train has a top speed of 431 km / h (speed of 350 km / h is achieved within 2 minutes). During the test, 12 November 2003, a train on the line reached a top speed of 501 km / h Test line is also in Germany (Transrapid technology lifting electro) - built and operated by a consortium of Siemens and ThyssenKrupp. In 2003, around Nagoya opened, active to this day, the line of turn-based magnetic lifting electro technology. The distance is about 8.9 km. On the line was reached, a record to this day, the speed of 581 km / h The biggest problems hampering the development of magnetic railways are: turbulence occurring at very high speeds and enormous construction costs related to superconductors.

SUBMARINE Submarines are capable of self-immersion and emersion and controlled sailing underwater. One of the key issues for the underwater vehicle technology is to regulate the depth and ascent. The role of the regulator in this area is performed by the ballast tanks filled with water. Their work is based the Archimedes' principle. But such a scheme of ascent is only a simplified theoretical model. In fact, the ascent with empty ballast tanks is used only in an emergency. Immediate access to the ship buoyancy caused by emptying the tanks would cause too rapid an ascent, and loss of control of the ship and its "jump out" of the water. In practice, the crew emerge their bodies by lifting up a depth planes operating on a similar principle as the elevators on aircraft. In order to obtain the lift, which is in accordance with Newton's ship will rise up, as in the case of airplanes she has to move relative to the medium in which it is located. Only just under its surface - at periscope depth-blown into the water from the ballast tanks. Currently, there are a wide variety of submarines propellants. The classic solution to use a diesel engine (on the surface) and electric motors (in draft), which through the transmission and drive shaft to rotate the propeller. The precursor to the construction of modern submarines recognized American John Holland, who in 1897 built the first submarine motor station both surface ships and underwater. "Father of modern submarines' is called, however, another American Simon Lake - designer of many types of ships and the inventor of the depth planes - key for immersion, maintaining the depth and ascent. The largest submarines Russian ships were built during the Cold War, a Typhoon, which could carry even after 200 nuclear warheads (mainly known from the movie "The Hunt for Red October"). On the surface displace 24,000 tons and submerged up to 48 thousand tons. They were the largest submarines ever built in the world.

173

They had nuclear drive, titanium rigid hull (actually two parallel hulls to-back - referring to the structure of your catamaran), steel hull with light coating anechoic plates (sound- deadening from the interior of the ship and absorbing and scattering sonar sound waves of enemy units). The ship was 170 feet long and up to 23 meters wide. The most well-known, though fictional, is a submarine "Nautilus - described in the novels of Jules Verne's" Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea "and" The Mysterious Island "commanded by Captain Nemo. Jules Verne described the elements that have been applied in the future in a real submarine, such as airlocks, watertight, electric drive, double hull.

Animations, Graphics: Required are prepared animations in combined 2d-3d technique to illustrate: - The construction of the car illustrated by the model placed on a bench, - Construction of railways magnetic illustrated by the model placed on a bench, - The construction of a submarine illustrated by the model placed on a bench as content for monitors with touch-sensitive pads [ts 2.59, 2.60 ts, ts 2.61]. Each animation sequence should be run using a graphical interface. Requires own production.

Required elements are animated films featuring: - Automotive history including the history of the production car model illustrated by the model placed on a bench, - The history of railways magnetic - The construction of underwater navigation including submarine illustrated by the model placed on a bench as content for presentation in the form of a looped projection displays using 2.37 mn, mn 2.38, 2.39 mn. The total duration of the animation and film: about 15 minutes. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of this report.

Foucault’s Pendulum

Special importance for achieving the objectives of the exposure is Foucault's Pendulum - available for follow-up for participants in all three tracks exploring - exposed in Refrigerators - one of the most impressive and most of the exhibits.

Objective: Proving (show experimentally) by using a Foucault pendulum that the Earth "does not stand still," but all the time it rotates. Scientific and educational value: Foucault pendulum demonstrates usually with the transfer of information that its movement is proof of the rotation of the Earth. But it is hard to imagine how this phenomenon actually takes place.

Construction of stations - technical description: The station consists of two main components: the station on the floor and the pendulum. Pendulum from the upper part, consisting of a rope (straightened steel wire in place adapted to the weight of the ball and carefully fitted, the cable can alternatively be used to weave Φ2, 00cm) mounted on a universal joint, providing a bearing device. The pendulum is attached slings steel ball (possibly another metal), and its weight at the stage of final testing of prototypes to be determined experimentally.

174

Station, view from the top are: concentric circles (the largest of Φ610, 00cm), of which, under the innermost are: - Electromagnetic exciter (steel construction profiles Bochnia), which after a full deflection of the pendulum will inspire them to baseline values (optimal), air resistance, preventing, - Magnet of own design - Platform exciter (conglomerate, Gr. 3.00 cm, the structure bonded to the structure exciter). - Specially shaped track, on which the balls are rolled into the next portion of the structure, where an employee is waiting to set them back (once a day). - Inclined at an angle (defined experimentally testing stage prototypes) platform, which are set beads, precipitated during operation pendulum by a bullet. Under the "glasses" - place a set of balls - are glass tubes, in which are mounted LEDs. LEDs and are turned on all the time (leds, green, one for each station), the glow can be seen only when the ball rolls down from its station. Ball falling "on glass" also has a ringing tone. Diameter (between the axes of the individual beads), to 360.00 cm. The whole district is the 90 pieces, and each fall at ≈ 20.00 min. Same balls fall only during the return movement pendulum ', rollin' on special skids, restricting their movement planned. - Technical trap for the operation of the device, along with revisions to service the unit. - All stations will be surrounded by a barrier of glass (VSG, 120.00 cm H)

Conceptual drawing of stand: AR 69.1, 69.2 (Volume II: element drawing).

The station is provided with: information plate / manual station, touch screen with multi-media content for a subject station.

Technical drawing information plate: T.41: Element drawing, AR Fig. 69a, 69b. Text to be placed on the label: FOUCAULT PENDULUM "Come and see how the Earth spins" - Jean Bernard Léon Foucault. Foucault pendulum during its movement reaches all points on the perimeter of the designated area, as evidenced by bullets precipitated from scratch. In the case of freely moving pendulum, the only explanation for this phenomenon is the fact that the Earth rotates beneath the pendulum. INSTRUCTIONS: Make sure you follow the changing swing of the pendulum. Do it for 10, 20, 30 min. and repeat observation. Do you see the difference?

Equipment and AV for the stand: - LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch pad + computer, 1 set., [Ts 2.40]. Description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 4 of this report.

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

FOUCAULT PENDULUM Law and physico-chemical phenomena: precession, rotation, the pendulum

Fundamental commentary: Foucault's Pendulum proves that the Earth is spinning, it is at rest. Deflected from the equilibrium station, varies in a particular plane. Because the Earth rotates beneath the pendulum, it appears in the following stations on the marked circle.

175

The pendulum that has a large inertia, or in other words, it is difficult to affect its movement to external factors, such as friction in the point of suspension or air resistance. These are compensate for energy losses during full swings.

Expanded commentary: The period of the pendulum, or the time after which it will perform a full turnover of 360 ° is different, depending on the location on the globe. The pole is the shortest and is 1 day (exactly 23 hours., And 56 min.), Extended with decreasing latitude to the equator attain infinite value, which means that you can not see it there on the market. In Łódź, full rotation will take place after the time of about 30 hours. and 46 min. Full time marketing can be calculated at any point on Earth using the formula: T = 23 hours. and 56 min. / Sin (z), where "z" is the latitude of the site (for Łódź ≈ 51.78333 °). During a turn, precipitated will be 90 balls arranged in a circle with a diameter of 360.00 cm. Subsequent balls are thus precipitated at about 20 minutes. If the pendulum seen by the space, it was noted that the complex movement of the pendulum is not only due to its vibration, but also the planet's rotation. However, since the observer is on the surface of the Earth, and along with it is moved, it is not possible to observe the Earth's movement. To describe this situation, wandering the pendulum, from the point of view of an observer on Earth, clearly subjected to a force, uses the term "inertia". Can distinguish between several types of inertial forces - in this case, the Coriolis force.

Practical application: The Coriolis force causes the northern hemisphere rotates the plane of the pendulum to the right, and in the southern hemisphere to the left. Coriolis effect can suffer whenever going through the surface that rotates and is not an easy task. The Coriolis force influences the direction of the winds on Earth, and even stronger scour responsible for the left or right edges of rivers, by flowing water. Moreover, even the pilots and gunners must take on her amendment to effectively do its job.

Trivia, history of discovery: Discovered the effect of the Earth's rotation on the movement of the pendulum is Frenchman Jean Bernard Léon Foucault. The appropriate conclusions led him to experiment with a pendulum length of 2 m and a weight 5 kg. The first screening for the general public took place in the Paris Pantheon, in 1851, used a pendulum length of 67 I had a cannon ball weight - 28 kg. the factors that make the fluctuations would disappear. After all, even with the length and weight of the pendulum stops moving once. To this did not happen, during each of the rocking it slightly stimulated to oscillate through a specific mechanism, but only to the extent to

Animations, Graphics: Required animation or presentation prepared of combined 2d - 3d technique illustrates the issues raised in the descriptive part - showing in schematic form, how does the Foucault Pendulum work. The duration of the animation or presentation: 20 seconds. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials. Dół formularza

Kids zone (not in technical dialogue) in the building, a room with educational games for children should be prepared for two age groups: 3-6 years old and 7-12 years old. The zone should be arranged in the room marked in an executive design specification no. 2N-0.31 on level +/-0.00, with floorage

176 ca. 265,00 m2. Location of the zone on touring scheme fig. AR 06.2 (tome II: graphic part). In the zone, the following should be constructed: - Information and cash office - Self-serve cloakroom

Self-serve cloakroom should be equipped with 4 wardrobe cabinets with dimensions / technical parameters: Cabinet produced of furniture board. Cabinet’s dimensions: 2790/1800-1900/490 mm (all dimensions: +/- 15%). 18 compartments with dimensions ca. 30/90 cm, with locks, no handles. 6 pieces of height adjustable feet with possible level of adjustment 5-20 cm. Cabinets painted in RAL 9010 color.

Information and cash office should be equipped with: - ticket register with software, ticket printer, fiscal printer, computer, touchscreen monitor – similarly to cash offices in Entrance Zone; ticket register should be integrated with cash system in Entrance Zone; - reception and cash counter; furniture with dimensions: 240cm (length), 75 cm (width), 75-115cm (height) – all dimensions +/- 15%; produced of lacquered glass 6mm thick, dyed RAL 9003 and 704 and 3020, tempered glass 8mm thick, MDF 18mm thick dyed RAL 9010; - swivel chairs on self-locking casters, with armrests: 2 items.

Stands and exhibits in the zone should be organized separately for children aged 3-6 and 7-12.

Topics presented by stands should refer to topics presented on touring routes in CNiT, yet does not have to be rigorously observed: due to the age of recipients, function of this zone is different from these of other touring routes.

Stations and equipment of Kid’s Zone:

Interactive floor: Two animations are required: - “escaping fish” - “squelching pools” It is allowed to change topics of animation: proposal must be approved by the Employer before making a post-production.

Integrated multimedia system is required for the interactive floor, which includes a computer with control and management software, camera with infrared irradiators, both integrated within dedicated casing. The casing should allow for mounting and suspension of all components, including the projector necessary for proper operation of the system in such a way as to beam in a horizontal position, with image reflected in the mirror directing it on the floor. The system should enable the detection of movement within the determined area so that the user can interact with applications.

Minimum technical requirements for the control computer: The processor should achieve a score of min. 9000 pts in the Control computer PCMark Vantage FutureMark Corporation performance test, or min. 7000 pts in Primate Labs Geekbench test. Integrated cooling system: yes RAM 4096 MB DDR3

177

Main Board Graphic card slots: D-Sub, DVI-D, HDMI Graphic card should achieve a score of min. 9000 pts in the Graphic Card PCMark Vantage FutureMark Corporation performance test Power: at least 430 W Power Supply Power supply compatible with the „80 PLUS” BRONZE Sound Card Integrated Disk type: SSD 2,5", SATA2 Hard Drive Capacity: at least 80GB Compaptible and conflict-free to the implemented for the present Operating System job software and network. Network Card Integrated WinFast VC100 type or equivalent TV Card Connection: USB min. 2.0 Integrated hardware controller supporting computer monitoring function that meets the following minimum requirements: - ability to remotely monitor the status of the control computer, - ability to remotely turn on/off and reset the control computer, Other parameters - controller must have an independent power source, - controller must be able to give the computer an individual IP address, - controller must provide the ability to manage control computer from any location within range of access to the Internet. A client’s program must be installed with following features on the computer: - support of Adobe Flash (SWF) or similar animations - support of C or similar animations - support of such file formats as: *.AVI, *.WMV, *.MOV, *.MKV, *.MP4, *.MPG, *.RVMB, *.JPG, *.PNG, *.BMP, *.GIF, *.FLV, *.MP3 audio files, *.WMA, *.WAV, *.OGG, *.FLAC, or similar - blocking access to drives; Integrated software - blocking access to control panel; - backup effects on the server, restoration of the system after a crash - blocking pop-up display.

A dedicated program is required on the computer, that allows to configure the system on a LAN, as well as plugging the system into a central management system. Dedicated casing equipped with a cooling system and enabling Casing integration of the projector controlling the system and the mirror. The casing must be easily mountable to the ceiling.

Minimum technical requirements or camera with infrared irradiators: Sensitivity 0,01 LUX (without sens-up) Camera type Dual (day/night) S/N Ratio 52 dB Power supply DC 12V Connector type BNC Irradiator’s range 50 m Irradiator’s beaming 90 degrees angle ATR Other parameters BLC Motion detection

178

Replaceable lens 3,6 mm OSD White balance ATW/PUSH LOCK/ ANTI CR/ USER/ PUSH/ MANUAL

Touch Table System: Required content: the game – play involving searching for (with touch of hands) „lost on a beach”: radio, mobile phone, camera, etc. Integrated multimedia system consisting of a touch screen connected to the control computer is required. All should be enclosed in a safe and ventilated casing. The system must enable to interact with applications by touch and is based on recognition of 2d tags and objects.

Minimum technical requirements: Screen size At least 40” Native screen 1920x1080 resolution At least 16,7 mln Number of colors

Contrast At least 2000:1 Brightness At least 300 cd/m² Reaction time 8 ms - recognition of min. 50 touch points at a time (ability to react to Required several people simultaneously) functionality - 2d tags detection - objects detection The procesor should achieve a score of min. 8000 pts in the PCMark Vantage FutureMark Corporation performance test, or min. 6000 pts in Primate Labs Geekbench test. Control computer Graphic card should achieve a score of min. 8000 pts in the minimum PCMark Vantage FutureMark Corporation performance test requirements Built-in speakers with a capacity at least 5W Minimum number of USB ports min. 2.0: 4 Integrated wi-fi router A computer built into the display - dedicated, produced in accordance with provisions of the Employer - made of aluminum Casing - powder coated - equipped with an independent cooling system - with dimensions and design tailored to the size and weight of the screen Integrated hardware controller supporting computer monitoring function that meets the following minimum requirements: - ability to remotely monitor the status of the control computer, - ability to remotely turn on/off and reset the control computer, Other parameters - controller must have an independent power source, - controller must be able to give the computer an individual IP address, - controller must provide the ability to manage control computer from any location within range of access to the Internet. A client’s program must be installed with following features on the computer: - support of Adobe® Flash (SWF) or similar animations; Integrated software - support of such file formats as: *.AVI, *.WMV, *.MOV, *.MKV, *.MP4, *.MPG, *.RVMB, *.JPG, *.PNG, *.BMP, *.GIF, *.FLV, *.MP3 audio files, *.WMA, *.WAV, *.OGG, *.FLAC, or similar

179

- blocking access to drives; - blocking access to control panel; - backup effects on the server, restoration of the system after a crash - blocking pop-up display.

A dedicated program is required on the computer, that allows to configure the system on a LAN, as well as plugging the system into a central management system.

Leaning Tower of Pisa: The stand is designed for the youngest children. It should be localized in a place without the local low ground. The main element of the stand is a tower with walls slightly out of plumb, with stairs topped with a dedicated platform. Platform height should not exceed 2,00 m. The stairs and the platform should provide a possibility of movement for 2-3 children, whose task will be to drop one of the colored balls from the platform. The tower and the platform should be constructed of MDF and plywood – covered with a sponge or foam. Around the tower there should be a separate safety area not less than 2m, lined with a cushioning material. Balls – light, of different weight, size and color, made of various soft materials. Next to the tower a colored area should be marked to drop the balls on. Finishing materials used should have bright, vivid colors.

Magnetic Field: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. On the platform desktop in the cavity covered with safety glass ca. 150 small compasses should be placed at equal distance from each other. A bar magnet with marked polarity (red South, blue North), coated with transparent plastic (to avoid scratching the blass) should be attached to the platform. By moving the magnet over the surface of the glazed cavity, user will be able to observe the magnetic field lines propagating around the bar magnet.

Magnetic world: The stand’s platform imitating a large horse-shoe magnet, constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 380,00cm x 250,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. The platform should include a variety of simple models with magnetic properties of permanent magnets, electromagnets, ie: - Round ferrite magnets (each with a hole) placed (threaded) on one cylinder (wooden or aluminum one screwed to the desktop) so as to repel each other: N-S S-N N-S S-N; by moving the magnets over the cylinder, the user will see their interaction; - electromagnet 1: steel rod ca. 10,00mm thick, with a coil wound on the rod, the coil connected to a power source (6/12 V), User turns on the power by pressing the button – an electromagnet is created, with which the user lifts steel trinkets placed in the desktop cavity; - electromagnet 2: aluminum rod ca. 10,00mm thick with a coil wound on the rod, the coil connected to a power source (6/12 V), User turns on the power by pressing the button – an electromagnet is not created, the user cannot lift steel trinkets placed in the desktop cavity;

180

- electromagnet 3: copper rod ca. 10,00mm thick with a coil wound on the rod, the coil connected to a power source (6/12 V), User turns on the power by pressing the button – an electromagnet is not created, the user cannot lift steel trinkets placed in the desktop cavity; - magnetic bear – strong neodymium magnet/s embedded to a body or another part of a teddy bear „Uszatek” (place of installation of the magnet and its poles indicated, e.g. on stomach), near in the depressions will be the remaining pieces (compatible, matching) of the character, but made of various materials: wood, steel, aluminum, glass, ferrite magnet, and depending on a material in a different color – User’s task is to build the entire character; User must select materials that attract a magnet. Stand should be multiplied, on the desktop may be placed several characters next to each other, eg. Teddy bear’s friends, so that an additional difficulty is to match the corresponding elements of the particular character. An alternative may be the characters from movies created in Se-ma- for studio in Łódź.

Fruit energy: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. On the stand one will be able to create a simple electric cell. On the desktop there will be placed various electrodes (made of different materials: a rod installed halfway in a wooden casing, which will bear the name of the material from which the electrode is made; casings should be differentiated in color depending on a type of metal) as well as a vessel with a „fruity” electrolyte. Using a simple gauge one can measure the voltage of the electrolyte – different depending of the use of different electrodes. The electrolyte must be placed in a vessel attached to the desktop. Next to the vessel fruit will be placed: apples, lemon – carrying out a role of electrolyte in the experience.

Energy from the Sun: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. A separated acrylic oval on the stand: a miniature model of the tramway with a tram. Next to the tramway a built-in countertop small solar panel. Above tramway: a lamp. The stand equipped with a light veil in the shape of the cloud – enabling the user to shade off the battery. A button triggering the tram ride should be installed on the desktop. Tram model will move receiving current from the battery. After shading off the battery with the cloud the tram should stop and start again after unveiling of the battery and pressing a button.

Induction slide: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. Attached to the desktop on both sides (stainless steel handes) Plexiglass tube with 2,00- 3,00cm diameter – with slope. LEDs installed along the tube. The stand equipped with a magnet (a „roll” of strongly magnetized magnets) – which when inserted into the tube moves freely down. A padded box cushioning the fall of the magnet should be placed at the bottom pipe outlet.

181

The roll of magnets, when inserted to the pipe and lowered, will light consecutive LEDs during the downhill. The roll of magnets should have marked poles. It will be lowered with the opposite poles interchangeably. Electric current is passes through the LED in one direction. In order to detect the direction of current flow through the coil, the following should be connected to it at any pair point: two LEDs with a different color. One of them will illuminate when current flows clockwise and the other when the current flows counterclockwise The roll of magnets causes the inductive current while moving through the coil, yet the flow direction of the current changes and, therefore, in each coil both LEDs illuminate. When the magnet is slid up to the coil, the magnetic field running through the coil will increase and electricity will be produced. When the magnet will leave the coil, the magnetic field will decrease and the flow direction of the inductive current will change. The flow direction of the inductive current also depends on which pole of the magnet will slide into the coil first. After rotating the roll of magnets, LES will illuminate in the reverse order.

Electromagnetic gun: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. A plexiglass tube should be attached to the platform 20,00-25,00 cm in diameter and 160,0-180,00 cm high. Inside the tube on a common core a coiled-coil and a metal ring should be embedded. A gun-start button will be installed on the platform. After pressing the button, electric current will flow through the coil, inducing a current through it. The generated magnetic field of the ring, opposite to the magnetic field of the coil will, fire the ring up. Due to the noisy operation of the unit, area which the ring will drop on should be damped with rubber.

Cartesian Diver 1: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. The stand equipped with PET bottles: filled with water and floating loaded objects of various shape and form (eg. Plankton and marine animals). A child using the stand should be able to, on pressing the bottle walls, observe „diving” and „ascent” of objects immersed in it.

Cartesian Diver 2: Components: diver filled with air with the possibility of fluid flow, tank with the liquid (sealed transparent cylinder, with the possibility of replenishing the liquid), metal lever (motion: up – down) enabling the change of pressure in the tank. Installation should have height of at least 150 cm, diameter of the tank cylinder: 20-30 cm, base weighted in a way that ensures stability of the device, the lever mounted at a height of 60-70 cm above the floor. Liquid – colored water a liquid selected by the designer at the design stage. Diver – made of plastic, with color distinctive of the liquid in which it is immersed. The base and other metal elements of the casing – stainless steel. Cylinder – curved glass or UV resistant plexiglass. Additional elements: a liquid container (for tank refilling), cylinder cleaning set. The system should be designed and constructed so that it was possible to simultaneously demonstrate the operation of both forces. The diver submerged in the liquid (use of color liquid is recommended) will be affected simultaneously by: force of gravity (pointing down) and buoyancy (pointing up). The resultant of those forces, ie. Their difference,

182 determines the direction of the diver. If the average density of the diver is smaller than the density of the liquid, the buoyancy prevails, keeping the diver in the upper position (Archimedes’ principle). The system should be equipped with a lever which, when pressed, will increase the pressure in the tank with the liquid (Pascal’s Law), causing compression of the air in the diver (reduced air volume) and partial fulfillment of the diver with liquid (as a result: it will become heavier). The force of gravity, stronger than the buoyancy force, will direct the diver down. By lifting the lever up, the user gets the reverse process. The hole through which water enters the diver during the descent should be twisted at the end or topped with an element enabling to turn the diver around its axis during the descent and ascent.

Communicating vessels: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. The stand equipped with bottles/vessels (plastic), connected with flexible transparent conductor. Other equipment required: cork to seal the bottle, holder. The user should be able to observe the flow of water (or absence of such flow) from one vessel to another: with different altitude of bottles, with one of the bottles sealed with cork.

Pascal Fountain: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. The stand equipped with two bottles sealed with cork with a funnel and tube inside, and a cuvette (to collect spilled water). The user should be able to observe Pascal’s law. Under the influence of poured water, air pressure in both connected bottles will raise and will become greater than the atmospheric pressure. Overpressure will push the water through the holes in the tube creating a fountain.

Tornado: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. The stand equipped with PET bottles: paired with necks and partially filled with water. The user should be able to observe a phenomenon associated with the principle of conservation of angular momentum. After setting the bottle so that the bottle filled with water is on top and energetic spin of the bottles, water spin speed will increase as it gets closer to the outlet.

Heron’s Fountain: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. The stand equipped in vessels/bottles connected with flexible conductor enabling the flow of water from one vessel to another – depending on the height of the water surface and the water column height. Vessels’ outlet – cork with a perforated tube at the end.

Hydroelectric power plant:

183

The stand with dimensions: 7,00m (length) x 1,20m (width) x 65,00cm (height). Construction of steel, roofing: sheet – stainless steel. The desktop shaped in the form of a river bed, with bottlenecks in which the following is embedded: overshot water wheel, undershot water wheel, Kaplan turbine – elements made of plexiglass and metal. Individual elements should be equipped with gauges indicating machine’s performance (the smallest – in the case of overshot water wheel, the biggest – in the case of Kaplan turbine). Water – in closed circuit; tank, installations and electrical mechanisms built into the platform. The stand equipped with: bags of sand for users to build dams in bottlenecks of river’s bed. The stand should be equipped with service access to all mechanical elements and plumbing.

Race with electricity: The stand is constructed of alternately stacked conductors (of various metals) and insulators – according to a conceptual drawing attached hereto. Conductors and insulators are „strung” on a metal structure (pipe) forming bendings at a right angle. The user moves a circle with a detector and gauge along the pipe, which in contact with the conductor „collects” points and adds them up – the better the conduction of current through a given metal, the greater the number of points. In case the insulator is touched, a number of points is lost. The route cannot be repeated. The winner of the game is the one who, after reaching the end of the installation, gathers the largest number of points.

Generator: The stand’s platform constructed of MDF and plywood, with dimensions: 60,00cm x 90,00cm and height 65,00cm (all dimensions: +/-15%), varnished, colors: red and blue. The platform should be equipped with height adjustable feet. A small generator attached to platform’s desktop: frame of an electrical conductor placed in a magnetic field. The user, turning the frame with a crank will make LEDs plugged into the stand light. The device must be simple and easy to use.

Voltaic pile: The stand to build the Voltaic pile should consist of the prepared discs of copper, aluminum, plastic racks for fastening discs in stacks with electrodes at one end and felt discs with a diameter similar to the diameter of the metal discs. The stand should be equipped with a bowl or bottle with a saline solution to wet felt discs. After construction of the stack, it can be plugged to one of the slots on the desktop to a network of several permanently constructed stacks. The goal is to build two stacks and connecting them in series and in parallel to the ones already existing and built-in on the desktop. By plugging in the stack one will see on the LCD display various reading of the voltmeter installed to the desktop. The voltmeter should have a wooden casing resembling the historical.

Electrochemical cells: The stand should consist of plates-electrodes made of various metals and bolted to the desktop. Electrodes should be connected (with the wires under the desktop) to a voltmeter with a high internal resistance. The experiment consists of closing the circuit of the electrochemical cell comprising electrodes, which the active user lays hands on. Circuit can be closed by putting hands on electrodes made of various metals. Electrodes should be palm-shaped. The experiment should be conducted by a single person or a group of people holding hands.

184

Aladdin’s lamp: The stand should consist of:: - darkened fragment of exhibition (e.g openwork turkish tent) with an area of 4 m2; - tent equipment, comprising: desktop; glass reactor with magnetic stirrer – placed on steel rack fastened to the desktop; two glass pipes supplying substrates to the reactor; pipe supplying breaker (neutral substance that washes out products the light-tight stoneware container after the shining ends); beaker stoneware tank; glass cylinders – placed over the reactor with which the reactants flow down into the reactor. The stand should be equipped with colorless substrates. Substrates for light-emitting substances are also required: in the cylinder no. 1 - solution of 3-aminophthalic hydrazide (luminol) in dimethyl sulfoxide (CH3) 2SO (DMSO); in the cylinder no. 2 – solution of KOH in DMSO The user by pressing a button on the desktop should be able to open the solenoid valve so that the products in sufficient quantities leak to the reactor. Mixing of the substances in reactor should result in an intense glow. After the glow disappears, when a certain button is pressed on the desktop breaker washes the reaction products and the whole process can be repeated. By the stand chemical flashlights may be available for sale.

Additional feature at the exhibition may be the stand: Record your own experiment. The visitor enters the room where simple objects available for experiments, like e.g. PET bottles, cans, etc. are placed on shelves. In the room there are instructions on how to perform the experiment and the instructor. The visitor prepares for the experiment and approaches the table where the experiment is performed along with pushing consecutive camera buttons: record – introduce yourself and tell what experiment you are going to conduct, record – experiment, record – conclusions of the experiment. Author sees on the screen elapsed time in respective recording modes such a as: 5s, 30s, 20s. After recording of conclusions is finished, the computer assembles the footage and plays in on the screen with appropriate inserts, eg. EC1 logo, title of the film, various stages of the experiment, end credits. The visitor is also able to copy their film on their own storage device.

Additional feature should be a demonstration: Hot air balloon: Model functioning: the visitor presses a button, a hot air is put into the balloon which results in rise of the balloon several meters above the floor. As the air cools down the balloon is lowered. Around the balloon, in its lower part, there is a heat-sensitive film ca. 20 cm wide, which is decolorized under the influence of temperature.

Path three: Microworld – Macroworld

The main part of the third exploring path "Microcosm - macrocosm" is located on the floors of 13.96 and 16.87. The 13.96 level should be the zone associated with the microcosm, and at the 16.87 zone should be the macrocosm. Zone "macrocosm" at the level of 16.87 should be arranged in two separate sub-zones: the engine room, and Refrigerators. The third path tour also provides for your stay in a 2d-3d cinema at level7.50, stay in the simulator at the level of 10.50 and a visit to the cold storage, in which is mounted Foucault pendulum. The schematic third path diagram: "Microcosm - macrocosm" is shown in Figure: AR 05 (Volume II: element drawing). Schematic deployment models and interactive installations, multimedia and selected elements on this path are arrangement as

185 illustrated in the drawings: AR 10, AR 11, AR 12, AR 18, AR 19, AR 25 (Volume II: element drawing).

The basic idea of the path script "Microcosm - macrocosm" is the presentation of objects and phenomena which, due to their size and properties which are not possible to behold by the naked eye and are beyond the frontiers of intuitive knowledge. Shown on it should also be implementations of the technology and studies of the microcosm and space exploration in everyday life.

The "Microcosm – macrocosm path" should be on the one hand different in character from the path of the first and second, but on the other hand should complement them. The study of micro-and macrocosm are firmly embedded in the history of science subjects and, therefore, to locate the subject on display next to the issues related to energy and knowledge of the history and civilization is natural and common in science centers. The path should not be a "copy" of other exhibitions related to space exploration. It should have its own personal character both in terms of editorial content and form of presentation.

A natural consequence of the path specific topics, of which knowledge is often contrary to experience and intuition, is to show the world that exists in the "micro" and "macro" dimensions using the latest multimedia technology. Processed or digitally generated images and sounds are a perfect complement to traditional media knowledge: easy to understand, stimulates the imagination and encourages, which is very important a positive attitude to knowledge.

The path should be arranged with the use of physical models, mock-ups, replicas and multimedia content. Equipment and audiovisual equipment should be one of the primary media content: both text and visual and auditive . Comment on mock-ups, models and replicas will be available from the GUI. Each theoretical issue should be illustrated by presentation, animation or film. The largest part as possible of the animation should be made in a combined of 2d-3d technique. Animations cannot be duplicated in various stations: the same animation should be available at the user level in only one place. Mock-ups, models, replicas should be done with attention to detail, use of generally accessible technical documentation.

This section contains the text layer materials research and teaching, and outreach to be used to prepare presentations, animations and videos, and provides guidelines for its preparation. This section provides guidance for the preparation of audio-visual materials. Other guidelines are included in Section 6 of this report. Elements of arrangement and stage design, the completion of which the contractor of the exhibition is bound, are described in this section under the relevant stations and in Chapter 3 of this report.

THE MICROCOSM ZONE 13.96 Level:

Objectives: Demonstration of the quark structure of matter. Demonstration of the construction of atomic nuclei. Demonstration of the construction of atoms and molecules. Demonstration property of crystal structures.

Scientific/ research value:

186

Understanding the structure, laws and processes of elementary particles, atoms, elements, and the practical use of this knowledge. Construction of legal and physical phenomena at the level of elementary particles and atoms escape intuitive knowledge that is difficult to understand. Nanotechnologies are simultaneously becoming increasingly important for everyday life. Understanding the characteristics of innovative technologies and materials is crucial for understanding the modern world.

The whole area is arranged in a huge separate space like an openwork polygon - reminiscent of the form of the molecular bonds model. Guidelines for the implementation of this component as well as guidelines for interior and set design area - are described in Section 3 of this report.

Equipment and AV designed for the stand: 4 sets 32'' LCD monitors with touch- sensitive pads and two Multimedia tables (required technical equipment and AV equipment are set out in Section 4 of this report, a description of the guidelines and requirements and software functionality - Chapter 6 of these studies ).

The user interface should allow access / select the following text and multimedia content:

Quarks - the smallest known elementary particles: a) quarks and leptons, the smallest known elementary particles: According to current knowledge of the smallest and indivisible elements that make up all matter (elementary particles) are quarks and leptons. From them are made all other particles. Quarks, of all kinds, are components of protons and neutrons. The best-known lepton is the electron. Suitable combinations of quarks and leptons form the atom. From atoms "can be built" any type of matter in the universe. Quark is not isolated, in contrast to leptons. Quarks accompany antiquarks (antiparticles). b) the electric charge of quarks: One of the fundamental properties matter, is the electromagnetic interaction of charged bodies electrically. The main feature is the ability of electric charges to interact with other charges, as well as manufacturing of electrical and magnetic fields, and the interaction with them. Proton is assigned a positive electric charge, and electron a negative. Quarks are unusual in terms of charges, since they have fractional electric charge: 2/3 or -1 / 3, in contrast to an electron (charge -1) or a proton (charge +1). Protons and neutrons are composed of two types of quark - up and down. Up quark has a charge of 2/3 and the down quark charge -1 / 3 Neutron consists of two down quarks and one up. c) color, smell, quark families: Quarks have a charge that is not an electromagnetic charge - this is the color charge. Color is a quantum number introduced in order to distinguish between the quarks that are all in the same spin state - the term has nothing to do with "normal" colors that we see. All quarks are fermions, which means that they have a half spin. Spin is torque of own momentum particles in the system in which it doesn’t execute advancing movement. "Own" - that is, one that does not result from movement of the particles relative to other particles, but only in the nature of the particle. Spin is a term associated with quantum mechanics. As a rule of Paulie: in a quantum state can be one Fermion - quarks are fermions and are subject to this rule.

187

Each quark carries a color charge of one of the possible values of red, green or blue. Colors are not assigned to individual quarks forever, because color exchange takes place between quarks (in strong interactions: by gluons). Each antiquark, in turn, brings anticolor and may be respectively anti-red, anti-green or anti-blue. All quarks are described by a set of characteristic values, called quantum numbers. One of them is the smell. There are six types of quarks with different flavors: u (top - up), d (lower - down), s (strange - strange), c (a charm - charm), b (trousers - bottom or beautiful - beauty) and t (true - true or peak - top). Each flavor (u, d, s, c, b, t) quark comes in three different colors (red, green, blue). Quarks and leptons are divided into three families (generations):

QUARKS LEPTONS FIRST GENERATION charge charge charge charge +2/3 1/3 0 -1 electron up down electron neutrino SECOND GENERATION charm strange neutrino muon THIRD GENERATION top bottom neutrino tau

Other families of elementary particles differ from each other in that they are heavier and heavier. The whole existing stable world around us is made up of particles of the first family. Particles of other families are unstable and quickly disintegrate: they are produced in laboratories. Applied also are different distribution of quarks into two groups: - Light quarks: u (up), d (down), s (strange) - Heavy quarks: c (charming), b (pants) and t (true). A multitude of outdoor types of quarks and leptons may indicate that the quarks and leptons can have an internal structure that has not yet been discovered. d) the interactions of strong and asymptotic freedom: Physics highlights in the universe, the so-called four. fundamental forces: gravitational force, the electromagnetic force, the weak force, the strong force. Relatively good study describes and explains two of them: gravity and electromagnetism. Less well known are the nuclear forces: strong and weak. Quarks and anti-quarks, alike, interact strongly. The quarks in hadrons are bound by strong interactions - the strongest of all basic interactions. Strong interaction occurs between two quarks through the exchange of gluons. During the interaction the strong quarks change their color. The strength and energy of the strong interaction increases with the distance between the quarks. If the distance / energy is sufficiently large, there may be new quarks. Strong nuclear interaction occurs only in very small distances. Quarks interact with a force that is proportional to the distance between them. Strong interactions between quarks are the weaker, the more energy they have. This effect is called "asymptotic freedom of the strong interaction". In contrast to other forces that we know, the strong do not decrease with increasing distance, but grow. Quarks located relatively close to each other interact relatively weakly, but the "breaking" of the nucleon quark requires infinite energy - so it's impossible.

188

Quark feature is that they are not present as free particles, and it is impossible to separate and isolate them. Quarks are found only in complex systems (hadrons - protons, neutrons). The discovery of asymptotic freedom in the theory of the strong interaction of the Nobel Prize in Physics in 2004 was awarded to: David Gross, David Politzer and Frank Wilczek. e) gluons: Kleiwem quarks are gluons. Strong interaction occurs between two quarks through the exchange of gluons - while carrying charges of colorful and anti-colorful. Gluons have no mass and have no electric charge. Gluons have their own color. Gluons, because they have no mass, are able to interact with themselves, but the interaction space area is very small. Exchange of gluons between quarks in a hadron (called the strong nuclear interaction) binds quarks together into an inseparable whole. The main difference between the electromagnetic and strong interactions is that strong interactions transfer particles (gluons) carrying the same color charge. Whereas photons do not carry charges. f) hadrons - a group of quarks: Quark feature is that they are not present as free particles, and they can not be isolated. Quark join together in groups - hadrons, e.g.: - Meson - a system composed of a quark and anti-quark having adequate in relation to the quark anti-color; - Baryon - the quarks arrangement of red, green and blue; baryons have three so called. valence quarks (named by analogy to the valence electrons of atoms. They are responsible for the properties of the particles, as valence electrons are responsible for the chemical properties of the atom); - Pentaquarks - a hypothetical five-quark: three differently colored quarks and quark-anti-quark pair; - Dibaryons - a hypothetical system of six quarks. g) strange matter: The third quark advocated by Gell-Mann and Zweig - a strange quark (s) explains the existence of strange particles. It is believed that the particles comprising quark s (strange) is made of very dense material occurring in the interior of very massive neutron stars. So a neutron star sometimes is compared to a giant atomic nucleus. The matter in it is very densely packed: star with a mass similar to the mass of the Sun has a diameter of only 12-24 km. In some theoretical models of nuclear matter in a star under the influence of sufficiently high pressure coming from the gravity the star may disintegrate: nucleons move to new state of matter - the quark-gluon plasma. Down quarks (d) would then turn into strange quarks (s). Such a substance that consists of three types of quarks: the lower and upper (both form the Earth's matter) and strange (not present in earthly matters, but recognized in hiperonach - unstable particles obtained in laboratories) has been called "strange matter." h) The story of the discovery of quarks: The hypothesis of the existence of quarks as elementary constituents of matter was put forward independently by Murray Gell-Mann and George Zweig in 1964 Initially this theory was not recognized among scientists. After the construction of a new accelerator physicists checked experimentally and verified it by analyzing the scattering of electrons with very high energy protons. The existence of quarks was confirmed in 1968 when experiments with deep inelastic scattering of electrons in the center of Stanford Linear Accelerator were performed. At lower energies electrons bounce off the proton as if it were a homogeneous elastic ball. After increasing the collision energy, when the wavelength of an electron become smaller than the size of a proton, electrons began to scatter in such a way as if- colliding with point objects inside the proton. If the charges inside the proton is distributed evenly, the

189 electrons should scatter at small angles. As a result of collisions surprisingly a lot of distractions at large angles were obtained. Similarly, alpha particles bombarding atoms of gold, Ernst Rutherford discovered in 1909, the internal structure of the atom (and the existence of the atomic nucleus). For the formulation of the quark model the Nobel Prize in 1969, was given to Murray Gell-Mann. The experimental confirmation the existence of quarks Nobel Prize in 1990 was awarded to HW Kendall J.I. Friedman, R. E. Taylor. i) testing techniques of elementary particles: The study of elementary particles of extremely small dimensions is possible thanks to accelerators - devices used to accelerate particles or ions to near the speed of light. By colliding elementary particles with each other we can learn of the properties of particles and nuclear reactions. Electrically-charged particles are accelerated in an electric field. To concentrate particles in a beam and to give them the right direction a magnetic or electric field is used. The largest and most powerful particle accelerator in the world (hadrons) - The Large Hadron Collider (LHC) - was built in the European Organization for Nuclear Research, CERN, near Geneva: the Swiss-French border. A tunnel, built from 75 to 175 meters below the ground is 27 km long. Some of the major particle accelerators are: - Linear Accelerator Center SLAC Stanford - Located in Palo Alto, California (USA), - Fermilab - National Laboratory for Particle Acceleration them. E. Fermi - located in Batavia near Chicago (USA), - DESY - DESY laboratory in Hamburg (Germany).

Content is designed for multimedia - 4 32'' LCD monitors with touch-sensitive pads [3.01 ts, ts. 3.02, 3.03 ts, ts 3.04]. Each, of the above mentioned themes, the Contractor may be place any on the monitors, although, recommended is the order of topics given above. Each topic should be illustrated with animation. Illustrate to the following: the structure of the atom, the structure of the proton, the strong, the loop algae, asymptotic freedom, experiments at SLAC, the characters associated with the history of discovery of quarks and research on quarks (including Nobel Prize winners). With the exception of history of the discovery of quark, which can be viewed in 2d, other animation should be performed in combined 2d - 3d. Total time animation of not less than 10 minutes. Besides animation a fictionalized footage showing the operation of modern accelerators is required. A minimum of two sequences - each about five minutes. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

Structure of the atom. The nuclei of atoms. Electron orbits: a) Brownian motion - the inspiration for the corpuscular models: Brownian motion is irregular, random, chaotic movement (vibration) of small dust particles suspended in liquid.They were seen in 1827 by biologist Robert Brown observing pollen under a microscope in an aqueous suspension. These movements seemed to be spontaneous - "for no reason". The constant movement resembled a kind of "perpetual motion" and aroused great interest among physicists. Interpretation of Brownian motion dealt with among others Albert Einstein and Marian Smoluchowski. They proved Einstein in 1905, and Smoluchowski in 1906 that Brownian motion can be explained as the effects of collisions with particles of liquid pollen. The experimental confirmation of Einstein and Smoluchowski explanations cemented the belief in the scientific world about the real existence of atoms.

190

Due to the size (the size of a typical particle is of the order of nanometers / or 10-9m) Brown could not see the water molecules: the largest object possible to see under an optical microscope is about a thousand times larger than a typical molecule. All exhibit Brownian motion of microscopic particles suspended in fluids (gases or liquids). The molecules move constantly, their movement is not waning, and the velocity is greater for smaller particles and for higher temperature. b) Thomson's model of the atom: The idea that matter is "grainy" dates back to ancient times. This view was confessed e.g. by Democritus (and contrary to this view was Aristotle, who believed that matter is continuous and can be infinitely divided into smaller and smaller parts). The smallest particle of matter, of which is made all the material, and that cannot be divided, is called atoms (atom - gr.: Indivisible). Experimentally the idea of Democritus was confirmed only in 1803, when John Dalton concluded from a study that chemical compounds always combined in certain proportions. Another theoretical evidence for the existence of atoms have been provided by the scientific explanation of Brownian motion developed by Einstein and Smoluchowski. At the same time assumed, however, that the atoms are divisible. It was demonstrated by Joseph John Thomson, who proved in testing the properties of cathode rays that are negatively charged particles of less than one thousandth of the mass of the lightest atom. He carried out the experiment with the use of a tube-like equipment: heated to a high temperature wire emits electrons as particles with a negative electrical charge, accelerated in an electric field struck the phosphor coated screen that under the influence of these strokes emit flashes of light. Thomson assumed that these electrons come from the interior of the atom, and the cathode rays are a ray particles of negative charge. Thomson formulated a theoretical model of the atom based on the assumption that the atom has a homogeneous structure, the positively charged "ball", which are evenly distributed over the negatively charged electrons (arranged in a sphere like raisins in a cake). c) Rutherford's model of the atom: Gradually atom increasingly ceased to be regarded as the smallest element of matter. The fact that the atom has, however, an internal structure was proven by Ernest Rutherford. In 1909, Rutherford, along with Hans Geiger and Ernest Marsden conducted an experiment of "bombing" a thin gold foil with alpha particles. The gold foil, which Rutherford bombarded with alpha particles, had a thickness of about 10-7m - equivalent to about four layers of gold atoms. Alpha particle velocity is, for particles with an energy of 5.5 MeV, about 15,000 km / s The source of alpha particles used in the experiment of Rutherford was the element polonium 214Po. If Thomson's model of the atom was true, then the alpha particles should penetrate without much difficulty the foil, and the path of the alpha particles as a result of a collision would be a small deviation. As a result of the experiment it was found, however, that the path of some (too many) alpha particles is, however, much larger deviations than expected, and some, after reflection, even returned to the source of radiation. This meant that the atom does not have a uniform structure: a clear, focused center of a relatively large mass of positively charged - nucleus (Rutherford called its "central charge"). Since a large amount of particles pass through the foil with almost no disturbance, positive medium must be sufficiently small compared to the size of atom. Rutherford conducted experiments to conclude that beyond a small, positively charged "central charge" within the atom prevails a void, and only as large as the dimensions of the atom, the distance from the nucleus are arranged negative charges - electrons (discovered earlier by Thomson). The kernel (single proton) is so heavy that the center of mass coincides with the proton. Rutherford concluded that, for the negatively charged electrons and positively charged atomic nucleus, through attracting not "hit" each other under the influence of Coulomb interaction, electrons must be in a constant orbital motion around the nucleus.

191

This model of atomic structure reappears in association with the planetary system. Results of tests conducted on experiments of a new "planetary" model of the atom Rutherford presented to the public in 1911, and this year is considered to be the date of the discovery of the atomic nucleus. d) Bohr's model of atomic structure and quantum assumptions: Rutherford's model of the atom does sufficiently explained the stability of atoms. Alby remove the shortcomings and Niels Bohr modified it: using the law of classical physics (circular motion) Bohr introduced the quantum assumptions that do not fit into classical physics. Bohr assumed for Rutherford that around the nucleus of an atom revolves electron attracted to the nucleus. But, instead of an infinite number of orbits (permissible from the point of view of classical mechanics), Bohr found that electrons can move only in certain orbits called stable (fixed). Cruising through the electron orbits, while experiencing acceleration, but it does not emit radiation (the total energy remains constant). Radiation is emitted only when an electron jumps to orbit. When you change the orbit, which is accompanied by change of energy of the electron, an atom emits a photon. The energy of a photon is equal to the difference between the energies of the electrons in these orbits. In the Bohr model of the electron orbital angular momentum is quantized: it must be an integer multiple of Planck's constant divided by 2π. Earlier Max Planck introduced quantization for light. The rays of the orbits of the electron and the electron energies at different orbits are also quantized. It turned out that when any of the values characterizing the electron is quantized, the other also must be quantized. The quantum model of the atom, Bohr gave results consistent with the experiment (emission and absorption spectrum), but not enough to explain the fact why the concepts of classical mechanics cannot be applied in the world of atoms (subatomic particles). Bohr's model, which is "artificial" combines classical mechanics and quantum limits, it gives the correct results for the energy of the electron on the next orbit and the orbital radii for hydrogen and carbon elements hydrogen-like, but fails for more complex elements. e) the theory of wave properties of particles de Broglie: Bohr's model was finally rejected such for this reason, that it was impossible to adapt it to atoms with more than two electrons, and it was impossible to use it to create a convincing, consistent with the known experimental facts, the theory of the formation of chemical bonds. Bohr model of the atom has been replaced by a new improved model, in which the position of an electron at a given point in time is not specified exactly - but with a certain probability, and the electron treated as a wave of matter. Louis de Broglie was one of the first to proposed to examine whether the material does not exhibit the properties of the wave. He believed that if light has a dual wave-particle nature, it may be that material also has dual nature. He assumed that the length of the anticipated wave of matter is defined by same compound, which is used for light. Experimental confirmation of this thesis were provided by the experiment performed by Davisson and Germer, the scattering of electrons in a crystal of nickel. The result obtained was analogous to the scattering of X-rays for atomic crystal planes. This phenomenon could be explained only on the basis of the theory of wave motion. These studies led to the theory of standing waves of matter. Standing waves do not carry energy - which explains why the circulating electron orbit does not emit electromagnetic radiation. The theory of de Broglie saying that the motion of a particle (e.g. an electron) is described by the wave behavior of matter, became the basis of modern atomic theory, the description states. f) the Heisenberg uncertainty principle and quantum mechanics:

192

The theory of de Broglie was expanded by Carl Werner Heisenberg and Erwin Schrodinger, who proposed a new way of describing the world of microparticles - quantum mechanics. In 1926 Heisenberg formulated the uncertainty principle, having fundamental meaning for quantum physics. According to the uncertainty principle particles haven’t separately defined position or speed - this is attributed to the quantum state. In quantum mechanics, it is not possible to predict the specific result of a single measurement - instead a set of possible outcomes is determined, and the probability of each of them can be estimated. This is similar to the behavior of the waves that do not occupy a certain position, but are distributed with a certain probability.

Of fundamental importance for the study of quantum mechanics were Max Planck. In 1900, Planck formulated the hypothesis that light and other electromagnetic waves may not be issued at any rate, but only in quanta - specific portions. Each quantum of energy is determined - the more, the higher the frequency of the wave. Quants (specific size, specific portions) light like particles of matter.

Quantum mechanics is based on the physics of the "new type" – it no longer describes a world with particles and waves: only observations of the world "scale" man can be described in this way. For quantum mechanics the duality of a wave particle is correct: in certain circumstances, "comfortable" is to consider particles as waves and waves as particles. As a result, between the particles, such as between the waves, interference may occur: overlapping ridges (such as wave crests), with all the associated consequences. Heisenberg in 1932 received the Nobel Prize "for the creation of quantum mechanics." In quantum physics is based on the development of new technologies and devices such as TVs, computers, transistors, integrated circuits. In quantum physics is based on the whole modern biochemistry.

Quantum mechanics is one of the greatest scientific theories - apart from the general theory of relativity. Both of these theories, however, have failed so far to agree with each other. Einstein's General Theory of Relativity explains the large-scale structure and properties of the universe. It is consistent with the macro-scale observations, such as the classical Newtonian mechanics is consistent with the observations of the world "scale" of man. In the microcosm scale "rules" the uncertainty principle and quantum mechanics. The combination of the theory of gravity and quantum mechanics, namely the creation of a grand theory of unification, is one of the great challenges of modern science. protons and neutrons: Atom in its structure is not uniform. It is composed of atomic nuclei and electrons arranged around it in orbit. The atomic nucleus is composed of two types of nuclei: protons - positively charged particles (protons charge is +1) and neutrons - particles without an electric charge. The discoverer of the proton is considered as Eugen Goldstein, who, during research on the radiation anode observed that the anode radiation consists of positively charged ions. Protons and neutrons are baryons, which in turn are hadrons. One of the characteristic quantities of the elements is the atomic number: it determines how many protons are in the nucleus of an atom. The atomic number is the basis for ordering of atoms in the periodic table: atomic number recorded in the periodic table recorded in the lower left corner of the element symbol. Atoms which have the same number of protons are atoms of one element. Proton is the lightest baryons. It is a strongly interacting particle composed of quarks: two up quarks (u) and one down quark (d). Between the positively charged protons electric repulsion occurs, the effects of which are offset by the strong interaction between nucleons.

James Chadwick discovered the neutron in 1932, It was based on previous studies on the

193 properties of alpha particles. During the bombardment of beryllium alpha particles discovered a very penetrating radiation, which was carrying no electric charge. Then interpreted them as gamma rays - the only known radiation electrically neutral. Chadwick found that there is a new elementary particle, which form part of the nucleus and is devoid of electric charge. The existence of neutrons explained why the atomic masses are approximately twice as large as the proton mass. Neutron consists of two bottom quark (d) and one of the upper (u), related to the strong interaction with each other. Neutrons can trigger a series of nuclear reactions. The mass number is the value describing the number of nucleons (protons and neutrons that is) in the nucleus of an atom of the isotope of the element. Atoms having the same mass number, but a different number of protons, are called isobars.

Proton cannot spontaneously decay (according to the standard model). However, when we deliver extra energy to the interior of the atom it can be transformed: the result is a Neutron and neutrino neutron. In turn, the neutron beta decay turns into a proton. electrons: Previously, the protons and neutrons, as in 1897, were discovered electrons: Thomson observed them during the test properties of cathode rays. The experiment made with the help of the cloud chamber gives an indication of the value of the electric charge, but they were not the exact measurements. Accurate test results were received in 1911,by Robert Andrews Millikan. Measurements carried out by him showed that all electrons have the same charge. The number of electrons in an atom is equal to the number of protons, so the atom is electrically neutral. As the number of electrons is equal to the number of protons, the atomic number tells us about many electrons element (deionized). Atoms of electron number different from the number of protons are called ions. electron orbits: Since the discovery of the electron research has focused on the properties of the electron and its movement within the atom. Experiments have confirmed the belief that the electrons move in an atom in the field much as the size of the atom, away from his nucleus. In the early planetary model of the atom the electrons circled in their orbits around the nucleus - similar like planets in the solar system. Attracting the interplay between the positively charged nucleus and an electron with a negative charge would guarantee the continuation of an electron in orbit (like the gravitational attraction Sun and planets). However, in accordance with the laws of mechanics and electrodynamics (applicable when formulating the basis of models of planetary structure of the atom) very fast electrons should lose energy - and thus fall into the nucleus. Part of the problem was solved by introducing Bohr quantum assumptions: the orbits of specific radii. Only after such well-defined orbits, the electrons can circulate around the nucleus, in one orbit could circulate only two electrons. Electrons can not fall on the nucleus, because they cannot get close to it more than the radius of the orbit near the lowest energy.

According to quantum mechanics, electrons orbiting the nucleus can be considered as a wavelength dependent on the speed of the electron. Length of certain orbits corresponds to the total (not fractional) multiple of the wavelength of the electron. The crest of the electron wave is created in the same location during each lap: waves add up and strengthen. These orbits correspond to Bohr's allowed orbits. If the electron orbits the nucleus in an orbit whose length is equal to an integer multiple of the electron waves, each wave crest (due to interference) is cleared by the valley of the wave – such an orbit is not allowed.

194

Bohr's theory explained well the distribution of the spectral lines of atoms hydrogen-like, but it has not worked for more complex elements. It was observed that the spectral lines are not homogeneous, but consists of several closely spaced lines. Arnold Sommerfeld to explain this fact, assumed that the orbits are not necessarily circles: in addition to circular orbits may also be elliptical orbits. It was also noted that the orbits of electrons does not necessarily lie in one plane: the orbit can be arranged in certain directions. electron shell: Currently, it is assumed that a large (such as the size of atom) distance from the core are disposed of electrons, which electrons are arranged. These coatings are a set of quantum states - with the same value of the main quantum number. Subsequent electron shell: K, L, M, N, O, P, Q correspond to increasingly weak binding energies. The coatings are composed of electron subshells Electrons can "jump" from one orbit to another: moving to a lower level lose energy, which is emitted in the form of electromagnetic radiation. Radiation can ionize an atom or excite electrons in atoms. Leaving the orbit of an electron leaves the shell space unfilled: the atom is then in an excited state. Excitation can be removed either by an electron jumping from a higher level to place unfilled, or by throwing out another electron from the atom (the Auger electron).

At the furthest from the core shells (valence shell) are arranged valence electrons. They are the weakest link to the nucleus. The chemical bonding electrons are involved in the so-called. orbital fronts: mainly located in the valence shell, but not only - they can also be located on the electron lower shells. It is these electrons with the highest energy properties and least attracted to the nucleus, taking part in the formation of chemical bonds are responsible for the chemical properties of the element.

Atom deprived creates the so-called valence electrons. atomic nucleus - the nucleus with strong electrons. electron cloud, atomic orbitals: Electron cloud is an area in which there is some probability of finding the electron. The term was popularized with the development of quantum mechanics, which describes the electron as a fuzzy area of electrical charge. According to quantum mechanics, atoms should not be treated as particles, but as cloud density cargoes described by the square of the wave function. This is a consequence of the theory of Erwin Schrodinger and corpuscular-wave dualism. Orbital is the position of the electron wave function and describes the combination of quantum numbers. Atomic orbitals have characteristic energies and different shapes. The electrons occupy the space around the nucleus forming an electron cloud, where the probability of finding them is large. Within the electron cloud are areas with very high probability: electron shells. Within the shell electrons are of the same principal quantum number. Capacity electron shell is 2 n2 (n - main quantum number). liquid drop model of the nucleus of an atom: One of the first models of the nucleus was a liquid drop model. It was proposed by George Gamow and developed by Niels Bohr and John Archibald Wheeler. It assumes that the nucleons (protons and neutrons) in the nucleus behave like particles in a liquid and therefore ownership of the nucleus (as a whole) should be similar to those of the liquid drop. As a drop of liquid: the nucleus is subject to various vibration and rotation. Microscopic impacts, strong nuclear impacts and strong electrostatic forces are in the model represented by analogy to the forces of viscosity and surface tension. An important assumption of the model is that the nuclei are spherical. In theory, the binding energy per nucleon for nuclei of light is constant. The binding

195 energy of the nuclei of high molecular weight is smaller than that of the low molecular weight nuclei. This leads to the conclusion that it is possible to split nuclei with large masses into smaller - so the phenomenon of fission is possible. coating model of the nucleus of an atom: Coating model of the nuclear shell model reminiscent of the electrons in the atom. Protons and neutrons in the nucleus move as independent particles resembling the shells of electrons). In this model, each layer in the kernel can take a certain number of nucleons. Separate coating occupy protons and neutrons separately. The number of protons, neutrons, for which the coatings are filled are called magic numbers. Protons and neutrons are moving in the interaction - formed by the remaining protons and neutrons. The source of this central field is a single, highlighted object (as in the nucleus of the atom), but averaged resultant force field of other nucleons nucleus, acting on the individual nucleon. The field produced by protons and neutrons is called nuclear potential. model of interacting bosons, collective model of the nucleus of an atom: Model of interacting bosons is based on the assumption that the nuclear force nuclei combine in pairs. The nucleus in this model is a set of such nucleonic pairs - located outside a closed shell. The two nucleons forming a pair like boson - a hypothetical particle carrying the impact. Typical nuclei in this model: even-even are not too likely to excitate. Model of interacting bosons, however, also differentiates uneven nuclei- even: an even number of one type of nucleons and the other odd.

The collective model assumes that within the nucleus of the atom moving both the "loose" nuclei and nucleons "in the collective": located on the external coatings in relation to the core of the nucleus. The nuclei in this model has no spherical symmetry. Closed, filled shell nuclei are deformed as a result of polarization caused by the action of nucleons outside closed shells. elements and isotopes of an element: Element is a substance composed of atoms with the same number of protons in the nucleus. The atoms of the same element, however, may have a different number of neutrons in the nucleus - consequently, may differ in mass. Atoms having the same atomic number but different numbers of neutrons are called isotopes. The existence of different isotopes of the certain element were discovered in 1911, by Frederic Soddy. The greater the difference in atomic weights of isotopes, the more they can vary in terms of the physico-chemical properties. Isotopes of an element may have a different density, boiling point, melting and sublimation. These differences are also found in chemical compounds formed by the isotopes. Difference in atomic mass of isotopes has no influence on the direction of chemical reactions in which they participate, but affect the speed of the progress of this reaction. Elements typically occur naturally as a mixture of isotopes. Each element has its isotopes, and a large part of which is radioactive. Radioactive isotopes (radioisotopes) are isotopes whose nuclei are unstable and spontaneously undergo radioactive transformation. As a result of this transformation other atoms are formed, the elementary particles, as well as energy is released in the form of gamma rays and the transformation of kinetic energy products. Of the approximately 3,500 known isotopes, only 259 are stable. Surrounding us is sometimes radioactive material, but only in trace amounts (so-called natural radioactivity).

196

Elements can have a few or even several isotopes. One of the most abundant element, has three isotopes of hydrogen: - Prot (hydrogen plain): 1H - has one proton and no neutrons, - Deuterium: 2H (D) - has one proton and one neutron, - Tritium: 3H (T) - has one proton and two neutrons. The heaviest isotope of hydrogen, tritium is not stable. The isotopes of certain elements are widely used in practice:  carbon isotope 12C (in the nucleus has six protons and six neutrons) is a standard mass;  carbon isotope 14C (in the nucleus has 6 protons and 8 neutrons) is radioactive and is used to determine the age of the samples;  americium 241Am, which is produced in nuclear reactors, is used in fire smoke alarm, the detectors for the detection of small amounts of heavy metals in the water; polonium used in radiation chemistry as a high source of alpha particles;  cobalt 60Co and krypton 85Kr are used to detect the flaw covered with product defects, the tightness of the quality control of welds; Power isotope are used in heart pacemakers, spacecrafts, meteorological stations located in difficult terrain. synthesis processes: Atomic nuclei are subject to change. Nuclear fusion (fusion) is the joining of two lighter nuclei into heavier one. As a result of the merger may be formed next to the new nuclei also free neutrons, protons, subatomic particles and alpha particles.

Atomic nuclei have a positive electrical charge and therefore repel each other – to connections must get close enough in order that the nuclear force defeat the electrostatic repulsion. Particles with high kinetic energies can overcome this repulsion and get close to each other at such a distance in order to get the fusion reaction. The high energy of nuclei is obtained at very high temperatures (e.g., in stars, the H-bomb) or the scattering of nuclei particle accelerators.

The kinetic energy needed to produce fusion reaction increases with the charge of the nucleus (the number of protons in the nucleus). The easiest way is to lead to a nuclear reaction of low atomic numbers. For this reason, the most effective are the thermonuclear reactions involving hydrogen and its isotopes: deuterium and tritium. Thermonuclear reactions have played a very important role in the universe. As a result, the first elements were obtained. The original nucleosynthesis (the earliest "production" of atomic nuclei) began only when the temperature of the universe as a result of expansion fell so low that the associated energy of thermal motion began to be less than the binding energy of the least bound nucleus. Thermonuclear fusion is the energy source of the stars today, including the Sun. It is actually in the stars are made all the elements. The main source of energy of stars is called. proton-proton cycle. fission reactions: The cleavage reaction is the nucleus of a heavy broken into two or more smaller fragments of comparable masses which are atoms of other, lighter elements. During the fission neutrons are emitted and gamma quanta. Nuclear fission can occur spontaneously or as a result of the bombing of the nucleus with different particles: neutrons, protons, deuterons (protons and neutrons), alpha particles, gamma quanta. Most often neutrons are used for such bombardment, because they have no electrical charge, which allows them to easily penetrate the nucleus. The cleavage reaction triggers a large amount of energy. This energy is related to the difference between the mass of the nucleus before fission, fission products and the masses, the newly formed nuclei of elements (so-called mass defect) - the total mass of the fission products is less than the mass of the nucleus before fission. An important feature is the emission of fission neutrons free: moving from high velocities

197 in different directions. Resulting fission neutrons can cause further nuclear fission (chain reaction). Process within the atomic bomb is uncontrolled fission chain reaction (e.g. using fissionable uranium isotope U235). Controlled fission reaction is carried out in a nuclear reactor. emission of alpha, beta, range, alpha decay, beta decay: Number of neutrons in the nucleus of an atom cannot be arbitrary. When there are too many or too few, the nucleus is no longer stable. Nuclear disintegration leads to radiation, in which particles emitted are alpha, beta and gamma. The material on which alpha, beta or gamma falls absorbs some of them (there is absorption of radiation).

The phenomenon of radioactivity was discovered by Henri Becquerel in 1896 by examining the phenomenon of phosphorescence. He noted that films combined with salt of uranium unexposed to sunlight earlier are already darkening at the application point of the film. Becquerel demonstrated in further studies, the source of new radiation can be any chemical compound that contains a sufficient amount of uranium and uranium metal. Maria Sklodowska-Curie and Pierre Curie exploring uranium ore precipitated a new element, radium - many times more radioactive than uranium. Extracting the element enabled a closer examination of quantitative emission of energy depending on the content of the radioactive element in the sample. It turned out that the radioactivity is in the emissions of three different types of radiation, and the transformation of one element into another through radioactive decay.

The phenomenon of radiation was dealt with at the end of the nineteenth century, by Thomson and Rutherford. They studied the processes of ionization of gases of irradiated rays discovered by Becquerel. Rutherford discovered that there are two types of radiation: - Alpha: easily absorbed, even by a sheet of paper, - Beta: can penetrate even thick metal sheets. Soon was discovered a third type of radiation: gamma - very penetrating, which can penetrate up to several cm of lead sheet. Rutherford proved that alpha radiation is a stream of positive ions He2 + (4He nuclei). Beta particles have been identified as having a negative charge: i.e. electrons. Interpreted as gamma radiation electromagnetic radiation (like light) having a wavelength of less than 10-11 meters.

The disintegration of the nucleus may take various forms. Alpha decay (alpha conversion) is a decomposition reaction, in which is emitted an alpha particle. As a result of alpha decay the resulting nucleus is smaller by 2 atomic number and mass number lower by 4 compared with the decaying nucleus. In alpha decay, alpha particle is formed in the nucleus. Alpha particle energy is less than the energy required to overcome the forces of attraction, but thanks to the phenomenon of quantum tunneling passes through a narrow potential barrier. Alpha decay is a common phenomenon in nature: it is responsible for almost half of the natural radioactivity of the earth's crust.

Beta decay is a nuclear transformation that takes place under the influence of the weak interaction, which occurs under the action of the weak nucleon transition to another nucleon.

There are two types of decay: disintegration of β-and β + decay. This decay is always dissipated energy, which float decomposition products. Part of the energy decay may remain stored in the nucleus in the form of its excitation energy, and therefore is often accompanied by beta decay gamma rays.

198

Β-decay is a nuclear transformation by which a neutron is replaced by a proton. The decay was studied among others by Wolfgang Pauli, who explained that during the transformation of beta in the nucleus one of the neutron turns into a proton, an electron and a neutrino (no mass at rest, with zero electric charge). An electron and a neutrino emitted during this transition are outside the nucleus (electron - as beta radiation). As a result of the conversion of mass number remains unchanged and the atomic number increases by 1 Β-decay is accompanied by gamma rays, and in some nuclei emission of protons or neutrons. Β + decay involves the conversion of a proton into a neutron inside the nucleus. Β-decay and β + occur as a result of the weak.

In decay particles retained energy and momentum. molecular binding: A permanent molecular bond connecting two atoms. They arise as a result of "share" electrons, so-called. orbitals front (usually these are the valence shell). These electrons are derived either from a single atom, or both, combining atoms. To create a molecular bond we need at least two electrons. Coatings having the hydrogen atoms of one electron to the valence approximation coalesce as if it were a shell formed. Two electrons are equally attracted by two nuclei. A bond which is formed by two electrons is called a single bond. When participating in the binding of electrons are four, there is a double bond. When the "common" electrons are six, there is a triple bond. Single, double and triple are quite common - much rarer are binding quadruple, quintuple and sextuple. When the particle is composed of two hydrogen atoms as their electrons are deployed symmetrically about both nuclei. The hydrogen atoms "lend" each other electrons: two electrons are "common" to both atoms.

Bonds may be covalent or ionic. Covalent bonding (atomic) the bond between the same atoms of establishing a shared pair of electrons for the two atoms. Depending on the distribution of electrons can be:

- Polarized: the shared pair of electrons which is not shifted in the direction of any of the atom, such bonds are present in the molecules of O2, H2, - Polarized: the one pair of electrons is moved toward the atom with a larger number of valence electrons, such bonds are present in the molecule such as NH3,> CO2. An ionic bond formed by a "returning" of the electron by one atom to another. Occurs when between ions: atom endowed with a positively charge (cation) and an atom endowed with a negative charge (anion). Such commitment causes a change in the charge of the electron atoms. allotropic variety of carbon: flereny, nanoruki, graphene: Allotropy is the phenomenon of a heteromorphic substance. It consists in the fact that the same element may be present in various embodiments with different physical and chemical properties. Allotropic varieties element may differ in crystal structure or the number of atoms in the molecule. Allotropic varieties cannot differ in the physical state, even though the transition from one to another allotropic varieties are first-order phase transitions (and hence thermodynamic processes). The element may be in two different allotropic forms at the same temperature. Well known allotropic varieties of carbon are: fullerenes, carbon nanotubes, graphene.

One of the best known allotropic forms of carbon are fullerenes- discovered in 1985, a fullerene molecule consists of an even number of carbon atoms, forming a closed regular hollow sphere. Fullerenes area consists of a coupled ring consisting of five and six carbon atoms. The most popular C60 fullerene comprises 60 carbon atoms. Fullerenes have superconducting properties and semiconductor. You can lock them inside

199 inside atoms of other elements .They are very active chemically. They enter into very sophisticated relations, and relationships with other elements. Fullerenes are used, among others in computing devices, diagnostics, pharmaceutical, optics, in the energy industry and environmental, such as creams for the face, humidifiers, lubricants, measuring devices, circuits and electrical devices, sensors, superconductors, catalysts in polymer composites, high-energy fuels, the process of magnetic resonance imaging. Fullerenes relays are used as drug delivery systems (using anti photochemotherapy, the development of anti-Alzheimer's disease or HIV), and genes. Fullerenes are very good antioxidant, largely reacting with the radicals. Fullerenes as catalysts are used for the reception and transmission of hydrogen atoms. Effectively facilitate the conversion of methane to higher hydrocarbons and inhibit the reactions of coke. Fullerenes are used in water treatment to protect against biological threats. Fullerenes are used vehicles to increase their strength, reduce the rate of heating and to improve fuel efficiency. Transistor performance and light detectors have been significantly improved by doping the semiconductor properties of fullerenes.

Specific structural isomers of fullerenes are carbon nanotubes, which are derived from long rolls "collapse" single plane of graphite.

Graphene was isolated for the first time in 2004, for research on graphene Andrei Gejm and Konstantin Nowosiołow received the 2010 Nobel Peace Prize. Graphene is composed of a single layer of carbon atoms forming a six-linked ring. The carbon atoms in graphene form a flat, almost two-dimensional lattice with hexagonal mesh whose structure resembles honeycomb. Graphene has unusual characteristics: it is an excellent conductor of heat and has low resistance, it is an excellent conductor of electrical charges even at room temperature (several times better than silicon), is very transparent (it absorbs only 2.3% of the light, while the typical window combined accounts for more than 20%) and a suspended - and at the same time flexible. This is probably the most durable material today and is 100 times stronger than steel, double its hardness, six times lighter, yet it can stretch without breaking as much as 20%. It is expected that graphene can replace many materials, including silicon - for example in advanced electronic technologies. The use of graphene could lead to a new generation of high-speed and energy-efficient transistors. In Poland, work on graphene and technologies that use it are ongoing, e.g. the Warsaw Institute of Electronic Materials Technology (ITME). ferromagnets: Very interesting kind of element are ferromagnets : showing own permanent magnetization of the variety of iron, cobalt, nickel (having a carbon not filled subshell 3d), and rare earth metals. Ferromagnets have a magnetic field despite the absence of an external magnetic field (the so-called spontaneous magnetization). Each ferromagnetic atom produces its own magnetic field, and these atoms have a "tendency" to set up so that the magnetic field has the same direction as the magnetic field of neighboring atoms. The magnetization of ferromagnetic sample depends not only on the external magnetic field at the time, but also on whether and in what direction the body was magnetized before (hysteresis). For each temperature of the ferromagnetic material is defined, the so-called. Curie point beyond which ferromagnetism disappears. Ferromagnets are used as technical magnetic materials, the technology of radio, microwave, electroacoustics.

The study of atoms Modern techniques of research on atom and atomic particles are much more advanced than the research methods of Thomson, Rutherford, Milikan, Bequerelle'a. Also, however,

200 and nowadays they largely focus on the distribution of mass and energy in the interior of the atom. One of the most common devices used for the study of atoms, are trace detectors - indicating departing charged particle paths. Trace detectors include photographic emulsion (the simplest visual detector) Wilson chamber (cloud chamber: containing supercooled gas, in which the ionized centers droplets condense to form particles of the path), alveolar compartment (path particles create gas bubbles in the superheated liquid), the chamber streaming (gives the opportunity to observe the electrical discharges along the path of the particles). In addition to the trace detectors are also used: gas detectors (Geiger-Muller counter proportional multiwire chamber, spark chamber), semiconductor detectors, transition radiation detectors or calorimetrical detectors. Electromagnetic calorimeters are used to measure energy positrons, electrons and photons. Hadron calorimeters are used to measure the total energy of hadrons. Calorimeter detectors are designed to slow the majority of neutral and charged particles. Modern equipment is a scanning tunneling microscope capable of providing an image of the surface of a conductive material with the resolving power of the order of a single atom. This device measures the occupied and unoccupied electronic states near the Fermi surface and shows them. Obtaining an image of the surface is possible thanks to the phenomenon of tunneling.

In the entire group of highly sophisticated devices that are equipped with large particle accelerators are: CERN Large Hadron Collider (France - Switzerland), Linear Accelerator Center SLAC Stanford (USA), Fermilab - National Laboratory for Particle acceleration Fermilab (USA), DESY (Germany). atomic "size": Determining the size and amount of carbon number is very small - making it difficult to observe them long conventional methods using visible light. Sizes atoms are not well defined quantum reasons, depend upon the nature and degree of excitation of the atom. The unit used to express the diameters of nuclei is ferrometer (fm). 1 fm = 10-15 m Neutrons and protons have a diameter of about 2.5 fm. The nuclei have sizes ranging from 10-14 to 10-15 m, which is about one hundred- thousandth the size of an atom. But it is in the kernel is centered over 99.9% of the mass of an atom.

Atomic mass unit is 1 unit (u): 1/12 the mass of the carbon atom 12C. It shall be: 1.660538921 (73) • 10-27 kg (931.494028 (23) MeV / c ²) The rest mass of the proton is equal to: 1.0073 in The rest mass of the neutron is slightly greater than the mass of the proton and the rate of 1.0087 at Mass of the electron is: 0.0006 in

An important entity in the world is the atomic electron volts (ev). 1 eV is the energy acquired by an electron in an electric field with a potential difference of 1 V. 1 eV = 1.602 • 10-19 J Since the velocity of light c = 3 • 108 m / s to 1 u = 1.66 • 10-27 • (3 • 108) 2 = 1.49 • 10-10 MeV J = 931.49

But, despite the small size of atoms, some values are very impressive (hence the term "atomic scale"?) alpha particle velocity is, for particles with an energy of 5.5 MeV, about 15,000 km / s removal of an electron from the shell of the "K" of the atom requires: - In the case of hydrogen - 13.5 eV - In the case of lead - 88 000 eV (or 88 kV)

Content is designed for multimedia - 8 32'' LCD monitors with touch-sensitive pads [3.05

201 ts, ts. 3.06, 3.07 ts, ts 3.08, 3.09 ts, ts. 3.10, 3.11 ts, ts 3.12]. Each individual, in / in themes, the Contractor may place anywhere on the monitors. Each topic should be illustrated with animation. Illustrate to the following: the structure of the atom, the structure of the atomic nucleus, electron shell models of atomic structure models of the nucleus volume sets, elements of quantum theory, elements of the corpuscular-wave theory, synthesis reactions, decomposition reactions, isotopes, interaction within the atom - including the strong , "the atomic scale", the processes of synthesis, cleavage processes, the key mentioned experience (including experience of Thomson, Rutherford), the characters associated with the history of research (including Nobel Prize winners), methods and techniques of research of atoms and nuclei practical use of nuclear energy and technology nuclear, fullerenes, graphene. Except for test history that may be shown in 2d, other animation should be performed in a combined 2d - 3d. Total time 3d animation, not less than 20 minutes. Practical use of phenomena: the collapse and fusion, the use of fullerenes, carbon nanotubes, graphene, ferromagnetism - to illustrate story-line documentary films. Must have a total duration of feature-length films no less than five minutes. Requires own production, but also allows licensed materials.

Crystal structures: a) crystals - properties, structures: Crystals is a body, in which molecules, atoms or ions are arranged in all its directions. Almost all solids are crystals. The crystal is composed of many repeating unit cells. In three-dimensional space, they form a closed network, whose main characteristic is symmetrical. There are only the 7 shapes of unit cells and 14 different types of unit cells. Just know the details of the composition and structure of the unit cell for the structure of the crystal. Knowledge of the structure of crystals can anticipate and meet their physical and chemical properties. Single crystals are crystals in which arrangement includes the entire volume of the crystal. Polycrystals are crystals in which arrangement includes only certain regions (grains). Whether their is formation of crystal or an amorphous body is determined by various factors, the most important is the cooling rate.

Places which occupy this network molecules, atoms or ions are a crystalline network nodes. Among other things crystal properties depend, on packing of molecules and atoms and ions as well as on the types of nodes. Of importance for the properties of crystals and their taxonomy is symmetry. Crystal structure symmetry elements are the plane of symmetry, the axis of symmetry, a center of symmetry. The crystals form different crystal systems: regular, hexagonal, tetragonal, trigonal, orthorhombic, monoclinic and triclinic. As part of the seven crystal systems 32 crystallographic classes stand out. In general, a single chemical compound corresponds to one crystallography class, although some minerals with the same chemical composition have different internal structure and belong to different classes of crystallographic (polymorphism).

Body Crystal is characterized by abrupt change in the properties of phase transitions. The crystals are characterized by anisotropy (variation direction) physical properties. Of great importance for the crystal are known. point defects: empty nodes, interstitial atoms, chemical additives. In addition to the point defects are linear defects (dislocations). Defects arise as a result of vibration, rapid cooling, or the bombing of forming crystal high-energy charged particles. Lattice defects and, in particular foreign atoms substantially affect the physical properties of crystals, in particular electrical and optical. This is particularly evident in the case of semiconductors, where the introduction

202 of even very small amounts of other elements can increase the electrical conductivity by several orders of magnitude.

The crystal lattice atoms oscillate and vibrate around the equilibrium position - they occur at any temperature. By vibrating they unbalance adjacent atoms, resulting in the formation of elastic waves propagating in the crystal in all possible directions. The vibrations are related to properties such as thermal expansion, thermal conductivity, electrical resistance. The particles are bound in the crystals depending on interactions of atoms (ions) bonds: ionic (occurring between the atoms differing significantly negative charge) covalence (occurring between the atoms of the same element), molecular (in the crystals are made up of particles of the chemical), metallic (occurring in metals and alloys). Nature of the forces acting between atoms and ions is the basis of the classification of ionic crystals, covalent, metallic and molecular. A separate phase of a liquid crystal ordering. Liquid crystal is the name of an intermediate phase between a liquid and a crystalline state of matter which is characterized by the ability to flow, characteristic of the liquid, yet still forming a long- range ordering of the molecules, as it is in the crystal. b) semiconductors: Semiconductors is a conductive material, but with different characteristics than the conductors. Their conductivity can be changed by doping, heating, lighting and other factors. Semiconductor materials are produced in the form of single crystal, polycrystal or powder. According to the laws of quantum mechanics, an electron in an atom can have specific energy values (energy levels). When connecting the atoms followed by "connect" the various energy levels and created a range of energy (the sum of the energy levels). The highest band completely filled by electrons is called baseband (valence), the next band (partially filled or empty) to the conduction band. From the point of view of electrical properties there are five cases of filled energy bands in solids: 1. highest occupied level in an atom is half-filled; 2. baseband (fully completed) and the conduction band (empty) overlap to form an effective one partially filled band, but with a very large number of electrons; 3. baseband meets the conduction band; 4. baseband and the conduction band (empty) lie relatively close to each other, so close that although there is an empty band electrons can easily move there; 5. baseband and the conduction band (empty) lie relatively far apart, so that the transfer of electrons to the conduction band is virtually impossible.

The electrons are free to move long distances only if they are in the conduction band. The first two cases correspond to the situation in metals (very high number of charge carriers), the fifth case is an insulator, the third and fourth case is - semiconductor. In the case of semiconductor electrons can move from the base-band to the conduction band by providing them with a specific amount of energy. Energy can be accomplished, eg, by heating the body (that is, the energy cost of thermal vibrations of atoms, electrons can move to the conduction band) or by irradiating it with a suitable light (when electrons move at the expense of the energy consumed by the photons does not - it is called. Internal photoelectric ). Concentration of charge carriers in semiconductors can be varied within wide limits by changing the temperature of the semiconductor or intensity of light incident on it, or even by compression or stretching. Resistance (resistance) depends on, among the shape of the material, which is made of electrically conductive element. The resistance is proportional to the length of the conducting element, and inversely proportional to the cross section of the conducting element.

203

Resistivity is the size characteristic of each material separately. This volume depends on its construction, and is inversely proportional to the value of the elementary charge conductivity, concentration of charges in the conduction band and the mobility of the mobility of the charges. In semiconductors as the temperature increases, more and more freight is likely to get to the conduction band. This causes charges concentration in the semiconductor conductivity increases, thereby decreasing resistivity. The resistance value (electrical resistance) generally decreases semiconductor with increasing temperature. The guides but with increasing temperature decreases the mobility of goods, or the possibility of their freedom of movement in the guide. The lower the ratio the mobility of goods resistivity is greater. Semiconductors are used, among others. for the production of electrical and electronic equipment. In electronics, the most commonly used semiconductor materials are elements are silicon, germanium, gallium arsenide, gallium nitride, indium antimonide. c) Czochralski crystal pulling: Czochralski method is one of the oldest and most widely used technology for producing single crystals. It was developed in 1916 by the Polish chemist Jan Czochralski. It is also called differently "removing from the solution." Czochralski’s studies related to the rate of crystallization of tin, zinc and lead. In the mid- twentieth century way of producing monocrystalline by Czochralski was discovered by Americans: Gordon K. Teal and John B. Little moved semiconductors and electronic from metallurgy to physics and used them in industry and applied them to the industrial production of among other things silicon. Using the technological regime is one of the fastest methods of the cultivation of single crystals: efficiency in the case of silicon ranges from 1 to 40 mm / h, it is a continuous process of approximately a 40-hour cycle.

Crystals formed by this method relies on a controlled slow, progressive fullering of the molten material of the crystal nucleus in a way that the crystallization is controlled and stable on the surface. If required by the terms of the crystallization process, the crystal nucleus and the crucible is set into rotation in order to improve the heat and mass transport. The dimensions and shape of the grown crystal is controlled by the shift and the rotating speed of the crystal nucleus, but are limited by the parameters used for breeding. The result is a cylindrical single crystal of crystallographic orientation of the crystal nucleus. In the fullering process temperature is high, 1500 ° C (melting point of silicon is 1,415 ° C). Is most commonly used induction furnaces. Depending on the crystallized material is used for the melting crucible made of refractory material, which does not enter into reaction with the crystallized substance. The process is carried out in vacuum or in an inert gas - usually argon (argon flow through the furnace through special vacuum pumps). d) piezoelectrics: Piezoelectric are crystals (single crystals, polycrystals), which under the influence of electrical stress on the surface, electric charges appear. Piezoelectric effect was discovered in 1880 by brothers Peter and James Curie. The essence of the piezoelectric effect is the creation of an electric field due to movement of ionic charge in the crystal lattice of the material, due to its deformation. Piezoelectric also exhibit the reverse piezoelectric effect: it consists in changing the dimensions of the crystal under the influence of an applied electric field. Piezoelectric materials convert electrical energy to mechanical and vice versa. A characteristic feature of piezoelectric materials is the lack of symmetry of the crystal structure. Under the influence of stress in such crystals various kinds of shifting occur "center of gravity" of positive and negative charges, which causes an electric polarization of the crystal. Crystal charges appearing on the edges are proportional to the charges of

204 deformation. The piezoelectric crystals have ionic bonds. Piezoelectric materials are characterized by describing their elastic properties, piezoelectric and dielectric properties. Piezoelectric effect is subject to a kind of crystallographic lattice. It occurs only in crystals belonging to 20 of 32 group points. For the direction and magnitude of the resulting charges on the piezoelectric plate of importance are both the direction and the value of stress and crystallographic orientation (type section). If made of quartz plate of "cut X" is subjected to compression or stretching along the crystallographic axes X, its charges will appear on surfaces perpendicular to the direction of stress, and if the forces act in the direction of the crystallographic axis Y, the charges appear on planes parallel to the stress . The type of cutting properties depend also on the temperature of the element obtained. The first practical applications of piezoelectric materials took place during World War I, they were applied in transmitters and receivers ultrasonic sonar equipment to detect submarines. Piezoelectric are used primarily as electroacoustic transducers. The piezoelectric effect is now simply used to build devices such as audio receivers, microphones, hydrophones, power generators, spark generators, sensors (sound pressure, vibration). Inverse piezoelectric effect is used to build a sound transmitter, piezoelectric motors, transformers, piezoelectric actuators. Piezoelectric are also used as piezoelectric filters, amplifiers, stabilizers resonant frequency resonant pressure sensors, humidity and temperature. Piezoelectric is being used in scientific research apparatus, including positioning the needle in the microscope tunnel. e) the test methods of crystal structures: Crystal structure is determined by X-ray diffraction and neutron diffraction. Structural X-ray is used to determine the dimensions and geometry of the unit cell composing the crystal lattice. It allows you to determine the chemical structure and build an accurate spatial model. It is based on registering the effects of diffraction of X-rays refracted / reflected as it passes through clouds of electrons in atoms crystal. Based on the registration of the X-ray diffraction images is determined three-dimensional electron density map of the crystal unit cell, which is then subjected to a mathematical analysis. For testing is mostly used single crystal of certain chemical compounds of the most regular shape and having as few defects. The crystal is placed in the diffractometer, cooled (using vapor liquid nitrogen or liquid helium - to reduce the uncertainty due to the thermal vibrations of atoms) and highlights the different angles a strong beam of X-ray diffraction images to register, use the CCD cooled Peltier cell. An element of the camera is a suitable scintillator, which absorbs the energy of X-rays and emits light recorded by the CCD. In X-ray crystallography the polycrystalline sample is also examined (powder method). Another method used in studies of crystals registering of the neutron diffraction profile of atoms arranged in the crystal lattice. Measurement of neutron beams reflected at different angles to specify the characteristic maxima and minima. Analysis of the results allows you to determine the structure of crystals and to build an accurate crystal model.

Content is designed for multimedia - 4 32'' LCD monitors with touch-sensitive pads [3.13 ts, ts. 3.14, 3.15 ts, ts 3.16]. Each above mentioned themes, the Contractor may be place anywhere on the monitors. The material should be prepared in a combined technique of 2d and 3d animation - illustrating all of the above topics. Total time of animation: not less than 20 minutes. In addition to animations required fictionalized documentary footage showing the crystal test methods, the process of Czochralski crystal pulling, examples of practical application

205 of the selected crystals: a minimum of four sequences - each about five minutes. Requires own production, but also allowed licensed materials.

Build atoms, molecules, elements:

This station is arranged with two multi-touch tables multimedia [3.17 ts, ts. 3.18] - required technical equipment and AV equipment are set out in Section 4 of this report. Enclosed multimedia tables: - wooden substructure (columns and beams); - sheathing of plywood secured fire, painted Col: RAL: 9010, high-gloss finish; - counter irregular heights: 75 cm screens built with dimensions: 145x75 cm; - based on required: search for service (on both sides), - perforated flap providing air circulation (both sides).

Multimedia content will provide an educational game. By moving and putting together (interaction started touching hands) color components - Schema / symbols quarks, protons, neutrons, electrons build participants can: - New particles (protons and neutrons) comparing pairs of quarks, - "Build" another atom electron shell filling, - Build simple molecules and isotopes of the elements. Participants should be able to use the index - help, which is a kind of statement: - The quarks must be combined to build a proton and a neutron, - What is the atomic number of a specific element, - Which electron shell must be filled to build an atom,

That the electrons must be "brought to a common" to build a chemical bond and the particular compound, - Which atoms should be combined to build a molecule. After the construction of the element on the screen will be displayed the characteristics and information about the successful completion of the task. Prepare content to build the four different particles and compounds (including isotopes) on each table with a diverse range of multimedia problems. At the lowest level of difficulty should be possible to build a water molecule. At the station User should be able to build isotopes. Building a radioactive isotope should be clearly indicated (e.g. a symbol of radioactivity).

ZONE: MACROWORLD AIM: Demonstration of the satellite techniques applicable in everyday life. Demonstration of passive and active means of propulsion in space. Demonstration of “simple” and “complex” cosmologic objects. Demonstration of solar and extrasolar planetary systems. Demonstration of the human space flights’ problems. Demonstration of the conditions of life and work in the orbit. Research and teaching qualities: The subject-matter of the macroworld often eludes intuitive understanding. Space, however, constantly stimulates the imagination – especially of the young audience. Space and satellite technologies have a growing importance in people’s everyday life. Understanding their basics is crucial to understanding contemporary world. The Macroworld Zone is supposed to enable the visitor to select and understand the “boundary conditions” of life and development of the civilisation, which require our constant and everyday care as well as rational use. International space research projects,

206 in which the youth from all over the world takes part, should be promoted. The work of Polish scientists in the field of space research should be presented.

Level 10.50:

THE SIMULATOR: The Simulator should be arranged in the reconstructed cockpit and crew cabin of the Columbia space shuttle. Both the interior and the sheathing should be reconstructed following the public archive technical documentation. The finishing materials should best imitate the original ones. The reconstruction should be done with proper care for details. Construction of the model – steel. The appropriate calculations should be submitted with the workshop drawings. Basic external measurement of the model are: axial length: 7.90 cm, height: 320.00 cm, width: 370.00 cm, average net height of the interior: 250.00 cm (all the measurements are +/- 10% as they must match construction and architectural components of the building). In the cockpit, 6 monitors [mn 3.01-3.06] must be built mirroring the original division of the cockpit’s interior (visible parts of the monitors should be a copy of the cockpit’s glazing). The entrance to the simulator is projected from the place on the C-E and 5-6 axes. Interior should be darkened. Two seats, imitating the original ones, should be mounted in the interior in the positions of the original pilots’ seats. Concept drawing of the position: Volume II: drawings section, fig. AR 18 The position is additionally marked in the figure AR 10 (Volume II: drawings section) with the symbol: M.3.01 (the model is located on the C-E and 6-7 axes, level +10.50). Two people will be able to use the simulator actively at one time. Depending on the option chosen by the User, one out of two interactive animations will be available in the simulator: 1. Entering of the space shuttle into the atmosphere. Duration: 10 minutes. The animation should be a simulation of the space shuttle pilotage when entering the Earth’s atmosphere. The atmospheric entry takes place at the height of 121,920 meters and the distance of 9,500 km from the runway. 20 minutes before touching the runway, the shuttle goes through the “fire barrier” – at that time the shuttle becomes surrounded by a cloud of plasma and the radio contact is lost (circa 6 minutes). Then, the temperature falls and the radio contact is regained. During the atmospheric entry and during the landing, the shuttle acts like a glider. In the layers of rare atmosphere, low power rocket engines of the RCS (Reaction Control System) are used. As the flight lowers and the atmospheric pressure rises, flight control surfaces become more active. In order to “use” the surplus of energy (resulting from the “surplus” of height to the distance that has to be covered as well as the loss of velocity and height) the shuttle does tight bends (one way, or the other) – according to the pre-programmed landing route in the direction of the runway. Velocity of the shuttle fall below the speed of 40 kilometres from the runway. The above described effects should be presented in the animation prepared by the Contractor. The Users (pilots) seated in the two front seats have the possibility to pilot using a joystick during some parts of the animation. Piloting by the User/pilot concerns only the reaction piloting and only in a limited range (so as not to disrupt the landing itself). During the landing the User/pilot has a possibility of doing limited manoeuvres – after the voice command automatically released from the speakers mounted in the cockpit. In the case of any misconduct, an error and autopilot takeover reports are released. After 15 seconds, a manual-piloting release follows, which a voice report informs about. The voice reports must be synchronised with the movements (activities) of the User/pilot. During the preparation of the animation, the shuttle piloting instructions should be used. The animation should start at the atmospheric entry and last until the regaining of the radio contact. During the animation, such data should be presented on the monitor: height, velocity, distance to the runway, time passed since the

207 atmospheric entry, time left to the runway. Cape Canaveral NASA’s John F. Kennedy Space Centre should be taken for the landing-ground. 2. Journey to the borders of the Solar System. Duration: 10 minutes. The animation should be a kind of journey (futuristic) through the Solar System. It starts at the Earth’s orbit. The User/pilot should be able to see, in order: the Moon, Venus, Mercury, the Sun, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune and selected moons of the gas planets. The materials sent from space probes should serve as inspiration for the images in the animation. During the “flight”, the following data should be presented on the monitor: distance from the Earth in kilometres and in light minutes, information about the celestial bodies seen on the monitors (name, IAU symbol, size, composition of the atmosphere, physicochemical structure). Users/pilots in the front seats should have a possibility to pilot the “flight” to a limited extend with the use of a joystick. The possibility of using the manual piloting will be preceded by a voice report from the speakers mounted in the cockpit. The User/ pilot will have the possibility of limited piloting: doing manoeuvres in order to avoid collision with e.g. asteroids. In the case of any misconduct, an error and a autopilot takeover reports will be released. After 15 seconds, a manual-piloting release follows, which a voice report informs about. The voice reports must be synchronised with the movements (activities) of the User/pilot.

The animations will be presented on LED monitors built in the sheathing (6 monitors [mn 3.01, mn 3.02, mn 3.03, mn 3.04, mn 3.05, mn 3.06]). The view on the monitors should be constant (panoramic); synchronised also during visitor’s usage of the joystick. Piloting of the view, possible by one of the Users/pilots in the front seat (piloting function is possible to be „taken over” by the User/pilot on the other seat only after consent of the primary user).

Level +16.96 Engine room:

SET OF POSITIONS: Satellite television – geostationary satellite; GPS – non- stationary satellites. The set of positions consists of: a 32” monitor with a touchpad [ts 3.19] and two 3d holograms [ts 3.20, ts 3.21]. The monitors should be built in the plasterboard wall stretched in an arc behind the entrance to the room. Description of additional guidelines for arranging the position: see Chapter 3 of hereby Description. The required technical parameters of the equipment and AV devices are described in Chapter 4 of hereby Description.

User’s interface should enable to access and choose from the following text and multimedia content:

32” monitor with a touchpad [ts 3.19]: GPS: The animation should present the location of 30 satellites used in the GPS system on the average Earth’s orbit (altitude of circa 20.183 km). Artificial satellites should be presented orbiting the Earth (in constant move, having circular orbits of proper gradient). The terrestrial system should be presented separately: control and monitoring stations as well as users signals receivers. How the system works should be presented separately: sent and received signals. The whole animation may be presented in 3-4 separate animations switched on by touching the monitor. In the description part, which accompanies each animation, the aim and operation of the system should be described: - the aim of this system is to provide the user with the information about his/her position; - the whole system consists of three segments: artificial satellites, control stations, user segment;

208

- the system is based on the measurement of time which the radio signal needs to get from satellites to the user’s receiver; simultaneous reception from at least four satellites is necessary; determining the receiver’s position consists in measuring its pseudo-range from a few satellites; it is necessary to correct the measurement result – taking into account for example the slowing of time passing in the gravitational field of the Earth; - each satellite is equipped with an atomic clock, so that its signal is exactly synchronised with the rest of the system, - the GPS system is maintained and managed by the U.S. Department of Defence but has both military and civil application. Other running and under construction positioning systems include: GLONASS (Russia), COMPASS (China), Galileo (Europe – under construction) – the animation should present the location of satellites and operation of at least one from the abovementioned systems (selectable by the Contractor) and point out the difference between it and the GPS system. Animations prepared using a combined technique of 2d and 3d are required. Animation duration: circa 10 minutes. Own production is required but a license material is also allowed.

Satellite television: This animation is about to present the location in geostationary orbit of artificial satellites used to operate TV. The animation and the accompanying text should emphasise the difference between satellites placed in geostationary orbit (used in telecommunications, satellite phone) and non-stationary satellites (GPS). It is necessary to present a satellite circling the stationary orbit, which is used in telecommunications and show the range of its transmitter. It should be noted that the geostationary orbit allows the satellite to maintain a fixed position above the selected point in the Earth’s equator (geostationary orbit is contained in the plane of the equator, 35.786 meters above the equator; the speed of the body in the geostationary orbit is about 3.08 km/s and the time needed to complete one circuit around the Earth equals 23 hours 56 minutes and 4 seconds, which is equal to sidereal day). It should be emphasised that the placement of a satellite in the geostationary orbit allows to maintain constant contact with it by using a directional antenna. It should also be noted that for an observer on the surface of the Earth north of latitude 81,3°N and south of latitude 81,3°S geostationary orbit is located entirely below the horizon, thus to be able to receive signal in the Arctic regions, special towers would have to be built for this purpose. The animation should present principles of operation of the satellite TV as well as components of this system i.e. the transmitters on artificial satellites, satellite dish, receiver. Animations prepared using a combined technique of 2d and 3d are required. Animation duration: circa 5 minutes. Additionally, a 2-3-minute fragment of a popular movie, which uses satellite communication (licensed material required). Own production is required but a license material is also allowed.

3d hologram: [ts. 3.20] Digital model of modern telecommunications satellite: As multimedia content, a 3d animation is required: a hologram working in a loop, showing the telecommunications satellite rotating alternately in the vertical and horizontal axes. Key visible structural and functional elements of the object should be clearly presented. The choice of the object to model is at the decision of the Contractor. Scale: enabling projection using the apparatus described as ts. 3.20. Animation duration: circa 30 seconds. Own production is required but a license material is also allowed.

3d hologram: [ts. 3.21] Digital model of modern satellite used in GPS system:

209

As multimedia content, a 3d animation is required: a hologram working in a loop, showing a satellite used in GPS system rotating alternately in the vertical and horizontal axes. Key visible structural and functional elements of the object should be clearly presented. The choice of the object to model is at the decision of the Contractor. Scale: enabling projection using the apparatus described as ts. 3.21. Animation duration: circa 30 seconds. Own production is required but a license material is also allowed.

Platforms/foundations for holograms, also being a built-in area of the projector and the computer: - construction: steel profiles; - sheathing: steel, powder coated grey; - the base of the platform requires access for service (on both sides), perforated element to cool (both sides).

SET OF POSITIONS: PLANETARY SYSTEMS The set of positions consists of: two 32” monitors with a touchpad [ts 3.22, ts 3.23]. The monitors and computers should be built in the way presented in the concept drawing AR 29 (Volume II: drawings section). Case construction: steel profiles. Sheathing of the construction: steel, powder coated gray and white. At the back of the case there should be openings, overridden by screwed flaps, to provide access for maintenance and ventilation. The required technical parameters of the equipment and AV devices are described in Chapter 4 of hereby Description. User’s interface should enable to access and choose from the following text and multimedia content:

32” monitor with a touchpad [ts 3.22]: Solar planetary system: The animation should present: - The Sun; - all planets of the Solar System (Mercury, Venus, the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune; - key moons accompanying the planets (5-6 objects – the choice is at the decision of the Contractor); - cosmic noise, Each animation should illustrate a celestial body in motion: the 3600 revolution on its axis. Colour animation is required. The individual sequences should be started by the User via a monitor with a touchpad. On the monitor there should appear a parallel description of the object: the name of the celestial body, its size, distance from the Sun (in kilometres and light years), distance from the Earth, the mass (and its comparison with the mass of the Earth); in the form of a pie chart the information on the chemical composition of the atmosphere and the geology of the celestial body should be given. Animations prepared using a combined technique of 2d and 3d are required. Animation duration: circa 8 minutes. Own production is required but a license material is also allowed.

32” monitor with a touchpad [ts 3.23]: Extrasolar planetary systems: The animation should include the following topics: - the first discovery of the extrasolar systems; - Aleksander Wolszczan and the discovery of the first exoplanets; - methods of research: the study of pulsars, the Doppler effect; - methods of research: transit, chronometry, astrometry, direct observations, gravitational microlensing; - types of exoplanets;

210

- cosmic noise.

The individual sequences should be started by the User via a monitor with a touchpad. Animations prepared using a combined technique of 2d and 3d are required. Animation duration: circa 10 minutes. Own production is required but a license material is also allowed.

The animation should be accompanied by brief descriptions (text). Sample text to the subject of the first discovery of extrasolar planetary systems: The search for planets outside the Solar System is both space exploration and the search for life. For a long time the astronomers couldn’t prove the existence of planets outside the Solar System because of negligible amount of light reflected by extrasolar planets compared to the amount of radiation emitted by their parent sun. Adequate research techniques were missing.

Sample text to the subject of methods of research: the study of pulsars, the Doppler effect: We owe the discovery of the first planets to radio astronomers and to the study of pulsars – neutron stars emitting regular pulses of electromagnetic radiation (radio radiation) at short intervals. The observed anomalies in the sent pulses indicate a change in pulsar’s velocity in relation to Earth’s. That way the first extrasolar planets were discovered in 1990 during the research of pulsar PSR B1257+12 carried out by Aleksander Wolszczan. The results of his research have been published and confirmed in 1992. Pulsars are rare objects. The conditions on the planets orbiting them significantly differ from the ones prevailing on Earth. The first extrasolar planets, orbiting a star similar to the Sun, were discovered in 1995 by the observation of the spectrum of 51 Pegasi star. The discovered planet was the size of Jupiter but was very close to the star (20 times closer then the Earth from the Sun). The discovery was made by observing the Doppler effect. A large planet orbiting close to its star means that the two bodies form a system of masses influencing each other. The star not only revolves around its own axis, but it also moves in space either approaching or going away from the Earth. This movement causes the spectral lines to drift either towards purple, or towards red (see Doppler effect).

In this position, information popularising the NASA project called Planet Hunters should be presented.

The presentation should be illustrated with the material obtained by the Kepler telescope – after a colour treatment. A separate component of the content should be an interview with A. Wolszczan, or other astronomer involved in the study of exoplanets, prepared especially for the exhibition by the Contractor. It is required that the complementation of both 2d contents about the planetary system are the recordings from radio telescopes broadcasted at the exhibition by an ultrasonic speaker. The speaker should be placed and synchronised in such a way that, after a choice of “cosmic sound” and the choice of a particular object, done by the viewer on the monitor with a touchpad interface, a sound emission could be triggered. It is required that the “noises” are registered by at least 6 objects (planets, pulsars). Duration: 3 minutes. The recordings should come from radio telescopes and space probes.

POSITION: ROCKET ENGINE MODEL The position should consist of: - sectional model of the Saturn V first stage rocket engine (stage 1) – made in 1:10 scale;

211

- the base of the model: steel profiles (structural calculations must be submitted with the workshop drawings), powder coated in the colour: RAL: 9011, hammer effect; - a monitor with a touchpad [ts 3.25] with a multimedia content. The monitors and computers should be built in the way presented in the concept drawing AR 29 (Volume II: drawings part). Case construction: steel profiles. Sheathing of the construction: steel sheet powder coated gray and white. At the back of the case there should be openings, overridden by screwed flaps, to provide access for maintenance and ventilation. The required technical parameters of the equipment and AV devices are described in Chapter 4 of hereby Description. The model should be done based on public archive technical documentation. The finishing materials should best imitate the original ones. The reconstruction should be done with proper care for details.

The multimedia content should primarily be a comment/description of the first stage Saturn V rocket engine presented at the exhibition in the form of the model. The content should describe the main components of the engine – their functions, the materials which were used for construction. One element of the content should be an animation illustrating the operation of all sections of the Saturn V rocket during a flight to the orbit. Technical data given in the branch literature should be used. A separate element of the content should be: - a brief and popularising description of Konstantin Tsiolkovsky research: his study of the relationship between the velocity of the rocket and its mass as well as the velocity of exhaust gases; Tsiolkovsky ‘s formula for the movement of rocket in vacuum should be mentioned; - theory of multi-stage rocket movement; the basic formula for the perfect velocity of a multi-stage rocket should be mentioned. The descriptive parts should be minimised to the necessary minimum – animations should be the core part of the presentation. Animations prepared using a combined technique of 2d and 3d are required. Animation duration: circa 10 minutes. Own production is required but a license material is also allowed.

Concept drawings of the position: Volume II: drawings section, fig. AR 22, AR 115. The positions is additionally marked in the figure AR 12 (Volume II: drawings section) with a symbol: M.3.03.

POSITION: A SATURN V ROCKET COMMAND MODULE MODEL The position should consist of: - Saturn V command module model – made in 1:1 scale; - the base of the module and its supporting construction: steel profiles (structural calculations must be submitted with the workshop drawings), powder coated in the colour: RAL: 9011, hammer effect; - contoured model case made of acrylic plate; - a monitor with a touchpad [ts 3.26] with multimedia content; The monitors and computers should be built in the way presented in the concept drawing AR 29 (Volume II: drawings part). Case construction: steel profiles. Sheathing of the construction: steel sheet powder coated gray and white. At the back of the case there should be openings, overridden by screwed flaps, to provide access for maintenance and ventilation. The required technical parameters of the equipment and AV devices are described in Chapter 4 of hereby Description. The model should be done based on public archive technical documentation. The finishing materials should best imitate the original ones. The reconstruction should be done with proper care for details.

212

The multimedia content should primarily be a comment/description of the Saturn V rocket command module presented at the exhibition in the form of a model. The content should primarily describe the main components of the command module – their functions, the materials which were used for construction. One element of the content should be an animation illustrating the operation of all sections of the Saturn V rocket during the flight, with a special attention given to role of the command module played in the Apollo space missions. Technical data given in the branch literature as well as archive film materials should be used. The descriptive parts should be minimised to the necessary minimum – animations should be the core part of the presentation. Animations prepared using a combined technique of 2d and 3d are required. Animation duration: circa 10 minutes. Own production is required but a license material is also allowed.

Concept drawings of the position: Volume II: drawings section, fig. AR 22, AR 115.

The positions is additionally marked in the figure AR 12 (Volume II: drawings section) with a symbol: M.3.04.

SET OF POSITIONS: TERRESTRIAL PLANETS The set of positions consists of: two spherical multi-touch monitors with projectors and computers [ts 3.24; ts 3.28], a monitor with a touchpad with a computer [ts 3.27]. Two spherical screens are projected with diameters of 80.00 cm and 60.00 cm. Cylindrical pedestals/bases for spherical, in which the projectors and computers are built in: - construction: steel profiles; - sheathing: steel sheet, powder coated gray and white - the base of the platform requires access for service (on both sides), perforated element to cool (both sides). The screens and computers should be built in the way presented in the concept drawing AR 29 (Volume II: drawings section). Case construction: steel profiles. Sheathing of the construction: steel sheet powder coated gray and white. At the back of the case there should be openings, overridden by screwed flaps, to provide access for maintenance and ventilation. The required technical parameters of the equipment and AV devices are described in Chapter 4 of hereby Description.

Concept drawings of the position: Volume II: drawings section, fig. AR 22, AR 23.

For animation, own production is required but a license material is also allowed. User’s interface should enable to access and choose from the following text and multimedia content:

Terrestrial planets: Mars multi-touch screen 60.00 cm [ts. 3.24]: The multimedia content should be a revolving animation of the planet based on the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. When touched in a particular point , the multi-touch surface of the sphere should display information grouped according to the following pattern:

1. Unicode:

213

2. Where? The average distance from the Sun: 230,000,000 km. The fourth planet from the Sun in the Solar System.

3. Did you know? The time of orbiting the Sun (Martian year) lasts 687 days on Earth. Sidereal day on Mars is not much longer than on Earth and lasts 24 hours, 39 minutes and 35.244 seconds. The gradient of the rotation axis of Mars (the deviation from perpendicular to the plane of the orbit) is 25.19 degree and it is similar to the gradient of the Earth’s rotation axis. The seasons on Mars are similar to the ones on Earth, however, they are nearly twice as long because of longer year.

4. Did you know? The name of the planet comes from the name of the Roman god of war – Mars. It owes it to its colour, which, when seen from the Earth, appears to be rust-red and was associated with war conflagration by the ancients. The red colour of the planet has its origin mainly in the high percentage of iron oxides in its crust. The surface of Mars is primarily composed of basalt. Much of the surface is deeply covered by iron oxide dust.

5. Did you know? Over the cratered surface of Mars there are mountains rising up to 24 km in altitude as well as plains crossed by canyons up to 7 km deep. The tallest mountain in the Solar System is on Mars. Olympus Mons, an extinct volcano, raises up to 21 kilometres over the average surface of the planet. There is also the biggest canyon – Valles Marineris, which is about 5000 km long, about 200 km wide and about 7 km deep.

6. Did you know? Compared to Earth, the atmosphere of Mars quite rarefied. Atmospheric pressure on the surface of Mars does not exceed 1% of Earth’s atmospheric pressure on the sea surface. The atmosphere of Mars consists of 95% carbon dioxide, the rest being nitrogen, argon and traces of oxygen and water vapour.

7. Did you know? In the atmosphere of Mars, we can clearly see the condensation of water vapour in the form of white and blue clouds. Repeatedly observed dark patches of the ground are the result of precipitation. At the south pole, an impressive snow cap is visible (dry ice about 8 meters thick). Liquid water cannot exist on the surface of Mars due to low atmospheric pressure, except the lowest elevations for short periods. The planet’s low atmospheric pressure prevents liquid water from existing over large regions – the ice never melts but instead sublimates to a gaseous state omitting the liquid state. Both polar caps consist primarily of water ice.

8. Did you know? Mars has the largest dust storms in the Solar System. During the storm, wind can reach the speed of 300 km/h. By using a telescope, you can see the “yellow clouds” in the atmosphere of Mars. These are clouds of dust risen by gales reaching 80 m/s. The sand and dust storms occur on Mars soon after its passing of the perihelion, the shortest distance from the Sun. Such storms can spread within a few weeks to the area parallel to that of the whole hemisphere. They can probably reach the upper layers of the troposphere.

214

The average temperature on Mars is about -55° C. In winter it falls to more or less -130° C, while in the summer it reaches 27° on the day side of the planet.

9. Did you know? The magnetic field of Mars is very weak. Its intensity has been reported to be lower than 0.001 Oe. Magnetosphere and radiation belts were not found. There is no global bipolar magnetic field similar to the Earth’s. The planet has a weak magnetic field of local nature. Mars resembles the Earth in terms of construction: under the crust there is a thick coat and in the depth of the planet there is the core, consisting mainly of iron.

10. Did you know? The first successful fly-by mission was made by the Mariner 4 space probe in 1964. The first successful landing on Mars was made by the space probe Mars 3. Currently the exploration of Mars is carried out by two roving probes: Pathfinder and Curiosity.

11. Did you know? Mars has two natural small moons: Phobos being 21 x 26 km big and Deimos having the diameter of 13 km.

Planets – sisters: The Earth and Venus: multi-touch screen; 80.00 cm [ts. 3.28]: The multimedia content should consist of animations of the surface of the Earth and Venus (scale: 1: 15,000,000) displayed interchangeably after the User’s choice. The animations should reflect: the directions of rotation on the axis, the gradient of the axis, the most important elements of the surface of both planets. The rotation of Venus should be based on the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration.

A monitor with a touchpad [ts 3.27] is designated to the position. The content for the zone and for the monitor should complement each other. It should be designed to show similarities and differences between both planets.

The model material (text layer):

The Earth: 1. Unicode

The symbol of the Earth is a isosceles cross inscribed in a circle, also known as sun cross, Odin’s cross or Celtic cross. The initial astronomical symbol of the planet was the globus cruciger, which frequently appears on megaliths. Wheel with two axes is one of the oldest Indo-European solar symbols, common among the Celts, the theme of which also appeared among Eastern Slavs. In north-west Europe, in pagan times, it became the attribute of the Norse god Odin. It has also been know in pre-Columbian America, as well as throughout the Mediterranean for at least 3,500 years. The Aztecs knew it as the symbol of the Sun.

2. Did you know? The planted has been formed 4.54 ± 0.05 billion years ago from the solar nebula – a cloud of gas and dust that turned into a disk during the formation of the Sun. Life on Earth appeared within the first billion years since the formation. The development of life on the land was possible due to the ozone layer, which reduced the intensity of ultraviolet radiation, as well as to magnetosphere, which reflected particles of the solar wind.

215

3. Did you know? Water is a chemical compound most commonly occurring on our planet. Currently, it covers about 71% of the Earth’s surface. In total, it hosts 1.3 billion km3 of salt water and only 4.2 km3 of fresh water. Most of the water was not created on the Earth but comes from the outer space.

4. Did you know? The gradient of the Earth’s axis to a straight line perpendicular to the orbital plane is 23,44°, which leads to annual fluctuations of light, which, in turn, cause for example the occurrence of the seasons. The shape of the Earth is close to the spheroid, a sphere slightly flattened at the poles. The rotation of the Earth makes equatorial diameter 43 km longer than the diameter between the poles. The average diameter is 12,742 km.

5. Did you know? The mass of the Earth equals 5.98 × 1024 kg. The Earth consists primarily of iron (32.1%), oxygen (30.1%), silicon (15.1%), magnesium (13.9%), sulphur (2.9%), nickel (1.8%), calcium (1.6%), aluminium (1.4%), chromium (0.4%) and others (0.7%). The core is mainly composed of iron (88.8%), nickel (5.8%), sulphur (4.5%) and trace amounts of other elements.

6. Did you know? The Earth creates a magnetic field which, close to the surface of the Earth, approximately corresponds the field of a dipole which poles are located near the geographic poles. However, the magnetic axis does not coincide with the rotation axis of the Earth but it is inclined by several degrees and it changes its position. Currently the deviation is about 11°. The south magnetic pole is on the northern hemisphere and similarly the north pole on the southern. Nevertheless, the magnetic poles of the Earth are marked in accordance with the names of geographic positions, and inversely to the magnet poles designations used in physics.

7. Did you know? Earth’s magnetic field is created in the outer liquid core of the Earth as a result of convective motions regulated by the rotation of the Earth. These movements generate an electrical current which creates the magnetic field. The convective movements in the core periodically change their setting, which is a probable cause of geomagnetic reversal. It occurs irregularly, on the average several times in a million years. The last geomagnetic reversal took place about 700,000 years ago.

8. Did you know? The magnetic field forms the Earth’s magnetic sphere deflecting particles of the solar wind which results in the field deformation. Part of the solar wind particles creates concentric rings made of electrically charged particles called the Van Allen belts. When the plasma penetrates the Earth’s atmosphere near the magnetic poles, the phenomenon of aurora borealis occurs.

9. Did you know? At sea level, the air density is 1.217 kg/m³ and pressure - 101.325 kPa and it decreases with altitude. The atmosphere layer, which is 100 km thick (homosphere) primarily consists of nitrogen (78% of air volume), oxygen (29%) and argon (0.9%). It also consists trace amounts of carbon dioxide and noble gases. The amount of water vapour in the atmosphere is frequently changed and is on average about 1%. The Earth's atmosphere constantly escapes into space at a rate of about 3 kg of hydrogen and helium 50g per second.

216

10. Did you know? Above the troposphere there are the stratosphere (10-50 km altitude), the mesosphere (50-80 km altitude) and the thermosphere (80-500 km altitude). They exhibit differences in the vertical temperature gradient (temperature change with altitude). In the stratosphere there is the ozone layer. Above these layers there is the exosphere, in which the last traces of the air presence vanish. The conventional boundary between Earth’s atmosphere and the outer space, which runs at the altitude of 100 km above the sea level, is called the Kármán line.

11. Basic information about the Earth: Diameter: 12,756 km Distance from the Sun: 149.6 mln km Velocity in the orbit: 29.79 km/s Orbital period around the Sun: 365.25 days The period of rotation around its axis: 23h 56 min 4 sec Gradient of the orbital plane to the elliptic: 23o27’40’’ Surface temperature: average 14oC Number of moons: 1

Venus: 1. Unicode:

Planet name comes from the Roman goddess of love, Venus.

2. Did you know? The distance between Venus and the Earth varies from 40 to 259 million km. Venus is the third brightest celestial object in the sky after the Sun and the Moon. Because Venus is visible in the night sky for only a limited period of time (about 3 hours) before sunrise or (about 3 hours) after sunset, it is also called the Morning Star (the Dawn), or the Evening Star.

3. Did you know? In size (diameter of about 12,000 km), weight, medium density and chemical composition, Venus resembles the Earth so much that it was long considered a twin planet. Venus is a planet nearly matching the Earth in size (95%) and mass (81.5%). The acceleration of gravity on the surface of Venus is about 8.9 m/s2.

4. Did you know? Most of the surface of Venus is covered with plains running at a level defined by the average planet’s radius (6051.2 km). Areas that are lower than this level make up only 16% of the planet’s area, and only about 24% of the area rises over 1 km. Extremely high elevations (Maxwell Montes) reach 11-12 km above the average. 60% of the area is within 500 meters from the mean radius, and only 8% is more than 2 km away.

5. Did you know? Venus has a very solid atmosphere consisting essentially of carbon dioxide and dense clouds of sulphuric acid. The atmospheric pressure on the surface of Venus is about 90 times greater than the pressure of the Earth’s atmosphere measured at sea level.

6. Did you know?

217

Most of the surface of Venus is covered by massive lava flows. The planet has active volcanoes. Craters on Venus have diameters from 3 km to 280 km. The current landscape of Venus is dry and deserted, created by the dust-covered rocks. Like Earth’s, the core of Venus is at least partially liquid.

7. Did you know? Venus orbits the Sun at an average distance of more than 108 million miles within 225 Earth days. One rotation around its axis takes 243 days. It is a retrograde rotation, and therefore solar day on Venus is shorter than the sidereal day and equals only 117 Earth days. At the equator, the surface of Venus rotates at a linear velocity of 6.5 km/h, while the Earth – at 1670 km/h. The gradient of Venus equator to the plane of its orbit is about 177 °.

8. Did you know? Viewed from above the ecliptic plane, from the north pole of the Sun, all the planets orbit in a counter-clockwise (to the left). Most of the planet also rotate to the left, however Venus rotates clockwise. The Sun raises in the west and sets in the east.

9. Did you know? Venus surface temperature ranges from 120 to 420 degrees Celsius. This is due to a very strong greenhouse effect caused by a high content of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere. Thermal inertia and the transfer of heat by winds in the lower parts of the atmosphere mean that the temperature of the surface of Venus does not significantly vary between day and night, despite very slow speed of rotation. Venus' surface has nearly uniform temperature not only during the day and night, but also on the equator and the poles.

10. Did you know? Dense cloud cover is about 62 km above the surface of the planet and the Ionospheric layer is at a height of about 140 km. The clouds observed in the atmosphere of Venus are composed of frozen droplets, a 75 % aqueous (by weight) solution of sulphuric acid. Additionally, hydrogen and helium, which are derived from the solar wind, were also found in the outer layers of the planet’s atmosphere. Clouds above the surface of Venus, like clouds above the Earth, are capable of producing lightning.

11. Did you know? The winds at the surface of Venus are slow, reaching only a few kilometres per hour, but due to the high density of the atmosphere they have considerable power on obstacles, carrying dust and small stones at the surface. This phenomenon could significantly hinder people walking, if there wasn’t the problem of high temperatures and lack of oxygen. Strong winds with speed of 300 km/h are at the tops of the clouds, circling the planet in four to five days. Venusian winds can blow at speeds up to 60 times faster than the planet's rotation, while Earth's fastest winds reaching only 10% to 20% of the speed of rotation of the Earth.

12. Venus has a very weak magnetic field. The tail of its magnetosphere is about 10 times thinner than Earth's. This fact allows the particles of the solar wind to mix with the upper layers of the atmosphere. The magnetic field of Venus is much weaker than on Earth. Unlike on Earth, it is generated by the interaction between the ionosphere and the solar wind, not by the inner dynamo in the core of the

218

planet. The magnetosphere of Venus protects the atmosphere from cosmic radiation only to a small extend. This radiation can ionize the atmosphere’s particles and lead to a discharges between clouds.

13. Basic information about Venus: Diameter: 12,104 km Distance from the Sun: 108.2 mln km Velocity in the orbit: 35.02 km/s Orbital period around the Sun: 224.7 days The period of rotation around its axis: 243 days Gradient of the orbital plane to the elliptic: 3o39’47’’ Surface temperature: average 464oC Number of moos: none

POSITION: GALAXY HUNTERS The position should consist of: two pairs of 32” LCD monitor with a touchpad and computers [ts 3. 29, ts 3.30 i ts 3. 31, ts 3.32]. The monitor should be built in the plasterboard wall on the system’s substructure.

Concept drawings of the position: Volume II: drawings section, fig. AR 22, AR 23. The required technical parameters of the equipment and AV devices are described in Chapter 4 of hereby Description. The multimedia positions should be divided bearing in mind their multimedia content. The content should consist of: - educational game, - animations: “Milky Way and Other Galaxies”, and “Stars Evolution – Cosmic Zoo: Pulsars, Quasars, Black Holes”.

Educational game: The main purpose of the game should be to identify types of galaxies by means of searching and distinguishing their characteristics: for spiral and elliptical galaxies. The educational game and an index of knowledge about galaxies should be planned on monitors with touchpad. Pattern (example text): http://zoo1.galaxyzoo.org/pl/Tutorial.aspx Before the game, the User should do some tests: familiarise with several (8-12) photographs of different types of spiral and elliptical galaxies. The User should have the possibility to enlarge photographs through touch pads to the size of about 75% of the monitor. On the right side of the monitor a graphic interface with options to choose from should be placed – after pressing the correct answer a message about correct or incorrect answer, as well as information about the galaxy, will be displayed. During the game, the User/player using the multi-touch screen selects the part of the sky, enlarges it and identifies galaxies in the selected part. The correct identification is awarded with a specific number of points. The game should have three levels of difficulty: 1 – identification of distinct types of galaxies, 2 – identification of the spiral and elliptical galaxies more difficult to identify, 3 – identification of very pale galaxies. The amount of earned points should make it possible to use bonuses (free-ticket to the planetarium, a shopping voucher at the museum shop, etc., a discount for the next entrance to the Interactive Centre for Science and Technology in Łódź, an invitation to the event, organized by the Centre). It should be noted that the game is an introduction to the Galaxy Zoo project. Galaxy Zoo is one of the online public astronomical project in which participants classify galaxies based on images taken automatically by the telescope Sloan Digital Sky Survey, which is located at the Apache Point Observatory in New Mexico. It was inspired by the Stardust@home project, in which Internet users have been invited by NASA to find traces of cosmic dust in the pictures of the Stardust mission. Galaxy Zoo is a joint project of the

219 universities of Oxford and Portsmouth as well as the Fingerprint Digital Media organization of Belfast. Since February 2009, the second project called Galaxy Zoo 2 was carried out, and since April 2010 another, called Galaxy Zoo: Hubble. This time it uses images of hundreds of thousands of galaxies derived from the archives of NASA's Hubble Space Telescope. Up to now, the Galaxy Zoo project was attended by over 350,000 people. This resulted in a huge database, and the discoveries made by the participants were addressed by the telescopes on Earth and in space. Photos in the project Galaxy Zoo: Hubble are more detailed and allow for a more in-depth examination of the universe than before. From this project comes a large-scale initiative called Zooniverse which also includes zoo- projects like Galaxy Zoo Mergers, Galaxy Zoo Supernovae, Solar Stormwatch, Galaxy Zoo: Hubble, Moon Zoo, Old Weather, Milky Way Project and Planet Hunters. The projects Moon Zoo, Milky Way Project, Galaxy Zoo Hubble, Galaxy Zoo Mergers and Galaxy Zoo Supernovae are in Polish language versions. The content uses the Hubble Space Telescope archives. The game should be prepared by the Contractor - own production is required. License material is also acceptable to prepare the data base of photographs.

Animations: - The Milky Way and Other Galaxies - “Stars Evolution – Cosmic Zoo: Pulsars, Quasars, Black Holes”. The most impressive objects of the universe: stars, galaxies, systems of galaxies, interstellar dust and nebulas should be illustrated in a user friendly way, mainly in animation. The Hubble Space Telescope archives should be used to prepare the animation. Animations prepared using a combined technique of 2d and 3d are required. Animation duration: circa 5 minutes. It is recommended that the animation be presented on the ts.3.32 monitor, or any other selected from the group: ts 3.29 – ts. 3.31.

POSITION: ZODIACAL ZOO

The position should be constructed in the form of curved arched wall, which is at the same time would be: supporting structure for the projection of Zodiacal Zoo on the monitors, arrangement element and a way of separating the 3d projection hall. The monitors should be fixed in the cavity – on the side of the main part of the exhibition (near the rocket module models). The wall should be provided with wire ducts (effects lighting power supply, AV equipment power supply). Wall construction: steel and aluminum profiles. At the stage of workshop drawings structural calculations should be prepared and presented. Lining of the walls: plasterboard and, from the main part of the exhibition, a 15- centimeter aluminum strip along the entire length of the wall. Effect lighting – LED points – should be placed over the projection monitors in the plasterboard strip. The area for interactive animation should not be smaller than 700 cm x 190 cm (+ / - 10%).

Concept drawings of the position: Volume II: drawings section, fig. AR 22, AR 23. Monitors and computers, together with kinetic software [mn 3.07], have been projected for the position. The required technical parameters of the equipment and AV devices are described in Chapter 4 of hereby Description.

An animation with kinetic software: a strip of sky with visible celestial bodies, grouped into constellations lying in the plane of the ecliptic should be prepared as the content for the projection wall (mn 3.07 monitors). Additionally, a Zoomorphic graphics:

220 interchangeable European zodiac and Chinese Zodiac should overlap this image, as a reaction to movement of visitors.

POSITION: INTERACTIVE SPACE

The position should be arranged in a darkened room, separated from the main exhibition by the Galactic Zoo projection wall. In this place, an interactive 3d projection has been planned on an curved wall by the use of a 3d projector [pr 3.01]. The projector should be set on a pedestal made of plywood (wood construction), attached to the floor. Suspending the projector from the ceiling is alternatively acceptable. The required minimum area of image presentation: 3.00 m (length) x 1.20 meters (height). The required technical parameters of the equipment and AV devices are described in Chapter 4 of hereby Description. Concept drawings of the position: Volume II: drawings section, fig. AR 22, AR 23. A 3d animation, faithfully imitating the Solar System, should be prepared as the content for the projecting wall (mn 3.07 monitors). It should include: - The Sun - alee the planets of the Solar System (Mercury, Venus, the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune), - asteroids, dwarf planets, - natural satellites of the planets (moons) The orbits of the planets should be marked in a visible for the viewer way. The right proportions in imitating the size and distances between celestial bodies should be preserved. The viewers should have the opportunity to control the animation, for example with a joystick. This control should allow to: zoom in and out the chosen areas, rotate the image in various dimensions.

The Cooling Tower:

SET OF POSITIONS: THE LIFE AND WORK ON A SPACE STATION The set of positions consists of: - cross-sectional models (1:1 scale) of international space station - the crew module and two laboratory modules, - 8 21.5'' monitor with touch pads [3.33 ts - ts. 3.40] - 4 52” monitors [mn 3.08 mn 3.09 mn 3.10 mn 3.11] - 2 copies of astronauts suits.

International Space Station modules models (ISS) should be constructed on the basis of publicly available specialised documentation. The finishing materials should best imitate the original ones. The model should be done with proper care for details.

The cross-sections should be designed in such a way that the viewer has a opportunity to thoroughly see the interior, the construction and the equipment. The visitors should be able to enter into separate parts inside the modules. The copies of the astronauts’ space suits should be indicative and be a part of arrangement: they should be suspended from the ceiling aisle between the modules – above the sightseeing route. The finishing materials should best imitate the original ones. The model should be done with proper care for details. The monitors and computers should be built in the way presented in the concept drawing AR 27 (Volume II: drawings section). Case construction: steel profiles. Sheathing of the construction: steel, powder coated gray and white. At the back of the case there should be openings, overridden by screwed flaps, to provide access for maintenance and ventilation.

221

The construction of the 52” monitors should be supported on structural poles of the building and, if necessary, on separate bases. Concept drawings of the position: Volume II: drawings section, fig. AR 25, AR 26, AR 27, AR 115. The positions is additionally marked in the figure AR 12 (Volume II: drawings section) with a symbol: M.3.06, M.3.07, M.3.08. For additional guidelines for arrangement and stage design: see Chapter 3 of hereby Description. The multimedia content planned for 21.5” monitors with a touchpad should primarily be a description/comment of the given station module models presented at the exhibition: their functions, the material which was used for construction, the technologies and equipment used. Technical data given in the branch literature should be used. An animation illustrating the conditions of life and work on the orbital station. Animations and presentations prepared using a combined technique of 2d and 3d are required. Own production is required but a license material is also allowed.

License materials: documentaries showing the astronauts’ preparation and training for the space flights, the astronauts’ stay on the orbital station, the research conducted on the orbital station and service work are planned as multimedia content for the 52” monitors. The total duration of the licensed material: 30 minutes. The duration of the license required should not be shorter than years. Purchasing the license should guarantee the possibility of broadcasting it in CNiT building. The film material must be approved by the Commissioner before purchasing the license.

The required technical parameters of the equipment and AV devices are described in Chapter 4 of hereby Description.

2d 3d Cinema

Level 7.50

In the 3d cinema will be displayed: - Popular science films, - 3d animations.

Popular science films will be acquired as the licensed materials. Standard of videos: National Geographic Science. 3d Animation: own content or purchased as a material license. Subject: Universe, elementary small parts, work of power plants and power station. License of material shall constitute not less than 50% of the content. Total duration of prepared and acquired for the cinema 2d 3d content shouldn't be less than 60 minutes. Content presented in the 2d and 3d cinema can not be presented at the same time at other areas CNIT exposure.

3. Scenography. Effects Lightning. The visual information

3.1. Arrangement and scenographic solutions

Arrangement solutions of individual positions were presented in Chapter 2 of this study – in the description of each track visitors.

222

The most characteristic and colorful solutions of the exposure: Zone of entrance, Drugstore (level +7,50), "Microworld" Zones, chosen paths "Development of knowledge and civilization" – are shown in visualizations in Volume II: drawing part.

Scenographic solutions realized using multimedia - are presented in Section 3.2. of these studies.

Scenographic and arrangement solutions adopted for the exposure, shouldn’t be competition with the historic substance and infrastructure. They should bring and clear historic infrastructure for preservation : wherever it is possible. Design project should take into account the historic character of the object. Arrangement elements couldn’t interfere with the historical substance or destroy it.

As a part and method of the arrangement should be used by image and light – for this purpose it should be used equipment and multimedia technology , and lamps described in this paper. However, these resources should be used so as not to compete with each other, do not disturb the presentation of science-teaching, and dissemination materials.” Light and sound”, as one of the main elements of the arrangement and building of mood should be used in boiler room- especially at the 0.00 and 4.50 level. You must use the lighting effects module economically especially in areas designated for special screening media - for example in "Macroworld" Zone at +16.96 level, or in a "Micro-World", at the 4,50 level by the turbine generator unit ("Energy conversion" path ), on the path of "Development of knowledge and civilization". In these areas should be used traditional means of design and arrangement. Blackout areas should be made from light impervious material - composite panels or plasterboard.

Coating / parts of plasterboard:

Materials: - cold formed sections made from galvanized steel with a thickness of 0.6 mm, - plasterboards as bilateral facing (except for the facing of the existing ventilation ducts by the elevator) with a thickness of 12.5 mm, meeting the requirements of the standards mentioned later in this paper, - sealing tapes - steel screws protected against corrosion for fixing plasterboard to capacity sections with minimum dimensions of 3.9 x 11.0 mm, - gypsum fillers for making connections between the sheets of plasterboard, and corner joints and seals on the perimeter,  joint tapes of glass fiber, paper tapes with aluminum insert or other: to strengthen joints between the gypsum boards, in the corners and along the diameter.

Glass separations and building should be made from safe tempered glass, or tempered safety. Sites selected for the safe use of tempered glass, and glass type is described in Section 2 of this elaboration.Appliance of this type of glass in the locations indicated, must be always confirmed by the necessary calculations - in accordance with the guidelines contained in Chapter 2.

Sections from tempered glass or safety glass shall be performed using glass:  ESG (according to DIN 1249) secure, single-layer, passively hardened, thickness: 10 mm / 12 mm, weight: 26 kg/m2 - 32 kg/m2, edges: polished or grinded  a VSG type (according to DIN 52250): active multilayer safety glass with an inner foil (2 x 0.38 mm PVB - foil), thickness: 12 mm (2 x 6 mm TSG), weight:

223

about 34 kg/m2, edges : polished or grinded.

The separation of selected zones around an experiment positions on the path of "Development of knowledge and civilization" is required to use perforated metal or metal mesh. Zones, and requirements for the material are defined in Chapter 2 of this report.

Kids Zone must be dealed in a special way. The walls in the room should be painted in bright colors, with the use of ideograms, symbols and mathematical, physical, and chemical patterns.

Individual arrangement element should be provided for "Microworld" zone at third sightseeing path. This should be a large-scale three-dimensional openwork hexagon:  The upper frame: steel substructure, bolted, finished by plywood, protected against fire. Painted in color: RAL: 9010, high-gloss finished. Commercial Lighting (LED) - wiring routed in a steel frame, light sources (LEDs) mounted on the lower trim waist. At the stage of realisation are required workshop drawings and design calculation. Top frames - guided taking into account the historic drum – are prepared at this point to keep “in situ”.  The side frames: wood construction of pillars and beams must be fixed at place (for example rings Ge-Ka) - admissible: aluminum, reinforced with steel profiles; finish - plywood, protected against fire. Painted in color: RAL: 9010, finished at high gloss. The height of the side frames 410 cm (+ / -10%), thickness: 20 cm (+ / -10%). At the stage of realisation are required workshop drawings and calculations.  spatial element height: 426 cm (+ / -10%), from the floor to the final; tolerance: + / - 10% due to the need to adapt to the architecture of the building. Thickness: 20 cm (+ / -10%, in justified cases can be higher tolerance after finishing and presentation of design calculations).  The walls constituting the structure of media positions, consisting of four touch screens 32 "(3.01 ts - ts 3.16) - finished lacquered MDF, with bay for graphics. - Telecommunication sockets - by electrical and telecommunication drawings, attached to this elaboration Building of touchsreens (in each module are four 32'' touch screen monitors, mounted at a height of 75 cm from the floor) - four pieces of main modules - irregular hexagons: items marked on the plan in drawing AR19 as: A-B, C-D, E-F, G-H), attached to the floor, construction steel, bolted cover with plywood. Thickness: 20 cm (+ / -10%). In the upper part is graphic - glued on plywood. At the top of the each module from inside is formed a bay with graphic element. Monitors – are before the face, positioned at an angle. For each set of AV (+ computer and monitor) there is a need to provide low visible to the viewer: service access and perforated unit providing cooling and air circulation. The floor inside the arrangement block of "Micro-World":  within the walls, the floor must be finished by aluminum sheet colored in RAL 7000:semi-gloss finish, type: EN AW 1050, recommended size sheets with dimensions: 300x300 mm, 400x400 mm, 500x500 mm (tolerance dimensions of workpieces is + / - 2 mm) thick. 2 mm (tolerance: + / - 0.5 mm) surface: 70 m2 (+ / -10%).

Arrangement curved wall in "Macroworld" Zone in the engine room of the building should be made as follows:  plasterboard wall on the plan of the arch must be finished by coat, a the wall must be graphics concerning the exposure, and provides housing for three touch screens 32'' (ts 3.19, 3.20 ts, ts 3.21);  materials and requirements for the realisation : cold rolled sections of galvanized steel sheet with a thickness of 0.6 mm; plasterboard as the both side linings (except for the facing of the existing duct of elevator) with a thickness of 12.5 mm, meeting the requirements of the standards mentioned in later in this

224

elaboration; sealing tapes, steel screws protected against corrosion for fixing plasterboard to the capacity sections with minimum dimensions of 3.9 x 11.0 mm. Gypsum fillers to make connections between the sheets of plasterboard and corner joints and seals on the perimeter ; joint tapes of glass fiber, paper tapes with aluminum inserts: to strengthen joints between the gypsum board and in the corners and along the circumference.

Clear arrangement accents on the path of "Development of knowledge and civilization" should be: - Rectangular block of images (photographs) winners of the Nobel Prize in physics and chemistry - the position: "Nobel Prize" - Separate area for the presentation of the Doppler effect for light, - A separate area of selected positions on acoustics, - A separate area of selected positions on the optics. These elements should fulfill not only as a practical and informative, but they should be aesthetically pleasing and visually appealing. The form of these elements and materials for their implementation are described in Chapter 2 of this report.

Special arrangements and finishing walls and ceilings requires an acoustics zone, including a resonance. In addition to including in the art installation which is both experimental position to study the speed of sound, it is required to arrange the surface by using swabs and acoustic structures. The walls of the room, the walls of the elevator shaft, the selected section of the ceiling should be finished be use of the following materials: a) absorbing-scattering units: typical radio studio disc shaped in an inverted pyramid made from a foam b) dispersion units: diffusers of wood and MDF - bar, slot c ) absorption units: perforated panels, absorbers, curtains (with a certificate of fire.) These linings must perform typically scenographic functions.

In zone "Macroworld" in the building of refrigerators must be made these kind of scenographic, and arrangement elements: Housing of coil fan, overhang over the touchscreens: - Housing: perforated sheet with a revision of the fan coils, painted in RAL 7000 - matt; - Overhang: perforated sheet illuminated by LED strips on the inside, painted in RAL 7000:matt. - Coating of columns: - steel plate closed to texture and color of ventilation ducts. Housing of 52'' monitors (mn 3.02-3.05):  Hanged housing, mounted to two structural columns, made of galvanized powder coated steel in RAL 7010; substructure of steel - according to figures AR 08 and AR 10

To make lining the bases and pedestal for models, installations may be used by these materials: steel (stainless and powder-coated) MDF plate. As a covers and layouts of models and interactive installations it is recommended to use glass and plexiglass.

At the exhibition should be used: - Refrigerator - curved safety glass as a structural element, transparent foil in glass, form and dimensions - as attached to this report conceptual drawings. - Exposure in revitalized buildings - powder coated stainless steel.

In order to visually merge path "Development of knowledge and civilization" and increase its aesthetics it should be made: 22 pieces with dimensions of 100x70 cm and 250x140

225 cm. They should be made as prints on plexiglass plates, hanged from the ceiling with stainless steel links. On the plates should be printed images of: inventors and scientists whose achievements of science and technology is associated with the path and its individual zones. Conceptual drawings of presenters - AR and AR 30.1 30.2 (Volume II: drawings part). Similar displays should be placed (with printouts of archival photographs) on convoyer at 0.00 level of boilers room.

Housing of AV and IT equipment should be uniform. The predominant material should be powder coated steel in gray and white or stainless steel. An exception should be areas where media should blend with antique furnishings Control Room / Switchgear – there should be a housing close to the texture and color of historic buildings. In a similar nature, and using the same materials should be made presenters - descriptions of experiment positions. The guidelines in this regard are contained in job descriptions in Chapter 2 of this report. All housings should be individualized.

Graphic arts should make ideologically to motives of guide expositions as: history of science and technology, energy, space exploration. It should be handled modern graphic motives, as well as historical iconography (especially on the tracks "Energy Conversion" and "Development of knowledge and civilization").

As part of scenographic design should be used information elements and visual identity to be placed in all areas of exposure - as described in section 3.3 of this report.

Furniture in the facility in public areas should be designed individually, with attention to quality and detail.

For all the paths and explore the "Kids Zone" are provides seats:  cylindrical poufs (in two sizes: 120x85 and 50x45 cm, tolerance of + / - 5 cm) to finish with eco-leather in different colors (color selection is at the discretion of the contractor) shape: cylinder, filled with polystyrene pellets; It is required the ability to easily complete granules during use (eg using locks, sliders) - required hygienic atest.

3.2.Functional and technical requirements of lighting effects processor

Commercial Lighting act as the CNIT exhibition an assist function for scenographic solutions

The key elements of exposure requiring illumination of effects processor are: - Drains of coal-fired boilers - Interior and sections of boilers - Water pump units - Microworld area and located there an openwork big size arrangement element.

Drain of coal-fired boilers (0.00 level) must be illuminated from mounted in the inside by LED reflector, so that the beam of light coming out of the inside of the boiler is directed o the floor. Light emission should be synchronized with sound of the work of power plant. The light beam should be clearly visible from every level of boiler. Specifications of LED Lamps: - Dual LED light effect of Moonflower with six strong RGB-LED (colors: 2x green, 2x blue, 2x red) bulbs - Musically controlled by the built-in microphone with adjustable sensitivity and automatic mode

226

- Long life LEDs allows frequent and continuous use - Low power consumption, and low level of heat - Suitable for installation on the wall or ceiling using the supplied bracket - Metal housing - Fuse F1A - Power supply: 240V, 50Hz - Capacity up to 5 kg.

Screening should also be adjusted automatically and coupled with a central lighting control system showroom.

Required: 4 sets of projectors with mounting brackets.

The side walls of boilers will be exposed through maping: parameters and the number of AV devices and software - later in this elaborate.

In a special way will be treated insides of the boiler.Pass through a boilers must transfer a visitors, in a sensual form at work technology. Visible and preserved technological systems will be highlighted with professional flexible LED elements with uniform illumination (fluorescent glowing effect). Stripes with visible LED point light sources are not permitted due to fragmented nature with desigh assumptions. It is required that the light intensity can be freely dimmable in RGB bindings, that it can be smoothly change the color of light:change the color temperature in the range from 2400 to 6500K.Ratio of rendering colors Ra> 85 Complementation of this lighting will be LED lights, similar to those used for lighting outlets, with adjustable intensity and color. It is required to control it musically by the built-in microphone with adjustable sensitivity and automatic mode. Both types of lighting - compressed with central lighting control system showroom. Lighting is complemented by the sounds of the boiler.

Both water pumps located on the path of "Energy Conversion" will be further illuminated by directional LED projectors.

LED lighting in "Micro-World" Zone mounted on an openwork big size arrangement element are described in A par. 1.2.3 of this report.

Lighting of information elements is to highlight selected presenters of content describing the various general ranges exhibition. This will be implemented by the respective cuboid made of translucent plastic elements illuminated by a fluorescent light source LED located behind the front surface, with possibility of dimming and control from a central system. Required parameters: - power consumption: not more than 200 W - light output: 25200 lumens - voltage: 12-24V - color of light: 4200K.

Additional features: - control the flow - choice of the color of light in the 3200-6500K - selection of RGB LEDs - colorful illumination

The applicable standard - PN EN 12464-1:2011, sets lighting of the exhibition space as a "light depends on the requirements of the exhibition." The consequence is to provide a

227 level of illumination that allows you to safely navigate around the site without compromising your health. In areas strictly for visual work like: cash, office, staff room or control room shall must be applied the rules and norms. However, in areas with higher humidity –there are requiered products that meet the safety standards for the protection against electric shock.

Additional equipment: mobile housing - for the presentations and events. In the project must be provided mobile smart spot devicest. Cover with a minimum beam angle 24°, should be equipped with interchangeable color wheel, GOBO wheel replacement, automatic focus and iris aperture. Preferred application 350W LED matrix. The output stream is not less than 8000lm.

Control: Implementation will require the use of a control system that allows for dynamic and seamless use of a variety of scenarios. The system should be integrated with the central control system of the show. Requirements: - input and output panels - sequence editor - MIDI input and output - audio input - joystick control - steering computer In order to perform the control will be necessary to design a telecommunication network that allows the transmission of signals to the housings. Control is required, which will allow the integration of multimedia presentations with feature of lighting.

Information about lighting effects processor, controlling lighting, and the installation are also included in the paragraph.: 1.2.3, 1.3.3, 1.3.5 and 1.6.2 of this study and conceptual drawings.

Range of order includes: development, manufacture and installation of visual identification and information system (design, multimedia content, and scenographic part).

Visual identification system - is designed to creating the image of CNIT. The visual identity should consist of: - Terminology (terminology Polish, English): places, exposure, key areas for exposure - logotype - colors - font - the treatment of these items

Performer during the investment of realisation has to develop a (descriptive and graphic version, the effect is to be forwarded to the Employer in printed copy and electronic) book which will describe all the components of visual identification and procedure rules. It must be described the system of specific applications using a visual identity logo (website, brochures, outdoor advertising, etc.). Book should contain examples of cards, card detail not less than:

228

It should be identified and developed the brand image to media: - cards - stationery - envelopes - banners - mascot, souvenirs, - virtual guide to the exposure, - website. - description of the meaning of the logotype - description of the construction of the logotype - colors - protective field around the logo - variations of the logo, achromatic and mono versions - set of corporate characters typeface and recommended varieties and sizes - examples of normal and abnormal forms of the logo

The system should act as an information and marketing. It should be: characterized by: - uniqueness (graphic form with distinctive logo of the environment), - visibility, - readability, - ensure consistency of brand image, - refer to the key theme of exposure - induce the recipient relevant associations and mood, emotions. It is required to create code ordering of a high degree of functionality and versatility.

Visual identification system should be used by the contractor in the multimedia contents prepared for the media exposure.

3.3.System visual information

The visual information (visual communication) should include clear information for the following components / parts of the building: - input / output - reception and information - ticket office - cloakroom - Souvenirs - Toilets - Leisure zone - Explore path - zone, subzone - interactive installations - "public” areas and experimental positions require monitoring and special precautions - post audio description and information about the prohibition / injunction.

Media in the building: directional boards and panels, pictograms and other elements of visual information.

A separate system is required for people with disabilities (described later in this elaborate).

Documentation of system must include graphic design and descriptive of signs and media

229

(with the material, dimensions, method of installation). Developed material should contain a diagram of the location of visual information elements (plan of the building indicating the location of the media, height of placing the table).

The developed system should provide visual communication in a clear and readable.

Note: In the Zone entrance and the exposure must be clearly and readable marked for people with pacemakers (prohibition signs, symbols).

4. Functional and technical requierement of AV and IT equipment It is required the technical parameters of equipment are not worse than described below. It is possible to change the equipment for other meeting the technical characteristic: equivalence of the solutions (in terms of quality, ergonomics and function) must be proven by the Contractor.

For desktop operating systems are required.

Entry Zone: Level 0.00:

Ticket office, Information: It is assumed in 4 cash position: to organized groups (one position) and for individual visitors (two positions). Each of the stations should be equipped with: Ticket printer: - Print speed: 200 – 300 mm/sec - Weight: not more than 15 kg - Thermodynamic printing - Menu in Polish - Sensor allows identification label atypical shapes (round) - Metal Case - Printer tickets’s size: 50 x 100mm (weight 170g) Fiscal printer: - LCD display with adjustable contrast and backlight - Touch Keyboard - Large, easy to read display - 4 line - Possibility to change the battery without having to throw the device - Thermal printing mechanism - Print the barcodes on receipt - Print speed of 150 mm/sec - The ability to print invoices - The weight of not more than 4 kg Computer: - Offered processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 1035 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - A minimum of 2GB RAM compatible with processor - Hard disk with a capacity of at least 320 GB - Operating system compatible with PC hardware platform and ticketing system Touch screen Monitor 15 ": - Diagonal Image Size 15 " - Built-in touch panel - Aspect ratio of 4: 3

230

- Contrast min. 500: 1 - Brightness min. 250 nit - Power consumption: Max 40W - Input signal: D-sub 15 pin VGA - The weight of no more than: 5 kg

Software is required to sell tickets - administration, ticket office, booking, reports, Internet (booking and ticket sales, ticket control).

Monitors seamless hanging in the cabinet: LCD Monitor 46 "- 7 pcs, [mn 0.01]: - The image can be min. 46 " - Matrix LCD, LED backlight - Resolution 1920 x 1080 - 16:9 - Brightness min. 500cd/m2 - Contrast min. 3500:1 - Input signal: D-sub 15 pin, DVI-D, HDMI, RCA (L / R) stereo mini jack - Control: RS232C (in / out), RJ45 - Power consumption: 300W max - Anti-glare coating - Weight not exceeding 25 kg - Mounting on the wall specially designed to permit easy service access from the front, meets VESA standards, the design should allow for mounting bracket LCD 46 "- 55" - CE certificate Topics: History of EC1 complex Topics: History of EC1 building restoration Topics: News, current events in the EC1 Topics: Tour routes EC1 Topics: Tour routes EC1 - current occupancy path 1 Topics: Tour routes EC1 - current occupancy path 2 Topics: Tour routes EC1 - current occupancy path 3 Projection automatically updates GUI

Seamless Computer Monitor - Main Board: chipset dedicated to CPU - The type of stand: dedicated to the processor - Supports CrossFire Technology or equivalent - RAM slots: at least four slots for DDR3 memory or DDR2 dedicated to Main Board and compatible with the type of processor - Number of PCI-Express x16: 2 pieces - The processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score at least 12,000 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - A minimum of two hard drives: Drive No.1 - Type: SSD Interface: SATA II minimum, the minimum capacity: 60 GB; drive No. 2 - type: HDD or hybrid interface: a minimum of SATA II, the minimum capacity of 500 GB hard disk minimum speed: 7200 r / min, minimum buffer space: 32 MB - RAM: at least two channel with a capacity of at least 8GB of 1333MHz DDR3 type - Graphics Card: GPU with minimum characteristics: Stream Processors: a minimum of 1600 Memory interface: 256-bit minimum graphics memory (size / type): a minimum of 2GB / GDDR5 Video output: DisplayPort minimum of 4 pieces all active at the same time max resolution at the output of the graphics card: at least 2560x1600 @ 60Hz graphics card designed for professional use

231

- Power supply - minimum power required to support the offered set of PC - Fan of sufficient capacity to effectively offered a set of PC cooling - keyboard - Required operating system compatible with PC and offered a set of offered applications that are installed on the offered set of PC - Enclosure Type: Rack-mount housing with mounting rails Rack for 19" spacing

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 4 pcs, [ts 0.01, ts 0.02, ts 0.03, ts. 0.04]: - Diagonal Image Size 21.5 "TFT active matrix LCD - Aspect ratio 16: 9 - Usable screen size: 477 x 268mm - Number of Colors - 16.7 million. - LCD panel brightness - 250 nit - Response time of 5 ms - Resolution 1920 x 1080 - Viewing angle: horizontal 170 deg / Vertical 160 st - Contrast 1000: 1 - Input signal: VGA (15 pin D-sub), DV1-D - Power consumption max. 25 W - VESA standard mounting type - CE certificate touch overlay: - Overlay thickness of 3 mm - Overlay 7H hardness (Mohs) - Transparency of 92% (+ / -2%) certifications - Certificates required: CE, IP64 - Stability of more than 50 million touches without the need for calibration - The resolution of 4096 x 4096 plus 255 levels of force - Controller with USB and RS232 - CE certificate Computer LCD monitor 21.5 "with touch overlay (each - 1 piece): - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet , - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

Path 1: Energy conversion:

Level 0.00:

Boiler Room:

232

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 4 pcs, [ts 1.01, ts 1.02, ts 1.03, ts.1.04] Topics: Fire - Lightning - Electricity - Human, Prometheus; Before You start visiting the Power Plant; From the beginning, or delivery of coal to the boilers; ash and slag removal. boiler by "Stocznia Gdańska" Company, ash and slag removal. boiler by "L. Zieleniewski I S-Ka" Company

Computer Monitor - ibid

Speakers: Directional speakers - 3 pieces - Directionality: up to 3° - Frequency Response: min. 500 Hz - 16 kHz - Built-in equalizer with min. 3 settings - Audio: stereo, 2x RCA - Built-in amplifier - Power consumption: 100W max - housing made of ABS plastic in black - Weight: not exceeding 1 kg Topics: Way of running historic boilers in EC1 (sounds of the work)

Level 4.50:

Boiler Room: Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 4 pcs, [ts 1.09, ts 1.10, ts 1.11, ts 1.12] Topics: Way of running historic boilers in EC1, boilers components shown in this exposition level LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 8 pcs, [ts 1.05, ts 1.06, ts 1.07, ts 1.08, ts 1.13, ts.1.14, ts. 1.15, ts 1.16] Topics: Power station mock-ups

Computer Monitor - ibid

Projectors: Projectors with the system of mirrors - 6 pieces [pr 1.01,pr 1.02, pr 1.03, pr 1.04, pr 1.05, pr 1.06] - DLP - contrast 2000: 1 - brightness min. 7500 AnsiLumen - image resolution min. 1024 x 768 - dual-lamp system - power consumption less than 800W - signal inputs: 1 x BNC (composite), 5 x BNC, DVI-D, HDMI, S-video, VGA, 15 pin. - lens shift + / - 50% vertical, + / - 10% in the level of - Keystone Correction - + / - 40 degrees - weight not more than 16 kg With the projectors must be supplied software (system) to connect video and lighting correction for irregular surfaces. Topics: mapping

Computers to projectors for mapping (2 pieces): - Main Board: chipset dedicated to CPU - The type of stand: a dedicated processor - Supports CrossFire Technology or equivalent

233

- The amount of RAM slots: at least four slots for DDR3 memory or DDR2 dedicated to discs and compatible with the type of processor - Number of PCI-Express x16: 2 pieces - The processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score at least 12,000 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - A minimum of two hard drives: Drive No.1 - Type: SSD Interface: SATA II minimum, the minimum capacity: 60 GB; drive No. 2 - type: HDD or hybrid interface: a minimum of SATA II, the minimum capacity of 500 GB hard disk minimum speed: 7200 r / min, minimum buffer space: 32 MB - RAM: at least two channel with a capacity of at least 8GB of 1333MHz DDR3 type - Graphics Card: GPU with minimum characteristics: Stream Processors: a minimum of 1600 Memory interface: 256-bit minimum graphics memory (size / type): a minimum of 2GB / GDDR5 Video output: DisplayPort minimum of 4 pieces all active at the same time max resolution at the output of the graphics card: at least 2560x1600 @ 60Hz graphics card designed for professional use - Power supply - minimum power required to support the offered set of PC - Fan of sufficient capacity to effectively offered a set of PC cooling - keyboard - Required operating system compatible with PC and offered a set of offered applications that are installed on the offered set of PC - Enclosure Type: Rack-mount housing with mounting rails Rack for 19" spacing

Speakers: Speakers and power amplifier - 6 pieces - frequency range (-10 dB) - min. 70 Hz - 23 kHz - mid-frequency range (± 1.5 dB) - min. 130Hz - 14 kHz - Power - 200W continuous program, test 100 h 100W continuous pink noise test of 100 hours - propagation angles - 100 ° x 100 ° - Nominal Efficiency - min. 87 dB SPL 1W/1m - Nominal Impedance - 8Ω (transformer in position THRU) - crossover settings - low pass filter and a high pass second order - Available tappings of the transformer - for 70V: min. 60W, 30W, 15W, 100V Wdla 7.5 min. 60W, 30W, 15W, position THRU: 8Ω - Grill in stainless steel, black or white paint store - Protection against overload - Weight: not exceeding 4,2 kg Topics: Way of running historic boilers in EC1 (sounds of the work)

1 LED wall, monitors seamless: Monitors seamless: the wall of monitors LED monitors 46'' - 12 pcs [mn 1.01], 320 cm width:, height 250 cm - The image can be min. 46 " - Matrix LCD, LED backlight - Resolution 1920 x 1080 - 16:9 - Brightness min. 500cd/m2 - Contrast min. 3500:1 - Input signal: D-sub 15 pin, DVI-D, HDMI, RCA (L / R) stereo mini jack - Control: RS232C (in / out), RJ45 - Power consumption 260W max

234

- Anti-glare coating - Weight not exceeding 25 kg Topics: presentation of way of running power plant (according to the technological cycle) - animation, looped projection

Computer for LED Wall number 1 (1 pcs) - Main Board: chipset dedicated to CPU - The type of stand: a dedicated processor - Supports CrossFire Technology or equivalent - The amount of RAM slots: at least four slots for DDR3 memory or DDR2 dedicated to discs and compatible with the type of processor - Number of PCI-Express x16: 2 pieces - The processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score at least 12,000 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - A minimum of two hard drives: Drive No.1 - Type: SSD Interface: SATA II minimum, the minimum capacity: 60 GB; drive No. 2 - type: HDD or hybrid interface: a minimum of SATA II, the minimum capacity of 500 GB hard disk minimum speed: 7200 r / min, minimum buffer space: 32 MB - RAM: at least two channel with a capacity of at least 8GB of 1333MHz DDR3 type - Graphics Card: GPU with minimum characteristics: Stream Processors: a minimum of 1600 Memory interface: 256-bit minimum graphics memory (size / type): a minimum of 2GB / GDDR5 Video output: DisplayPort minimum of 4 pieces all active at the same time max resolution at the output of the graphics card: at least 2560x1600 @ 60Hz graphics card designed for professional use - Power supply - minimum power required to support the offered set of PC - Fan of sufficient capacity to effectively offered a set of PC cooling - keyboard - Required operating system compatible with PC and offered a set of offered applications that are installed on the offered set of PC - Enclosure Type: Rack-mount housing with mounting rails Rack for 19" spacing

2 LED wall, monitors seamless: Monitors seamless: the wall of monitors LED monitors 46'' - 12 pcs [mn 1.02], 320 cm width:, height 250 cm Topics: presentation of way of running power plant (according to the technological cycle) - animation, looped projection Monitors - ibid to wall LED 1 (12 pcs monitor 46'')

Computer for LED Wall number 2 - ibid to wall LED 1 (1 pcs) - Main Board: chipset dedicated to CPU - The type of stand: a dedicated processor - Supports CrossFire Technology or equivalent - The amount of RAM slots: at least four slots for DDR3 memory or DDR2 dedicated to discs and compatible with the type of processor - Number of PCI-Express x16: 2 pieces - The processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score at least 12,000 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - A minimum of two hard drives: Drive No.1 - Type: SSD Interface: SATA II minimum, the minimum capacity: 60 GB;

235

drive No. 2 - type: HDD or hybrid interface: a minimum of SATA II, the minimum capacity of 500 GB hard disk minimum speed: 7200 r / min, minimum buffer space: 32 MB - RAM: at least two channel with a capacity of at least 8GB of 1333MHz DDR3 type - Graphics Card: GPU with minimum characteristics: Stream Processors: a minimum of 1600 Memory interface: 256-bit minimum graphics memory (size / type): a minimum of 2GB / GDDR5 Video output: DisplayPort minimum of 4 pieces all active at the same time max resolution at the output of the graphics card: at least 2560x1600 @ 60Hz graphics card designed for professional use - Power supply - minimum power required to support the offered set of PC - Fan of sufficient capacity to effectively offered a set of PC cooling - keyboard - Required operating system compatible with PC and offered a set of offered applications that are installed on the offered set of PC - Enclosure Type: Rack-mount housing with mounting rails Rack for 19" spacing

Pump Room:

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 "- 2 pcs [mn 1.05, mn 1.06] - Type TN panel - Aspect ratio 16: 9 - Screen size no larger than 56 x 39 cm - Number of Colors - 16.7 million. - LCD panel brightness - 250 nit - Response time of 5 ms - Resolution 1920 x 1080 - Viewing angle: horizontal 170 deg / Vertical 160 st - Contrast 1000: 1 - Input signal: VGA (15 pin D-sub), DV1-D, Display Port - Power consumption max. 28 W - VESA standard mounting type - CE certificate Topics: operation of water pumps, emergency cases - looped animation

Computer for every single 23'' LCD monitor: - processor must receive the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet , - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

236

Distribution / Control Room

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 2 pcs, [ts. 1.17, ts 1.18] Topics: Historical equipment distribution Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 "- 8 pieces [mn 1.07, mn 1.08, mn 1.09, mn 1.10, mn 1.11, mn 1.12, mn 1.13, mn 1.14] Topics: monitors to describe experiences / experiments with electricity – looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Level 7.50:

Turbine Set Zone: Projectors with lens - 6 pieces [pr 1.07,pr 1.08, pr 1.09, pr 1.10, pr 1.11, pr 1.12] - DLP - contrast 2000: 1 - brightness min. 6500 AnsiLumen - image resolution min. 1024 x 768 - dual-lamp system - power consumption less than 720W - signal inputs: 1 x BNC (composite), 5 x BNC, DVI-D, HDMI, S-video, VGA, 15 pin. - lens shift + / - 50% vertical, + / - 10% in the level of - Keystone Correction - + / - 40 degrees - weight not more than 16 kg Projection screen for front projection screens, Visio (l = 1.800 cm, h = 220 cm) Topics: Way of running and turbine set components

Computers to projectors – Way of running turbine set (2 pieces): - Main Board: chipset dedicated to CPU - The type of stand: a dedicated processor - Supports CrossFire Technology or equivalent - The amount of RAM slots: at least four slots for DDR3 memory or DDR2 dedicated to discs and compatible with the type of processor - Number of PCI-Express x16: 2 pieces - The processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score at least 12,000 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - A minimum of two hard drives: Drive No.1 - Type: SSD Interface: SATA II minimum, the minimum capacity: 60 GB; drive No. 2 - type: HDD or hybrid interface: a minimum of SATA II, the minimum capacity of 500 GB hard disk minimum speed: 7200 r / min, minimum buffer space: 32 MB - RAM: at least two channel with a capacity of at least 8GB of 1333MHz DDR3 type - Graphics Card: GPU with minimum characteristics: Stream Processors: a minimum of 1600 Memory interface: 256-bit minimum

237

graphics memory (size / type): a minimum of 2GB / GDDR5 Video output: DisplayPort minimum of 4 pieces all active at the same time max resolution at the output of the graphics card: at least 2560x1600 @ 60Hz graphics card designed for professional use - Power supply - minimum power required to support the offered set of PC - Fan of sufficient capacity to effectively offered a set of PC cooling - keyboard - Required operating system compatible with PC and offered a set of offered applications that are installed on the offered set of PC - Enclosure Type: Rack-mount housing with mounting rails Rack for 19" spacing

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- touch overlay: 2 pcs, [ts. 1.19, ts. 1.20] Topics: - Monitors with touch overlay to model the turbine and generator - Monitors with touch overlay for model: the second law of thermodynamics, Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Distribution / Control Room

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 "- 8 pieces [mn 1.15, mn 1.16, mn 1.17, mn 1.18, mn 1.19, mn 1.20, mn 1.21, mn 1.22] Topics (all - looped projections) - Disconnecting the power in power plants, construction of surge voltage - Power as part of the energy system: past and present - Working conditions of people in the old power station - What skills are needed - An ordinary day in power - How does the power of plants

Computer Monitor - ibid

Level 10.50:

Distribution / Control Room

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 "- 8 pieces [mn 1.23, mn 1.24, mn 1.25, mn 1.26, mn 1.27, mn 1.28, mn 1.29, mn 1.30] Topics (all - looped projections) - Electrical Surges at home - History of the world's energy - History of energy in Poland Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors:

238

LCD Monitors 23 "- 8 pieces [mn 1.31, mn 1.32, mn 1.33, mn 1.34, mn 1.35, mn 1.36, mn 1.37, mn 1.38] Topics: Strategy game LCD Monitors 23 "- 27 pieces [mn 1.39, mn 1.40, mn 1.41, mn 1.42, mn 1.43, mn 1.44, mn 1.45, mn 1.46, mn 1.47, mn 1.48, mn 1.49, mn 1.50, mn 1.51, mn 1.52, mn 1.53, mn 1.54, mn 1.55, mn 1.56, mn 1.57, mn 1.58, mn 1.59, mn 1.60, mn 1.61, mn 1.62,mn 1.63, mn 1.64, mn 1.65] Topics: Strategy game Monitor parameters - ibid LCD Monitors 23 "- 4 pieces [mn 1.66, mn 1.67,mn 1.68, mn 1.69] Topics: Strategy game Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Projectors: Projectors 10 pieces [pr1.13 – pr1.14 i pr1.16 – pr1.21 i pr1.23-pr1.24] - DLP - contrast 2000: 1 - brightness min. 2500 AnsiLumen - Lens 0.19: 1 - Image size 86 - 97 " - The resolution of min. 1920 x 1080 - Power consumption less than 400W - Input Signal and Control: HDMI, VGA 15 pin. DVI-D, RJ-45, RS-232 - Keystone correction - + / - 15 degrees - weight not more than 9 kg With the projectors must be supplied software (system) to connect video and lighting correction for irregular surfaces. Topics: Strategy game

Computers to projectors (10 pieces): - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet , - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

Projectors: Projector 2 pcs [pr1.25, pr1.26] - DLP - contrast 2000: 1 - brightness min. 7500 AnsiLumen

239

- image resolution min. 1024 x 768 - dual-lamp system - power consumption less than 800W - signal inputs: 1 x BNC (composite), 5 x BNC, DVI-D, HDMI, S-video, VGA, 15 pin. - lens shift + / - 50% vertical, + / - 10% in the level of - Keystone Correction - + / - 40 degrees - weight not more than 16 kg

Computers to projectors (2 pieces): - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet , - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

The zone for physical and chemical demonstrations and presentations

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 6 pcs, [ts 1.21, ts. 1.22, ts 1.23, ts 1.24, ts 1.25, ts 1.26] Topics: Monitors with touch overlay for the stands: experience / experiments physico- chemical Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Path 2: Development of knowledge and civilization

Level 10.50:

Speakers: Directional speakers - 6 pieces, [experimental stands, different types] - Sound pressure level - less than 95 dBA (at a frequency of 5 kHz) - Reproduction frequency range - from a minimum of 250Hz to minimum 17.4 kHz (- 3dB/oct) - Power supply - external power - up to 24V DC - Audio input - at least 1x stereo mini-jack 3.5 mm unbalanced with switching to mono balanced - Power Music - a minimum of 30W

240

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 "- 2 pieces [mn 2.00 – mn 2.01] Topics: Science and technology at home, microwave oven - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 14 pcs, [ts 2.01- ts.2.14] Topics: Science and technology at home, microwave oven - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.15] Topics: Rutherford scattering - monitors with touch overlay for visitors

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.16] Topics: Radioactivity phenomenon - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.17] Topics: Measuring the speed of light - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Projectors: Projectors and projection screens (plane screen: cylinder sector), the computer - 4 pieces, [pr 2.01 - 2.04 pr] - LCD technology - Brightness 3300 AnsiLumen - Contrast 2000: 1 - 1024 x 768 resolution - The projection distance of 0.6 - 1.1 m - Aspect ratio of 4: 3 - Throw ratio 0.36: 1 - Diagonal Image Size 60 - 110 " - Input Signal: 2 x 15 pin. VGA, 1 x HDMI, 1 x RCA, 1 x mini DIN 4 - pin, 1 x RJ45,

241

- Weight up to 4 kg - Power consumption 350W max - CE, TUV Included with the projector must be provided software to connect to the image, and the image on the irregular surface. Topics: Presentation of the Doppler effect for light

Computer to projectors: - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet, - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.18] Topics: Presentation of the Doppler effect for light Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.19] Topics: Electromagnetic waves, Maxwell's equation - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.20] Topics: Movement of charges in an electromagnetic field - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.22] Topics:

242

Production of electric and magnetic fields - the characteristics of force field - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.21] Topics: Electron beam gun - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.23] Topics: Wilson Cloud Chamber - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 2 pcs, [mn 2.02 – mn 2.03] Topics: Nobel Prize - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 5 pcs, [ts 2.24, ts. 2.25, ts 2.26, ts 2.27, ts 2.28] Topics: Nobel Prize winners, great discoveries - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.29] Topics: The photoelectric effect - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 2 pcs, [mn 2.04 – mn 2.05] Topics: Laser - looped projection

243

Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.30] Topics: Laser - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 1 pcs, [mn 2.06] Topics: Conductivity of a conductor and semiconductor - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.31] Topics: Conductivity of a conductor and semiconductor - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 1 pcs, [mn 2.07] Topics: High temperature superconductivity - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.32] Topics: High temperature superconductivity - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 5 pcs, [ts 2.33, ts 2.34, ts 2.35, ts 2.36, ts 2.37.] Topics: Aerodynamics – lift - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

244

Computer Monitor - ibid

Projectors: Projectors and projection screens - 1 pcs, [pr 2.05] - LCD technology - Brightness 3300 AnsiLumen - Contrast 2000: 1 - 1024 x 768 resolution - The projection distance of 0.6 - 1.1 m - Aspect ratio of 4: 3 - Throw ratio 0.36: 1 - Diagonal Image Size 60 - 110 " - Input Signal: 2 x 15 pin. VGA, 1 x HDMI, 1 x RCA, 1 x mini DIN 4 - pin, 1 x RJ45, - Weight not more than 4 kg - Power consumption 350W max - CE, TUV Included with the projector must be provided software to connect to the image, and the image on the irregular surface. Topics: Aerodynamics – lift

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.38] Topics: Aerodynamics – lift - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.39] Topics: The laws of ideal gas - isothermal, isobaric, isochoric transformation, Stirling engine - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

245

Computer Monitor - ibid

Projectors: Projectors and projection screens - 1 pcs, [pr 2.06] - LCD technology - Brightness 3300 AnsiLumen - Contrast 2000: 1 - 1024 x 768 resolution - The projection distance of 0.6 - 1.1 m - Aspect ratio of 4: 3 - Throw ratio 0.36: 1 - Diagonal Image Size 60 - 110 " - Input Signal: 2 x 15 pin. VGA, 1 x HDMI, 1 x RCA, 1 x mini DIN 4 - pin, 1 x RJ45, - Weight not more than 4 kg - Power consumption 350W max - CE, TUV Included with the projector must be provided software to connect to the image, and the image on the irregular surface. Topics: The laws of ideal gas - isothermal, isobaric, isochoric transformation, Stirling engine

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.40] Topics: Bernoulli’s Principle - stand 1 - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.41] Topics: Bernoulli’s Principle - stand 2 - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

246

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.42] Topics: Archimedes’ Principle, Pascal's Law - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Projectors: Projectors and projection screens - 1 pcs, [pr 2.07] - LCD technology - Brightness 3300 AnsiLumen - Contrast 2000: 1 - 1024 x 768 resolution - The projection distance of 0.6 - 1.1 m - Aspect ratio of 4: 3 - Throw ratio 0.36: 1 - Diagonal Image Size 60 - 110 " - Input Signal: 2 x 15 pin. VGA, 1 x HDMI, 1 x RCA, 1 x mini DIN 4 - pin, 1 x RJ45, - Weight not more than 4 kg - Power consumption 350W max - CE, TUV Included with the projector must be provided software to connect to the image, and the image on the irregular surface. Topics: Acoustic - looped projection

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.43] Topics: Interference and Diffraction. Newton Rings - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

247

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 1 pcs, [mn 2.08] Topics: Interference and Diffraction. Newton Rings - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.44] Topics: Rainbow Colours - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 1 pcs, [mn 2.09] Topics: Rainbow Colours - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.45] Topics: Optical Line - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 1 pcs, [mn 2.10] Topics: Optical Line - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.46] Topics: Speed of sound (The physics of cracking whip) - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

248

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.47] Topics: Speed of sound (Waves) - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.48] Topics: Diode - LED - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.49] Topics: Speed of sound - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 3 pcs, [mn 2.11, mn 2.12, mn 2.13] Topics: Speed of sound - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.50] Topics: Resonance - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Projectors: Projectors and projection screens - 1 pcs, [pr 2.08] - LCD technology - Brightness 3300 AnsiLumen - Contrast 2000: 1 - 1024 x 768 image resolution - The projection distance of 0.6 - 1.1 m - Aspect ratio of 4: 3 - Throw ratio 0.36: 1 - Diagonal Image Size 60 - 110 " - Input Signal: 2 x 15 pin. VGA, 1 x HDMI, 1 x RCA, 1 x mini DIN 4 - pin, 1 x RJ45,

249

- Weight not more than 4 kg - Power consumption 350W max - CE, TUV Included with the projector must be provided software to connect to the image, and the image on the irregular surface. Topics: Resonance

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.51] Topics: Acoustic analysis of sound - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 3 pcs, [ts 2.52, ts 2.53, ts 2.54] Topics: Acoustic analysis of sound - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 4 pcs, [mn 2.14, mn 2.15, mn 2.16, mn 2.17] Topics: Gyroscope, General subject about gravity - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.55]

250

Topics: Oblique Projection - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Projectors: Projectors and projection screens - 1 pcs, [pr 2.09] - LCD technology - Brightness 3300 AnsiLumen - Contrast 2000: 1 - 1024 x 768 image resolution - The projection distance of 0.6 - 1.1 m - Aspect ratio of 4: 3 - Throw ratio 0.36: 1 - Diagonal Image Size 60 - 110 " - Input Signal: 2 x 15 pin. VGA, 1 x HDMI, 1 x RCA, 1 x mini DIN 4 - pin, 1 x RJ45, - Weight not more than 4 kg - Power consumption 350W max - CE, TUV Included with the projector must be provided software to connect to the image, and the image on the irregular surface. Topics: Oblique Projection

Computer to projector: - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet, - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.56] Topics: Simple Machines - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.57]

251

Topics: Air Track - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Projectors: Projectors and projection screens - 1 pcs, [pr 2.11] - LCD technology - Brightness 3300 AnsiLumen - Contrast 2000: 1 - 1024 x 768 image resolution - The projection distance of 0.6 - 1.1 m - Aspect ratio of 4: 3 - Throw ratio 0.36: 1 - Diagonal Image Size 60 - 110 " - Input Signal: 2 x 15 pin. VGA, 1 x HDMI, 1 x RCA, 1 x mini DIN 4 - pin, 1 x RJ45, - Weight not more than 4 kg - Power consumption 350W max - CE, TUV Included with the projector must be provided software to connect to the image, and the image on the irregular surface. Topics: Air Track

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.58] Topics: Free Fall Of Matter - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Projectors: Projectors and projection screens - 1 pcs, [pr 2.12]

252

- LCD technology - Brightness 3300 AnsiLumen - Contrast 2000: 1 - 1024 x 768 image resolution - The projection distance of 0.6 - 1.1 m - Aspect ratio of 4: 3 - Throw ratio 0.36: 1 - Diagonal Image Size 60 - 110 " - Input Signal: 2 x 15 pin. VGA, 1 x HDMI, 1 x RCA, 1 x mini DIN 4 - pin, 1 x RJ45, - Weight not more than 4 kg - Power consumption 350W max - CE, TUV Included with the projector must be provided software to connect to the image, and the image on the irregular surface. Topics: Free Fall Of Matter

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 3 pcs, [mn 2.24, mn 2.25, mn 2.26] Topics: Zone: The Time Machine - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 10 pcs, [mn 2.27, mn 2.28, mn 2.29, mn 2.30, mn 2.31, mn 2.32, mn 2.33, mn 2.34, mn 2.35, mn 2.36] Topics: Zone: The Time Machine - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Cooling Tower

253

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.59] Topics: Set Of Stands: Science And Technology In Other Applications - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.60] Topics: Set Of Stands: Science And Technology In Other Applications - monitors with touch overlay for visitors Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 2.61] Topics: Set Of Stands: Science And Technology In Other Applications - monitors with touch Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 23 " – 3 pcs, [mn 2.37, mn 2.38, mn 2.39] Topics: Set Of Stands: Science And Technology In Other Applications - looped projection Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

2d 3d Cinema

A professional installation projector with a telephoto lens (2 pieces): - Warranty producer for operation 24/7 at full power lamps. - Built-in color calibration software, the ability to calibrate the image to REC709 color space (for compatibility with the materials in full HD), the ability to calibrate the white point to D65, a separate color correction RGBCMY in color space correction XY and intensity of each of these colors - Brightness 11 000 lm - The projector technology, 3-chip DLP 3D - Real-time optical - Dynamic Black - raises levels of black. - Contrast to 15 000: 1 (on / off) - Two 400W UHP lamp - Native Resolution 1920x1200 - Inputs, DVI-D, HDMI 1.3, 1 x 15-pin DSUB, 1 x BNCx5, 1 x RCAx three YUV, 1 x 4-pin mini DIN Y / C, 1xRJ45, 2 x RS232, 1 x USB, 2x12V

254

- Weight - 26kg without lens - Dimensions max 51x61x25 cm (without lens) - Motorized iris (iris) - Work at 10 - 40 ° C, humidity 20 - 90% - Correct display of the image from a distance cm in 16:10 format of: base cm - cm, height cm - cm. Hardware image processor enables blending and warping images displayed. Image transformations performed while maintaining the native resolution of 1920x1200 and a frequency of 120Hz image for 3D projection. The processor comes with software for automatic calibration of projected images.

The computer allows the presentation of 3D images (2 items) - Main Board: chipset dedicated to CPU - The type of stand: a dedicated processor - Supports CrossFire Technology or equivalent - The amount of RAM slots: at least four slots for DDR3 memory or DDR2 dedicated to discs and compatible with the type of processor - Number of PCI-Express x16: 2 pieces - The processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score at least 12,000 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - A minimum of two hard drives: Drive No.1 - Type: SSD Interface: SATA II minimum, the minimum capacity: 60 GB; drive No. 2 - type: HDD or hybrid interface: a minimum of SATA II, the minimum capacity of 500 GB hard disk minimum speed: 7200 r / min, minimum buffer space: 32 MB - RAM: at least two channel with a capacity of at least 8GB of 1333MHz DDR3 type - Graphics Card: GPU with minimum characteristics: Stream Processors: a minimum of 1600 Memory interface: 256-bit minimum graphics memory (size / type): a minimum of 2GB / GDDR5 Video output: DisplayPort minimum of 4 pieces all active at the same time max resolution at the output of the graphics card: at least 2560x1600 @ 60Hz graphics card designed for professional use - Power - minimum power required to support the offered set of PC - Fan of sufficient capacity to effective cooling offered zesatwu PC - keyboard - Required operating system compatible with PC and offered a set of offered applications that are installed on the offered set of PC - Enclosure Type: Rack-mount housing with mounting rails Rack for 19 " spacing

A sound system for the cinema is required

Path 3: Microworld - Macroworld

Level 10.50:

The simulator:

LCD Monitors: LCD Monitors 20 " – 6 pcs, [mn 3.01, mn 3.02, mn 3.03, mn 3.04, mn 3.05, mn 3.06] Topics: Zone: The Time Machine - looped projection Monitor to the simulator, parameters:

255

- LCD technology - Dimensions of the monitor up to 477 x 290 mm - LED backlight - Aspect ratio 16: 9 - Contrast 1000: 1 - Brightness 250 cd/m2 - 5 ms response time - Number of colors 16.7 - Power up to 30W - Signal inputs: 1 x DVI-D, 1 x VGA 15 pin

Computer (for each of the monitors): - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet , - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

Level 13.96:

Microworld:

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 32 "- with touch overlay: 4 pcs, [ts 3.01, ts. 3.02, ts 3.03, ts 3.04] LCD Monitor 32 "- with touch overlay: 4 pcs, [ts 3.05, ts. 3.06, ts 3.07, ts 3.08] LCD Monitor 32 "- with touch overlay: 4 pcs, [ts 3.09, ts. 3.10, ts 3.11, ts 3.12] LCD Monitor 32 "- with touch overlay: 4 pcs, [ts 3.13, ts. 3.14, ts 3.15, ts 3.16] - Active Matrix TFT LCD - Aspect ratio 16: 9 - Usable screen size: up to 700 x 400mm - Number of Colors - 16.7 million. - LCD panel brightness - 450 nit - Resolution 1366 x 768 - Viewing angle: horizontal 178 deg / Vertical 178 st - Contrast 3500: 1 - Input signal: VGA (15 pin D-Sub), HDMI - Power consumption max. 65 W - VESA standard mounting type - CE certificate touch overlay: - Overlay thickness of 3 mm - Overlay 7H hardness (Mohs) - Transparency of 92% (+ / -2%) certifications - Certificates required: CE, IP64

256

- Stability of more than 50 million touches without the need for calibration - The resolution of 4096 x 4096 plus 255 levels of force - Controller with USB and RS232 - CE certificate - Touch overlay: 8 - points

Computer touch screen 32'' (1 piece for each monitor): - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet , - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

Multi touch tables (Multimedia tables): Multi touch tables (tactile, interactive) - 2 pcs [ts 3.17, ts. 3.18] - Screen size: 65 " - panel type: CCFL-backlit AMVA3 - area: min. 1425 x 800 mm - aspect ratio: 16:9 - number of colors: 16.7 million - the brightness of the LCD panel: max. 500 cd/m2 - Response Time: 8 ms - Resolution: 1920 x 1080 - viewing angle: 178 degrees horizontal / vertical 178 ° - Contrast: 5000:1 - signal inputs: VGA (15 pin D-sub), S-video, composite (RCA), RGBHV, DV1-D (with HDCP), HDMI 1.3 (with HDCP), DisplayPort (with HDCP) - Power consumption: max. 500 - capacity up to 55 kg - Monitor External dimensions: 1540 x 945 cm - standard mounting: VESA type - CE Touch Overlay: 32 - points

Player (for each table): - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet , - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB

257

- size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

Level 16.96:

Macroworld, Boiler Room:

Monitors with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 32 "- with touch overlay: 3 pcs, [ts 3.19, ts. 3.20, ts 3.21] LCD Monitor 32 "- with touch overlay: 2 pcs, [ts 3. 22, ts 3.23] LCD Monitor 32 "- with touch overlay: 2 pcs, [ts 3. 25, ts 3.26] LCD Monitor 32 "- with touch overlay: 1 pcs, [ts 3.27] LCD Monitor 32 "- with touch overlay: 2 pcs, [ts 3. 29, ts 3.30] LCD Monitor 32 "- with touch overlay: 2 pcs, [ts 3. 31, ts 3.32] Monitor parameters - ibid

Computer Monitor - ibid

Monitors ts.3.20 and ts 3.21 could be replaced by two devices: Hologram - 3D projection system Device parameters: - The possibility of combining a smooth holographic 3D object from a real product - Support for plug and play operation via a CF card - The ability to work 24/7 - Image resolution 1920 x 1080 - Optimum illumination of the object is not distorting the actual virtual object - High image quality with 10 Watt LED that produces little amount of heat - Dimensions (width / height / length): 586 x 325 x 405 mm (+ / -10%)

Computer to the device: - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet , - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

Sphere - 1 multi-touch screen, the projector:

258

Sphere - projection screen in the shape of a sphere (diameter 80 cm) + projector [ts 3.24]: - rear projection screen in the shape of a ball - matte screen surface - ball diameter: min. 80 cm (max. 90 cm) - screen (ball) disposed on the base, wherein the projector is mounted - construction of the base to ensure adequate cooling of the projector - resolution of the projector: 1400 x 1050 - projector brightness: min. 6000 AnsiLumen - contrast projector: min. 2000: 1 - projector technology: DLP or LCD - display area (the ball) Touch - multipoint

The computer's sphere 1: - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet , - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

Sphere - 2 multi-touch screen, the projector: Sphere - projection screen in the shape of a sphere (diameter 60 cm) + projector [ts 3.28]: - rear projection screen in the shape of a ball - matte screen surface - ball diameter: min. 60 cm (max. 70 cm) - screen (ball) disposed on the base, wherein the projector is mounted - construction of the base to ensure adequate cooling of the projector - resolution of the projector: 1400 x 1050 - projector brightness: min. 4000 AnsiLumen - contrast projector: min. 2000: 1 - projector technology: DLP or LCD - display area (the ball) Touch - multipoint

259

- storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

Video Wall: Video Wall (mn 3.07), 770 cm (liter) x 190 cm (h): - Built projective modules forming an arc convex with a radius of up to 300 cm and a - aximum angle of 140 ° - Total space: min. 710 x 210 cm, max 730 x 230 cm - Effective pixels total: min. 15300 x 4600 pixels - The distance between the edges of adjacent screens modules: up to 1mm - The brightness of a single module: min. 500 cd/m2 - Contrast single module: min. 750:1 - Module Backlight Type: LED - life of the backlight unit: min. 55 000 hours (to reach 50% of the initial brightness) - control modules: min. via LAN and RS-232 - Each module should have a built-in image processor for receiving digital video (DVI-D min) and for up-scaling and pixel mapping - Total power consumption: Up to 8 kW - External GPU able to generate an image with a resolution of min. 8000 x 2400 pixels - graphics processor must be capable of running the software installation and User

Computer: with the ability to display image - in line with the content

Interactive Projection: Projector for interactive projection screen, computer [pr 3.01] Projector 3D: software kinetic projection screen, computer: - technology DMD chip 3 x 0.96 " - brightness: min. 6000 AnsiLumen - actual resolution: 1920 x 1200 - contrast: min. 2500:1 - Signal Input: DVI-D, BNC, 3-D dual link DVI, VGA, HDMI, - a built-in keypad (controller) LCD - dual-lamp system, the lamp max. 200W - lamp life in standard mode: 2000 hours. - weight: not more than 28 kg - presentation of images in 3D technology, Dual - the projector lens to enable the presentation of an image from a distance of 4m on the screen from 5.4 m - included with the projector, a computer capable of playing 3D presentation

Computer: enabling presentation of 3D images - Main Board: chipset dedicated to CPU - The type of stand: a dedicated processor - Supports CrossFire Technology or equivalent - The amount of RAM slots: at least four slots for DDR3 memory or DDR2 dedicated to discs and compatible with the type of processor - Number of PCI-Express x16: 2 pieces - The processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score at least 12,000 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net)

260

- A minimum of two hard drives: Drive No.1 - Type: SSD Interface: SATA II minimum, the minimum capacity: 60 GB; drive No. 2 - type: HDD or hybrid interface: a minimum of SATA II, the minimum capacity of 500 GB hard disk minimum speed: 7200 r / min, minimum buffer space: 32 MB - RAM: at least two channel with a capacity of at least 8GB of 1333MHz DDR3 type - Graphics Card: GPU with minimum characteristics: Stream Processors: a minimum of 1600 Memory interface: 256-bit minimum graphics memory (size / type): a minimum of 2GB / GDDR5 Video output: DisplayPort minimum of 4 pieces all active at the same time max resolution at the output of the graphics card: at least 2560x1600 @ 60Hz graphics card designed for professional use - Power - minimum power required to support the offered set of PC - Fan of sufficient capacity to effective cooling offered zesatwu PC - keyboard - Required operating system compatible with PC and offered a set of offered applications that are installed on the offered set of PC - Enclosure Type: Rack-mount housing with mounting rails Rack for 19 " spacing

Ultrasonic Speakers (3 pcs): - Directionality: up to 3 ° - Frequency Response: min. 500 Hz - 16 kHz - Built-in equalizer with min. 3 settings - Audio: stereo, 2x RCA - Built-in amplifier - Power consumption: 100W max - housing made of ABS plastic in black - Weight: not exceeding 1 kg

Macroworld, Cooling Tower:

Monitors 21,5” with touch overlay: LCD Monitor 21,5" - with touch overlay: 2 pcs, [ts 3.33, ts. 3.34] + 2 pcs, [ts 3.35, ts. 3.36] + 2 pcs, [ts 3.37, ts. 3.38] + 2 pcs, [ts 3.39, ts. 3.40], the position of the space station modules models: - backlight TN - aspect ratio: 16:9 - screen size: up to 550 x 380 x 20 mm - number of colors: 16.7 million - LCD panel brightness: 250 nits - Contrast Ratio: 1000:1 - Response Time: 5 ms - Image resolution: 1920 x 1080 - angle min. : 170 degrees horizontal / vertical 160 ° - signal inputs: VGA (15 pin D-sub), DV1-D, Display Port, HDMI, Stereo Mini Jack - Power consumption: max. 30 W - weight: not more than 6.5 kg - standard mounting: VESA type - CE Touch Overlay: 2 - points

Computer for 21.5'' monitor with touch overlay (for each monitor):

261

- processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet , - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0° C to 40° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

LED monitors: LCD Monitors 52 " – 4 pcs, [mn 3.08, mn 3.09, mn 3.10, mn 3.11] - type of panel: S-PVA - aspect ratio: 16:9 - number of colors: 16.7 million - panel brightness: 500 nits LCD - Response Time: 8 ms - Image resolution: 1920 x 1080 - viewing angle: 178 degrees horizontal / vertical 168 ° - Contrast: 1000: 1 - signal inputs: VGA (15 pin D-sub), S-video, composite, computer graphics, DV1-D (with HDCP), HDMI (with HDCP), DisplayPort (with HDCP) - Power consumption: max. 410 W - weight: 40 kg - standard mounting: VESA type - CE Touch Overlay: 8 - points

Computer to the monitor 52'' (for each monitor): - processor must achieve the test Passmark CPU Mark score of at least 3735 points (the result of the proposed processor must be on the http://www.cpubenchmark.net) - Main memory: at least 8GB of DDR3 type a minimum working in dual channel mode at a speed of at least 1066 - connection required: minimum 2 x USB 3.0, a minimum of 2 x 232, minimum 1 x DVI- I, a minimum of 1 x HDMI, a minimum of 1 x Display Port, a minimum of 2 x RJ45 with LED signaling with support for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet, - the power switch on the housing - storage: minimum 1 x drive with a maximum size of 2.5 "and a minimum capacity of 250 GB - size: up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) dictated by the space in which the computer will be installed - Power supply: 1 x external power supply max. 90W AC / DC - Operating temperature range: from 0° C to 40° C - humidity range: 10% to 90% - required operating system compatible with PC as well as a set of applications that are installed on your PC

262

5.Functional requirements and technical parameters of AV and IT installation

Electric switchboards: Sub-board will be operating light installations, jacks, and audio-video (AV) installation energy supply. General technical sub-boards directions: Rated voltage: 400/230V, 50Hz Network system: TN-S Rated current: do 160A Short circuit on-peak current: 6kA Level of security: IP31, IP54, 55 – in technical wet rooms Arrangement – wall Cables ducting: from above.

It is reccomended to use cases for module apparatus, made up of plastic. Sub-boards in flush-mounted and surface compliance.

Installation ducting. Main installation run should be ducted on net cable trays, individually for electric installations and for telephone and teletype service. Branch cables through trays and in PVC tubes. Arrange circumventions to devices in the flush-mounted wall tubes or in PVC tubes in the floor or under technical floor. Feeding-points and telephone and teletype service of copper cabling in the floor, should be finished in gang boxes of type „floorbox”, IP55. Wall sockets should be done as flush-mounted, with contact buffle IP44.

As conducting materials can be used copper and aluminum, number of strings: 1, 3, 4, 5, whereat for cross section of strings to 10 mm2, copper cables should be used obligatory. Rated voltage for cable lines: 0,6/1 kV; 8,7/15 kV; cross sections of strings: 10 to 240 mm2. Insulated cable installations should be used, or with insulation and protective coat for stable arrangement, in coats or without, sticked directly to the ground or arranged on suspension strands, also flush-mounted, surface or inside-plaster; number of strings is dependent on the dedication of particular cable. Rated voltage of insulation are: 300/300, 300/500, 450/750, 600/1000 V depending on requirements, cross sections of arranged cables can be (0,35) 0,4 to 240 mm2, whereat current feed of buildings requires using of minimal cross section 1,5 mm2.

Cables installation equipment

Cable bushing and edge - in places of the cables passage between fire-zones or for protection of cables isolation at passages through sides of the cantilever construction, there should be used protective culverts. Cables arranged directly on the floor, should be protected across the application covers ( installation tubes , floor slats). Installation ladders made up of perforated steel tapes or of aluminium as fastened systemically or self-supporting, constitute accessories of different elements of electrical system. They should permit free fastening of not only cables , but also installation accessories. Installation channels made up of perforated steel tapes or of aluminum or net and from plastics in the simple form or crestal about the width 50 to 600 mms. All kinds of channels used in the object, should have sets of additional elements, facilitating the

263 arrangement according to designed lines and providing difficult access to cables for unauthorized people. Channels and installation slats made up of plastics, steel sheets or of aluminum or as the combination metal-plastic, due to the place installation can be mural, floor, and ceiling ; resistant on the ambient temperature within the range from -5 to +60°C. Channels about the greater width should have internal partitions constant or fastened for enabling leading different kinds of installation in parallel sequences in the common channel or the slat. Rules of the parallel installation of different networks with usage of channels and installation slats, should be accepted according to recommendations of the producer and recommendations standard specifications. Installation tubes with accessories (branching, funnels, connections, handles) - made up of plastics or metal, mainly steel (there should be used materials of the electric strength above 2 kV, incombustible which does not sustain the flame, and gases emitted by tubes in high temperature are not harmful for human). Tubular interior installations should be resistant on the ambient temperature within the range from -5 to + 60°C, and due to endurance, they require applications tubes from light and average plastics. The selection of the tubes installation diameter depends on the cross-section of cables, cables retractable and their quantity retractable to the common installation tube. Tubes from plastics can be smooth or notchy and simultaneously flexible or rigid; diameters of typical smooth tubes: from 16 to 63 mms (greater for cables about heavy gauges according to 200 mms needs) however diameters of typical notchy tubes : from 16 to 54 mms. Steel tubes black, painted or galvanized can be smooth or notchy - diameters of typical smooth (rigid) tubes: from 13 to 42 mms, diameters of typical tubes notchy flexible: from 7 to 48 mms and rigid from 16 to 50 mms. For the aesthetic concealment of cables in floor installations, there should be used flexible cables-covers - spiral, made up of tape or notchy tubes from plastics. Floor horizontal channels measurements - width 200, 250, 300, 350 and 400 mms, should be made of plastics, aluminum sheets as perforated or full. Floor channels accessories constitute elements facilitating leading of the installation and cover and floor activation points ( useful equipment) frames and assembly together with tongues to installation of sub plastering accessories , with the ring 45 mms, of the same and different type. Installation of floor channels can take place in the concrete, compensatory layer (sunk in the dressing about thickness 40 to 115 mms - with possibility of regulation to 25 mms of the channel ordinate part , and also in floors: hollow brick or raised).

Systems fastening cables, faggoty installations and accessories Handlings to cables fastening wedged in the opening with holding element constant or terminal, driven and fastened to other elements e.g. terminal belts or cable-handlings screwed on; applied mainly from plastics (some elements can be made of metals also). Tubing clips installation - made of materials and in typical sizes such as installation tubes - fastening tube across pressing or screwing on (open or closed). Electro installation of containers - to assembly sockets and installation connections, there can be applied: connective, through, branch or floor and ceiling. They are made of from materials about the electric strength above 2 kV, incombustible or incombustible which sustain the flame, and emitted gases in the high temperature are not harmful for the man, simultaneously ensuring the level protection minimum-IP 2X. Depending on destination container, it must fulfill following requirements regarding their size: the equipment can 60 mms, of ceiling or final of 60 mms or 60x60 the mm, of branch or of through of 70 mms or 75 x 75 mms - two -- three -- or four-of entrance for cables about the section to 6 mms. Electro installation downs to assembly of sockets and installation connections should be adapted to fastening of accessories by means of „fingernails" and / or screws.

Cable lugs, binding clamps and connectors - they should be performed from electric current well conductible materials, as aluminum, copper, brass, assembled across the

264 binding, the torsion or soldering; their use should facilitate connecting and enable the multiple dissociation and the incorporation of cables to the installation without the necessity of the each preparation ends of the cable and to enable the system-insulation by means of insulating covers. Remaining accessories: ratings of cables, stuffing boxes, connectors and rails, protective clamps.

The installation equipment Connectors of the general purpose performed for needs for sub plastering installations , surface-plastering and surface-inside plastering

- sub plastering connections should be adapted to the installation in cans 60 mms using screws or „fingernails"; - surface-plastering and surface-sub plastering connections are prepared for the installation directly on the ground (to the wall) using screws or stuck; - binding clamps joining of cables should enable induction of cable about 1,0- 2,5mm section; - connections covers should be made from materials incombustible or not supporting flame. - Basic technical data: - rated voltage: 250V; 50 Hz, - rated current: to 10 And, - level of protection in normal accomplishment: minimum IP 2X, - level of protection in tight accomplishment: minimum IP 44.

Connector sockets of the general purpose to installation in sub plastering installations , surface-plastering and surface-inside plastering:

- 1-phasic sub plastering sockets should be provided with the protective contact and adapted to installation in gang-boxes 60 mms using screws or „fingernails"; - surface-plastering sockets and 1-phasic surface-sub plastering should be provided with protective contact and adapted to the direct installation on the ground using screws or stuck.

Binding clamps connecting cables should enable induction of cables about the section of 1,5-6,0 the mm depending on installed power and the kind of connector socket. Sockets covers should be made of materials incombustible or not flame supportive. Sockets basic technical data : - rated voltage: 250V or 250V/400V; 50 Hz, - rated current: 10A, 16A for 1-phasic sockets - rated current: 16A to 63A for 3-phasic sockets - level of protection in normal accomplishment: minimum IP 2X, - level of protection in tight accomplishment: minimum IP 44. The most of experimental stands requires the feed 230V ( floor gang boxes). In the zone of demonstrations and physics-chemical experiments there should be provided feed 380V. Information on stands requiring of the feed due to character of provided for them experiments are found in Chapter 2 of this elaboration (at description stands).

The structural cabling:

Elements of cabling:

265

- the passive part: the fibre optic cable, plugs, patch cords, pigtails, optical fibre patch panels (so called optical fibre switching equipment with adapters), cover muffs - the active part: media-converters , switches.

Assumptions of the system: The installation based on communication from server room via optical extenders to each AV device AV/monitors, walls of monitors, projectors, groups of projectors:

1./Extender: to the transmission of HDMI signals on great distances /up to 900 m/with usage of single fibre optic cable. The extender system should consist of transmitter and receiver. Thanks to this set, it should be possible to send signal of 12 bit depth of colours v1.3 HDMI with HDCP in resolution up to 1080p, and simultaneous transmission of embedded lossless audio signal audio through single fibre optic cable. The system should be adapted to send coded pictures: video and audio. The system should reach the distance of the transmission up to 900 meters for signals of 1080p resolution included. Both the receiver and the transmitter must be provided with the connector blockade of feeder preventing separation of the system. Key-features of the set: - Served resolutions HDTV to 1080p @ 60Hz - Compatibility with HDMI 1.3 - Compatibility with HDCP 1.1 - The range of transmission of signal up to 900 m @ 1080p - Embeeded lossless digital audio in the HDMI signal - Blockade of feeder before falling out Entries/ exits of video: - The transmitter: entry min. 1x HDMI - The receiver: the exit across 1x HDMI - Entries/visual outputs: - Transmitter exit across 1x SC (the video + embed. audio) - Receiver: entry across 1x SC (the video + embed. audio) Fibre optic cables: - Single Mode 9/125um or 8/125um Served signals: - Industry standards: HDMI v1.3, HDCP 1.1

The video: - Maximum served resolution to 1920x1200, 1080p/60Hz - Coefficient of the sampling audio - Recommended 48 kHz (GraphicEncryption) Working environment: - Operating temperature: from 0°C to +50°C - Humidity during the work from 5% to 85%, without condensation - Temperature of the storage from -10°C to +85°C - Humidity during the storage from 5% to 85%, without condensation, additionally required Extender LAN.

2./ Fibre optic cables: of 1000SX: 50/125, 62.5/125µm multi-mode Opto-telecomunicating cable with fibres in central tube , four-fibre, multimode with endings 4LC/4LC of length minimum 100 apt. Cable fully dielectric. Intended to the transmission of digital and analog signals in entire optical band, used in all transmission systems: data, voice and picture. The cable must fully cooperate with set: transmitter and receiver /Extender/DVI/HDMI/LAN and enable transmission of signal on distance from 100 m to 400 m Performance properties: - immunity on electromagnetic disturbances

266

- ease of assembly - possibility of next door arrangement to electric wirings - coating of the cable is created of incombustible materials

Fibre optic cable multimode is built from elements: 1. Optical fibre: multimode. The quantity of optical fibres in the cable: 8 2. Tube: central with optical fibres filled with water-repellent gel 3. Strengthening: aramid fibres 4. Thread breaking the coating 5. Coating: withouthalogenous not flame spreading

The number of optical fibres: 8 Recommended measurements of the cable: - Outside diameter: 6-9 mm - Mass of the cable: 40-65 the kg/ km - - Manufacture Length: 2150 ± 50

Mechanical properties: - Maximum dynamic force of drawing: 1500-2000 N - Maximum static force of drawing: 500-1000 N - Minimum- dynamic ray of inflexion: 500-700 mm - Minimum- static ray of inflexion: 500-750 mm Climatic properties: - Temperature range of the storage and transport: -30/+70 °C - Temperature range of installation: -15/+55 °C - Temperature range of exploitation: -30/+60 °C Cables must be adapted to: - sending signals between optoelectronic devices in closed rooms and outside buildings, contractions of the cable-sewage system and inside object-oriented.

THE ATTENTION: In store of the same cable routes through server room and with all devices must be put also cables CAT6-In. Parameters: High-quality cable CAT6-In, length 100-300m. External, incombustible coating, possessing LSZH (LowSmoke the Zero Halogen)status , not emitting toxic halides during burning , protecting from ultraviolet radiation. Guide: 23 AWG Bare Solid Copper Isolation: Solid Polyethylene or FRP (Plenum) Standards: - Confirmed THE HIVE {STREET}/CSA - ETL verified to ANSI/TIE/EIA568A - ISO/IECC/1801 Uses: - 10 Bassets (IEEE802.3) - 100Vg-AnyLan (IEEE802.12) - Token Ring (IEEE802.5) - 100 Bassets (IEEE802.3) - FDDI/CDDI 100 Mbps - ATM 155, 622 Mbps - 1000 Bassets

There should be designed optical fibre cabling in mixed topology starrily - ring-shaped which will ensure certain data transfer and guarantee of action, despite damage ,of one and even several optical fibre cables.

267

Optical fibre connections will appear among the central distributional node and distributional points , between central distributional node and main server room, and also among neighboring distributional nodes.

Optical fibre cables should be finished in optical fibre panels situated in distributional cabinets. After execution of optical fibre cabling installation, there should be carried out measurement of optical fibre cables. There should be done measurement of the attenuation and of reflectometry of all fibers.

The quantity of distributional points should be adapted to architecture of buildings, on the assumption, that the cable UTP length over from the port of the active (switch) device to the device of destination (e.g. computer) cannot be greater than 90,0 apt. UTP cables and optical fibres used to construction of telephone and teletype service network must be led in easily available technological channels. It should be foreseen the possibility of logical sockets in rooms quantity increase.

Installation of copper cabling should be fully done with the unshielded cable of 6a category. Every installed RJ45 terminal RJ45 of cat. 6a, constitutes single logical point of the copper cabling, which will constitute on the composition of OF PELAS point. Depending on locating of distributional points in the building, main server room can perform a role of central distributional node. The location of cable-routes must ensure required distance from power engineering routes , in the way not causing disturbances of the system. After the execution, cabling system must obtain the certificate of conformity with 6aW category ,provided by the producer.

Distributional points: Server room (CPD) should be provided with cabinet 19” 800x800mm, min. 42U.Local distributional (LPD) points should be provided with cabinet 19” 24U. Equipment of individual distributional points: slat feeding 9x230V - ventilating panel - panels arranging 19"/1U -hangers to the vertical leading of patch cables - distributive panels kat.6A 19"/1U Each cabinet must have 4 openings to the initiation of junction cables. In set with cabinet should become delivered such elements as: dummies of openings of the initiation cables, the brush-culvert to installation in the cable-opening , feet, the set of assembling bolts. Every cabinet standing must have the construction with possibility of untwisting of the skeleton. Assembly of distributional points of structural cabling, should be coordinated with execution of electric wirings for the purpose of suitable power of the feed assertion.

Server room: Ethernet Switch - 48 gigabit ports - 44x 10/100/1000T, 2 free slots (hot-swap modules) - Patch panel, 24 RJ45 joints in number enabling buckling up of all systems provided through Ordering.

The cabinet Rack: - frame-Construction welded from steel profiles of 1,5gr , adapted to setting on leveling feet M10 or assembled on the plinth - Possibility of cavalry wheels usage - In the roof and the base, openings 8U infatuated with full dummies, which, after removal, enable assembly of ventilating panel - 4 2U culverts 2U for the cables introduction - 1 in the roof, 1 in the floor , 2 behind (the top and pit), infatuated with full dummies

268

- front door perforated , right-left side, with three-punctual lock with handle, hinges enable opening of 180° - the rear Cover perforated , fastened by two one-point locks - Side screens made of steel 1,0 mms, closed with 2 one-point locks - Cabinet IP20 demanding the requirements - Cabinet intended for usage inside of rooms - Set of cabling network and feeding to devices installed in the cabinet. Minimum computer (sever) requirements:

Housing: Housing of Rack type, height maximally 2U with possibility of minimum 4 disks 3.5" Hot Plug installation together with the set of rails enabling installation in the rack cabinet and the protrusion of the server to service purposes. Cabinet possessing the physical protection dedicated by the producer of server making impossible extraction of hard disks by unauthorised users.

Main board: With possibility of installation minimum one physical processor two, four, six or eight-pithy, possessing minimum 6 slots for memory with possibility of installation to the minimum 192GB, possible storage protections: ECC, SDDC, Memory the Mirroring Rank the Sparring, SBEC. main board designed by the producer of the server and appointed permanently with his trademark.

The processor: Installed one four-pithy processor of the x86 class dedicated for work with offered server, enabling achievement of minimum 166 points result in the test SPECint_rate_base2006 available on www.spec.org for the uniprocessor configuration. To the offer should be enclosed the printout with the test result offered server model.

RAM Memory: Minimum 8 GB RAM of LV RDIMM type, having clock rate of minimum 1333 MHz.

PCI Express slots: Functioning slots PCI Express: - minimum one slot x8 of the third generation about x4 speed - minimum one slot x16 of the third full height generation

Built-in ports: Minimum 5 USB 2.0 ports (2 on the front panel, 2 on the rear panel, 1 internal), 2x RJ45, 1x RS-232, 2x VGA D-Sub

The graphics adapter: Integrated graphics adapter, enabling image display in the resolution of minimum 1280x1024

Network interfaces: Minimum 2 network interfaces, gigabit Ethernet Base-T not occupying none of available PCI Express slots.

The disk controller: Equipment controller disk, enabling configuration of levels RAID : 0, 1, 5, 10, 50

The internal bulk store: Possibility of disks SATA, NearLine SAXON, SAXON, SSD and SED installation Installed 4 equal hard disks about capacity minimum 500GB SATA 7.2 RPM each Possibility of installation inside the server, of 2 identical carriers of the Flash type dedicated for virtaulhypervisor with possibility protection RAID 1 configuration of server BIOS level, solution cannot cause the reduction of the minimum- required quantity of recesses on hard disks. There commits equivalent solution - server must have installed two additional hard disks of the flash SSD Hot Plug type about the capacity minimum 200GB each, performed in

269 the technology SLC not causing reductions of minimal amount of required recesses on hard disks.

Installed 4 equal hard disks having capacity minimum 500GB SATA 7.2 RPM each Possibility of installation, inside the server, of 2 identical Flash type carriers dedicated for virtualhypervisor, with possibility of RAID 1 protection configuration, of BIOS level of the server, solution cannot cause the reduction of the minimum- required quantity of recesses on hard disks. There commits equivalent solution - the server must have installed two additional hard disks of flash SSD Hot Plug type having capacity minimum 200GB each, performed in SLC technology not causing reductions of the minimal amount required recesses on hard disks.

Optical drive: Installed internal drive enabling reading DVD carriers

The safety and the diagnostic system: The panel LCD should be situated at the front housing, enabling showing the state information of the processor, memory, disks, BIOS, the feed and the temperature. Integrated with the main board, TPM module. Built-in sensor of the housing opening cooperating with BIOS and with the card administering.

The cooling and feed: Minimum four internal redundant fans. Two redundant feeders Hot Plug about the power of minimum 350Watts each

Managing card: Independent from installed operating system, integrated with main board or, as the additional adapter card (there Commits the use of the card installed in the slot PCI Express however not maybe she to cause reductions of the minimal amount of required slots in the server), possessing the minimum-functionality : - communication across the interface RJ45 - basic management with server across IPMI 2.0, SNMP, VLAN tagging protocol - built-in diagnosis - built-in tools for operating systems installation - access across the graphic interface of Web card and from command-line - monitoring of the feed and energy consumption through the server real-time with the possibility of graphic presentation - local and remote server configuration - remote installation of operating systems - support for IPv4 and IPv6 - record of the screen shot from last failure - integration with Active Directory

Possibility of the functionality development of the card for automatic reset of server, network cards, BIOS, firmware version in case of failure and exchange of some components (including RAID controller, network cards, main board).

There is required configuration og central database server softwares. Router: - Portes: 1 x WAN - RJ45 - 10/100 Mb/s 4 x LAN - RJ45 - 10/100 Mb/s 1 x USB 2.0 - WLAN: Standard IEEE 802.11n Wireless LAN 300Mbps, 2.4GHz Baudrate mode 802.11n: to 300 Mb/s the Encipherment WEP, WPA, WPA2 128 the bit, 256bit - Functions: DHCP - Configuration: through Internet browser.

There are required dedicated programmes which enable system configuration communicating through the mediation of LAN network. From the computer working in the

270 local area network, thre must exist possibility of remote configuration and monitoring among other things: - All parameters of media servers - Playlists of events - Remote resetting of media servers - Viewing of placed playlist - creations of reports from application work.

Users sockets will consist of RJ45 joints, shielded category 6A. Detailed location sockets and way of their assembly, should be coordinated with the arrangement project of interiors and to agree with the Investor before assembly, regarding technological stocking of room. RJ45 joints, assembled in annexation sockets , must be up to the mark standards: ISO/IEC-11801 Amd. 2 Draft, TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 for the 6A category. For the purpose of minimum-assertion of twisted pairs of cable, modules RJ45 must be provided woth the guide par. For purpose of optimim-arrangement assertion pairs in relation to themselves, to each pair should provide dedicated opening by which it is introduced to the guide - such solutions significantly improve parameters of broadcasting joints, minimizing intersteam-crosstalks. There should be applied modules assembled withouttool- (without the use of the striking tool). The RJ45 module must ensure the possibility of sewing of the cable. The joint must be provided into the independent metal- band serving for the compression of metal-cachet shielding on-screen of the kink cable. For the purpose of joints assembly, different systems of electroinstallation accessories , RJ45 joint must have the standard of mechanical assembly of „keystone” type. Joints of the same type should be applied in distributive panels. All materials to the execution of the telephone and teletype service installation, should comply with requirements contained in documents of reference (standards, technical approvals). The technical information about applied materials and products, including quality certificate, the homologation certificate , certificate of the conformity, mounting instructions and the exploitation, or else guarantees of producers should be prepared on:

1. Every manufacture section of the copper cable or optical fibre 2. Cabinets to assembly of devices, 3. Optical fibre switching equipments , 4. Cable-(for optical fibres)muffs 5. Transmission equipment, 6. Pigtails, 7. Patchcords, 8. Measuring equipments. 9. All elements servants to the mechanical protection or steerings of cable lines in the building: cable-wells , protections of cable-wells , tubes of cable-pipelines , the secondary sewage system , pipe unions, cover tubes , gaskets of pipes endings, tubes of rebores, warning tape , mark post , junctional container or wrestling of the cable, markers, the cable signal-locational.

6.Media Content. Exhibition management systems. Web page

6.1.Media Content

Contents required for the exhibition - subject and duration described in Sec. 2 of this study.

The types of contents,: 2d animation, 3d animation, 2d infographics, documentaries, ambient music (looped images, without narration), audio (A / music, b / narrative -

271 multilingual languages: Polish, English, German, and exhibition to an audioguide) graphics to the presenters. The panoramic projections require a minimum resolution of full HD (movies and projectors should be matched to the resolution).

The quality of documentary films and multimedia content: Multimedia material of the show must be tailored to the intended quality AV equipment for the exhibition.

Sound: The Purchaser expects the highest quality sound effects, musical compositions, ambient sounds that strengthen the emotional and more enjoyable time whilst exploring the CNIT. In the case of film screenings it’s preferably dolby surround sound 5.1 or 7.1.

Website - described later in this paper.

Multimedia presentations should be compatible and appropriately work together and exploit the technical equipment of the assembled media, and they should be able to be updated and edited in the future.

Multimedia presentation shall be made in the form of an application that uses an interface having the operation and capabilities of the touch panel installed on the monitors. The presentation should include an interface for navigating through the presentation, move to the next level and stage of presentation, rewind, stop and restart. Multimedia presentations should provide support for the use of gestures on the touch screen.

Multimedia presentations must meet the following requirements:  should be prepared in full HD resolution (1920x1280) with the ability to dynamically scale to lower the screen resolution without reducing the functionality of the presentation, be able to connect any common start screen presentation,  support any number of languages with the possibility of adding more by the central management system (including the date of publication) be operated using the touchscreen multi-touch (using gestures)  have a central management system for editing on-line any part (text, picture, drawing, video) presentation of a central interface, a browser or a dedicated application-installed in the system, including digital rights management and content editing (such as Digital Asset Management) depending on the type of user, location of presentation: touch screen, internet, intranet, and also time in which the presentation is displayed (can reduce the time from-to), ability to remove, change the display order of information in presentations, have the ability to automatically generate photo galleries  have a map mode 2d and 3d so you can see any maps in the form of sliding images with zoom gestures and the slider, the ability to place any hot-spots on the map (content management system), have a timeline mode: enables the distribution of any (image, sound, video, etc.) of the element on the timeline,  have a gallery mode: gallery images, videos and sounds with the possibility of placing any order, sorting and describing the various media,  have a video player: so you can play the selected video at a resolution of 1920 x 1080 / Full HD GPU hardware acceleration for full-screen mode, which enables sharing video chapters to which you can scroll through the video, the ability to place additional textual and pictorial display during playback (in the form of clouds pinned to the corresponding point), augmented reality mode: ability to load 3d models that will be displayed when it detects a marker (pictogram or photo)  projector mode of presentation in PDF and PowerPoint, you can view any file loaded into the system under the projection display and can control the pace of the presentation,  have a mode of book: Contents are displayed in the form of a book with the ability to

272 turn pages, the page can be put images, text, links to videos from the gallery, screen saver mode and mode: info and outro during startup and shutdown of the system,  content management system should enable the creation of new types of multimedia content, XML-based private data exchange between player and CMS system. XML syntax is possible to adapt to any other player, presentation should run and display the final content of content even without a LAN connection,  have a built-in motor allows you to view 3d model or 3d animation (over 5000 polygons) in Full HD resolution with refresh rate of 60 Hz using GPU hardware acceleration, be able to have versioning ,in the content management system,  have the ability to dynamically substitute in the central management system one presentation for another presentation or other form of media (graphics, video, game), be able to view the presentations on information bar located at the bottom of the screen.  operate on control systems: Windows, Macintosh and Linux.  presentations should be able to sync with other presentations over the network or LAN control system to enable or disable sound effects, lighting and other requirements in the scenario of the exhibition.  The system allows you to create presentations or sequence of sound effects, videos and presentations interdependent and run because of the time, the order or interactions. system should be able to create different versions and maintain RFID interacting with the system.

The Contractor shall be required to transfer to the Purchaser all copyright being used in the exhibition works. The purpose of this provision is to ensure that the Employer has unlimited use of tracks and certainty about the legal status of works being used in the exhibition. The contracting authority may exceptionally authorize the transfer of the license, in lieu of the transfer of all rights. This situation is unique only for works not executed by the Contractor for the execution of the contract and each is dependent on the written consent of the Purchaser. Such consent may be expressed only in relation to specific, identified tracks, allowing you to assess the risk of the Purchaser due to lack of full copyright ownership to specific tracks. The entity authorized to license each should be Orderer.

Multimedia presentations, animations, and videos - the samples must be submitted to the Employer for approval before being sent to production and post-production.

6.2.Exhibition management system

Video and audio equipment, and lighting effects devices should be controlled by the central control system.

It is recommended that the system meets the requirements and functionality described below:

273

All local lighting installations and multimedia management to be connected to each other through a local subnet and separate cabling.

The system shall allow control through dedicated tablet with each exhibition space directly on the selected devices. Communication with the central server through a dedicated separate Wi-Fi network. The system should support the Windows, Macintosh and Linux.

Content Management: The central panel of content updates on all devices show Define multiple possible content for presentation on the furnishing (profiles show) Monitoring the status of the uploaded new content Verifying the Installation list of connected devices

Managing the application: Defining starting and stopping hours of devices that support the exhibition for each day of the week exceptions for individual days for special occasions / events remote computers on and off The Central Administration Change profile: schedule or on request Define an exception for the day - choice of dates, selecting the time Setting up a profile for the exhibition

Device Management: Easy identification device on the network, a unique identifier Map of the exhibition - an interactive graphical presentation of the plan of the building along with the selected computers Ability to restart all exhibition equipment Remote mouse, mouse control on the remote device with a browser support for mobile devices (tablet, smartphone) facilitate administrative functions for built-furnishing

Diagram shows - makes it easy to find the device that represents panel display devices - a sample view:

274

Remote Control:

Remote control - unit testing and verification of the correct calibration of the touch screen - testing module multimedia capabilities of the device, a stereo image - displaying 3d images - The video - check the calibration of the projector, support color palette, smooth video display test, the number of frames per second - Sound - verification of the correct position of the speakers, support for the required - number of channels to detect the effect of distortion static image - check the hardware capabilities of your monitor depth and palette of colors, contrast, brightness, change the geometry of the image, - Test Touch Screen - Quality Test Monitor - Test stereoscopic

Remote diagnostics: - report hardware and software configuration of the device is available from the control panel, operating system version - parameters of the device hardware: CPU, RAM, hard disk - version, manufacturer and parameters of the installed video and sound card - installed I / O devices (mouse, touch screen) - model on the monitor

275

- installed audio and video codecs - Screenshot - preview image currently displayed on the device - download the event log of your running applications - the ability to send diagnostic information to the creator of the content of the presentation - Network Diagnostics - the verification of the availability of network devices - Informing the administrator of upcoming surveys, information about replacement parts which are required.

Management module lighting fixtures and electrical installation: - Ability to control and schedule programming and modes on and off electrical appliances and lighting fixtures - Ability to create lighting scenes and scenarios - Choice of operating modes: constant power supply, power supply according to schedule, with individual control switches on the walls.

Other features of the system: - Supported devices show a PC or equivalent, with the possibility of connecting a touch screen - multimedia player - dedicated to arranging for audio visual presentation - Administration panel made in HTML5, access via a web browser - Access from mobile devices (Tablet) - Manage User Rights - The user interface in Polish and English - Ability support authentication based on client certificates based on HTTPS. - Hosting in the container application and beyond. - repository configuration - Operation in offline mode. - Support service panel adm. from the tablet. - Repository files with automatic en encoder video files to the right format and converter files. - documents database. - Unnecessary database administrator privileges. Back-up the database by copying the file system level. - Health Monitoring server application. - Remote monitoring performance Counter'ow. - Based authentication for LDAP domain controller. - Ability to run independent applications on a single TCP port. Load-balancing and server - side applications. - WCF security - client installers, the ability to network. - Implementation of preventing reverse engineering. - Library signed with the private key (server) - Ability central Client Update - The ability to write your own extensions - Ability to integrate your own extensions to the schedule - remote client interface based on web service technology - Ability to download logs and dump the contents on-screen player - Ability to integrate with Microsoft Azure. - Integration with Active Directory

Wireless network for exhibition Required designed WiFi wireless connectivity allows configuration and diagnostics system, lighting and the media exhibition and manage all the technical services or

276 recommendations from a computer equipped with a WiFi card (laptop) or mobile devices such as iPods. Requires a Wi-Fi system gives: - Ability to log on to a local Wi-Fi network and registered ticket purchased by the person entering the CNIT, trigger the appropriate application on your portable mobile device - their own or shared by CNIT - provides access to a wide range of information, along with the function of the mobile guide; - The possibility of individual planning the visitor sightseeing places and receive interesting range of information with a choice of language and the type of information, - The opportunity to provide information specifically tailored to support the blind and visually impaired, such as voice, the possibility of transmission of information to the hearing impaired.

Operational scenarios multimedia installations. Each installation will include a multimedia function module, which enables programming the relevant scenarios and interaction with the ability to edit them. In conjunction with the large-format projection, sound system, lighting showroom and effects module, motion sensors and other sensors that are appropriately matched to the stage of detailed design will enable the construction of visitor interaction-multimedia installation: for example, when we have a group of systems are activated, the appropriate scene lighting, presentation, video projection, background music. Move the visitor to the appropriate level of a multimedia presentation or finding a suitable place in the footage may attach additional multimedia equipment in accordance with the previously written script to add another element of the narrative. This module will allow editing / modification of the script, which will be able to perform an authorized employee of CNIT.

RFID Module This module will be responsible for gathering information about the user and adapt emitted content according to your preferences. This module allows you to easily add new languages or even more expanded age groups.

Statistics and Reporting Module This module will be responsible for creating statistics and reports related to the functioning of the exhibition, such as the number of switching performances and exhibition halls for the investigated time interval, by a group of Polish and foreign, etc.

The control system shall consist of the actuators - the central unit, relay modules, drivers, lighting, video and audio switch and the device used to issue commands, the special LCD screen with touch sensitive surface 10 "diagonal. The touch screen and the CPU are installed in the server. The CPU control system: - 7 configurable serial ports RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485 - 8-port relays - 8-Port IR / Seria - 8-port digital I / O - 2-port network communications AxLink and Ethernet (TCP / IP) - The speed of the CPU processing 404 million instructions per second - Built-in internal memory of 64 MB of RAM - Built-in non-volatile memory 1MB SRAM - Port CompactFlash memory card with support for up to 1GB of memory

Indicators on the front panel:

277

- Amount heat emitted during operation of the central control system:36.9 BTU / hr. - Metal housing in black, matt - Dimensions no greater than 8.8 cm x 43.2 cm x 8.8 cm (height 2U rack units) - Weight: 2.50 kg - Power supply 900mA at 12VDC

The touch panel control system: - Screen size 10 " - The aspect ratio of 16: 9 - Dimensions Min. 17 x 25 x 6.7 cm - Type Color TFT Active Matrix - Contrast Ratio 700:1 - Brightness 400 cd/m2 - LED backlight - Screen resolution 1280 x 800 - Color display 256 colors (18 bit color) - Intercom technology by VIP - Built-in speaker and microphone - Communication: Ethernet 10/1000 port, RJ-45, USB, Bluetooth, NFC - Composite / S-video input by NXA-AVB/Ethernet Breakout Box - 512 MB SDRAM / 4 GB flash memory - Supplied with the monitor bracket for installation in rack 19 "

Minimum technical requirements of the computer (the server):

Housing: Housing rack 2U high up the possibility of installing a minimum of 4 drives 3.5 "Hot Plug with a set of rails allow mounting in a rack server and Eject for service. Backed by a dedicated physical security of the server manufacturer to prevent removal of the hard drives by unauthorized users.

Motherboard: By installing at least one physical processor to two, four, six or eightcore, having a minimum of six slots for memory is to be installed a minimum of 192GB, can protect memory ECC, SDDC, Memory Mirroring Rank Friendly, SBEC. Motherboard designed by the server manufacturer and permanently marked his trademark.

Processor: Installed one x86 quad-core processor dedicated to the work offered to the server in order to reach a result at least 166 points in the test SPECint_rate_base2006 available on the website www.spec.org for single-processor configuration. The bid must be accompanied by print the test result for the offered server model.

RAM: At least 8 GB of RAM type LV RDIMM minimum clock frequency 1333 MHz

PCI Express PCI Express Functioning: - At least one third-generation x8 slot with x4 speed - At least one third-generation x16 slot full height

Built-in Ports: Minimum 5 USB 2.0 ports (two on front panel, two on back panel, one internal), 2x RJ45, 1x RS-232, 2x VGA D-Sub

Graphics card: Integrated graphics card capable of displaying images at a resolution of at least 1280x1024

Network Interfaces: A minimum of two and Gigabit Ethernet Base-T is not involved in any of the available PCI Express slots.

278

Disk Controller: Hardware storage controller, which allows the configuration of RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 10, 50

Internal storage: Can be installed SATA drives, Nearline SAS, SAS, SSD and SED. Installed four identical hard disk drives with a capacity of at least 500GB SATA 7.2 RPM each Can be installed within two identical media server Flash dedicated for hypervisor virtualization security with the ability to configure RAID 1 from the server BIOS, the solution may not result in a reduction of the minimum required number of bays for hard drives. Accepted solution equivalent - the server must have installed two additional hard drives, flash SSD Hot Plug with min. 200GB each made in SLC technology does not causereduction in the minimum amount of required hard disk drive bays.

Optical drive installed inside the drive can read DVD media

The safety and diagnostic system: LCD panel located on the front panel, allows you to view information about the state of the processor, memory, disks, BIOS, power and temperature. Integrated with the motherboard TPM. Integrated chassis intrusion sensor cooperating with the BIOS and card management.

Cooling and Power: A minimum of four redundant internal fans. Two hot plug redundant power supply with a capacity of at least 350 watts each

Data Management: Independent of operating system, integrated with the motherboard or as an add-in card slots (acceptable to use the card installed in the PCI Express slot, but it can not cause a reduction in the minimum number of required slots in the server), which has the minimum functionality: - Communication interface RJ45 - Basic server management through IPMI 2.0 protocol, SNMP, VLAN tagging - Built-in diagnostics - Built-in tools to install the operating system - Access through the Web GUI menu and command line - Monitor power and energy consumption of a server in real-time with the possibility of graphical presentation - Local and remote server configuration - Remote installation of operating systems - Support for IPv4 and IPv6 - Record a snapshot of the recent crash - Integration with Active Directory

Expandable card functionality of automatic resetting the server, network, BIOS, firmware version in case of failure and replacement of one of the components (including the RAID controller, network cards, motherboard).

Required to configure the software and the central database server. The configurations of the server might look like this: The system operates a twin devices (servers), one of them support the system, and second, as programmed, copies the data generated on the first server. In case of failure of the first server acquires its second role, and thus continuity is maintained; b The system is running one server and one twin, with twin software is a backup server. The first server periodically creates backup copies of the data are created, and in case the data can be played back on a second server and the second server can take over the former.

279

Because computers reproducing the content will be installed in place of exposition, throughout the building, you will need one main point that will be server room housing the server (server) database and web and devices LAN switch for LAN signal distribution to more parts of the site and the remote LAN socket is not more than 90m from the point. The whole property is so large that it will be necessary distribution points of distribution, which will be installed LAN Switches LAN distributing signals to electrical outlets away from them no more than 90m. The main server will be placed one rack cabinet 19 "with a height of about 42 to 44 U and the horizontal dimensions of 800mm wide x 1000mm deep. Distribution points LAN signal is proposed to the cabinet with a height of about 12U and horizontal dimensions of 600x600mm.

The RFID system is to enable visitors to explore the CNIT personalized way. The content presented on the screens are tailored to the stage of the knowledge of the recipient and presented in the language defined by him earlier. In the entrance area visitor receives a ticket, which is provided with a special electronic system. With such a ticket can change the content of the displays targeted to the individual user. This ticket also allows the implementation of more advanced features, such as gathering points in games education. The system also allow collection of electronic materials, such as videos, animations, text, images which most interested the user that the exit of the museum will be available on a special website where the registered users will receive all the materials that marked by pressing "Add to favorites" during the tour.

With the system will not collect personal information.

RFID ticket issue: RFID ticket will be issued at checkout. RFID functionality: - Checking tickets at the entrance (gate) - Personalized content (language) - Reader integrated into the housing (small circuit board mounted on the inside, Additional device visible to the public) - Stats Extended functionality of RFID (ticket from a vending machine): - Collect points - Souvenir from MP

Priorities select the playback order of presentation: Visitors who first load the ticket at the counter display has the right content to the end of the show. Depending on the construction of display, return to start may be the ticket or re-applied via an interface (screen) touch screen display, the same. Anyone who has put his ticket as the next reader can initiate playback of new content. Trigger content should also be performed using RFID card readers, so calibrated that it was necessary for the application of the card reader, or even insert the slot and leave it there until the end of viewing the content.

Changing the difficulty of comments phenomena (basic / extended) RFID ticket apart from choosing to be also possible to display - while exploring. It is required that the computers on display was equipped with an interface inputs and outputs, I / O (GPIO). At the exhibition site, install the panel with enough buttons.

Designed described above exhibition management systems should be supplemented by the following features:

280

Requires effective access control system allows: - Control; - Counting people in different areas visit; - Queuing based on the pre-registration; - Group of people to explore thematic paths. The access control system must take into account the draft zoning access and data bandwidth, and the maximum number of visitors in each room or zone.

Additional functionality: - The opportunity to register the visitor on the website of the CNIT, based on the used ticket, which allows to trace the route of your tour and additional information about the exhibits and receive current information about new and upcoming events in the CNIT; - Managing contacts with visitors, both during the tour as well at a later date; - Self-creation of individual paths explore, as independent proposals for the visitor, in case of lack of access to certain areas visit (eg, due to the limited number of seats or a temporary exemption from visiting the zone).

Requires information distribution system, including in particular the following functions: - The distribution of on-line advertising, along with information for visitors and people living in the building, such as EC-1 guide to smartphones and other mobile handheld devices; - The possibility of an independent transmission of information resulting from the presence of a visitor to explore specific areas or common areas; - Be able to use for the purposes of advertising, and the transmission of general information such as: control the flow of people in the right direction or to explore specific areas or dissemination of warnings; - Automatic or controlled response to various events and automatically trigger the appropriate "content".

In order to facilitate the movement of visitors to the exhibition is recommended to use the application on mobile devices (e.g. smart phones) - as the navigation to facilitate navigation around the site showing the course of the tour path. This requires the creation of mobile applications for inclusion on Google Play and iOS platform. This requires the development of applications based on "augmented reality" acting on the basis of an electronic guide for visitors. Once the application by indicating mobile device the exhibit, visitors can read additional information on the screen of your mobile device.

The system should provide customers with an opportunity to establish their individual accounts, which will be able to log in and view the data associated with it (information from the position of the green box and the like). The possibility of setting up and log in to the account along with a preview of the associated content is also be possible through the Center's website.

The Contractor shall ensure that the O ¬ positions taken was to have access to e-mail to send photos and greetings from the show. It should also constitute ¬ impact in the green box technology: that is, the position of the scan image and application form along with the ability to send through the Internet system effects compilation in the form of photographs and memorabilia from the show.

Requires ticketing system, including in particular: - Modules reservations and ticketing on-line; - Ticket registration system;

281

- Features "cloning" of events and pricing schemes.

The Contractor shall be required to train staff to use ordering system, update the content. The Contractor shall provide the Employer book: manual systems and how to update content in Polish.

6.3. Website

Required is a website dedicated to the exhibition. This site should be based on copyright CMS - written specifically for the object. It will be necessary by the Contractor provide a password and login name of the chief executive. It is necessary for the ability to create accounts minor chief executive administrators with the ability to reduce the edit points. Also required is a complete transfer of passwords for FTP and basic content of your page. Forum is to enable features such as: - You can book on-line - Support for on-line payments, - The ability to log in to your account that was created during the tour of the Centre and the ability to view content that has been associated with that account during the visit, - The possibility of creating a new website from the account, which will also be operated while in the CNIT, - Select the language: Polish, English, German, Russian, - Map of the object, - Virtual tour of the object, - A calendar of upcoming events, shows, - Staff newsletter - News tab - Media tab with the ability to upload pictures and videos - Top bar enables you to change the language - Icon top with adjustable font size for the visually impaired

You must use the technology to read pages for the blind. Home technology should support HTML 5.0 and AJAX or equivalent and be opened correctly in browsers (at least): IE 9.0, Chrome 12, Opera 8 and equivalent. A different solution must, at the implementation stage, to be accepted by the Purchaser. Expected operation of the website: - Required functionality involving the possibility to log in to your account if it has been created while visiting the Centre or started from the web - The creation of an account will not be necessary to explore the object center, visitors will be optional variant. Durability account up to one year after the last use of the automatic winding. Account is designed to allow for the outside center information generated by such quiz results. For any of the positions will not be mandatory login.

Through a virtual tour of a typical facility is meant for instance, a virtual tour in flash. Virtual Tour is presented subject matter available on display in a form adapted to the medium of the Internet, but should not replace a visit to the facility. Virtual Tour should provide an object and subject of interest to the visitor, encourage the pursuit of deeper knowledge, be of interest also for visitors who have visited the facility.

Contractor shall provide the Employer application version editable and non-editable electronic medium with a separate transfer protocol which included the handover of copyright.

282

Applications and content of the posts will be accessible from within the application. The functionality of the virtual sightseeing ordering predicts that users (visitors): - Go through the exhibition or visit the figure, - Additional information (text, images or 3d images, sound, video) - the approximate - Navigation panel - Zooming interface - Rotate 360 ° around its own axis and 180 ° in the up-down approximation of selected elements, - Full screen or frame, - Teacher (in Polish and English) - Map of the premises.

Service shall be made in responsive technology i.e., automatically adapt to any device that displays (tablet, smart phone, desktop).

7. Accessibility to the exhibition for the disabled

Exhibition should be available to people with disabilities: - The blind and visually impaired - Path 1 - With limited mobility - essential areas of all walks of sightseeing. But be aware that people with disabilities will not have full access to all the functionality of exhibition.

For people with physical disabilities must be ensured touch screens, which are carriers of convents, at a height to allow use by people sitting in wheelchairs.

Adjusting the exhibition for the blind and partially sighted people must be ensured by: - Special presenters and positions and tactile elements - Description The audio-based audio guides.

Guidelines for audio description: Audio description by words explain the image. Audio description by a brief, objective descriptions of the scenes should enable the blind self-interpretation of the visual content, follow the developing theme of history and hear and understand what is happening on-screen image. Do not give a subjective version of what he sees writer / reader. Audio description is intended to describe what is most precious and most valuable, in a concise, precise, clear, objective and general, yet colorful, stimulating imagination and the imagination. Language Audio description involves handling of metaphor, paradox, subtlety, aesthetic minimalism, so that in the short form of poetry every word had its role and suggested some content. The most important is the brevity and economy of words, but the words and sentences (meaning, a form of speech) should be designed to deliver a large shipment of feelings and sensations ("painting" word).

The rules for creating audio description video / animation: Audio description for the video, and animation is woven with fused to comment on the soundtrack - a break in it is used to describe what is happening on the screen, describe the form, place of action, costumes, gestures and facial expressions. The verbal description of the image film transmits its sub-elements: staging, set design, the actors, costumes, color and light on words. The script for the film / animation should be prepared in such a way, that image of the blind and visually impaired viewers was understandable. Do not tell the story of the movie / animation, but to describe the visual elements of the film image composition in terms of neutral and objective narrator. Avoid interpretations and evaluations, allowing listeners to build their own applications. Indispensable to this is to focus on the key elements that make up an event and make up a particular scene. Due to the limited amount of time to transfer the image is needed in

283 selection of audio description and select what is most relevant and important to what indispensable to understand. You should also pay attention to the accuracy and precision of the wording of the message. This could be applied to the dialogue, if they are not significant, or if they are accompanied by subtitles, and only when you need to convey important information or read the subtitles. Use the present tense, noting that the description was smooth and natural. The language should be diverse, but not artificial or stilted. Adverbs facilitate a concise description of what we see, however, are often subjective in nature and should therefore be used with caution. Do not be afraid of adjectives denoting colors. Their importance can often be clarified by adding a qualitative adjective.

Objects typed for audio description: For audio description were selected historic buildings - the old infrastructure elements EC1. The material should be so prepared that he gave the history of the object, the working conditions in the plant, size of the devices, their function, the production technology. It should be stressed elements such as temperature that occurs during the manufacturing processes, equipment stored material solutions, the sounds of technological processes.

Technical data and functionality required for the equipment: audio guides (set for 25 people): Kit will include: - Listening devices (audio-guide) with batteries - 25 pcs - Radio frequency tags objects - 50 pcs - Radio frequency tags with audible signal for the blind - 40 pcs - Wired headset - 25 pcs - 25 pcs charger audio guides - one set. - Device memory programming audio-guides in accordance with the proposed model-one pc - Software for uploading self-narrative - one piece

Description of the system: The receiver must provide all visitors with the freedom and flexibility in learning about exhibition. Comments should be released automatically, in relation to the place where the visitors. Trigger recording is followed by wireless remote, and by illuminating the object with a special light source installed in the guide. In areas where the trigger is applied based on wireless technology, the size of the area (transmission range), which should be triggered recording is to be adjusted from a few to several meters. In addition to the automatic operation of the system is given a choice of several recordings manually assigned to places that are closest to and around the visitor. This technology automatically selects must have the following additional features: - The opportunity to play in the same area, different recordings when entering or leaving the area, - The opportunity to break the current record for the transition visitor in another area, breaking records must be followed in completing a logical whole recording / logical thread (eg the end of the sentence). Listening devices are provided with a display, which will be presented photographs and maps related to listening to a commentary. The technology needs to ensure correct operation of the system if you place the receiver in clothing (e.g. suspension on a leash under the jacket). For reasons related to the risk of theft is not allowed to use equipment commonly available in the market where the exchange of software, the device can have other uses (palm tops, PDAs, etc.). Audio guide - receiver: - Housing made of plastic resistant to mechanical damage (falls, stroke), - Weight: less than 170 g with battery, - Size: no larger than 130 x 70 x 30 mm,

284

- The internal battery, you can not pull the appliance by the public, - Audio format: MP3 or similar compression, - Frequency response: 20 Hz ... 20 kHz, - The minimum quality mp3: 44kHz, 128 kbit / s - Dynamics -> 90dB, - Volume control: buttons louder and quieter, - Outputs Headphone Jack 3.5 mm (2 pcs) - The possibility of connecting the loop - Display Type LCD TFT min. 3 " - Minimum resolution of 320 x 240 pixels, Colors:> 65000, - Minimum time audio: 50h, - The minimum amount of stored images to a recording: 1 000 at a resolution of 320 x 240 pixels, - The minimum number of languages: 14, - The minimum number of location-triggered> 10 000 - Synchronization with video Exchange of content: - Dedicated configuration software languages, audio, images, configuration of radio tags, - Upload content to multiple devices at once via USB communication, - The ability to update firmware guides - Audio guides must be protected against the free exchange of data or software by the public. Automatic detection of failure: - Signaling radio communication failure, - Indication of damage to individual keys on the keyboard,- Damage to the battery, - Errors in the recording medium. - Radio tags to automatically trigger: - Battery operated - min. One year of continuous operation, - Dimensions no larger than 55 x 40 x 23 mm, - Weight not more than 35g with battery - The ability to hide the exhibition (no need to direct "view" tag by the receiver). Radio tags to automatically trigger audio description (for blind people): - Power supply, - Dimensions no larger than 60x40x25 mm, - The weight to 40g, - The ability to hide the exhibition (no need to direct "view" tag by the receiver), - Sound signal - signal on a frequency of 3 kHz, triggered by the receiver of a blind person (depending on the relevant record) until the person sightseeing confirm the presence of the exhibit. The system must allow for the use of facilities for people with disabilities: - Function for the deaf (or hearing), the ability to connect consumers to the loop and display media content will support subtitles on the LCD. - Function for the blind - the location of the exhibits with audio navigation

Computer-type player to play the presentation: Processor least equivalent to the Intel Core 2 Duo Technical parameters not worse than: Main Memory 2 x DIMM DDR3 1066/1333 MHz 4GB. Connections on the front panel: - 2 x USB 2.0, 2 x RS232, 1 x on / off power switch, 2 x HDD LED and IR. Connections on the back of the device: - 1 x 12 V DC power input, 1 x VGA, 1 x DVI, 1 x HDMI, 2 x USB 2.0, 2 x RJ45 with LEDs for 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet, 1 x SPDIF, 1 x Line- out / 1 x Line-in, 2 x holes antennas Wi-Fi and a TV tuner. Storage: 1 x Drive 2.5 "SATA HDD 250 GB.Expansion Slots: 2 x Mini-PCIe. Size: Up to 260mm (W) x 200mm (D) x 50mm (height) without mounting bracket.

285

Created by:

The lid is made of aluminum for improved heat transfer - Housing made of steel in black. Power supply: 1 x 96W external power AC / DC. - Operating temperature range: from 0 ° C to 40 ° C - Operating Humidity: 10% to 90%

Additional items on display for the blind and visually impaired: The entrance area: - Terminal of the plan raised the exhibition, engraved with written information in Braille, marked the places where audio description starts; selected route for the blind and visually impaired, marked the most important of maintenance, hygienic nodes, recreation areas; - Physical model presents a solid object EC1 cast brass on a pedestal (construction and roofing steel) with engraved information written in Braille.

Exhibition - plates and handrails, steel (stainless steel) with engraved written information in Braille, information contains the most important data on exhibits (name, original function, year of construction). Complementing this information will be audio description - runs the place is not colliding with the standard path sightseeing.

8.Guidelines for the contract

8.1. Guidelines and requirements for the preparation of project documentation

Draft regulations should be developed based on assumptions, guidelines and requirements included in this study. Contractors are expected to pay attention to get the desired effect of the aesthetic and technical - as described in this paper and the accompanying conceptual studies.

The technical documentation shall comply with the requirements relating to the proceedings prior to the commencement of works, resulting from:  Ustawa z dnia 7 lipca 1994 r. Prawo budowlane (t.j. Dz. U. z 2010 r. Nr 243, poz. 1623 z późn. zm.),  Ustawa z dnia 29 stycznia 2004 r. Prawo zamówień publicznych (t.j. Dz. U. z 2010 r. Nr 113, poz. 759 z późn.zm.), w tym art. 30 – tak, aby mogła stanowić podstawę zorganizowania i przeprowadzenia przetargu i spełniać wymogi określone dla Opisu przedmiotu zamówienia w zamówieniach udzielanych na podstawie Pzp; and meet the requirements:  Rozporządzenie Ministra Transportu, Budownictwa i Gospodarki Morskiej z dnia 25 kwietnia 2012 r. w sprawie szczegółowego zakresu i formy projektu budowlanego /Dz. U. 2012 nr 81 poz. 462);  Rozporządzenia Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 18 maja 2004 r. w sprawie określenia metod i podstaw sporządzania kosztorysu inwestorskiego, obliczania planowanych kosztów prac projektowych oraz planowanych kosztów robót budowlanych określonych w programie funkcjonalno-użytkowym (Dz. U. Nr 130, poz. 1389);  Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 2 września 2004 r. w sprawie szczegółowego zakresu i formy dokumentacji projektowej, specyfikacji

286

technicznych wykonania i odbioru robót budowlanych oraz programu funkcjonalno-użytkowego (Dz. U. 2004, Nr 202, poz. 2072);  Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 23 czerwca 2003 r. w sprawie informacji dotyczącej bezpieczeństwa i ochrony zdrowia oraz planu bezpieczeństwa i ochrony zdrowia (Dz. U. Nr 120, poz. 1126).

Design documentation that is the subject of the contract, shall contain the optimal functional and operational solutions, construction, material and cost, and all the necessary drawings, including drawings of details, along with a detailed description and technical characteristics - in the manner that the assembly, finishing and delivery without having to draw additional studies and additions. Project documentation should be consistent and coordinated in all parts.

Project documentation prepared for the task should not include solutions that may adversely affect the functionality of the object, make it difficult to work and access to wiring and appliances and sanitary facilities or technical or may diminish fire protection.

The Contractor shall develop and submit the Employer four copies of technical documentation in printed form and two copies in electronic form, with the written consent of the print. Documentation in electronic form shall be forwarded to the Investor (optical / electronic) media in two versions: an editable (e.g. files in *. Doc for the descriptive part and *. Dwg drawings for parts) and non-editable (e.g. files in *. pdf) or equivalent.

The commencement of the project work is to look at the building design and documentation executive of construction and installation works, including land development, and their current state, carried out under a separate contract.

Project documentation may include equivalents to the proposed in this paper in terms of quality, ergonomics and functionality. You can change the materials and equipment on the other, the corresponding form and technical characteristics. Equivalence of solutions should be demonstrated by the Contractor.

Everywhere in this paper describes the materials and method of execution by standards, technical approvals, technical specifications or reference systems, such records should be treated as a subsidiary for an exhaustive definition of the object of the contract. Purchaser in all the above. There may equivalents described in terms of quality, ergonomics and functionality. Equivalence of solutions should be demonstrated by the Contractor.

Project documentation should be a separate development, which will separate volumes according to the adopted scheme of division of labor and delivery. Each volume prints all parties should bear numbers and prints permanently bound. Cover page design documentation should include: - name and address of the Employer - the name given to the contract by the Employer - address of a building to which the project documentation - the name of the building, according to the markings used in a construction project with additional markings such as levels, zones, etc. - project documentation table of contents - the name and address of the project along with the names and the names of the people developing the components of the project documentation the date of publication.

All documentation must get the approval of the Employer.

287

Draft regulations should complement and elaborate this study the extent and degree of accuracy needed for the task: all its elements. Detailed engineering drawings should include a scale taking into account the specificity of the ordered works / services / supplies, along with descriptive explanations.

The expected range of documentation: 1) Electrical: Power plants media, general lighting, lighting effects processor, lighting fixtures, sockets - for public areas 2) Audiovisual installations 3) telecommunication systems 4) other systems (such as plumbing, gas) for positions and exhibits 5) design projects and sets 6) detailed scenarios 7) draft regulations stations and interactive models. projects should include: material solutions, color solutions, mounting solutions (details, if necessary, calculate construction). The project is to design a server room AV multimedia transmission method of audiovisual and multimedia control system. Requires compatible designed systems and installations with existing systems.

Figures should be drawn on a scale: 1:100, 1:50, and 1:25 for the installation, technology specialist and interior, in a scale of 1:10, 1:5 and 1:2 in the details, in particularly justified cases should be drawn on a scale of 1:1.

Detailed Description of the design documentation in interior and set design shop drawings should be.

The as-built documentation should be included: a document that guarantees data sheets, certificates and technical approvals or compliance documents, manuals.

In addition, as-built documentation shall include: - Card installation contractors and subcontractors - Card equipment suppliers - Required statements, held licenses and certificates - Detailed instructions for use (in Polish) - Shortened mnemonic instructions for use (in Polish) - A list of materials and equipment - Device data sheets. The as-built documentation, apply the changes (and show them) in relation to construction documentation. The as-built documentation should include measurement protocols.

For each position / interactive installation contractor is expected to provide the Employer cards all posts / installation (as part of the as-built documentation), containing at least the following information (in Polish): 1) the name of the site / plant, belonging to the thematic area, 2) the purpose 3) The dimensions, 4) the materials used, 5) instructions for the implementation of the visitor experience, 6) user guide for visitors intended to be fitted on exhibition 7) a detailed description of the present phenomenon, 8) The detail of the installation / position 9) the number of persons who may also benefit from the post, 10) graphic design and as-built drawings,

288

11) detailed information about the media and consumables necessary for the proper functioning of the position, 12) a list of repairs that can be performed by trained personnel CNIT by the Contractor during the warranty period, without prejudice to the warranty.

8.2 Requirements in relation to the performance and acceptance of delivery, assembly and installation

All work must be carried out in accordance with: - The applicable regulations and standards, - The technical performance and acceptance of construction and assembly instructions and guidance manufacturers of equipment and materials used.

All materials must have a current certificate of approval for use in the construction and finishing materials should also have hygienic certificates and certifications and labeling required by the Building Act and its implementing rules.

Finishing materials used should have technical certificates and approvals for anti-static properties.

The requirements concerning the products and building materials, sources for materials: The materials and technologies used to carry out the work must comply with the prescriptions and solutions adopted in the technical design, put it to meet the technical requirements specified by standards and aesthetic, to have appropriate certificates, approvals, certificates in accordance with applicable regulations. For the contract to be used as construction products, which are: - Are CE marked, which means that an assessment of their compliance with the harmonized standard or European technical approval or a national technical specification of a Member State of the European Union or the European Economic Area, as recognized by the European Commission to be compatible with the essential requirements or - Were placed in a specified by the European Commission the list of limited relevance to health and safety, for which the manufacturer has issued a declaration of conformity with the recognized rules of the trade, or - Have been marked with the building - according to the model set out in the Act of 16 April 2004 on construction products (Journal of Laws 2004 No. 92, item. 881) - For which type approval has been granted. All materials shall provide the Contractor.

Acceptances The work is subject to the stages of acceptance: a) reception of partial, b) the reception of the final c) the reception of postwarranty.

Partial acceptance is based on an assessment of the quantity and quality of work performed. Partial acceptance shall be made according to the rules as the final acceptance of the work.

Final acceptance is based on the final assessment of the actual implementation of the tasks in terms of their quantity, quality and value. The overall task completion and readiness for final acceptance will be checked by the Contractor written notification addressed to the Investor. Final acceptance will work within the deadline set in the contract documents, the date of confirmation by the Investor completion and acceptance necessary for the receipt of documents.

289

Final acceptance of the work of the committee will determined by the investor in the presence of the Contractor. The Commission will work receiving their qualitative assessment based on the documents submitted, the results of tests and measurements, visual assessment and compliance of the work with the project documentation. The basic document for the final acceptance of the final protocol is drawn up according to the pattern set by the investor. The final acceptance of the Contractor shall prepare the following documents: - As-built design documentation with marked changes and an additional, if made on the contract, - Estimate of post-completion and quantity survey, - Instructions for use, - Device data sheets, - Attests to the quality of embedded materials - Technical report - Other documents required by the investor. If by the committee, the work in terms of preparation of documentation may not be ready for the final, the committee in consultation with the Contractor re-appoint the final acceptance date. All ordered by the committee correcting or supplementing the work will be summarized by the formula established by the Investor.

Reception after warranty Final acceptance is based on an assessment of the works associated with the removal of defects occurring within the warranty period. Reception after warranty shall be made on the basis of a visual object with the principles of the final.

Environmental protection when working around During its work apply any provisions for the protection of the environment. The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to comply with the laws and regulations on environmental protection in the task, and will avoid damage or nuisance to persons or property, and other social and resulting from contamination, noise or other causes arising as a result of its course of action. The materials, which are permanently harmful to the environment, will not be allowed to use. It is not allowed to use materials that cause harmful radiation at a concentration greater than the limit referred to relevant regulations. All waste materials used for the work will have technical certificate issued by an authorized agency, clearly indicating no adverse effects of these materials on the environment.

Fire Protection The Contractor will comply with fire safety. Flammable materials will be disposed of in accordance with relevant regulations, only the necessary amount for a day's work and protected from access by third parties. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss due to fire caused as a result of the work either by the Contractor and its subcontractors. The Contractor shall ensure that personnel do not perform work in hazardous, noxious and substandard sanitary requirements.

Compliance with laws and regulations The Contractor shall be familiar with all regulations issued by the central and local, and other rules and guidelines that are in any way connected with the work and will be fully responsible for compliance with these laws, regulations and guidelines while you work. The Contractor shall comply with the patent rights and will be fully responsible for complying with all legal requirements relating to the use of patented devices or methods and continuously will inform the investor of its activities by providing copies of permits and other relevant documents.

290

Standards and other documents related to the task - those in this study and in 1.6.3: "Laws and standards for the design and execution of the task."

8.3.Legal codes and standards connected with the design and execution of tasks

Laws and Decrees: Ustawa z dnia 7 lipca 1994 r. – Prawo budowlane /tekst jednolity: Dz. U. 2010 Nr 243, poz. 1632/ Ustawa z dnia 16 kwietnia 2004 r. o wyrobach budowlanych /Dz. U. 2004 Nr 92, poz. 881 z późn. zm./ Ustawa z dnia 12 września 2002 r. o normalizacji /Dz. U. Nr 169, poz. 1386 z późn. zm./ Ustawa z dnia 24 sierpnia 1991 r. o ochronie przeciwpożarowej /tekst jednolity: Dz. U. 2009, Nr 178 poz. 1380 z późn. zm./ Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 12 kwietnia 2002 r. w sprawie warunków technicznych, jakim powinny odpowiadać budynki i ich usytuowanie /Dz. U. z 2002 r. Nr 75, poz. 690 z późn. zm./ Rozporządzenie Ministra Spraw Wewnętrznych z dnia 7 czerwca 2010 r. w sprawie ochrony przeciwpożarowej budynków, innych obiektów budowlanych i terenów /Dz. U. Nr 109 poz.719/ Rozporządzenie Ministra Spraw Wewnętrznych i Administracji z dnia 24 lipca 2009 r. w sprawie przeciwpożarowego zaopatrzenia w wodę oraz dróg pożarowych /Dz. U. 2009 Nr 124, poz. 1030 z późn. zm./ Rozporządzenie Ministra Spraw Wewnętrznych i Administracji z dnia 16 czerwca 2003 r. w sprawie uzgadniania projektu budowlanego pod względem ochrony przeciwpożarowej /Dz. U. Nr 121, poz. 1137/ Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 11 sierpnia 2004 r. w sprawie sposobów deklarowania zgodności wyrobów budowlanych oraz sposobu znakowania ich znakiem budowlanym /Dz. U. 2004 Nr 198, poz. 2041/ Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 8 listopada 2004 r. w sprawie aprobat technicznych oraz jednostek organizacyjnych upoważnionych do ich wydawania /Dz. U. 2004 Nr 249 poz. 2497/ Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 25 stycznia 2011 r. w sprawie próbek wyrobów budowlanych wprowadzonych do obrotu /Dz. U. 2011 Nr 23, poz. 122/ Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 14 października 2004 r. w sprawie europejskich aprobat technicznych oraz polskich jednostek organizacyjnych upoważnionych do ich wydawania /Dz. U. 2004 Nr 237, poz. 2375/ Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 11 sierpnia 2004 r. w sprawie systemów oceny zgodności, wymagań, jakie powinny spełniać notyfikowane jednostki uczestniczące w ocenie zgodności, oraz sposobu oznaczania wyrobów budowlanych oznakowaniem CE /Dz. U. 2004 Nr 195, poz. 2011/ Rozporządzenia Rady Ministrów z dnia 23 grudnia 2002 r. w sprawie sposobu nadawania i wykorzystywania znaku zgodności z Polską Normą /Dz. U. 2002 Nr 241, poz. 2077/ Rozporządzenia Ministra Pracy i Polityki Socjalnej w sprawie ogólnych przepisów bezpieczeństwa i higieny pracy /tekst jednolity: Dz. U. 2003, Nr 169, poz. 1650/ Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 18 maja 2004 r. w sprawie określenia metod i podstaw sporządzania kosztorysu inwestorskiego, obliczania planowanych kosztów prac projektowych oraz planowanych kosztów robót budowlanych określonych w programie funkcjonalno-użytkowym /Dz. U. 2004 Nr 130 poz. 1389 z późn. zm./ Rozporządzenie Ministra Infrastruktury z dnia 2 września 2004r. w sprawie szczegółowego zakresu i formy dokumentacji projektowej, specyfikacji technicznych

291 wykonania i odbioru robót budowlanych oraz programu funkcjonalno-użytkowego /Dz. U. Nr 202, poz. 2072 z późn. zm./ Rozporządzenie Ministra Kultury i Dziedzictwa Narodowego z dnia 1 grudnia 2008 r. w sprawie zabezpieczania zbiorów w muzeach przed pożarem, kradzieżą i innym niebezpieczeństwem grożącym zniszczeniem lub utratą zbiorów oraz sposobów przygotowania zbiorów do ewakuacji w razie powstania zagrożenia /Dz. U. 2008 Nr 229, poz. 1528/. Rozporządzenia Ministra Transportu, Budownictwa i Gospodarki Morskiej z dnia 25 kwietnia 2012 r. w sprawie szczegółowego zakresu i formy projektu budowlanego /Dz. U. 2012 nr 81 poz. 462/ Rozporządzenie Ministra Transportu i Budownictwa z dnia 28 kwietnia 2006 r. w sprawie samodzielnych funkcji technicznych w budownictwie /Dz. U. 2006 r. Nr 83 poz. 578/

Standards: Network and Electrical Installations: PN-HD 60364-4-41:2009 Instalacje elektryczne niskiego napięcia - Część 4-41: Ochrona dla zapewnienia bezpieczeństwa -- Ochrona przed porażeniem elektrycznym PN-IEC 60364-4-42 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych. Ochrona dla zapewnienia bezpieczeństwa. Ochrona przed skutkami oddziaływania cieplnego. PN-HD 60364-4-43:2012 Instalacje elektryczne niskiego napięcia - Część 4-43: Ochrona dla zapewnienia bezpieczeństwa -- Ochrona przed prądem przetężeniowym PN-IEC 60364-4-45:1999 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Ochrona dla zapewnienia bezpieczeństwa. Ochrona przed obniżeniem napięcia PN-HD 60364-4-443:2006 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Część: 4- 443: Ochrona dla zapewnienia bezpieczeństwa -- Ochrona przed zaburzeniami napięciowymi i zaburzeniami elektromagnetycznymi -- Ochrona przed przepięciami atmosferycznymi lub łączeniowymi PN-IEC 60364-4-473:1999 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Ochrona dla zapewnienia bezpieczeństwa. Stosowanie środków ochrony zapewniających bezpieczeństwo. Środki ochrony przed prądem przetężeniowym PN-IEC 60364-5-523:2001 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych. Obciążalności prądowe długotrwałe przewodów. PN-IEC 60364-5-53:2000 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Dobór i montaż wyposażenia elektrycznego -- Aparatura rozdzielcza i sterownicza PN-IEC 60364-5-537:1999 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Dobór i montaż wyposażenia elektrycznego. Urządzenia do odłączania izolacyjnego i łączenia PN-HD 60364-5-56:2010, PN-HD 60364-5-56:2010/A1:2012 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych. Dobór i montaż wyposażenia elektrycznego. Instalacje bezpieczeństwa. PN-HD 60364-5-534:2012 Instalacje elektryczne niskiego napięcia - Część 5-53: Dobór i montaż wyposażenia elektrycznego -- Odłączanie izolacyjne, łączenie i sterowanie - Sekcja 534: Urządzenia do ochrony przed przepięciami PN-EN 62305-1:2011 Ochrona odgromowa - Część 1: Zasady ogólne PN-EN 62305-2:2012 Ochrona odgromowa - Część 2: Zarządzanie ryzykiem PN-EN 62305-3:2011 Ochrona odgromowa - Część 3: Uszkodzenia fizyczne obiektów i zagrożenie życia PN-EN 62305-4:2011 Ochrona odgromowa - Część 4: Urządzenia elektryczne i elektroniczne w obiektach

292

PN-HD 60364-7-714:2012 Instalacje elektryczne niskiego napięcia - Część 7-714: Wymagania dotyczące specjalnych instalacji lub lokalizacji -- Instalacje oświetlenia zewnętrznego PN-EN 1838:2005 Zastosowania oświetlenia - Oświetlenie awaryjne PN-EN 12464-1:2011 Światło i oświetlenie - Oświetlenie miejsc pracy - Część 1: Miejsca pracy we wnętrzach PN-EN 12665:2011 Światło i oświetlenie - Podstawowe terminy oraz kryteria określania wymagań dotyczących oświetlenia

AV and communications systems: BN-84/8984-10 Zakładowe sieci telekomunikacyjne przewodowe. Instalacje wewnętrzne. Ogólne wymagania PN-IEC 60364-7-713:2005 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych Wymagania dotyczące specjalnych instalacji lub lokalizacji – Meble PN-IEC 60364 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych przywołane w Dz.U.2002.75.690 z późniejszymi zmianami: PN-IEC 60364-3:2000 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Ustalanie ogólnych charakterystyk PN-IEC 60364-4-45:1999 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Ochrona dla zapewnienia bezpieczeństwa - Ochrona przed obniżeniem napięcia PN-IEC 60364-4-473:1999 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Ochrona dla zapewnienia bezpieczeństwa - Stosowanie środków ochrony zapewniających bezpieczeństwo - Środki ochrony przed prądem przetężeniowym PN-IEC 60364-4-482:1999 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Ochrona dla zapewnienia bezpieczeństwa - Dobór środków ochrony w zależności od wpływów zewnętrznych - Ochrona przeciwpożarowa PN-IEC 60364-5-52:2002 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Dobór i montaż wyposażenia elektrycznego - Oprzewodowanie PN-IEC 60364-5-53:2000 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Dobór i montaż wyposażenia elektrycznego - Aparatura rozdzielcza i sterownicza PN-IEC 60364-5-523:2001 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Dobór i montaż wyposażenia elektrycznego - Obciążalność prądowa długotrwała przewodów PN-IEC 60364-5-537:1999 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Dobór i montaż wyposażenia elektrycznego - Aparatura rozdzielcza i sterownicza - Urządzenia do odłączania izolacyjnego i łączenia PN-IEC 60364-7-707:1999 Instalacje elektryczne w obiektach budowlanych - Wymagania dotyczące specjalnych instalacji lub lokalizacji - Wymagania dotyczące uziemień instalacji urządzeń przetwarzania danych PN-EN 50173-1:2011 Technika Informatyczna – Systemy okablowania strukturalnego – Część 1: Wymagania ogólne PN-EN 50173-2:2008, PN-EN 50173-2:2008/A1:2011 Technika Informatyczna – Systemy okablowania strukturalnego – Część 2: Budynki biurowe PN-EN 50174-1:2010, PN-EN 50174-1:2010/A1:2011 Technika informatyczna. Instalacja okablowania – Część 1- Specyfikacja i zapewnienie jakości PN-EN 50174-2:2010, PN-EN 50174-2:2010/A1:2011 Technika informatyczna. Instalacja okablowania – Część 2 - Planowanie i wykonawstwo instalacji wewnątrz budynków PN-EN 50346:2004, PN-EN 50346:2004/A1:2009, PN-EN 50346:2004/A2:2010 Technika informatyczna. Instalacja okablowania - Badanie zainstalowanego okablowania PN-EN 50310:2012 Stosowanie połączeń wyrównawczych i uziemiających w budynkach z zainstalowanym sprzętem informatycznym

293

PN-EN 61935-1:2010 Wymagania dotyczące sprawdzania symetrycznych i współosiowych kablowych linii telekomunikacyjnych - Część 1: Okablowanie z symetrycznych kabli telekomunikacyjnych zgodne z serią norm EN 50173 PN-EN 61935-2:2011 Wymagania dotyczące sprawdzania symetrycznych i współosiowych kablowych linii informatycznych - Część 2: Sznury zgodne z ISO/IEC 11801 oraz normami związanymi, PN-EN 61935-2-20:2010 Sprawdzanie symetrycznych kablowych linii telekomunikacyjnych zgodnych z serią norm EN 50173 - Część 2-20: Paczkordy i sznury - Norma szczegółowa ramowa do zastosowania dla klasy D PN-EN 50173-1:2011 Technika informatyczna - Systemy okablowania strukturalnego - Część 1: Wymagania ogólne biurowe PN-EN 50174-1:2010, PN-EN 50174-1:2010/A1:2011 Technika informatyczna - Instalacja okablowania - Część 1: Specyfikacja i zapewnienie jakości PN-EN 50174-2:2010, PN-EN 50174-2:2010/A1:2011 Technika informatyczna - Instalacja okablowania - Część 2: Planowanie i wykonywanie instalacji wewnątrz budynków ZN-96/TPSA-002 Linie optotelekomunikacyjne. Ogólne wymagania techniczne ZN-96/TPSA-006 Linie optotelekomunikacyjne. Złącza spajane światłowodów jednomodowych. Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-007 Linie optotelekomunikacyjne. Złączki światłowodowe i kable stacyjne. Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-008 Linie optotelekomunikacyjne. Osłony złączowe. Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-009 Kablowe linie optotelekomunikacyjne. Przełącznice światłowodowe. Wymagania i badan. Kanalizacja Kablowa ZN-96/TPSA-011 Telekomunikacyjna kanalizacja kablowa. Ogólne wymagania techniczne ZN-96/TPSA-014 Rury z polichlorku winylu (RPCW). Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-015 Rury polipropylenowe RPP i polietylenowe RPE kanalizacji pierwotnej. Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-016 Rury polietylenowe karbowane dwuwarstwowe (RHDPEk). Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-017 Rury kanalizacji wtórnej i rurociągu kablowego (RHDPE). Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-018 Rury polietylenowe (RHDPEp) przepustowe. Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-019 Rury trudnopalne (RHDPEt). Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-020 Złączki rur kanalizacji kablowej. Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-021 Uszczelki końców rur kanalizacji kablowej. Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-027 Linie kablowe o torach miedzianych. Wymagania i badania ZN-05/TPSA-030 Łączniki żył. Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-031 Złączowe osłony termokurczliwe arkuszowe wzmocnione. Wymagania i badania ZN-05/TPSA-032 Łączówki i głowice kablowe. Wymagania i badania ZN-05/TPSA-033 Obudowy zakończeń kablowych. Wymagania i badania ZN-96/TPSA-036 Urządzenia ochrony ludzi i instalacji przed przepięciami i przetężeniami (ochronniki). Wymagania i badania

Other: PN-B-02151-02:1987 - Akustyka budowlana - Ochrona przed hałasem pomieszczeń w budynkach - Dopuszczalne wartości poziomu dźwięku w pomieszczeniach

294

PN-B-03230:1984 - Lekkie ściany osłonowe i przekrycia dachowe z płyt warstwowych i żebrowych - Obliczenia statyczne i projektowanie PN-EN 1021-1:2007 - Meble - Ocena zapalności mebli tapicerowanych - Część 1: Źródło zapłonu: tlący się papieros PN-EN 1021-2:2007 - Meble - Ocena zapalności mebli tapicerowanych - Część 2: Źródło zapłonu: równoważnik płomienia zapałki PN-B-02852:2001 - Ochrona przeciwpożarowa budynków - Obliczanie gęstości obciążenia ogniowego oraz wyznaczanie względnego czasu trwania pożaru PN-B-02855:1988 - Ochrona przeciwpożarowa budynków - Metoda badania wydzielania toksycznych produktów rozkładu i spalania materiałów PN-B-02867:1990, PN-B-02867:1990/Az1:2001 - Ochrona przeciwpożarowa budynków - Metoda badania stopnia rozprzestrzeniania ognia przez ściany (w części dotyczącej ścian zewnętrznych przy działaniu ognia od strony elewacji) PN-EN ISO 6940:2005 - Wyroby włókiennicze - Zachowanie się podczas palenia - Wyznaczanie zapalności pionowo umieszczonych próbek PN-EN ISO 6941:2005 - Wyroby włókiennicze - Zachowanie się podczas palenia - Pomiar właściwości rozprzestrzeniania się płomienia na pionowo umieszczonych próbkach PN-EN 13501-1+A1:2010 - Klasyfikacja ogniowa wyrobów budowlanych i elementów budynków - Część 1: Klasyfikacja na podstawie badań reakcji na ogień PN-EN 13501-2+A1:2010 - Klasyfikacja ogniowa wyrobów budowlanych i elementów budynków - Część 2: Klasyfikacja na podstawie badań odporności ogniowej z wyłączeniem instalacji wentylacyjnej PN-EN 13501-3+A1:2010 - Klasyfikacja ogniowa wyrobów budowlanych i elementów budynków - Część 3: Klasyfikacja na podstawie badań odporności ogniowej wyrobów i elementów stosowanych w instalacjach użytkowych w budynkach: ognioodpornych przewodów wentylacyjnych i przeciwpożarowych klap odcinających PN-EN 13501-4+A1:2010 - Klasyfikacja ogniowa wyrobów budowlanych i elementów budynków - Część 4: Klasyfikacja na podstawie wyników badań odporności ogniowej elementów systemów kontroli rozprzestrzeniania dymu PN-EN 13501-5+A1:2010 - Klasyfikacja ogniowa wyrobów budowlanych i elementów budynków - Część 5: Klasyfikacja na podstawie wyników badań oddziaływania ognia zewnętrznego na dachy PN-EN ISO 6940:2005 - Wyroby włókiennicze - Zachowanie się podczas palenia - Wyznaczanie zapalności pionowo umieszczonych próbek PN-EN ISO 6941:2005 - Wyroby włókiennicze - Zachowanie się podczas palenia - Pomiar właściwości rozprzestrzeniania się płomienia na pionowo umieszczonych próbkach PN-B-02855:1988 - Ochrona przeciwpożarowa budynków - Metoda badania wydzielania toksycznych produktów rozkładu i spalania materiałów PN-N-01256-02:1992 - Znaki bezpieczeństwa - Ewakuacja PN-N-01256-5:1998 - Zasady umieszczania znaków bezpieczeństwa na drogach ewakuacyjnych i drogach pożarowych PN-ISO 7010:2006 - Symbole graficzne - Barwy bezpieczeństwa i znaki bezpieczeństwa - Znaki bezpieczeństwa stosowane w miejscach pracy i w obszarach użyteczności publicznej PN-EN 1991-1-6:2007, PN-EN 1991-1-6:2007/NA:2010, PN-EN 1991-1-6:2007/AC:2008, PN-EN 1991-1-6:2007/Ap1:2010 Eurokod 1: Oddziaływania na konstrukcje - Część 1-6: Oddziaływania ogólne -- Oddziaływania w czasie wykonywania konstrukcji PN-EN 1991-1-1:2004, PN-EN 1991-1-1:2004/NA:2010, PN-EN 1991-1-1:2004/AC:2009, PN-EN 1991-1-1:2004/Ap1:2010, PN-EN 1991-1-1:2004/Ap2:2011 Eurokod 1: Oddziaływania na konstrukcje -- Część 1-1: Oddziaływania ogólne - Ciężar objętościowy, ciężar własny, obciążenia użytkowe w budynkach

295

PN-EN 1990:2004, PN-EN 1990:2004/NA:2010, PN-EN 1990:2004/A1:2008, PN-EN 1990:2004/AC:2010, PN-EN 1990:2004/Ap1:2004, PN-EN 1990:2004/Ap2:2010 Eurokod - Podstawy projektowania konstrukcji PN-E-05204:1994 - Ochrona przed elektrycznością statyczną - Ochrona obiektów, instalacji i urządzeń - Wymagania

and: Warunki techniczne wykonania i odbioru robót budowlano-montażowych, Arkady, 1989 r. Wytyczne techniczne G-3.1, Pomiary i opracowania realizacyjne, GUGiK, Warszawa 2006 Instrukcja odbudowy nawierzchni drogowych po wykopach związanych z wykonaniem i remontami urządzeń podziemnej infrastruktury technicznej, IGPiK, Warszawa 2000 Wytyczne projektowania instalacji centralnego ogrzewania, COBRTI INSTAL Warunki techniczne wykonania i odbioru instalacji wentylacyjnych, COBRTI INSTAL Warunki techniczne wykonania i odbioru instalacji ogrzewczych, COBRTI INSTAL Warunki techniczne wykonania i odbioru instalacji wodociągowych, COBRTI INSTAL Warunki techniczne wykonania i odbioru sieci wodociągowych, COBRTI INSTAL Warunki techniczne wykonania i odbioru sieci ciepłowniczych z rur i elementów preizolowanych, COBRTI INSTAL Warunki techniczne wykonania i odbioru sieci kanalizacyjnych, COBRTI INSTAL Praca zbiorowa Poradnik inżyniera i technika budowlanego ARKADY, Warszawa 1968, Bogucki, Żyburtowicz Tablice do projektowania konstrukcji metalowych ARKADY Warszawa 1996 Specyfikacje techniczne wykonania i odbioru robót budowlanych. Instalacje wodociągowe z tworzyw sztucznych. OWEOB „Promocja” Sp.z o.o. Warszawa 2005r. Specyfikacje techniczne wykonania i odbioru robót budowlanych. Instalacje kanalizacyjne z tworzyw sztucznych. OWEOB „Promocja” Sp.z o.o. Warszawa Warunki Techniczne Wykonania i Odbioru Robót Budowlano - Montażowych, część II - instalacje Sanitarne i Przemysłowe, M. B. P. M. B, Warszawa „Warunkami Technicznymi Wykonania i Odbioru Rurociągów z Tworzyw Sztucznych" z 1996 r. Instalacje elektryczne. Warunki techniczne z komentarzami. Wymagania odbioru i eksploatacji. Przepisy prawne i normy. Wydanie III. Warszawa, COBO-Profil, COBR Elektromontaż 2000.

296